System Manual SIMOCODE Pro en

Motor Management and
Control Devices
SIMOCODE pro
System Manual 05/2011
Industrial Controls
Answers for industry.
Safety guidelines
Table of contents
Important information
System description
Short instructions for configuring
a reversing starter
Motor protection
SIMOCODEpro
Motor control
Monitoring functions
Outputs
Inputs
System manual
Analog value recording

3UF50 compatibility mode
Standard functions
Logic modules
Communication
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
Commissioning and servicing
Alarms, faults and system events
Tables
Data formats and data records
Dimension drawings
Technical data
Example circuits
Safety and commissioning
information for EEx areas
Index
List of abbreviations
Glossary
Order number: 3UF7970-0AA00-0
Edition 05/2011
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Feedback form
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
C
D
E
F
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:
Warning
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions..
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NRNBERG
GERMANY
631 6050-22 DS 03
10/2005
Copyright Siemens AG 2011

Subject to change
Table of contents
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
1
System description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.5.7
1.6
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
1.7.9
1.7.10
1.8
1.8.1
1.9
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check list for selecting a device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional signal processing with freely-programmable logic modules . .
Operating, service and diagnostic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic units (BU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator panel with display (OPD) for SIMOCODE pro V . . . . . . . . . .
Current measuring module (IM) for the SIMOCODE pro C and
SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decoupling module (DCM) for current/voltage measuring modules,
SIMOCODE pro V device series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . .
Configuration information for using an operator panel with display
and/or a decoupling module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of function blocks (alphabetical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Introduction and objective of the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station . . . . . . .
Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extending the reversing starter with a control station via PROFIBUS DP
1.7.5
1.7.6
1.7.7
1.7.8
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB631 6050-22 DS 03
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-1
1-2
1-9
1-11
1-13
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-19
1-20
1-20
1-21
1-22
1-24
1-29
1-29
1-32
1-34
. 1-93
. 1-94
. 1-96
. 1-99
. 1-106
. 1-107
. 1-109
. 1-111
. 1-111
. 1-114
2-1
. 2-2
. 2-3
. 2-6
. 2-10
Table of contents
Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Introduction . . . . . . .
Overload protection . .
Unbalance protection .
Stalled rotor protection
Thermistor protection .
Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
4.2.9
4.2.10
4.2.11
4.2.12
4.2.13
4.2.14
4.2.15
4.2.16
4.3
Control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating modes and mode selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Releases and enabled control command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control station settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General settings and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Overload relay" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Direct starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Reversing starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control function . . . . . . . . .
"Star-delta starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Star delta reversing starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Dahlander" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Dahlander reversing starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Pole changing starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Pole-changing reversing starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Solenoid valve" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Positioner" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Soft starter" control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function . . . . . . . . .
Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
3-1
. 3-2
. 3-5
. 3-13
. 3-14
. 3-15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-5
4-7
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-15
4-20
4-22
4-24
4-27
4-30
4-33
4-37
4-40
4-44
4-47
4-51
4-54
4-59
4-62
. . . 4-65
Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
Earth-fault monitoring . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal earth-fault monitoring . . . .
External earth-fault monitoring (with
Current limit monitoring. . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I> (upper limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I< (lower limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage monitoring . . . . . . . . . .
Cos phi monitoring . . . . . . . . . .
Active power monitoring . . . . . . .
0/4-20 mA monitoring . . . . . . . . .
Operation monitoring . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating hours monitoring . . . . .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
summation current transformer) .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-11
5-13
5-15
5-18
5-18
5-19
SIMOCODE pro
ii
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Table of contents
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.8
5.9
5.10
Motor stop time monitoring . . . . . . . . .

Monitoring the number of starts . . . . . .
Temperature monitoring (analog) . . . . . .
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing .
Hysteresis for monitoring functions . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
5-19
5-20
5-22
5-24
5-25
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
Introduction . . . . . . .
Basic unit outputs . . .
Operator panel LEDs .
Digital module outputs
Analog module output
Cyclic Send . . . . . . .
Acyclic Send . . . . . .
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
Introduction . . . . . . . . . .
Basic unit inputs . . . . . . .
Operator panel buttons . . .
Digital module inputs . . . .
Temperature module inputs
Analog module inputs . . . .
Cyclic Receive . . . . . . . .
Acyclic Receive. . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-2
7-4
7-6
7-9
7-12
7-14
7-16
7-17
Analog value recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
3UF50 compatibility mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
10
Standard functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.5.1
10.5.2
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
10.10
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test position feedback (TPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operational protection OFF (OPO) . . . . . . . . .
Response for positioner control function . . . . .
Response to other control functions . . . . . . . .
Power failure monitoring (UVO) . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety-oriented tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring)
Timestamping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Logic modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
Introduction . . .
Truth table 3I/1O
Truth table 2I/1O
Truth table 5I/2O
Counter . . . . .
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
. 6-2
. 6-4
. 6-6
. 6-9
. 6-11
. 6-16
. 6-18
7-1
. 10-2
. 10-4
. 10-8
. 10-10
. 10-12
. 10-12
. 10-14
. 10-15
. 10-17
. 10-18
. 10-24
. 10-26
.
.
.
.
.
11-2
11-3
11-6
11-7
11-8
iii
Table of contents
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
11.10
11.11
11.12
Timer . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal conditioner . . .
Non-volatile elements .
Flashing . . . . . . . . .
Flickering . . . . . . . .
Limit monitor . . . . . .
Calculators (calculation
12
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.4.1
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.5
12.5.1
12.5.2
12.5.3
12.5.5
12.6
12.6.1
12.6.2
12.7
12.8
12.8.1
12.8.2
12.8.3
12.9
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Failsafe data transfer via PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telegram description and data access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cyclic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics data and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of the slave diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems . . . . . . . . .
Slave operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the
configuration software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave
via GSD) in STEP7 HW Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro . . .
Evaluating diagnostics data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES
Data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameterization via PROFIBUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMOCODE ES Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter data during startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timestamping/time synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
Mounting, wiring, interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1
13.2
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
13.2.5
13.2.6
13.3
13.3.1
13.3.2
13.3.3
13.3.4
13.3.5
General information about mounting and wiring . . . . . . . . . . .

Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module. . . .
Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . .
Current measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/voltage measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator panel and operator panel with display . . . . . . . . . . .
Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module. . . .
Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . .
Current measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/voltage measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring current with an external current transformer
(interposing transformer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.4
.. .. ..
.. .. ..
.. .. ..
.. .. ..
.. .. ..
.. .. ..
modules)
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-10
11-15
11-18
11-21
11-22
11-23
11-27
. 12-2
. 12-4
. 12-5
. 12-6
. 12-6
. 12-7
. 12-8
. 12-17
. 12-17
. 12-17
. 12-18
. 12-19
. 12-20
. 12-21
. 12-21
. 12-22
. 12-24
. 12-25
. 12-25
. 12-26
. 12-27
. 12-28
. 13-2
. 13-4
. 13-4
. 13-5
. 13-6
. 13-7
. 13-8
. 13-10
. 13-12
. 13-12
. 13-25
. 13-30
. 13-31
. . . . . 13-33
SIMOCODE pro
iv
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Table of contents
13.4
13.4.1
13.4.2
13.5
13.6
System interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System interfaces on basic units, expansion modules, decoupling
module, current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring
modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local or
DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
Commissioning and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1
14.2
14.2.1
14.2.2
14.2.3
14.2.4
14.3
14.3.1
14.3.2
14.3.3
14.3.4
14.4
14.5
General information about commissioning and service . . . . . . . . . . .

Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel
Diagnostics via LED display on the digital modules DM-F Local or
DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing and saving parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing SIMOCODE pro components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error buffer/reading out error protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
Alarms, faults and system events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
A.5
Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status

for the control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Socket assignment table - digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Socket assignment table - analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics . . . . . . . . .
Data formats and data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1
B.1.1
B.1.2
B.1.3
B.2
B.3
B.4
B.5
B.6
B.7
B.8
Handling data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Writing/reading data records . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics . . . . . .
Data record 63 - Analog value recording . . . . . .
Data record 67 - Process image of the outputs . .
Data record 69 - Process image of the inputs . .
Data record 72 - Error buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data record 73 - Event memory . . . . . . . . . . .
Data record 92 - Device diagnostics . . . . . . . .
13.4.3
13.4.4
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
. . . 13-36
. . . 13-36
. . . 13-39
. . . 13-41
. . . 13-42
. . . 13-46
. . . 13-47
information
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
14-2
14-4
14-4
14-5
14-6
. 14-7
. 14-8
. 14-8
. 14-9
. 14-11
. 14-14
. 14-15
. 14-16
A-1
. A-2
. A-3
. A-5
. A-12
. A-14
B-1
. B-3
. B-3
. B-4
. B-5
. B-6
. B-8
. B-8
. B-9
. B-10
. B-11
. B-12
Table of contents
B.9
B.10
B.11
B.12
B.13
B.14
B.21.1
B.21.2
B.21.3
B.21.4
B.21.5
B.21.6
B.21.7
B.21.8
B.21.9
B.21.10
B.21.11
B.21.12
B.21.13
B.21.14
Data record 94 - Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug) . . . . . . . . . . .
Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2
(plug ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data record 139 - Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Record 160 - Communication parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data record 165 - Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data record 202 - Acyclic receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data record 203 - Acyclic send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data record 224 - Password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Star-delta starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Star-delta reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dahlander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dahlander reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pole changing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pole-changing reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft starter with reversing contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimension drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
C.1
C.1.1
C.1.2
C.2
C.2.1
3UF70 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 basic unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3UF710 current measuring module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current measuring module (through-hole converter)
3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A . . . . . . . . .
3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current measuring module (bus connection)
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/voltage measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/voltage measuring module (through-hole converter)
3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A . . . . . . . . . .
3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
C-2
C-2
C-2
C-3
.. .. .. .
C-3
.. .. .. .
C-4
.. .. .. .
C-5
.. .. .. .
C-6
.. .. .. .
.. .. .. .
C-7
C-8
.. .. .. .
C-8
.. .. .. .
C-9
B.15
B.16
B.17
B.18
B.19
B.20
B.21
C.2.2
C.2.3
C.2.4
C.2.5
C.3
C.3.1
C.3.2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-19
B-20
B-21
B-26
B-30
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.B-37
. B-40
. B-41
. B-41
. B-42
. B-43
. B-44
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.B-45
. B-45
. B-46
. B-47
. B-48
. B-49
. B-50
. B-51
. B-52
. B-53
. B-54
. B-55
. B-56
. B-57
. B-58
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SIMOCODE pro
vi
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Table of contents
C.3.3
C.4
C.4.1
C.4.2
C.5
C.6
C.7
C.7.1
C.7.2

3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current/voltage measuring module (bus connection)
3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3UF7200 operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3UF7210 operator panel with display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion modules/decoupling module . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-F PROFIsafe . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator panel adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C-12
C-13
C-13
C-13
C-14
C-15
C-16
C-16
C-16
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
D.1
D.2
D.3
.
.
D-2
D-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
D-7
D-9
D-10
D-10
D-12
D-14
D-17
D-19
D-20
D-21
D-22
D-22
D-23
D.8
Common technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Technical data of the basic units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the current measuring modules or current/voltage
measuring modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the decoupling module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules.
Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the analog module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the earth-fault module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the temperature module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the operator panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the operator panel with display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit
currents up to 100 kA and 690 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical reaction times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
E.1
E.2
E.2.1
E.2.2
E.3
E.3.1
E.3.2
E.4
E.4.1
E.4.2
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Overload relay" example circuit . . . . . . .
"Overload relay" circuit diagram . . . . . . .
"Overload relay" function circuit diagram . .
"Direct starter" example circuit. . . . . . . .
"Direct starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . .
"Direct starter" function circuit diagram . .
"Direct starter" example circuit. . . . . . . .
"Reversing starter" circuit diagram . . . . .
"Reversing starter" function circuit diagram
E-2
E-3
E-4
E-5
E-6
E-6
E-7
E-8
E-8
E-9
C.3.4
C.3.5
D.4
D.5
D.5.1
D.5.2
D.5.3
D.5.4
D.5.5
D.5.6
D.5.7
D.6
D.6.1
D.6.2
D.7
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . C-10
. . . . . . . C-11
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. D-24
. D-27
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
vii
Table of contents
E.5
E.5.1
E.5.2
E.6
E.6.1
E.6.2
E.6.3
E.6.4
"Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" example circuit . . . . . . . .

"Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . .
"Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" function circuit diagram . . .
"Star-delta starter" circuit example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta) . . . . . .
"Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta).
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable). .
"Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply
cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.7
"Star-delta reversing starter" circuit example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.7.1
"Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.7.2
"Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.8
"Dahlander" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.8.1
"Dahlander" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.8.2
"Dahlander" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.9
"Dahlander reversing starter" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.9.1
"Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.9.2
"Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.10
"Pole-changing starter" example circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.10.1 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.10.2 "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.11
"Pole-changing reversing starter" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.11.1 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.11.2 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . .
E.12
"Solenoid valve" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.12.1 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.12.2 "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.13
"Positioner" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.13.1 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.13.2 "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.14
"Soft starter" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.14.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) . .
E.14.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.14.3 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) . . . . . . . .
E.14.4 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) . . .
E.15
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" example circuit . . . . . . . . . . .
E.15.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402,
3RW403, 3RW404) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.15.2 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor"
(3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.15.3 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor"
(3RW405, 3RW407) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
E-10
E-10
E-11
E-12
E-12
E-13
E-14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
E-15
E-16
E-16
E-17
E-18
E-18
E-19
E-20
E-20
E-21
E-23
E-24
E-25
E-26
E-26
E-27
E-29
E-30
E-31
E-32
E-32
E-33
E-34
E-35
E-36
E-37
E-38
E-39
E-40
E-41
E-42
E-42
.
.
.
.
E-43
E-44
E-45
E-46
. E-46
. E-47
. E-48
SIMOCODE pro
viii
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Table of contents
E.15.4
E.16
E.16.1
E.16.2
Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor"

(3RW405, 3RW407) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
"Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example . . . . .
"Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example . . . . .
"Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit example
Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas. . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
F.1
F.2
F.2.1
F.2.2
F.2.3
F.2.4
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set-up and commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the rated motor current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensor circuit wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Short-circuit protection for type of assignment 2 according
IEC 60947-4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-2
F-3
F-4
F-5
F-6
F.2.5
F.2.6
F.2.7
F.2.8
F.2.9
F.3
F.4
F.5
Index
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
to
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.E-49
. E-50
. E-50
. E-51
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
. F-6
. F-6
. F-7
. F-8
. F-8
. F-8
. F-9
. F-9
. F-10
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
1-1
List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations-1

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
ix
Table of contents
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Purpose of this manual

The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes in detail the motor
management system and its functions. It contains information about
configuring, commissioning, service and maintenance. The user is
introduced to the system quickly and practically using a typical reversing
starter application as an example.
In addition to providing assistance for troubleshooting and fault elimination,
this manual also contains information of special importance to service and
maintenance personnel.
To assist in configuration, this manual also contains circuit diagrams,
dimension drawings and technical data of system components.
Required basic knowledge
To understand this manual you will require basic knowledge of low-voltage
controls and distribution, digital circuit engineering and automation
technology.
Topics
This manual consists of instructional chapters for reference purposes. The
following table lists the most relevant topics. Topics with a gray background
correspond largely with the contents of the "SIMOCODE ES"
parameterization and service software:
Topic
System description
Short instructions for commissioning a
reversing starter
Motor protection
Motor control
Outputs
Inputs
Standard functions
Logic modules
Communication
Commissioning and servicing
Alarm, faults and system events
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Target group
Configurators, planners
Configurators, planners, technicians,
commissioners
Configurators, commissioners
Configurators, PLC programmers
Configurators, programmers,
commissioners, service personnel
Configurators, planners, programmers
Configurators, planners, programmers
Configurators, programmers,
commissioners, service personnel
Configurators, programmers
Configurators, programmers
Mechanics, electricians, maintenance and
service personnel
Commissioners, electricians, maintenance
and service personnel
Commissioners, maintenance and service
personnel, configurators, PLC
programmers
xi
Scope of application
This manual is applicable to the listed SIMOCODE pro system components.
It contains a description of the components applicable at the time of printing
the manual. We reserve the right to include updated information about new
components or new versions of components in a product information.
Definitions
When "SIMOCODE pro" is referred to, both the "SIMOCODE pro C" and the
"SIMOCODE pro V" series are meant.
SIMOCODE pro response tables

Specific responses (deactivated, signaling, warning, tripping) can be
parameterized for various SIMOCODE pro functions, such as overload.
These are always displayed in tabular form:
"X" = Applicable
"-" = Not applicable
Preset values are underlined.
Response
Function 1
Function 2
Function 3
Tripping
Warning
Signaling
Deactivated
0 - 25.5 s
Delay
Short description of the responses:

Tripping: The contactor controls QE* are tripped. A fault message is
generated which is available as a diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP. The fault
message and the device-internal signal remain on until the appropriate
amount of time has elapsed or the cause of the fault has been eliminated and
acknowledged.
Warning: In addition to the device-internal signal, a warning signal is
generated that is available as a diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP.
Signaling: Only a device-internal signal is generated, which can be further
processed as required.
Deactivated: The appropriate function is switched off, no signals are
generated.
A delay time can also be set for specific responses.
SIMOCODE pro
xii
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Further information
Please read the operating instructions of the respective components.
You can find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals.
In addition to this system manual, you will need the following manuals:
"Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" manual
The appropriate manual for the DP master
You will find further information on the Internet:

Internet:
www.siemens.com/simocode
Information and Download Center:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/infomaterial
Product Information System (ProdIS):
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/support
ATEX:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/atex.
Certificates:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/approvals.
Further support (Service and Support)
Technical assistance:
Telephone:+49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8 a.m. - 5 p.m. CET)
Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907
E-mail:technical-assistance@siemens.com
Internet: www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance.
Correction sheet
A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. Please use it to
enter suggestions for improvements, additions and corrections and send it
back to us. This will help us to improve the next edition.
Disclaimer of liability
The products described here have been developed to carry out safetyoriented functions as part of a complete plant or machine. In general, a
complete safety system consists of sensors, evaluation units, signaling
devices and methods for safe tripping. The manufacturer is responsible for
ensuring safe functioning of the complete plant or machine.
Siemens AG, its subsidiaries and associated companies (herein referred to
as "Siemens") are not in a position to guarantee every characteristic of a
complete plant or machine not designed by Siemens.
Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are
made or implied in the following description. No new guarantee, warranty or
liability above those standard to Siemens can be derived from the following
description.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
xiii
SIMOCODE pro
xiv
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find an introduction and general information about
the SIMOCODE pro system including e.g.
Characteristics of both the SIMOCODE pro C and the SIMOCODE pro V
device series
Simplification of SIMOCODE pro circuits
Overview of functions
An overview of system components.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
Planners and configurators
People who are now using SIMOCODE DP but wish to use SIMOCODE pro
as a replacement or additional system in the future
Optional for commissioners, maintenance and service personnel as additional
information "about SIMOCODE pro"
System integrators/process technology.
Necessary knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
Basic knowledge about load feeders
Basic knowledge about motor protection
Basic knowledge of control engineering
Basic knowledge of industrial bus technology.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-1
System description
1.1
Introduction
Overview
SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Devices) is a
flexible and modular motor management system for motors with constant
speeds in low-voltage applications. It optimizes the link between the control
system and the motor feeder, increases plant availability, and also allows
considerable savings to be made during installation, commissioning,
operation and maintenance.
SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low voltage switchgear system and links
the higher-level automation system and the motor feeder (via
PROFIBUS DP) intelligently. It comprises the following functions:
Multifunctional and electronic full motor protection, independently of the
automation system
Integrated control functions for motor control (instead of hardware)
Detailed operating, service and diagnostic data
Open communication via PROFIBUS DP the standard for fieldbus systems.
Parameterization with the SIMOCODE ES software package.
Only the switching and short-circuit protection mechanisms of the main
circuit (contactors, circuit breakers, fuses) are additionally needed.
Benefits
Wiring effort between the motor feeder and the PLC is reduced significantly
by connecting the entire motor feeder to the process control system via the
bus (see Figure 1-1 "SIMOCODE pro integrated in the main circuit, control
circuit and at automation level (PLC)").
Automated processes are decentralized by means of configurable control and
monitoring functions in the feeder. This saves automation system resources
and ensures that the feeder is fully functional and protected even if the
control system or bus system fails.
By recording and monitoring operating, service and diagnostic data in the
feeder and process control system, plant availability is increased, and the
feeder is easier to service and maintain.
The user can implement plant-specific requirements for every motor feeder
thanks to the high degree of modularity.
SIMOCODE pro provides compact solutions and different levels of functions
for every customer application.
By replacing the control circuit hardware with an integrated control function,
the quantity of required hardware components with wiring is reduced. This
drives down storage costs and limits potential wiring errors.
Using electronic full motor protection allows the motors to be used more
efficiently and ensures that the tripping characteristic remains stable and the
tripping response stays the same, even after many years.
1-2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Main circuit
Control circuit
Automation level
Operator panel
Connecting cable
Current measuring module

Basic unit
Remote
Protection + Monitoring
Control circuit
(overload, thermistor, earth-fault )
(including monitoring + interlocks)
Communication
(operating, service and diagnostics data
+ control commands)
Fig. 1-1: SIMOCODE pro integrated in the main circuit, control circuit and at automation level (PLC)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-3
System description
Features
Multifunctional and electronic full motor protection for nominal motor
currents up to 820 A:
SIMOCODE pro provides comprehensive protection of the motor feeder by
means of a combination of delayable multi-level protection and monitoring
functions:
Current-dependent electronic overload protection (CLASS 5 to 40)
(see Chapter 3.2 "Overload protection")
Thermistor motor protection (see Chapter 3.5 "Thermistor protection")
Phase failure/phase unbalance protection (see Chapter 3.3 "Unbalance
protection")
Stalled rotor protection (see Chapter 3.4 "Stalled rotor protection")
Monitoring of adjustable limits for the motor current
(see Chapter 5.2 "Current limit monitoring")
Voltage monitoring (see Chapter 5.3 "Voltage monitoring")
Power monitoring (see Chapter 5.5 "Active power monitoring")
Monitoring of cos phi (non-load operation/load shedding)
(see Chapter 5.4 "Cos phi monitoring")
Earth-fault monitoring (see Chapter 5.1 "Earth-fault monitoring")
Temperature monitoring e.g. Pt100/Pt1000 (see Chapter 5.8 "Temperature
monitoring (analog)")
Monitoring of operating hours (see Chapter 5.7.2 "Operating hours
monitoring")
Motor stop time monitoring (see Chapter 5.7.3)
Monitoring the number of starts within a specific period of time (see
Chapter 5.7.4).
Safety-oriented tripping of motor feeders, e.g. failsafe tripping in the process
industry, locally or via PROFIBUS DP (see "Failsafe Digital Module
SIMOCODE pro Safety").
Recording of measured curves:

SIMOCODE pro is able to record measured curves and can, for example,
illustrate the flow of the motor current during motor startup. See Chapter 8
"Analog value recording"
Flexible motor control with integrated control functions
(instead of extensive hardware interlocks):
SIMOCODE pro has many pre-defined, integrated motor control functions,
including all necessary connections and interlocks:
Overload relay (see Chapter 4.2.3)
Direct starter (see Chapter 4.2.4)
Reverse starter (see Chapter 4.2.5)
Star-delta starter, also with reversing starter (see Chapter 4.2.7 and
Chapter 4.2.8)
1-4
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), also

with reversing starter (see Chapter 4.2.11 and Chapter 4.2.12)
Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, also with reversing
starter (see Chapter 4.2.9 and Chapter 4.2.10)
Positioner control (see Chapter 4.2.14)
Solenoid valve control (see Chapter 4.2.13)
Circuit breaker control (see Chapter 4.2.6)
Soft starter control, also soft starter with reversing contactor (see
Chapter 4.2.15 and Chapter 4.2.16).
These control functions are pre-defined in SIMOCODE pro and can be

assigned freely to device inputs and outputs (including PROFIBUS DP).
These pre-defined control functions can also be adjusted flexibly to meet
customer requirements of the motor feeder, without requiring additional
auxiliary relays in the control circuit. This is achieved by means of freelyparameterizable logic modules (truth tables, counters, timers, edge
evaluation, etc., see Chapter 11 "Logic modules") and standard functions
(external power failure monitoring, emergency start, external fault
monitoring etc., see Chapter 10 "Standard functions").
Detailed operating service and diagnostic data:
SIMOCODE pro provides a range of operating, service and diagnostic data
and helps to detect impending faults in good time and stop these occurring
with preventative measures. If a fault occurs, it can be diagnosed, traced
and resolved within a short period of time. Plant downtime is thus reduced
to a minimum or does not occur at all.
See Chapter 1.5.7.
Communication:
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or
terminal connection). This replaces all individual wiring and distribution
boxes (normally required to exchange data with a higher-level automation
system) with a single two-wire cable.
SIMOCODE pro supports:
Baud rates up to 12 Mbit/s
Automatic baud rate recognition
Communication with up to 3 masters
Time synchronization via PROFIBUS (SIMATIC S7)
Time stamping with high temporal precision (SIMATIC S7)
Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1)
DPV1 communication downstream from the Y-link.
See Chapter 12 "Communication".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-5
System description
Areas of application
SIMOCODE pro is usually deployed in automated processes that would
incur great expense during downtime (e. g. steel or cement industry), where
it is essential to prevent plant downtime by utilizing detailed operating,
service and diagnostic data and ensure that faults can be detected rapidly if
they occur.
SIMOCODE pro is modular, compact and specifically designed to be
deployed in motor control centers (MCC) in the process industry, and power
plant engineering.
Protection and control of motors:
In potentially explosive areas for type of protection EEx e/d according to
ATEX directive 94/9/EC (see Chapter F "Safety and commissioning
information for EEx areas")
Heavy-starting motors (paper, cement and metal industries; water
management)
In high-availability plants (chemical, oil, and raw material processing
industry, power plants)
SIMOCODE pro is especially designed for the chemical industry (including
oil and gas), the steel industry, water management, and the paper,
pharmaceutical, cement and glass industries. Further applications include
power plant engineering and diamond, gold and platinum mines.
SIMOCODE pro has been designed to meet the requirements of these
industries even more accurately, based on experiences with the previous
system (SIMOCODE DP). The availability of motors and thus the entire
process plays an important role in these industries. Downtime caused by
faults often leads to high costs. This is why it is even more important to
detect impending faults and introduce targeted, preventative measures.
Today, SIMOCODE pro provides the user with a motor management system
based on years of experience and the latest technology.
1-6
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Device series
SIMOCODE pro can be subdivided into two device series:
SIMOCODE pro C a compact system for direct and reversing starters
and/or for controlling a circuit breaker (MCCB)
SIMOCODE pro V a variable system, which offers numerous functions in
addition to all of the SIMOCODE pro C functions.
For each feeder, every system comprises a basic unit and a separate current
measuring module. Both modules are connected to each other electronically
via the system interface, by means of a connecting cable, and can be
installed together as a unit (behind one another) or separately (side-by-side).
An operator panel can also be connected optionally via the second system
interface on the basic unit, and installed in the switchgear cabinet door. The
current measuring module and the operator panel are connected to the
basic unit via connecting cables, which also supply the power.
Besides the existing inputs and outputs present, additional inputs, outputs,
and functions can be added to basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) by means of
optional expansion modules.
All modules can be connected to each other via connecting cables.
Connecting cables are available in various lengths. The maximum distance
between modules (e.g. between basic unit and current measuring module)
is 2.5 m.
Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V for star-delta
starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing starters, soft starters each also possible
in combination with reversing starter solenoid valves and positioners.
SIMOCODE pro V is also particularly versatile. Its functionality can be extended,
if required, for example:
The number and type of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages
and adapted.
A current/voltage measuring module can be used for additional voltage
measurement and for monitoring power-related measured values (power
management).
A temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature
sensors.
An earth-fault detection system can be integrated together with a summation
current transformer.
An analog module extends the system by additional analog inputs and
outputs, for example, for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring.
In addition to the standard operator panel (OP), an operator panel with display
(OPD) is optionally available (basic unit 2 from version *E03*).
SIMOCODE pro C is upwards-compatible with SIMOCODE pro V. This
means both series can be used simultaneously in your plant, according to
requirements.
Both systems can be used simultaneously in a low voltage switchgear
system according to requirements without additional outlay.
The parameterization of SIMICODE pro C can be transferred without
problems. Removable terminals and terminal markings are identical for both
systems.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-7
System description
Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder
independently of the automation system. Even if the automation system
(PLC) fails, or if communication is disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully
protected and controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being
connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can easily be connected later, if required.
Typical configuration
The following schematic shows a typical SIMOCODE pro C and
SIMOCODE pro V hardware configuration:
SIMOCODE pro C
Basic unit (BU1)
Current measuring
module (IM)
UF-01129
Operator panel (OP)
SIMOCODE pro V
Basic unit (BU2)

Digital module (DM)
Analog module (AM)
Current/voltage
measuring module (UM)
Operator panel (OPD)
Additional optional expansions are possible

Fig. 1-2: Typical SIMOCODE pro hardware configurations
System components: See Chapter 1.7 "Description of system components".
1-8
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1.2
Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro
Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro

Individual components are used for control, monitoring and signal preprocessing. The following components are to be used and the following
wiring is to be carried out:
Insertion and wiring of overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current
transformers and analog/digital converters
Wiring of the control circuit
Connection of start/stop control devices
The contactor must be brought into locking mode via the auxiliary switches
Wiring of the interlocks.
The following figure illustrates the conventional configuration of a direct
starter:
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V1L1
L1
-F4
L2
L3
N
PE
-Q1
Automation level / I/O module
-F3
- Q1
2 4 6
-X1
1 3 5
-Q11
Manual
2 4 6
ON/OFF
Manual/
automatic
Current
-Q1
-Q1 open
OFF
-Q1
Control commands
Thermistor
ON
Q1
Overload
Feedback
-F2-
1 3 5
Auto
-X2
1 3 5
Local stop
S1
- F2
2 4 6
PE
UV W
M
3~
Local start
2
4 A - 20 mA S2
PLC
Start/stop
-Q1
-Q12
-Q11
1
-Q1
-F3
-X3
Thermistor
evaluation
-F2
-F3
-Q1
D
A
Switchgear
-Q12
2
N
1N
Fig. 1-3: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-9
System description
Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Only SIMOCODE pro is used for control, monitoring and signal preprocessing.
This has the following advantages:
Additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current
transformers and analog/digital convertors are not necessary
The wiring of the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified
The start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit
The contactor coil is activated via the output of the basic unit. An auxiliary
contact for locking is not required.
The following figure illustrates configuration with SIMOCODE pro:
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
PROFIBUS DP
L+
L1/L+
1 3 5
Q1
Control station
Local control station [LC]
F11
S0
2 4 6
Current measuring
module (IM)
A2
A1
S1
IN1
IN2
24 V
Basic unit (BU)
T1
T2
OUT 1
Q1
1 3 5
N/L
- Q1
2 4 6
PE
U V W
T1
M
3~
Thermistor
T2
Fig. 1-4: Configuration of a load feeder (direct starter) with SIMOCODE pro
1-10
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1.3
Application example
Description
The fill level of a liquid container is being monitored. A pump keeps the
liquid level (reference value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into
the container. The fill level (actual value) is measured by the fill level
indicator and output as an analog signal. When the fill level sinks below a
specific level, the pump is switched on by SIMOCODE pro. Liquid is
pumped in until the reference value is re-attained. The pump is then
switched off.
Controlling the pump
The pump can be controlled as follows:
Locally: Local control station [LC] for manual switching on and off (by visual
contact)
LC in the switchgear cabinet door: Control station operator panel [OP] for
switching on and off manually
At automation level: Control station PLC/PCS [DP] for remote-controlled
switching on and off (automatic operation) via PROFIBUS DP
Via SIMOCODE pro: Via local mode fill-level monitoring and/or limit value
monitoring.
Schematic
Control station
PLC/PCS [DP]
PLC/PCS
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
PROFIBUS DP
Fill-level indicator
L+
L1/L+
1 3 5
Q1
Control station
F11
S1
S0
2 4 6
Current measuring
module (IM)
System
interface
A2
1 3 5
IN1
IN2
24 V
Basic unit (BU 2)
In+
Control station
In
Analog module (AM) Operator panel
Connecting cable
T1
N/L
- Q1
A1
Liquid container
T2
OUT 1
Out+
Out
Display
Motor current
(Unit: % of Is)
Q1
2 4 6
Pump
PE
U V W
T1
M
3~
Thermistor
Optional:
Laptop with
SIMOCODE ES
T2
Fig. 1-5: Schematic of a typical application example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-11
System description
Recording, displaying and evaluating measured values

The following measured values are required for monitoring the process:
The pump motor current, which is measured by the current measuring
module.
The analog value of the fill-level indicator, which is measured by the analog
module.
The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro and/or
transferred via PROFIBUS DP to the PLC/PCS.
Any measured value can be output via the analog module, e.g. the effective
motor current on a connected pointer instrument.
Optionally, a laptop with the SIMOCODE ES software, for example, can be
connected to the operator panel so that further process data can be locally
evaluated.
1-12
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1.4
Check list for selecting a device series

The following check list should help you decide upon the optimum device
series for your requirements:
SIMOCODE
Requirements
pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Footnote
1)
Monitoring of stalled rotor, unbalance, phase

failure
1)
Current measuring, current limit monitoring,

overload protection
1)
Earth-fault monitoring via the current

measuring module (internal)
1)
1)
2)
3)
3)
3)
2)
Standard motor feeders (4 inputs, 3 outputs)

with control functions for direct starters,
reversing starters, intelligent overload relays
Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary)
Motor feeder with control function:

Star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing
starters, soft starters each also possible in
combination with reversing starter , solenoid
valves, positioners
Measuring, processing and outputting analog
values e.g. flow rate, fill level, etc.
(if necessary via an analog module)
Current measuring and voltage measurement
Voltage monitoring for undervoltage
Power management, implementing power

considerations (power, cos phi), power
monitoring
More than 4 binary inputs required
(maximum 12)
Table 1-1: Check list for selecting a device series
1) Via current measuring module

2) With expansion modules
3) Via current/voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-13
System description
SIMOCODE
Requirements
More than 3 relay outputs required

(maximum 7)
Earth-fault monitoring with external
summation current transformer via the earthfault module
Binary inputs for 110 - 240 V AC/DC
(max. 8)
pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Footnote
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Bistable relay outputs (max. 4)
Analog temperature monitoring with NTC,

PT100, PT1000 and KTY 83/84 sensor types
Safety-oriented tripping with EMERGENCY
OFF buttons (local or decentralized via
PROFIBUS DP)
Table 1-1: Check list for selecting a device series (Cont.)
1) Via current measuring module

2) With expansion modules
3) Via current/voltage measuring modules
1-14
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1.5
Overview of functions
1.5.1
Protection functions
Detailed description: See Chapter 3 "Motor protection".
Overload protection
Current-dependent electronic protection of three-phase and AC motors with
adjustable tripping characteristics (class times) according to IEC 60947-4-1
requirements.
Unbalance protection
Protects motors from excessive temperatures caused by excessive phase
unbalance.
Immediate trip after the motor current overshoots an adjustable threshold.
Thermistor protection
The basic units (BU1 and BU2) enable connection of thermistor sensors
(binary PTC) for monitoring motor temperature.
1.5.2
Detailed description: See Chapter 5 "Monitoring functions" and Chapter 11
"Logic modules"
Earth-fault monitoring
Basic units have
Internal earth-fault monitoring:
For motors with a 3-wire connection, the basic unit calculates a possible fault
current/earth-fault current from the total current via a current measuring
module or a current/voltage measuring module. Internal earth-fault
monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks
that are either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance.
External earth-fault monitoring for SIMOCODE pro V 1) 5) :
In the case of networks that are grounded with a higher impedance it may be
necessary to set up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault currents
using a summation current transformer, instead of carrying out internal earthfault monitoring via a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module. A maximum of one earth-fault module can be used to create an
additional input on basic unit 2 to connect a 3UL22 summation current
transformer. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A/ 0.5 A/ 1 A can be evaluated with
the summation current transformer.
Current limit monitoring

Current limit monitoring is used for process monitoring. Thus, impending
irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: If a current limit is
exceeded but still below the overload limit, it can, for example, indicate a
dirty filter on a pump, or an increasingly sluggish motor bearing. If the
current limit is undershot, it can be the first sign of a worn-out drive motor
belt.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-15
System description
Voltage monitoring 2)
SIMOCODE pro V allows voltage monitoring of a three-phase current
network or a one-phase network for undervoltage or further availability:
Monitoring for undervoltage:
Two-phase monitoring for freely-selectable limits. The SIMOCODE pro V
response can be freely parameterized upon reaching a particular pre-warning
or trip level.
Monitoring for further availability:
Even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can display the further
availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit
breaker or fuses.
Temperature monitoring 1) 3)
The SIMOCODE pro V temperature module allows analog temperature
monitoring of, for example, the motor windings or the bearings of up to 3
sensor measuring circuits.
SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of overtemperature for
freely-selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Temperature monitoring takes into account the highest temperature of all
the sensor measuring circuits in use.
Active power monitoring 2)
The active power curve of a motor reflects its actual load. Excess load
results in increased wear of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature
motor failure. Insufficient active power can, for example, be a sign of nonload motor operation.
SIMOCODE pro V allows two-phase active power monitoring for freelyselectable upper and lower limits. The SIMOCODE pro V response can be
freely parameterized and delayed upon reaching a pre-warning or trip level.
Cos phi monitoring 2)
The power factor fluctuates more than either the motor current or the active
power does, particularly in the low-end performance area of a motor.
Therefore, power factor monitoring is particularly suitable for distinguishing
between non-load operation and faults, e.g. a broken drive belt or drive
shaft.
SIMOCODE pro V enables two-phase monitoring of cos phi undershooting
for freely-selectable limits. The SIMOCODE pro V response can be freely
parameterized and delayed upon reaching a pre-warning or trip level.
Monitoring operating hours, motor stop time and number of starts
In order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors that were either
running too long (wear) or stopped for too long, both SIMOCODE pro C and
SIMOCODE pro V can monitor operating hours and motor stop times.
For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal indicating that
the relevant motor requires maintenance or replacement can be generated.
After replacing the motor, the operating hours and motor stop times can be
reset.
In order to avoid excessive thermal strain and premature aging of a motor,
the number of motor starts in a selected time frame can be limited. The
limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.
1-16
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Monitoring additional process variables via the analog module 1) 4)

SIMOCODE pro V allows measuring and monitoring of any other process
variables via the analog module.
For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a pump against dry
operation, or a differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the
degree of pollution in a filter. If the fill level undershoots a specified level,
the pump can be switched off and, if a specific differential pressure value is
exceeded, the filter is to be cleaned.
SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of the corresponding
process variables for freely-selectable upper and lower limits. The
SIMOCODE pro V response can be freely parameterized and delayed upon
reaching a pre-warning or trip level.
Phase sequence identification 2)
SIMOCODE pro allows the direction of rotation of a motor to be determined
by identification of the phase sequence. If the direction of rotation is wrong,
a signal can be generated or the motor switched off.
See "Menu of the operator panel with display" and "Navigating the menu of
the operator panel with display".
Monitoring any measured values using unrestricted limit monitors 1)
SIMOCODE pro can monitor every measured value in the system for
undershooting or overshooting a set threshold value by means of
unrestricted limit monitors.
See Chapter 11.11 "Limit monitor".
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
When using basic unit 2

When using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module
Additional temperature module required
Additional analog module required
Additional earth-fault module and summation current transformer required.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-17
System description
Safety-oriented tripping
The SIMOCODE pro V motor management system has been extended by 2
modules/safety relays for the safety-oriented tripping of motors:
Failsafe digital module DM-F Local:
For applications that require the safety-oriented tripping of a motor feeder via
a hardware signal that is detected and analyzed by the module.
Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:
For applications that require the safety-oriented tripping of a motor feeder by
a failsafe control (F-CPU) via PROFIBUS with the failsafe PROFIsafe profile.
These modules fulfill the general requirements for EMERGENCY STOP
mechanisms or safety circuits, as described in the standards EN 418 and
EN 60204-1 (06/2006).
Depending on the external circuit, the following Performance Level/Safety
Integrity Level can be achieved:
PL e Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 or
SIL 3 according to IEC 61508/62061.
Safety technology and safety-oriented functions:
Are limited exclusively to failsafe digital modules.
Do not directly affect existing SIMOCODE pro components and concepts.
A more detailed description is provided in the documentation listed below:
Documentation
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY " (German)
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (English)
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (French)
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (Spanish)
Operating manual failsafe digital module DM-F Local
Operating manual failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe
System manuals and operating manuals are available at:

Caution
Use a power supply unit compliant with IEC 60536, Class III (SELV or PELV)!
A suitable safety circuit is required for capacitive and inductive loads!
1-18
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1.5.3
Control functions
Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control
functions are available:
SIMOCODE
Control function
pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Overload relay
1)
Direct starter
1)
Reversing starter
1)
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
1)
Star-delta starter,
star-delta reversing starter
Dahlander,
Dahlander reversing starter
Pole-changing starter,
Pole-changing reversing starter
Solenoid valve
Positioner
Soft starter,
Soft starter with reversing contactor
Table 1-2: Control functions
1) Due to additional requirements (e.g. power measuring), it may be necessary

to select the BU2 device version.
All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available
and can be flexibly adapted and expanded.
For a detailed description of the individual control functions: See
Chapter 4 "Motor control".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-19
System description
1.5.4
Communication
PROFIBUS DP
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or
terminal connection on the basic units).
SIMOCODE pro supports, for example, the following services:
SIMOCODE
Service
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s
Automatic baud rate recognition
Cyclic services (DPV0) and

acyclic services (DPV1)
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the

Y link
Alarms according to DPV1
Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP
Safety-oriented tripping "PROFIsafe"
Table 1-3: PROFIBUS DP services
Detailed description: See Chapter 12 "Communication".

1.5.5
Standard functions
Standard functions are pre-defined functions that can be easily activated,
e.g. time-staggered restart of the drives after a power failure.
SIMOCODE pro has the following standard functions:
SIMOCODE
Standard function
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Number
Number
Test
Reset
Test Position Feedback (TPF)
External fault
Operational Protection OFF (OPO)
Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)
Emergency Start
Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring)
Timestamping
Safety-oriented Tripping "Local"
Table 1-4: Standard functions
Detailed description: See Chapter 10 "Standard functions".
1-20
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1.5.6
Additional signal processing with freely-programmable logic modules

If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use
the freely-programmable logic modules. These can be used, for example, to
implement logical operations, time relay functions and counter functions.
Furthermore, limit monitors can monitor any value in SIMOCODE pro for
undershooting or overshooting of a freely selected limit.
Depending on the device series, the system offers several, freelyparameterizable logic modules:
SIMOCODE
Logic module
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Number
Number
Truth Tables 3 Inputs/1 Output
Truth Tables 2 Inputs/1 Output
Truth Tables 5 Inputs/2 Outputs
Timer
Counters
Signal Conditioners
Non-volatile Elements
Flashing
Flickering
Limit Monitor
Calculation modules (Calculator) 1)
Table 1-5: Freely-programmable logic modules
1) Only for basic unit 2 from version *E03*
Detailed description: See Chapter 11 "Logic modules".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-21
System description
1.5.7
Operating, service and diagnostic data

SIMOCODE pro supplies a large amount of detailed operating, service and
diagnostic data.
Operating data
Motor switching state (ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT, SLOW, FAST), derived from the
current flow in the main circuit; thus, feedback via auxiliary contacts of circuit
breakers and contactors is not necessary
Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 and maximum current in % of set current
Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 in V 2)
Active power in W 2)
Apparent power in VA 2)
Power factor in % 2)
Phase unbalance in %
Phase sequence 2)
Temperature in the sensor measuring circuits 1, 2 and 3, and maximum
temperature in K 1) 4)
Actual analog signal values 1) 5)
Time to trip in s
Thermal motor model in %
Remaining cooling down period of the motor in s, etc.
It is possible to adapt the units via the device-internal conversion of
individual measured values with the help of the logic modules (calculators)
provided by SIMOCODE pro V. For example, the temperature recorded by
SIMOCODE pro can be calculated in either F or C and transmitted to the
automation system via PROFIBUS.
Service data
Among other things, SIMOCODE pro provides the following relevant data
for maintenance:
Number of motor operating hours, also resettable
Motor stop times, also resettable
Number of motor starts, also resettable
Number of permissible starts remaining
Number of overload trips, also resettable
Feeder power consumption in kWh, also resettable 3)
Internal feeder comments stored in the device, e.g. information regarding
maintenance events, etc.
Safety-oriented tripping monitoring in h, also resettable
1) When using basic unit 2

2) When using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module
3) When using basic unit 2 (from version *E03*) with
current/voltage measuring module
4) Additional temperature module required
5) Additional analog module required
1-22
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Diagnostic data
Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages, also for further
processing in the device or in the control system
Device-internal error protocolling with time stamp
Value of the last trip current
Feedback faults (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit after switch-on
command), etc.
Diagnostic message "Local" und PROFIsafe
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-23
System description
1.6
Overview of system components
Devices
SIMOCODE
Connectable
system components
pro C
(BU1)
Operator panel (OP)
pro V
(BU2)
Application
Installation in the
switchgear cabinet
door. Additional control
station and display.
With system interface
for connecting a PC
Operator panel with display (OPD)
Current measuring modules (IM)

0.3 A - 3 A
2.4 A - 25 A
Installation in the
switchgear cabinet
door. Additional control
station and display.
With system interface
for PC connection
Current measuring
with through-hole
technology. Basic unit
can be snapped on
Current measuring module (IM)

10 A - 100 A
20 A - 200 A
Current measuring
with through-hole
technology or bus
connection system

63 A - 630 A
Current measuring via

bus connection system
Current/voltage measuring modules

(UM) 1)
0.3 A - 3 A
2.4 A - 25 A
Can only be mounted

next to the basic unit,
otherwise like current
measuring modules,
also:
- Voltage measurement
- Power measurement
- Cos phi measurement
- Phase sequence
Table 1-6: System components, devices
1-24
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
SIMOCODE
Connectable
system components
pro C
(BU1)

(UM) 1)
10 A - 100 A
Current/voltage measuring module

(UM) 1)
20 A - 200 A

(UM) 1)
63 A - 630 A
Decoupling module (DCM)
Digital modules (DM)

24 V DC monostable
110 V - 240 V AC/DC monostable
24 V DC bistable
110 V - 240 V AC/DC bistable
Failsafe digital module
DM-F Local (DM-F Local)
pro V
(BU2)
Application
Can only be mounted

next to the basic unit,
otherwise like current
measuring modules,
also:
- Voltage measurement
- Power measurement
- Cos phi measurement
- Phase sequence
For connection in
series upstream from a
current/voltage
measuring module at
the system interface
when used in
ungrounded networks.
Additional binary inputs
and outputs. Max.
2 DM possible
For failsafe tripping via
hardware signal
- 2 relay enabling
circuits, wired in
parallel
- 2 relay outputs,
common ground
failsafe shutdown
- Inputs:
- 2 sensor circuits
- Start signal
- Cascade input
- Feedback circuit
- Safety function
configurable via
DIP switch
Table 1-6: System components, devices (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-25
System description
SIMOCODE
Connectable
system components
Failsafe digital module

DM-F PROFIsafe (DM-F PROFIsafe)
pro C
(BU1)
Analog module (AM)
Earth-fault module (EM)
Temperature module (TM)
pro V
(BU2)
Application
For failsafe shutdown

via
PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe
- 2 relay enabling
circuits, wired in
parallel
- 2 relay outputs,
common ground
(failsafe shutdown)
- Inputs 24 V DC
- Feedback circuit
- 3 binary inputs
Additional analog value
inputs and outputs,
and analog monitoring.
Max. 1 AM possible.
For connecting a
3UL22 external
summation current
transformer for earthfault monitoring.
Max. 1 EM possible
For temperature
monitoring via
additional sensors
(PT100, PT1000,
KTY83/KTY84, NTC).
Max. 1 TM possible.
Table 1-6: System components, devices (Cont.)
1) Depending on the type of network (main current) in ungrounded networks,

combinable with decoupling module (DCM)
For a detailed description of the system components: See Chapter 1.7
"Description of system components".
Dimension drawings: See Chapter C "Dimension drawings".

Installation instructions: See Chapter 13 "Mounting, wiring, interfaces".
1-26
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Accessories
SIMOCODE basic unit
Connectable
system components
pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Application
Connecting cable in various

lengths, ranging from 0.025 m up
to 2.5 m
For connecting
system components
via system interfaces
System interface cover
For covering unused

system interfaces
Memory module
Saving device
parameters. If a
device is replaced,
parameter transfer
without PC
Addressing plug
Configuring the
PROFIBUS DP
address without a PC
PC cable
Connecting
SIMOCODE pro to
a PC
USB to serial adapter
For connecting a RS232 cable to the USB

interface of a PC.
Door adapter
Only for leading out

the system interface,
e.g. from a switchgear
cabinet
Operator panel adapter
Enables the use of the

smaller 3UF720
operator panel in the
front panel cut-out of
the 3UF52 operator
panel or the 3UF721
operator panel with
display.
Table 1-7: System components, accessories
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-27
System description
Software
For parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing
SIMOCODE basic unit
Software components
SIMOCODE ES
pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Application
Access via the system

interface on
device/PROFIBUS DP/
SIMATIC S7 routing,
depending which
software version is
deployed
PCS 7 function block library

SIMOCODE pro:
AS blocks and faceplates for
integrating SIMOCODE pro in
the SIMATIC PCS 7 process
control system
Table 1-8: Software components
1-28
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1.7
Description of system components
1.7.1
Basic units (BU)

The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro
system. Basic units are always necessary when using SIMOCODE pro.
They have a standard enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with
detachable terminals:
Basic unit 1 (BU1)
SIMOCODE pro C device series
Basic unit 2 (BU2)

SIMOCODE pro V device series
Fig. 1-6: Basic units
Basic units can be installed on a standard mounting rail or fixed to a

mounting plate (with additional push-in lugs).
Basic units are available in two versions for the following supply voltages:
24 V DC or
110 to 240 V AC/DC.
Basic unit 1 (BU1)
Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro C device
series and is used in combination with a current measuring module and
optional operator panels. The following motor control functions are
supported:
Overload relay
Direct starters and reversing starters
Circuit breaker control (MCCB).
LEDs for device diagnostics (Device, Bus, Gen.Fault):
These LEDs on the front of the device are used for device and fault
diagnostics, and indicate the basic status
Of the device itself via the Device LED
About PROFIBUS communication via the Bus LED
About any motor feeder faults via the Gen. Fault LED
For more information see Chapter 14.2.3.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-29
System description
Test/Reset button:
Enables the device to be reset after tripping or after a fault has occurred and
makes it possible to test the device/motor feeder with or without tripping
the contactor control. If a memory module or addressing plug is plugged in,
the PROFIBUS address can be parameterized or adopted via the Test/Reset
button.
For more information see Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset", Chapter 14.2.2 and
Chapter 14.3.2.
System interfaces:
2 system interfaces for connecting
A current measuring module
An operator panel.
Basic unit 2 (BU2).
Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V device
series and is used in combination with a current measuring module or
current/voltage measuring module and optional operator panels.
The following motor control functions are supported:
Overload relay
Direct and reversing starters
Star-delta starter, also with reversing starter
Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), also
with reversing starter
2 speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, also with reversing
starter
Positioner control
Solenoid valve control
Circuit breaker control (MCCB)
Soft starter control, also with reversing starter.
In contrast to basic unit 1, basic unit 2 offers the following expansion
options:
Increased device functionality via various expansion modules according to
need
Implementation of a current/voltage measuring module in place of a current
measuring module
Additional inputs and outputs, as required.
Use of an operator panel with display in place of a standard operator panel.
LEDs for device diagnostics (Device, Bus, Gen.Fault):
These LEDs on the front of the device are used for device and fault
diagnostics, and indicate the basic status:
Of the device itself via the Device LED
About PROFIBUS communication via the Bus LED
About any motor feeder faults via the Gen. Fault LED
For more information see Chapter 14.2.3.
1-30
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Test/Reset button:
Enables the device to be reset after tripping or after a fault has occurred and
makes it possible to test the device/motor feeder with or without tripping
the contactor control. If a memory module or addressing plug is plugged in,
the PROFIBUS address can be parameterized or adopted via the Test/Reset
button.
For more information see Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset", Chapter 14.2.2 and
Chapter 14.3.2.
System interfaces:
2 system interfaces for connecting
A current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module
Expansion modules and
An operator panel.
Supplying the inputs
See Chapter 13 "Mounting, wiring, interfaces".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-31
System description
1.7.2
Operator panel (OP)

The operator panel controls the motor feeder from the switchgear cabinet. It
has an external system interface on the front to allow easier
parameterization or diagnostics via a PC/PD. A PC (via PC cable with the
SIMOCODE ES software), a memory module or the addressing plug can be
connected to the front system interface (with cover for IP54).
The operator panel can be connected to the basic unit or an expansion
module via the rear system interface using a connecting cable. The basic
unit supplies power to the operator panel.
The operator panel is often installed in the front panels of motor control
centers. It can be used with both the SIMOCODE pro C device series and
the SIMOCODE pro V device series. It also contains all the status LEDs
available on the basic unit and the Test/Reset button, and facilitates access
to the system interface from outside the switchgear cabinet.
The following are available:
5 buttons, of which 4 are freely-parameterizable
10 LEDs, of which 7 are freely-parameterizable
The following figure shows an operator panel:
Fig. 1-7: Operator panel
Labeling strips:
Labeling strips are enclosed for designating buttons 1 to 4 and the yellow
LEDs 1 to 3:
Buttons 1 to 4:
6 pre-assigned labeling strips and 1 individually inscribable labeling strip
LEDs 1 to 3:
1 individually inscribable labeling strip.
1-32
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
STOP
CLOSE
0
0
Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4
0
0
TEST/
RESET
DEVICE
LED 1
BUS
LED 2
GEN. FAULT
LED 3
Fig. 1-8: Labeling strips for operator panel buttons and LEDs
Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel:
Labeling strips
Storage clips
Fig. 1-9: Storage clips for labeling strips
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-33
System description
Memory module "park position":

The memory module can be protected from unauthorized use by "parking" it
on the rear of the operator panel inside the switchgear cabinet.
In this case, the storage clips for the labeling strips cannot be used.
Memory module in the "park position"
Fig. 1-10: Memory module "park position"
1.7.3
Operator panel with display (OPD) for SIMOCODE pro V

Apart from the standard operator panel (OP), an optional operator panel with
display (OPD) is also available for SIMOCODE pro V. This operator panel can
display current measured values, operating data, diagnostic data or status
information of the motor feeder on the switchgear cabinet. The operator
panel can only be used with basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from version
*E03*. It also contains all the status LEDs that are present on the basic unit
and facilitates access to the system interface from outside the switchgear
cabinet. The motor can be controlled via the buttons on the operator panel.
Current measured values, status information, fault messages or the deviceinternal error protocol are simultaneously shown on the display.
Notice:
The operator panel can only be used with a basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
from version *E03*.
Overall, the following are available:

4 freely parameterizable buttons for controlling the motor feeder
4 buttons for display menu navigation, 2 of these are softkeys with various
functions (e.g. Test/Reset)
2 system interfaces (front and rear)
7 LEDs, 4 of which are freely-parameterizable (4 green LEDs integrated in the
motor control, primarily for feedback regarding the switching state, e.g. ON,
OFF, LEFT, RIGHT, etc.)
1-34
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
The following figure shows an operator panel with display:
Fig. 1-11: Operator panel with display
The operator panel with display can be connected directly to basic unit 2 or
an expansion module via the rear system interface. Voltage is supplied by
the basic unit. A PC (via a PC cable with SIMOCODE ES software), the
memory module or the addressing plug can be connected to the front
system interface (with a cover for IP54).
Caution
The operator panel with display may not be removed or plugged in during
operation!
Note
When using an operator panel with display, the type and number of
expansion modules that can be connected to a basic unit are limited! See
Chapter 1.7.8.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-35
System description
Labeling strips:
Labeling strips for labeling buttons 1 to 4 are included:
6 pre-assigned labeling strips and 1 individually inscribable labeling strip
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
CLOSE
I
0
OPEN
OPEN
STOP
CLOSE
Fig. 1-12: Labeling strips for the buttons of the operator panel with display
1-36
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel with
display:
Labeling strips
Storage clips
Fig. 1-13: Storage clips for labeling strips
"Park position" for memory module:

The memory module can be "parked" on the front of the operator panel with
display beneath the system interface:
Fig. 1-14: Memory module "park position"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-37
System description
Displays of the operator panel with display

The display shows current measured values, operating data and diagnostic
data as well as the status information of the motor feeder in plain text or
with the aid of symbols.
IL1
IL2
IL3
8.00A/5/T
2.80 A
2.16 A
2.00 A
Menu
1 23
Fig. 1-15: Displays
1
Shows the set current Is / nominal motor current in A.
The corresponding set current Is1 or Is2 is always
shown for motors with two speeds, depending whether the current speed
is slow or fast, e.g. 8.00 A.
For motors with two speeds, the left-hand softkey can be used when the
motor is stopped to alternate between the display of the two set currents.
When running, the set current for the active motor speed is always
displayed.
2
Shows the set class time of the overload protection, e.g. 10 = Class 10
(class = trip class)
3
Indicates that temperature monitoring is active, e.g. the temperature
monitoring of the motor via thermistors or analog temperature sensors
(Pt100, Pt1000, KTY, NTC). T = Temperature monitoring is active.
4
The main display enables customized depiction of different measured
values when running. This is the standard display at the topmost menu
level. Predefined profiles in the display settings can be selected for this
purpose. When the "Menu" softkey on the right is pressed, the submenus of
the main display can be navigated (see "Read and adapt main display").
1-38
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Operator controls of the operator panel with display
Fig. 1-16: Operator controls of the operator panel with display
1
Four freely-parameterizable control buttons.
These control buttons are used to control the motor with integrated status
LEDs for any status feedback. The functions can be user-defined. Labeling
can be either as desired or via the labeling strips included in the scope of
supply (see also Chapter 7.3 "Operator panel buttons" and Chapter 6.3
"Operator panel LEDs").
2
Two softkeys.
These softkeys can have different functions, depending upon the menu
depicted (e.g. Open Menu, Leave Menu, Test/Reset). The currently assigned
functions are shown on the lower left or right edge of the display.
3
Two arrow keys (up and down).
These arrow keys can be used for menu navigation or for changing the display
settings, e.g. contrast adjustment or selection of the main display profile.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-39
System description
Menu of the operator panel with display

Navigating the menu of the operator panel with display
Main menu (OPD)
For details see "Displays of the operator panel with display"
Main display
Measured values display
Status display
Motor protection/motor control
Statistics/maintenance
Communication (PROFIBUS)
Device I/Os
Display settings
Commands
Status information
Warnings
10
Faults
11
Error buffer
12
Event memory
(OPD above *E04* and BU2 above *E07*)
13
Identification
14
About SIMOCODE
Fig. 1-17: Main menu (OPD)
1-40
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1 Main display (OPD)
For details see "Read and adapt main display".
IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]
IL1, IL2, IL3 [%]
I_max [A]
I_max [%]
I_max, Cos
I_max, UL1-N, Cos, S
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, S
I_max, UL1-N, Cos, P
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, P

(OPD above *E04*)
In 1[mA] / Out [mA]
In 2[mA] / Out [mA]
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos

(OPD above *E04*)
I_max, UL1-N, C
I_max, UL1-L2, C
(OPD above *E04*)
I_max, UL1-N, F
I_max, UL1-L2, F
Calculator 1
Calculator 2
Energy consumed [kWh]
(OPD above *E04*)
In 1[mA] / In 2 [mA]
Max. temp. C
Max. temp. F
Temperatures C
Temperatures F
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N
UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1

(OPD above *E04*)
I_max, UL1-N, Cos
Fig. 1-18: Main display (OPD)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-41
System description
Measured values display (OPD)
For details see "Display of measured values in the measured values display".
I_max [A]
IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]
Phase unbalance [%]
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N [V]
UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 [V]

(OPD above *E04*)
Cos phi, P [kW], S [kVA]
I1, I2, O [mA]
Max. temp. [C]
Max. temp. [F]
T1, T2, T3 [C]
T1, T2, T3 [F]
Thermal motor model [%]
Time to trip [s]
Cooling down period [s]
Last trip current [A]
Fig. 1-19: Measured values display (OPD)
1-42
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Status display motor protection/motor control (OPD)
For details see "Motor protection and motor control status".
General fault
General warning
Current flowing
Device ok
Bus ok
PLC/PCS in Run
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
Start active
Interlocking time active/

Change-over pause act.
OPO
Remote
TPF
FC
TC
FO
TO
Positioner...
Closes
Opens
Non-maintained
command mode
Cooling down period act.
Pause time active
Emergency start executed
Device test
Active
Phase sequence
3-2-1
1-2-3
Safety
DM-F Local
Enabling circuit
Switch-off
Safety o.k.
DIP Safety
1
2
3
Safety
DM-F Local
4
5
6
7
8
DM-F PROFIsafe
Enabling circuit
Switch-off
PROFIsafe o.k.
Fig. 1-20: Status display motor protection/motor control (OPD)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-43
System description
Statistics/maintenance (OPD)
For details see "Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information

on the statistics/maintenance display".
Number of overload trips
Counter 1(2,3,4) Actual value
Motor operating hours [h]
Counter 1
Output
Operating hours
Motor >
Calculators
Number of starts
Calculator 1
Permissible starts Actual value
Calculator 2
One more only

No start
Safety: Time until

Test required [weeks]
Motor stop time [h]
Motor stop time >
Number of
parameterizations
Operating hours basic unit [h]
Timer
Timer 2 - Actual value [s]
Timer 1 (2,3,4) - Output

Output
Counters
Fig. 1-21: Statistics/maintenance (OPD)
1-44
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
PROFIBUS communication (OPD)
For details:See "Status display for PROFIBUS communication".
PROFIBUS address
PROFIsafe address
Baud rate
Bus
o.k.
Monitoring
PLC/PCS
in Run
Monitoring
Bus/PLC fault - Reset
Manual
Auto
Start-up parameter block
Timestamping
Active
Compatibility mode
Compatibility mode 1
3UF50 mode
3UF50 - Operating mode
DPV0
DPV1
3UF50 basic type

Diagnostics
Device fault
Event
Diagnostics
Warning
Fault
Fig. 1-22: PROFIBUS communication (OPD)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-45
System description
Device I/Os (OPD)
For details see "Displays the current status of all device I/Os".
AM
Inputs
1
3
Input 1 (I1) [%]

Input 2 (I2) [%]
2
4
AM
Outputs
1
3
Output [%]
AM
PTC
High resistance/not present
Inputs
Open circuit
TM
PTC
ok
Short circuit
Max. temp. [C]

TM
IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]
T1, T2, T3 [C]

TM
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N [V]
Sensor type
Pt 100
NTC
KTY84
Pt1000
KTY83
TM
UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 [V]

(OPD above *E04*)
Sensor
Fault
Out of range
DM 1.2
Inputs
1
3
2
4
DM 1.2
Monostable outputs
1
2
DM 1.2
Bistable outputs
1
2
DM1 = DM-F Local
Inputs
IN
Start
Feedback circuit
Cascaded
DM1 = DM-F Local
Sensor channels
1
2
DM1 = DM-F Local
Outputs DM-F Local

2
1
Enabling circuit
DM1 = DM-F PROFIsafe
Inputs
1
2
3
Feedback circuit
Outputs DM-F PROFIsafe

1
2
Enabling circuit
Fig. 1-23: Device I/Os (OPD)
1-46
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Display settings (OPD)
For details see "Adapt display settings".
Languages
Contrast [%]
Illumination [Off, 3 s,
10 s, 1 min, 5 min]
Profiles
(OPD above *E04*)
Voltage display
Phase voltages
Line-to-line voltages
Voltage display
Phase voltages
Warnings
1 Do not display
2 Display
Voltage display
Faults
1 Do not display
2 Display
Return to main
display [Manual, 3 s, 10 s,
1 min, 5 min]
Factory settings
Display
Restore
display settings
Fig. 1-24: Display settings (OPD)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-47
System description
Commands (OPD)
For details see "Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands".
Execute Test/Reset
Adopt address
Program
Clear
Read
Restart
Factory settings
Fig. 1-25: Commands (OPD)
Messages (OPD)
For details see "Display of all pending status information".

Thermistor trip
Warning T>
Fig. 1-26: Messages (OPD)
10 Warnings (OPD)
For details: See "Display of all pending warnings".
Thermistor trip
Warning T>
Fig. 1-27: Warnings (OPD)
1-48
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
11 Faults (OPD)
For details: See "Display of all pending faults".
Trip T>
Overload + phase failure
Fig. 1-28: Faults (OPD)
12 Error buffer (OPD)
For details: See "Reading out the device-internal error buffer".
Fault - 1
Fault - 21
Fig. 1-29: Error buffer (OPD)
13 Event memory, OPD (OPD above *E04* and BU2 above *E07*)
For details see "Reading out the device-internal event memory".
DM1 = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe
Event memory
DM1 = DM-F Local
Enabling circuit 0 ->1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Enabling circuit 0 -> 1

PROFIsafe Address:
...
DM1 = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe
Enabling circuit 1 -> 0
Fig. 1-30: Event memory, OPD
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-49
System description
14 Identification (OPD)
For details see "Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro
components".
Display
Plant identifier
MLFB
Display
Location designation
HW version
Display
Date
FW version
Comment
MLFB
Short code
SIMOCODE pro V
Manufacturer
SIEMENS
Device family
Load feeder
Device subfamily
Motor management
Device class
SIMOCODE pro V
System
SIMOCODE pro
ID number
HW version
FW version
Time stamp
Fig. 1-31: Identification (OPD)
1-50
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Displays of the operator panel with display

Navigation is possible by means of the arrow buttons and softkeys. Each
menu item may have one or more submenus. The menu structure and
display are, in part, directly dependent upon device parameterization (e.g.
selected control function) and hardware configuration (e.g. type and number
of expansion modules used).
Main display
The "Main display" is the default SIMOCODE pro display. It displays

the current measured values, which can be selected via predefined
profiles according to user requirements.
For detailed information, see: "Read and adapt main display").
Measured values display
The "Measured Values Display" provides an overview of all values

measured by SIMOCODE pro.
For example, all phase currents, phase voltages, power-related
measured values or temperatures. For detailed information, see
"Display of measured values in the measured values display".
Status display
The "Status Display" shows all higher-level status information, i.e.

all status information relevant to protecting and controlling the
motor.
For detailed information, see: "Motor protection and motor control
status".
Statistics/Maintenance
The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item provides an overview of all

SIMOCODE pro information that is primarily relevant to
maintenance.
For detailed information, see: "Display of statistical and
maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/maintenance
display".
Communication
The "Communication" menu item displays all important information

concerning PROFIBUS communication.
For detailed information, see: "Status display for PROFIBUS
communication".
Table 1-9: Menu of the operator panel with display and menu navigation
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-51
System description
Device I/Os
The "Device I/Os" menu item provides a complete overview of the

current status of all inputs and outputs of the basic unit as well as
any connected expansion modules.
For detailed information, see: "Displays the current status of all
device I/Os".
Display settings
All settings relevant to the operator panel with display can be

carried out via "Display Settings". In addition to selecting the
language and adjusting the contrast or illumination, it is also
possible to select the profiles here which are relevant for adjusting
the main display.
For detailed information, see: "Adapt display settings".
Commands
The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to

SIMOCODE pro e.g. for testing the feeder, resetting after tripping
and/or adopting parameters into the memory module or into
SIMOCODE pro.
For detailed information, see "Resetting, testing and parameterizing
via commands".
Status information
The "Status Information" menu item provides an overview of all

pending status information.
For detailed information, see "Display of all pending status
information".
Warnings
The "Warnings" menu item provides an overview of all pending

warnings.
For detailed information: See "Display of all pending warnings".
Table 1-9: Menu of the operator panel with display and menu navigation (Cont.)
1-52
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Faults
The "Faults" menu item provides an overview of all pending faults.

For detailed information: See "Display of all pending faults".
Error buffer
The "Error buffer" menu item displays the SIMOCODE pro deviceinternal error buffer.
For detailed information, see "Reading out the device-internal error
buffer".
Event memory
The "Event Memory" menu item enables access to the

SIMOCODE pro device-internal event memory.
For detailed information, see "Reading out the device-internal event
memory".
Note
This is only displayed for OPD versions above *E04*and BU2 above
*E07* with a DM-F present.
Identification
In the "Identification" menu item you will find detailed information/

labeling regarding SIMOCODE pro hardware components (basic
unit, operator panel with display).
For detailed information, see: "Identification of the motor feeder and
the SIMOCODE pro components".
About SIMOCODE
The "About SIMOCODE" menu item displays further information

about SIMOCODE pro.
Table 1-9: Menu of the operator panel with display and menu navigation (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-53
System description
Read and adapt main display

To enable users speedy viewing of the measured values typically shown on
their switchgear, various profiles are deposited in the operator panel with
display that enable user-specific adaption of the standard measured values
displayed in the SIMOCODE pro main display. The profile can be selected in
"Display settings" -> "Profile"
(see Section "Adapt display settings" on Page 1-81).
If available, the effective set current, the set class time for overload
protection and the use of temperature monitoring with the help of
thermistors or analog temperature sensors are displayed in the lower left of
the main display. The submenus of the main display can be navigated with
the right-hand softkey. For motors with two speeds, the left-hand softkey
can be used when the motor is stopped to alternate between the display of
the two set currents.
IL1, IL2, IL3 [A] (example)
Displays the currents in all three phases in A.

Note
Only possible if a current measuring module or current/voltage
measuring module is used.
IL1, IL2, IL3 [%] (example)
Displays the currents of all three phases in % of set current.

Note
I_max [A] (example)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A.

Note
I_max [%] (example)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in % of set

current.
Note
Table 1-10: Read and adapt main display
1-54
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
I_max, Cos (example)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A and the

power factor.
Note
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used.
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase

voltage UL1-N in V, the power factor, and the apparent power
in kVA.
Note
If an OPD above version *E04* is used: Values will only be
displayed if phase voltage is set/configured.
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-toline voltage UL1-L2 in V, the power factor, and the apparent power
in kVA.
Note
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used,
line-to-line voltage is set/configured and the OPD is above version
*E04*.

voltage UL1-N in V, the power factor, and the apparent power
in kVA.
Note
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-toline voltage UL1-L2 in V, the power factor, and the apparent power
in W.
Note
line-to-line voltage is set/configured and the OPD used is above
version *E04*.
Table 1-10: Read and adapt main display (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-55
System description
[mA] In 1/Output (example)
Displays the current value at input 1 of the analog module and at the
output of the analog module in mA.
Note
Only possible if the analog module is used.
[mA] In 2/Output (example)
Displays the current value at input 2 of the analog module and at the
output of the analog module in mA.
Note
[mA] Inputs (example)
Displays the current value at both inputs of the analog module

in mA.
Note
Max. temp. C (example)
Displays the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring

circuits of the temperature module in C.
Note
Only possible if a temperature module is used.
Temperatures C (example)
Displays the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring

circuits of the temperature module in C.
Note
1-56
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Max. temp. F (example)

circuits of the temperature module in F.
Note
Temperatures F (example)

circuits of the temperature module in F.
Note
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N
Displays phase voltages UL1-N, UL2-N and UL3-N in V.

Note
Shows line-to-line voltages UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 in V.

Note
*E04*.
I_max, UL1-N, Cos

voltage UL1-N in V and the power factor.
Note
displayed if phase voltage is set/
configured.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-57
System description
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-toline voltage UL1-L2 in V and the power factor.
Note
*E04*.
I_max, UL1-N, C

voltage UL1-N in V, and the maximum temperature of all used
sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in C.
Note
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module and
temperature module are being used. If an OPD above version
*E04* is used: Values will only be displayed if phase voltage is set/
configured.
I_max, UL1-N, F

voltage UL1-N in V, and the maximum temperature of all used
sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in F.
Note
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module and
temperature module are being used. If an OPD above version
*E04* is used: Values will only be displayed if phase voltage is set/
configured.
I_max, UL1-L2, C
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-toline voltage UL1-L2 in V, and the maximum temperature of all used
sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in C.
Note
version *E04*.
I_max, UL1-L2, F
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-toline voltage UL1-L2 in V, and the maximum temperature of all used
sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in F.
Note
version *E04*.
1-58
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Calculator 1 (example)
Displays the calculated result that the function block Calculator 1

provides, unitless in the range of 0 to 65535.
Note
Enables, for example, the depiction on the switchgear display of a
2-byte value sent directly from the automation system, i.e. the
unitless depiction of all 2-byte values available in SIMOCODE pro.
Calculator 2 (example)
Displays the calculated result that the function block Calculator 2

provides, unitless in the range of 0 to 65535.
Note
Enables, for example, the depiction on the switchgear display of a
2-byte or 4-byte value sent directly from the automation system, i.e.
the unitless depiction of all 2 or 4-byte values available in
SIMOCODE pro.
Energy consumed (example)
Note
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used
and the OPD is above version *E04*.
Note
If measured values are not depicted on the main display for a sustained
period of time, a profile has been selected in the display settings that is no
longer supported, due, for example, to a changed system expansion or
changed hardware configuration. The profile must be reselected.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-59
System description
Display of measured values in the measured values display

The "Measured Values" menu item displays all current SIMOCODE pro
measured values. Depending upon the type of expansion modules used, all
or only some of the values listed here will be available.
Here are the most important menus:
I max (example)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases, switchable

between A and % of Is.
Note
IL1, IL2, IL3 (example)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases, switchable

between A and % of Is.
Note
Phase unbalance (example)
Displays current phase unbalance in %.

Note
Only available if a current measuring module or current
/voltage measuring module is used.
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N (example)
Displays all phase voltages in V.

Note
U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1
Displays all line-to-line voltages in V.

Note
version *E04*.
Table 1-11: Display of measured values in the measured value display
1-60
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Cos phi, P, S (example)
Displays the power factor (0 to 100 %, or absolute, switchable via

the right-hand softkey), the active power in kW and the apparent
power in kVA.
Note
Analog input 1
Analog input 2
Analog output (example)
Displays the current values at both inputs and the current value at
the output of the analog module, switchable between mA and %.
Max. temperature (example)

circuits of the temperature module in C (switchable to F).
Note
This is only available if an analog module is being used.
Note
Only possible if a temperature module is being used.
T1, T2, T3 (example)

circuits of the temperature module in C (switchable to F).
Note
Thermal motor model (example)
Displays current internal thermal motor model in %.
Table 1-11: Display of measured values in the measured value display (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-61
System description
Time to trip
Displays the estimated time to trip.
Cooling down period (example)
Displays the cooling down period remaining before the motor can
be switched on again after an overload trip.
Last trip current (example)
Displays the strength of the current that was measured at the

moment of the overload trip, switchable between A and % of Is.
Table 1-11: Display of measured values in the measured value display (Cont.)
1-62
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Motor protection and motor control status

The status display shows all higher-level status information, i.e. all status
information relevant to the protection and controlling of the motor. The type
of status information depicted is, therefore, in part directly dependent upon
the parameterized control function and the hardware configuration of
SIMOCODE pro, and may vary.
General
General fault, general warning
Current flowing, device ok
Bus ok, PLC/PCS in Run
Control: The display of the status information can vary according to the control function.
ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>,
Start active
Table 1-12: Motor protection and motor control status
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-63
System description
Interlocking time active

Change-over pause active
OPO, Remote, TPF
FC, FO, TC, TO
Only for "Positioner" control functions, can vary according to the

actual positioner function.
Positioner closes
Positioner opens
Only for "Positioner" control functions.
Non-maintained command mode
Table 1-12: Motor protection and motor control status (Cont.)
1-64
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Protection
Cooling down period active,
Pause time active
Emergency start executed
Other
Device test active
Phase sequence 1-2-3,

Phase sequence 3-2-1
Note
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-65
System description
Safety
Safety DM-F Local
Enabling circuit status, switch-off "Safety", "Safety OK."

Note
This is only displayed if the OPD version is above *E04* and if the
BU2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F Local present.
DIP switches, DM-F Local
Status of DIP switch 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.

Note
BU2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F Local present.
Safety DM-F PROFIsafe
Enabling circuit status, switch-off "Safety", PROFIsafe active

Note
BU 2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F PROFIsafe present.
1-66
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/

maintenance display
The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item gives an overview of all
SIMOCODE pro information that is primarily relevant to maintenance. The
statuses of the timer and counter, etc. are displayed, as well as operating
hours, motor stop times and the number of starts.
General
Motor operating hours
Operating hours >
Displays overshooting of the set limit for operating hours

monitoring.
Number of starts - Actual value

(example)
Table 1-13: Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the

statistics/maintenance display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-67
System description
Permissible starts - Actual value

(example)
One more only, No start
Motor stop time (example)
Motor stop time >
Energy consumed (example)
Displays overshooting of the stipulated limit for motor stop time

monitoring.
Note

statistics/maintenance display (Cont.)
1-68
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Number of parameterizations
(example)
Operating hours BU (example)
Timer
Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) - Actual value

(example)
Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) - Output

SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-69
System description
Counters
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) - Actual value

(example)
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) - Output
Calculators
Calculator 1

1-70
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Calculator 2
Safety: Time until test required
Remaining time until next test is required in weeks.

Note
BU 2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F present.

SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-71
System description
Status display for PROFIBUS communication

The "Communication" menu item displays all important information
concerning PROFIBUS communication. In addition to the current PROFIBUS
device address, the baud rate or PROFIBUS-relevant settings concerning
process alarms and diagnostic alarms for the automation system are also
displayed.
PROFIBUS address (example)
PROFIsafe address
Displays the PROFIsafe address.

Note
BU 2 is above version *E07* with a DM-F PROFIsafe present.
Baud rate
Bus o.k.
Bus monitoring
Table 1-14: Status display for PROFIBUS communication
1-72
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
SPS/PCS in Run
PLC/PCS monitoring
Timestamping active
Compatibility mode
Table 1-14: Status display for PROFIBUS communication (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-73
System description
Compatibility mode 1
3UF50 mode
3UF50 mode
DPVO, DPV1
3UF50 basic type
Diagnostic device fault/status info Displays which type of diagnostic information "device fault" or
"status information" is sent by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level
Diagnostic warning
Diagnostic fault
Displays which type of diagnostic information "warning" or "fault" is

sent by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level automation system via
PROFIBUS.
Table 1-14: Status display for PROFIBUS communication (Cont.)
1-74
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Displays the current status of all device I/Os

The "Device I/Os" menu item gives a complete overview of the current
status of all inputs and outputs of the basic unit and any connected
expansion modules (except for the earth-fault module) The type of status
information displayed is, therefore, directly dependent upon the
SIMOCODE pro hardware configuration.
Basic unit
Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4
Outputs 1, 2, 3
PTC high resistance/not present
PTC ok, PTC short circuit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-75
System description
Current measuring
I L1, I L2, I L3
Displays the currents in all three phases in A.

Note
Only available if a current measuring module or current/voltage
Voltage measurement
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N (example)
Displays all phase voltages in V.

Note
U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1
Displays all line-to-line voltages in V.

Note
version *E04*.
Table 1-15: Displays the current status of all device I/Os
1-76
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Digital module 1, digital module 2

Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4
Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4 "monostable" or "bistable".

Note
Only possible if digital module 1 is being used as monostable or
bistable.
Monostable outputs
Outputs 1, 2 "monostable".
Note
Only possible if digital module 1 is being used as monostable.
For OPDs up to version *E03*: The display is different.
Bistable outputs
Bistable outputs 1, 2.
Note
Only possible if digital module 1 is being used as monostable.
For OPDs up to version *E03*: The display is different.
Table 1-15: Displays the current status of all device I/Os (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-77
System description
Digital module 1 as DM-F Local

Inputs DM-F Local
Inputs "IN", "Start", "Feedback circuit", "Cascaded".

Note
Only possible if digital module 1 is "Local", an OPD above version
*E04* and BU2 above *E07* is being used.
Sensor channels DM-F Local
Sensor channels 1,2

Note
Outputs DM-F Local
Outputs 1, 2, "Enabling circuit".

Note
Digital module 1 is DM-F PROFIsafe

Inputs DM-F PROFIsafe
Inputs 1, 2, 3, "Feedback circuit".

Note
Only available if digital module 1 is "PROFIsafe" and if an OPD above
version *E04* and BU2 above *E07* is being used.
Outputs DM-F PROFIsafe
Outputs 1, 2, "Enabling circuit".

Note
Only available if digital module 1 is "PROFIsafe" and if an OPD above
version *E04* and BU2 above *E07* is being used.
1-78
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Analog module
Input 1, input 2 (example)
Output (example)
Open circuit
Note
Note
Note
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-79
System description
Temperature module
Max. temperature (example)
T1, T2, T3 (example)
Sensor type
Pt100
Pt1000
NTC
KTY83
KTY85
Note
Note
Note
Sensor fault
Sensor out of range
Note
1-80
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Adapt display settings

All settings relevant to the operator panel with display can be carried out via
the display settings. In addition to selecting the language and adjusting the
contrast or illumination, it is also possible to select the profiles here which
are relevant for adjusting the main display. The display settings can be
completely reset to the factory settings via the corresponding menu item.
Languages
Example:
English
German
French
Polish
Spanish
Portuguese
Italian
Finnish
Contrast
Example:
10 %
15 %
20 %
25 %
30 %
35 %
40 %
45 %
50 %
55 %
60 %
65 %
70 %
75 %
80 %
85 %
90 %
Illumination
Example:
Stipulates how long the background illumination remains on after a

button has been pushed on the operator panel with display, and it
enables the illumination to be switched off permanently:
Off
3_s
10_s
1_min
5_min
Table 1-16: Adapt display settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-81
System description
Profiles
See "Menu of the operator
panel with display", main
display
Enables selection of the display profiles for the main display. If a

defined profile is no longer supported by SIMOCODE pro, for
example, due to a changed hardware configuration, the start display
is shown instead of the default main display.
IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]

I_max [A]
IL1, IL2, IL3 [%]
I_max [%]
I_max, Cos
In1/Output [mA]
In2/Output [mA]
Inputs [mA]
Max. temp. C
Temperatures C
Max. temp. F
Temperatures F
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N
I_max, UL1-N, Cos
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos
I_max, UL1-N, C (max. temp.)
I_max, UL1-L2, C (max. temp.)
I_max, UL1-N, F (max. temp.)
I_max, UL1-L2, F (max. temp.)
Calculator 1
Calculator 2
Table 1-16: Adapt display settings (Cont.)
1-82
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Voltage display
Switch voltage display
Note
Only available for OPDs above version *E04* and BU2 above
version *E06*.
From BU2 product version *E07, configuration is carried out in the
BU.
Determines whether "phase voltages" or "line-to-line voltages" are

displayed.
Phase voltages
Warnings
Determines whether, in the case of a pending general warning, the
display is switched over to the menu item "Warnings" so that details
are displayed (not switched on as standard).
Do not display
Display
Faults
Determines whether, in the case of a pending general fault, the
display is switched over to the menu item "Faults" so that details are
displayed (switched on as standard, higher priority than pending
warnings).
Do not display
Display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-83
System description
Return to main display

Determines whether and when to return from the current menu to
the main display.
Manual
3s
10 s
1 min
5 min
Factory settings display

Enables resetting of the the display settings (not to the factory
settings of SIMOCODE pro!)
1-84
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands

The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to
SIMOCODE pro e.g. for testing the feeder, resetting after tripping and/or
adopting parameters into the memory module or into SIMOCODE pro. By
safeguarding the device-internal parameterization against external access,
e.g. via a password stipulated in SIMOCODE pro, individual commands and/
or even the entire "Commands" menu item can be blocked.
Test/Reset
Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked.
Adopt address
Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked and a password
has not been stipulated.
Program
Clear
Always possible.
Read
Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked and a password
has not been stipulated.
Restart
Factory settings
Table 1-17: Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-85
System description
Display of all pending status information

This menu item provides an overview of all pending status information. A
detailed description of pending status information can be found in
Chapter 15 "Alarms, faults and system events".
Fig. 1-32: Display of all pending status information
Display of all pending warnings

This menu item provides an overview of all pending warnings. In the case of
a newly pending general warning, it is possible to switch to this menu item
automatically (this must be set via the display settings) so that the exact
cause of the general warning can be displayed.
A detailed description of pending warnings can be found in
Fig. 1-33: Display of all pending warnings
Display of all pending faults

This menu item provides an overview of all pending faults. In the case of a
newly pending general fault, it is possible to switch to this menu item
automatically (this must be set via the display settings) so that the exact
cause of the general fault can be displayed.
A detailed description of pending faults can be found in
h
Fig. 1-34: Display of all pending faults
1-86
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Reading out the device-internal error buffer

The "Error buffer" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro deviceinternal error buffer. The time and cause of the last 21 faults are displayed
here. See also Chapter 14.3 "Error buffer/reading out error protocol".
A detailed description of faults can be found in
Fig. 1-35: Reading out the device-internal error buffer
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-87
System description
Reading out the device-internal event memory

The "Event Memory" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro
device-internal event memory. The two most recent events "DM-F enabling
circuit closed" and "DM-F enabling circuit open" are displayed, together with
the time, for both digital modules "DM-F Local" and "DM-F PROFIsafe".
Switch to event memory display.
Last event "Enabling circuit closed",

DM-F Local,
The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed", the
time and the related DIP switch configuration.
Note
Only available if digital module 1 is DM-F Local.

DM-F PROFIsafe
The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed", the
time and the related PROFIsafe address.
Note
Only possible if digital module 1 is DM-F PROFIsafe.
Last event "Enabling circuit opened"
The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit open" and
the corresponding time.
Note
Only available if digital module 1 is DM-F Local or
DM-F PROFIsafe.
Table 1-18: Reading out the device-internal event memory
1-88
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components

In the "Identification" menu item you will find detailed information about
SIMOCODE pro hardware components, e.g. hardware and firmware
versions. Furthermore, this dialog enables the identification of the motor
feeder via a plant identifier stored in SIMOCODE pro, as well as a request
for the location designation and display of the device-internal comment.
Identification
Plant identifier
Date
Comment
Table 1-19: Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-89
System description
Basic unit
MLFB (order number)(example)
Short code
Manufacturer
Device family (example)
Device subfamily (example)
Table 1-19: Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components (Cont.)
1-90
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Device class
System
Identification number (example)
HW version (example)
FW version (example)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-91
System description
Time stamp
Display
MLFB (order number)
HW version (example)
FW version (example)
1-92
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1.7.4
Current measuring module (IM) for the SIMOCODE pro C and

SIMOCODE pro V device series
Current measuring modules are used together with the basic units of the
SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series.
For each feeder, the current measuring module must be selected according
to the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor).
The current measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and
630 A, with interposing transformers up to 820 A.
Current measuring modules are available for the following current ranges
(see figure below):
0.3 ... 3 A with through-hole technology.
2.4 ... 25 A with through-hole technology.
10 ... 100 A with through-hole technology
20 ... 200 A with through-hole or bus connection technology
63 ... 630 A with bus connection technology.
0.3 A - 3 A
2.4 A - 25 A
20 A - 200 A
10 A - 100 A
63 A - 630 A
Fig. 1-36: Current measuring module variants
The current measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a

connecting cable, which also supplies the power. Current measuring
modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed
directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. Basic units can
be snapped directly onto the current measuring modules. Current
measuring modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard
mounting rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate
with the screw attachments that are integrated in the enclosure. The current
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-93
System description
measuring module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated

screw attachments.
Note:
Current measuring modules with a set current of up to 100 A can be
connected to the basic unit mechanically and be installed as a unit (behind
one another). Larger current measuring modules can only be mounted
separately.
1.7.5
Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V device

series
The SIMOCODE pro V device allows use of a current/voltage measuring
module instead of a current measuring module. In addition to measuring the
motor current, current/voltage measuring modules also enable:
Measuring voltages up to 690 V
Calculation and monitoring power and cos phi
Monitoring of the phase sequence.
The following figure shows the various current/voltage measuring modules:
0.3 A - 3 A
2.4 A - 25 A
20 A - 200 A
10 A - 100 A
63 A - 630 A
Fig. 1-37: Current/voltage measuring modules
The current/voltage measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a

connecting cable, which also supplies the power.
1-94
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Current/voltage measuring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail

mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional
push-in lugs. The current/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A can also
be mounted on the standard mounting rail or, optionally, they can be fixed
directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments that are
integrated in the enclosure. The current/voltage measuring module up to
630 A can only be mounted using the integrated screw attachments. Basic
units can only be mounted separately next to current/voltage measuring
modules.
For calculating or monitoring performance variables, current/voltage
measuring modules have additional, removable terminals that can be fed
with all three phase voltages of the main circuit. An additional 3-core cable
can be used, for example, to connect the main circuit directly from the bus
connections of the current/voltage measuring module with the connection
terminals of the voltage measurement module.
Note
The current/voltage measuring module requires basic unit 2, version *E02*
(from 04/2005) or later.
Using a decoupling module
A decoupling module may be required when using a voltage measuring
module.
See Chapter 1.7.6.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-95
System description
1.7.6
Decoupling module (DCM) for current/voltage measuring modules,

SIMOCODE pro V device series.
When measuring voltage and power with SIMOCODE pro in ungrounded
networks, each current/voltage measuring module must have a decoupling
module connected upstream in series at the system interface. When
measuring voltage and power with SIMOCODE pro in networks with
additional insulation measurement or insulation monitoring each current/
voltage measuring module must also have a decoupling module connected
upstream in series. If using the 3UF710 current measuring module in these
networks, it is imperative that an additional decoupling module is not used.
1 decoupling module for connection in series upstream from a current/
voltage measuring module at the system interface
Fig. 1-38: Decoupling module, SIMOCODE pro V device series
Note
When using a decoupling module, the type and number of expansion
modules that can be connected to a basic device are limited! See
Chapter 1.7.8 "Configuration information for using an operator panel with
display and/or a decoupling module".
Using the decoupling module in different networks

A decoupling module may be required when using a voltage measuring
module, especially for the following networks:
Insulated networks
High-resistance networks
Asymmetrically grounded networks
Single-phase networks.
1-96
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
The table below shows decoupling module requirements for different

network forms and configurations (star networks, delta networks and
single-phase networks):
Star networks:
Star network
Network configuration
4-wire, star
grounded with low
impedance
Decoupling
module
required
Note
No
TN-S system
according to
IEC 60364
Yes
No
TN-C system
according to
IEC 60364
Yes
Yes
IT system according
to IEC 60364
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
4-wire, star
grounded with high
impedance
L1
L2
L3
R
N
PE
3-wire, star
grounded with low
impedance
L1
L2
L3
PE
3-wire, star
grounded with high
impedance
L1
L2
L3
R
PE
3-wire, star
insulated
L1
L2
L3
PE
Table 1-20: Decoupling module requirements for star networks
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-97
System description
Delta networks: 1)
Delta networks
Network configuration
3-wire, delta
single-phase grounded
Decoupling
module
required
Note
Yes
Parameter
"Voltage display
-> Line to line
voltage" must be
activated.
Yes
Parameter
"Voltage display
-> Line to line
voltage" must be
activated.
Yes
Parameter
"Voltage display
-> Line to line
voltage" must be
activated.
Yes
Parameter "Voltage
display -> phase
voltages" must be
active.
The applied voltage
can be calculated as
follows
U_L1N + U_L2N.
L1
L2
L3
PE
3-wire, delta
insulated
L1
L2
L3
PE
Center tap grounded

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Table 1-21: Decoupling module requirements for delta networks
Single-phase networks:
Single-phase networks
L
Table 1-22: Decoupling module requirements for single-phase networks
1) Mainly in North America
1-98
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1.7.7
Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series

Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion modules are
available:
Digital modules (DM)
Failsafe digital module Failsafe Local (DM-F Local)
Failsafe digital module Failsafe PROFIsafe (DM-F PROFIsafe)
Analog module (AM)
Temperature module (TM).
All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of
22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing)
and removable terminals. The expansion module is connected via a
connecting cable to the first system interface of basic unit 2. Further
expansion modules or the operator panel can be connected via the second
system interface. The expansion modules draw power from basic unit 2 via
the connecting cables.
All expansion modules are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed
to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs.
Fig. 1-39: Expansion modules, SIMOCODE pro V device series
Notice:
Expansion modules can only be used in conjunction with basic unit 2!
Up to 5 expansion modules can be connected to a basic unit in any order.
When using an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module,
ensure that additional limitations governing the number of expansion
modules that can be connected per basic unit are observed!
See Chapter 1.7.8 "Configuration information for using an operator panel
with display and/or a decoupling module".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-99
System description
Digital module (DM)

Digital modules allow the type and number of binary inputs and relay
outputs on basic unit 2 to be further increased, if required.
The following digital modules are available for basic unit 2:
Inputs
4 inputs
4 inputs
4 inputs
4 inputs
Supply
Outputs
24 V DC, external
2 monostable relay
outputs
110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relay
outputs
24 V DC, external
2 bistable relay outputs
110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
Table 1-23: Versions of digital modules
A maximum of 2 digital modules can be connected to one basic unit 2. A

further 4 additional binary inputs and 2 additional binary outputs are
available. All versions can be combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro V
can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs and
7 relay outputs.
In the case of the monostable version, the relay outputs open
after switching off/failure/interruption of the supply voltage. With the
bistable version, the switching state of the relay outputs remains intact
even after switching off/failure/interruption of the supply voltage.
If required, you can set a delay time for the digital module inputs (see
Chapter 7.4 "Digital module inputs").
Supplying the inputs: See Chapter 13.3 "Wiring".
Note
To implement some motor control functions, a further digital module is
required in addition to the relay outputs on basic unit 2.
Note
If two digital modules are being used, the digital module connected the
closest to the basic unit via the system interface will be identified as digital
module 1. The digital module that follows behind will be identified as digital
module 2. If one digital module is connected to the front side and another to
the lower system interface of the basic unit, the digital module on the front
system interface of the basic unit will always be identified as digital
module 1.
1-100
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Failsafe digital module DM-F

The failsafe digital module DM-F extends the SIMOCODE pro motor
management system with failsafe functions for switching off motors:
Failsafe digital module DM-F Local
Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe.
These modules fulfill the general requirements for EMERGENCY STOP
mechanisms or safety circuits, as described in the standards EN 418 and
EN 60204-1 (06/2006).
Depending on the external circuit, the following Performance Level/Safety
Integrity Level can be achieved:
PL e Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 or
SIL 3 according to IEC 61508/62061.
Safety technology and safety-oriented functions
Are limited exclusively to failsafe digital modules.
Do not directly affect existing SIMOCODE pro components and concepts.
LEDs for DM-F device diagnostics:
See Chapter D.5.2 "Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
digital modules" system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules
SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (table below).
Test/Reset button DM-F:
See system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY"
(table below).
Configuring the DM-F DIP switch:
See Chapter 10.8 "Safety-oriented tripping" system manual "Failsafe digital
module SIMOCODE pro Safety" (table below).
DM-F system interfaces:
(table below).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-101
System description
Documentation for safety-oriented functions and failsafe digital

modules
Safety-oriented functions and additional information on failsafe digital
modules can be found in the following documentation:
Documentation
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY " (German)
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (English)
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (French)
System manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY" (Spanish)
Operating manual "Failsafe digital module DM-F Local"
Operating manual "Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe"
System manuals and operating manuals are available at:

The failsafe digital module DM-F Local provides safety-oriented tripping of
a motor feeder via a hardware signal that is detected and evaluated by the
module.
From a non-safety-oriented perspective, the DMF comprises:
Inputs
Supply 1)
4 digital inputs (non-safety-oriented): 24 V DC

- Input 1: Sensor circuit
- Input 2: Start input
- Input 3: Feedback circuit
- Input 4: Cascade input
Outputs
2 monostable relay outputs
inputs (non-safety-oriented)
Table 1-24: Inputs, outputs and voltage supply of the digital module
Failsafe Local (DM-F Local)
The failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe provides safety-oriented

tripping of a motor feeder by a failsafe control (F-CPU) via PROFIBUS with
the failsafe PROFIsafe profile.
From a non-safety-oriented perspective, the DM-PROFIsafe comprises:
1-102
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Inputs
Supply 1)
4 digital inputs (non-safety-oriented) 24 V DC
Outputs
inputs (non-safety-oriented)
Table 1-25: Inputs, outputs and voltage supply of the digital module
Failsafe PROFIsafe (DM-F PROFIsafe)
1)
Warning
Dangerous voltage
Use a power supply unit compliant with IEC 60536, Class III (SELV or PELV)!
Overvoltage limiters are required for inductive loads.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-103
System description
Analog module (AM)

By means of the analog module, basic unit 2 can be optionally expanded by
analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA - 20 mA). As a result, it is possible to
measure and monitor any process variable that can be mapped on to a 0/4
mA - 20-mA signal.
Typical applications would be, for example, fill-level monitoring for
protecting pumps from dry operation, or the monitoring of pollution in a
filter using a differential pressure transducer. The automation system has
free access to the measured process variables. The analog output can, for
example, be used for the visualization of any process variables on a pointer
instrument. The automation system can also freely access the output via
PROFIBUS.
1 analog module can be connected to BU2
2 analog inputs (passive) for measuring 0/4mA - 20 mA signals.
Both inputs are either set to 0 - 20 mA or 4 mA - 20 mA
1 output for outputting a 0/4 mA - 20 mA signal.
Notice
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs that have to be supplied
by an external, isolated current source (e.g. isolating transducer). If the
output of the analog module is not being utilized, it can be used as current
source for an input.
Note
The use of an analog module requires basic unit 2, version *E02*
(from 04/2005).
1-104
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description

For networks grounded with a higher impedance it may be necessary to set
up earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault currents using a 3UL22
summation current transformer, instead of carrying out earth-fault
monitoring via a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A, and 1 A can be evaluated with
the summation current transformer.
In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring supported by both device
series, SIMOCODE pro V can thus be expanded by a more precise,
additional external earth-fault monitoring system.
The earth-fault module adds an additional input for connecting a summation
current transformer to basic unit 2.
1 earth-fault module connectable to BU2.
Note
The use of an earth-fault module requires basic unit 2, above at least version
*E02* (from 04/2005).
The temperature module allows expansion of the SIMOCODE pro V device
series with an analog temperature monitoring system. In addition to
monitoring thermistors of the basic units, up to 3 analog sensor measuring
circuits (in two or three-wire systems) can be connected, the temperatures
in the 3 sensor measuring circuits can be measured, and the highest
temperature in all sensor measuring circuits can be determined. The
measured temperatures can be fully integrated into the process, and they
can be further monitored and also made available for a higher- level
This makes it possible, for example, to implement analog temperature
monitoring of the motor windings, bearings, the coolant temperature and
the gear oil temperature.
SIMOCODE pro V supports different sensor types (NTC,
KTY83/84, Pt100/Pt1000) for use in hard, fluid or gaseous media.
Notice
The same sensor type must be used in all sensor measuring circuits.
1 temperature module connectable to BU2
3 sensor measuring circuits in 2 or 3-wire systems
Note
The use of an analog module requires basic unit 2, above at least version
*E02* (from 04/2005).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-105
System description
1.7.8
Configuration information for using an operator panel with display and/or

a decoupling module
If a decoupling module and/or an operator panel with display is to be used in
the SIMOCODE pro system, the following configuration information
regarding the type and number of expansion modules must be observed.
The following tables show the maximum expansion with expansion modules
for the various combinations
(x = possible, = not possible):
Maximum expansion with expansion modules
U/I
U/I
1)
Earth-fault module
Analog module
Digital module
Digital module/DM-F
Earth-fault module
Temperature module
Analog module
Digital module
Digital module/DM-F
Decoupling module
Measurement
Operator panel
None/
Operator panel
Operator panel
with display
Temperature module
SIMOCODE pro basic unit

Us = 110-240 V AC/DC
SIMOCODE pro basic unit

Us = 24 V DC
1)
1)
1)
Max. 4 modules
Max. 4 modules
U/I
Max. 4 modules
Max. 3 modules
U/I
1)
3)
2)
1)
1) No bistable relay outputs and a maximum of 5 of the 7 relay outputs are simultaneously
active (> 3 s)
2) No bistable relay outputs and a maximum of 3 of the 5 relay outputs are simultaneously
active (> 3 s)
3) Analog module output is not being used
Table 1-26: Maximum expansion with expansion modules when using an operator panel with display, a current/
voltage measuring module and a decoupling module for SIMOCODE pro V basic units with 24 V DC or
110-240 V AC/DC
1-106
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1.7.9
Accessories
The following figure shows accessories that are independent of the device
series:
PC cable
System interface
cover
Door adapter
Addressing plug
Adapter for
Operator panel
Memory module
Connecting cable
Fig. 1-40: Accessories
PC cable
For device parameterization, for connecting a PC to the system interface of
a basic unit via the serial interface of the PC.
For connecting a RS-232 cable to the USB interface of a PC.
Memory module
Allows system parameterization to be backed up completely and be
transferred to a new system without additional resources or specialist
expertise, for example if the device is replaced (see Chapter 14.3.3)
Addressing plug
For the hardware-related allocation of the PROFIBUS DP address to
SIMOCODE pro without a PC/PD via the system interface.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with an addressing plug:
See Chapter 14.2.2.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-107
System description
Connecting cable
In various designs and lengths. These are required to connect the basic unit
to its current measuring module and, if applicable, to its expansion modules
or the operator panel.
Notice:
The total length of all cables connecting modules and basic units must not
exceed 3 m per system interface of the basic unit!
Door adapter
Facilitates access to the SIMOCODE pro system interface, for example via
the front panel, to ensure fast parameterization.
To protect and/or seal the system interfaces against soiling. In normal
operation, unused system interfaces must be closed.
Enables the use of the SIMOCODE pro 3UF720 operator panel in a front
panel cut-out, in which a SIMOCODE DP 3UF52 operator panel (IP54 degree
of protection) was previously used, e.g. after a system change. Can also be
used when replacing a 3UF721 operator panel with display with a 3UF720
standard operator panel.
1-108
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1.7.10
Software
For communication-capable switching devices, device functions, hardware
configuration, user-friendliness of parameterization software and suitable
system integration (i.e. optimum and fast integration in various plant
configurations and process automation systems) play a key role.
SIMOCODE pro offers various software tools for thorough, time-saving
parameterization and configuration and diagnostics for:
SIMOCODE ES for "totally integrated" commissioning and service
Object manager OM SIMOCODE pro for "totally integrated" in SIMATIC S7
PCS 7 SIMOCODE pro function block library "totally integrated" in PCS 7
SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for
SIMOCODE pro, and runs on a PC/PD with Windows XP or Windows 7
Ultimate and Professional.
SIMOCODE ES is a user-friendly and clear user interface for the
SIMOCODE pro motor management system for parameterizing, operating,
monitoring and testing SIMOCODE in the field or from a centralized
location.
SIMOCODE ES provides detailed information for maintenance and service
by displaying operating, service and diagnostic data and helps to prevent,
localize and resolve faults.
Online parameterization during operation avoids unnecessary plant
downtime.
The integrated print function in SIMOCODE ES makes it possible to
document all parameters according to DIN EN ISO 7200.
Additionally, the graphics editor allows very ergonomic and user-friendly
parameterization per "drag and drop": Inputs and outputs of function blocks
can be linked graphically and the parameters set. Configured functions can
be described in detail and device parameterization can be documented
graphically using comments. This speeds up commissioning and simplifies
plant documentation. The optimized user interface and integrated graphic
editor are used for parameterization. Inputs and outputs of function blocks
can be linked graphically and the parameters set. The device
parameterization can be documented graphically. See also Chapter 1.9
"Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)".
Further functions: Operation, diagnostics, testing, S7 routing, Teleservice
via MPI, STEP 7 object manager.
You will find a demo and latest updates on the Internet at
http://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Software Downloads
Note
SIMOCODE ES is subject to continual maintenance and improvement.
Current Service Packs and Hotfixes can be downloaded at
http://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Software Downloads.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-109
System description
Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro Object Manager OM is part of SIMOCODE ES. When
SIMOCODE ES and SIMOCODE OM pro are installed on a PC/PD,
SIMOCODE ES can be called up directly from STEP 7 HW Config. This
enables simple and complete SIMATIC S7 configuration.
SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 Library
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library is used to simply and
conveniently connect SIMOCODE pro to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process
control system. The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library contains
the diagnostic and driver blocks that correspond to the diagnostic and driver
concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 and the elements (symbols and faceplates)
necessary for operating and monitoring. Integration is carried out graphically
with the CFC editor.
Signal processing and technological functions of the SIMOCODE pro PC7
function block library are oriented towards the SIMATIC PCS 7 standard
libraries (Driver Blocks, Technological Blocks) and are optimized for
SIMOCODE pro. Users that have previously configured motor feeders
conventionally via Signal Blocks or Motor/Solenoid Valve Blocks can easily
switch to the SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library.
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library supplied on CD-ROM
enables the user to use the required engineering software on one
engineering station (single license) including the runtime software to run AS
blocks in one automation system (single license). If the AS blocks are used
in additional automation systems, an appropriate number of runtime
licenses is required (these are delivered without CD).
Note
The PCS 7 libraries are subject to continual maintenance and improvement.
Current Service Packs and Hotfixes can be downloaded at
http://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Software Downloads.
Notice
Observe the respective system versions!
GSD File
For integration into SIMATIC S7 or any standard DP master system
(automation system). The latest version can be found on the internet
at http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd.
Further information on integrating DP slaves can be found in the automation
system documentation.
Win SIMOCODE DP converter
This is a software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP parameter
files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for
SIMOCODE pro.
1-110
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
1.8
Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro
1.8.1
Function blocks
See also Chapter 1.9 "Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)".
Properties
Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for
the administration of various control stations, for the set control function, or
for motor protection. Every function block has a name and may be equipped
with inputs and outputs. The inputs and outputs are used for the internal
connection of the various function blocks and, thus, the setup of a deviceinternal logic instead of an externally wired logic in the control circuit.
The following table shows the possible input types of the internal function
blocks of SIMOCODE pro:
Input
Symbol
Example
Plugs
(binary)
Function blocks in the basic unit may have binary

plugs. These are connected to binary sockets via
software. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES.
Plugs
(analog)
Function blocks in the basic unit may have analog

plugs. These are connected via software to analog
sockets. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES. Example: 2-byte word for cyclic
send data.
Screw
terminals
Screw terminals are outside, e.g. "BU Input" function

block. Control devices and auxiliary switches are
normally connected there.
Receive data
from
PROFIBUS DP
DP
From the DP master to SIMOCODE pro, e.g. "Cyclic

Receive" function block.
Table 1-27: Input types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro
The following table shows the possible output types of the internal function
blocks of SIMOCODE pro:
Output
Sockets
(binary)
Symbol
Example
Function blocks in the basic units may have binary
sockets. These are assigned via software to binary
plugs.
They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with
SIMOCODE ES.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-111
System description
Sockets
(analog)
Function blocks in the basic units may have analog

sockets. Sockets are assigned via software to analog
plugs.
They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with
SIMOCODE ES.
Example: 2-byte word max. current I_max.
Screw
terminals
Screw terminals are outside, e.g. "BU Output"

function block. The contactors, for example, are
connected here.
Send data to
PROFIBUS DP
DP
From SIMOCODE pro to the DP-Master, e.g."Cyclic

Send" function block.
Binary terminal
block
Internal binary signals (binary sockets) that are not

assigned to a function block (fault, status, other),
e.g. "Status - Device OK." (in the graphic editor).
Analog terminal
block
Internal analog signals (analog sockets) that are not

assigned to a function block, e.g. "Phase Unbalance"
(in the graphic editor).
1-112
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Schematic of principle structural configuration

The following function block diagram shows the principal configuration of
SIMOCODE pro with its external inputs and outputs and internally stored
function blocks:
SIMOCODE pro (external)
Inputs
(terminals)
Sockets
BU Inputs
SIMOCODE pro (internal)

Plugs
Sockets
BU Outputs
Function Block A
1
IN1
IN2
1
Standard function
IN4
OUT1
2
Function Block C
IN3
Outputs
(terminals)
Plugs
OUT2
OUT3
Standard function
Function Block B
Cyclic
Receive
Cyclic
Send
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.0
Control Function
From DP
Master
Bit 0.1
DP
Function Block D
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.2
To DP
Master
DP
Logic Function
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS DP
Fig. 1-41: Principal configuration of SIMOCODE pro
Connecting plugs with sockets

Note
The function block plugs and sockets have not already been connected at
the factory with the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic unit.
The internal wiring (connecting the plugs and sockets) is determined by the
selected application. 1)
Note
If external wiring has already been carried out, but SIMOCODE pro has not
yet been parameterized:
If you now press a button, the contactors will not be activated! 1)
1) If you select and load a preset application (e.g. the reversing starter) in
SIMOCODE ES, all links and interlocks for the reversing starter are created in
the basic unit.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-113
System description
1.9
Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Analog Value Recording (Record)
Fig. 1-42: Analog Value Recording
See Chapter 8.
AM Output
Fig. 1-43: AM Output
See Chapter 6.5.

AM Inputs
Fig. 1-44: AM Inputs
See Chapter 7.6.
1-114
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Acyclic Send Byte 0 (1)
Fig. 1-45: Acyclic Receive Byte 0
See Chapter 6.7.

Acyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3)
Fig. 1-46: Acyclic Receive
See Chapter 7.8.

OP LED
Fig. 1-47: OP LED
See Chapter 6.3.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-115
System description
OP Buttons
Fig. 1-48: OP Buttons
See Chapter 7.3

Operation Monitoring
Fig. 1-49: Operation Monitoring
See Chapter 5.7.

Flashing 1 (2, 3)
Fig. 1-50: Flashing 1
See Chapter 11.9.
1-116
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
OPO
Fig. 1-51: OPO
See Chapter 10.5.

Calculator 1
Fig. 1-52: Calculator 1
See Chapter 11.12

Calculator 2
Fig. 1-53: Calculator 2
See Chapter 11.12.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-117
System description
DM1(2) Outputs
Fig. 1-54: DM1(2) Outputs
See Chapter 6.4.

DM1(2) Inputs
Fig. 1-55: DM1(2) Inputs
See Chapter 7.4.

DM1(2) Inputs, DM-F = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe
Fig. 1-56: DM1(2) Inputs, DM1 = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe
See Chapter 7.4.
1-118
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Extended Protection
Fig. 1-57: Extended protection
See Chapter 3.1.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-119
System description
Extended Control
Fig. 1-58: Extended Control
See Chapter 4.2.1.

External Fault 1 (and 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)
Fig. 1-59: External Fault 1
See Chapter 10.4.

Flickering 1 (2, 3)
Fig. 1-60: Flickering 1
See Chapter 11.10.
1-120
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
BU Outputs
Fig. 1-61: BU Outputs
See Chapter 6.2.

BU Inputs
Fig. 1-62: BU Inputs
See Chapter 7.2.

Limit Monitor 1 (2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-63: Limit Monitor 1
See Chapter 11.11.

Emergency Start
Fig. 1-64: Emergency Start
See Chapter 10.7.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-121
System description
Non-Volatile Element 1 (2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-65: Non-Volatile Element 1
See Chapter 11.8.

TPF
Fig. 1-66: TPF
See Chapter 10.3.

Protection/Control
Fig. 1-67: Protection/Control
See Chapter 4.2.1.
1-122
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Signal Conditioner 1 (and 2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-68: Signal Conditioner 1
See Chapter 11.7.

Safe Tripping, DM-F Local
Fig. 1-69: Safe Tripping, DM-F Local
See Chapter 10.8 "Safety-oriented tripping".

Safe Tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe
Fig. 1-70: Safe Tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-123
System description
Control Stations
Fig. 1-71: Control Stations
See Chapter 4.1.

Current Limits
Fig. 1-72: Current Limits
See Chapter 5.2.
1-124
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Test 1 (2) and Reset 1 (2, 3)
Fig. 1-73: Test 1, Reset 1
See Chapter 10.2.

Thermistor
Fig. 1-74: Thermistor
See Chapter 3.5.

Timer 1 (2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-75: Timer 1
See Chapter 11.6.

TM Inputs
Fig. 1-76: TM Inputs
See Chapter 7.2.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-125
System description
Monitor 0/4-20 mA
Fig. 1-77: Monitor 0/4-20 mA
See Chapter 5.6.

Monitor Cos Phi
Fig. 1-78: Monitor cos phi
See Chapter 5.4.
1-126
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Monitor Earth Fault
Fig. 1-79: Monitor Earth Fault
See Chapter 5.1.

Monitor Power
Fig. 1-80: Monitor Power
See Chapter 5.5.

Monitoring interval for testing
Fig. 1-81: Monitoring interval for testing
See Chapter 5.9.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-127
System description
Monitor Voltage
Fig. 1-82: Monitor voltage
See Chapter 5.3.

Monitor Temperature
Fig. 1-83: Monitor temperature
See Chapter 5.8.

UVO
Fig. 1-84: UVO
See Chapter 10.6.
1-128
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Truth Table TT 1 3I/1O (TT 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 3I/1O)
Fig. 1-85: Truth Table TT 1 3I/1O
See Chapter 11.2.

Truth Table TT 7 2I/1O (TT 8 2I/1O)
See Chapter 11.3.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-129
System description
Truth Table TT 9 5I/2O
See Chapter 11.4.
1-130
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
System description
Watchdog
Fig. 1-88: Watchdog
See Chapter 10.9.

Counter 1 (2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-89: Counter 1
See Chapter 11.5.

Timestamping
Fig. 1-90: Timestamping
See Chapter 10.10.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-131
System description
Cyclic Send Byte 0 (1, 2/9)
Fig. 1-91: Cyclic Send
See Chapter 6.6.

Cyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3)
Fig. 1-92: Cyclic Receive
See Chapter 7.7.
1-132
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Short instructions for configuring

a reversing starter
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing
starter, with the aid of a practical example. The majority of the parameters
have been appropriately preset at the factory for most applications.
You only need to set a few parameters.
Target groups
Planners
Configurators
Technicians
Electricians
Commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
Basic SIMOCODE pro knowledge (see Chapter 1 "System description")
Basic knowledge of SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
2-1
Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
2.1
Introduction and objective of the example
Introduction
The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-bystep how to commission SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing
starter will be equipped with:
Initially, a local control station - Local Control
Followed by a second control station with PROFIBUS DP.
SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization.
The PC/programming device is connected to the basic unit via PC cable.
Objective of the example
This example is intended to:
1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation with a reversing
starter using
SIMOCODE pro in just a few steps.
2. Help you modify this example for your respective application
3. Help you implement other applications easily.
Fundamental steps
The two fundamental SIMOCODE pro steps are always:
Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main current
switching devices and control and signaling devices)
Implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions (function
blocks), with control and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs
(internal SIMOCODE pro wiring).
Prerequisites
Load feeder/motor is present
PLC/PCS with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
The main circuit of the reversing circuit, including the current measuring
module, has already been wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the
motor must be led through the through-hole openings of the current
measuring module.
PC/programming device is present
SIMOCODE ES software is installed
The basic unit has the factory settings. You can find out how to implement
the basic factory settings in Chapter 14.3.4 "Resetting the factory settings".
SIMOCODE pro
2-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
2.2
Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control

station
Necessary components
The following table lists the components required for this example:
Item
Ordering data
Order number
Basic unit SIMOCODE pro C

(SIMOCODE pro V also possible)
3UF7000-1AU00-0
(3UF7010-1AU00-0)
Current measuring module 0.3 A up to 3 A
3UF7100-1AA00-0
Connecting cable for connecting the basic unit to

the current measuring module, depending on
length
3UF793.-1AA00-0
"SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic" software for

parameterization via the system interface
3ZS1 312-4CC10-0YA5
or
"SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard" software for
parameterization via the system interface
or
"SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium" software for
parameterization via PROFIBUS DP and the system
interface with the graphic editor, includes STEP 7
Object Manager
5
PC cable for connecting the basic unit to a PC/

programming device
3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YA5,
3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YD5,
3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YE5,
3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YA5,
3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YD5,
3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YE5
3UF7940-0AA00-0
Table 2-1: Components required for this example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
2-3
Reversing starter circuitry with SIMOCODE pro

The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the
control circuit:
Control circuit
Main circuit
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
L1/L+
1 3 5
Q1
F11
S0
2 4 6
3 through-hole
openings
A2
Current measuring
module (IM)
System
interface
Connecting cable
S2
S1
IN1
IN2
Basic unit (BU)
A1
1 3 5
1 3 5
- Q2
2 4 6
PE
24 V
System
interface
OUT1
- Q1
IN3
Q1
OUT2
Q2
N/L
2 4 6
U V W
M
3~
Motor, motor rated current e.g. 3 A

CLASS 10
Optional: Thermistor
Fig. 2-1: Wiring of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
2-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit

The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with
a local control station for the commands:
LEFT
OFF
RIGHT.
Displays, messages, etc. have not been taken into account.
Standard reversing starter
Reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro
L1/L+
L1/L+
S1
Necessary interlocks
and connections
F11
S0
A2
S0
Q1
S2
A1
S2
S1
IN1
IN2
IN3
24 V
Q2
Basic unit (BU)
Q2
Q1
OUT1
Q1
N/L
S0: "LEFT" button

S1: "OFF" button
S2: "RIGHT" button
Q2
N/L
Q1
OUT2
Q2
Q1: Contactor clockwise rotation

Q2: Contactor counterclockwise rotation
Fig. 2-2: Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit
The necessary interlocks and connections are carried out in the basic unit
via software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
2-5
2.3
Parameterization
The basics of parameterization

After the external wiring has been carried out (contactor coils connected,
current measuring module integrated in the main circuit), SIMOCODE pro is
then parameterized.
For this you need to know the following points:
Point
Description
Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for
control stations, control functions and motor protection.
Function blocks have names.
Function blocks may have set values, e.g. the type of control function and the
set current for overload protection.
Function blocks are equipped with plugs and sockets. These are clearly
designated.
To achieve the desired functionality, proceed as follows:

Connect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific
sockets (i.e "plug the plugs into the sockets")
If required, set values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current, type of
control function.
The inputs of the function blocks in the basic unit are designated as plugs
and labeled accordingly:
The outputs of the function blocks in the basic unit are designated as sockets
and labeled accordingly:
The plugs and sockets of the device inputs and outputs are not connected as
factory defaults. If you press a button now, the contactors will not be
activated.
Table 2-2: Schematic of the various SIMOCODE pro function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
2-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
General procedure for parameterizing a reversing starter

Parameterization means:
1. Setting values
2. Connecting function blocks
Where this example is concerned, this means:
Select the control function "Reversing Starter". This establishes all the
interlocks and connections for the reversing starter in the basic unit.
Determine the set current Is for motor protection. In this case, the set current
corresponds to the motor rated current, i.e. 3 A.
The "BU Outputs" function block must be connected to the sockets of the
"Protection/Control" function block via the software, i.e:
"BU Output 1" plug to "Contactor Control QE1" socket (right)
"BU Output 2" plug to "Contactor Control QE2" socket (left).
The plugs on the "Protection/Control" function block must be connected via
software to the sockets on the "BU Inputs" function block, i.e.
Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON< to "BU Input 1" socket
Control station plug - Local Control [LC] OFF to "BU Input 2" socket
Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON> to "BU Input 3" socket.
SIMOCODE pro
Select reversing starter
Set Is
Connect
digital inputs
Connect
relay outputs
BU Inputs
BU Outputs
ON<
OFF
ON>
Protection/Control QE1
QE2
Is = 3 A
Control station - Local Control [LC]
Right
Left
Contactor controls
Fig. 2-3: Schematic of a parameterization example
The assignment of the contactor controls QE depends on the parameterized

control function. See Chapter 4.3 "Active control stations, contactor
controls, lamp controls and status information for the control functions".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
2-7
Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC/programming device.
Select the control function "Reversing Starter" as application. When you

select this application, a range of presets will be automatically carried out
that you will have to check later.
In the "Device Configuration" menu item, select SIMOCODE pro C or

SIMOCODE pro V. Deactivate the operator panel if this is not available.
Open the dialog Device Parameters > Motor Protection > Overload/
Unbalance/Stalled Rotor. Set the set current Is1 to 3 A.
Open the dialog Further Function Blocks > Outputs > Basic Unit and check
the following settings:
BU Output 1 > Contactor Control QE1
BU Output 2 > Contactor Control QE2
The relay outputs are connected
to the contactor controls.
Protection/
Control
BU Outputs
QE1
QE2
Note
By choosing a preset application (Step 2), other presets might be made
when assigning the BU outputs to the contactor controls.
6
Open the dialog Device Parameters > Motor Control > Control Stations
and check the following settings:
Local Control [LC] ON<: BU Input 1
Local Control [LC] OFF: BU Input 2
Local Control [LC] ON>: BU Input 3
BU Inputs
Protection/
Control
ON<
OFF
ON>
The control station "Local Control"

is now connected with the binary
inputs of the basic unit.
Check whether the releases for "ON" and "OFF" for operating mode "Local2"
are set.
7
Parameterization is complete. Save the parameter file on your PC/

programming device using Device > Save.
Table 2-3: Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE pro
2-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Transferring parameters to the basic unit and commissioning

After creating the parameter file, you can transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and
commission the reversing starter.
Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Switch on the voltage supply of the basic unit.
Connect the serial interface of the PC/programming device and the system
interface of the basic unit using the PC cable.
Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up
green. SIMOCODE pro can be started up.
Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit via the menu, e.g. using Target
System > Download to Device. Select the RS232 interface with which
SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC via the PC cable.
After transferring the data to the basic unit, you will receive the message
"Download to device successfully accomplished".
Table 2-4: Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning
Notice
Switching between "RIGHT" and "LEFT" is only possible via "OFF" after the
preset, 5-second interlocking time has expired.
Configuration with local control station completed

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a
functional reversing starter with a local control station.
If the wiring and parameterization are correct, the contactors for clockwise
and counterclockwise rotation will be activated when the corresponding
buttons are pushed.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
2-9
2.4
Extending the reversing starter with a control station

via PROFIBUS DP
In this section
In this section you will find out how the previously configured example can
be extended by one control station via PROFIBUS DP. You can switch
between the local control station (local) and PLC/PCS (remote). Thus,
SIMOCODE pro can be controlled locally via the buttons, as well as via
PLC/PCS.
The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in
SIMOCODE pro. Therefore, you only have to set the PROFIBUS DP address
for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized correctly as a DP slave on
the PROFIBUS DP.
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
The motor is switched off
The supply voltage for the basic unit is switched on. The "Device" LED lights
up green
You have connected the basic unit to the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS DP
interface is on the front side (9-pole SUB-D socket)
SIMOCODE pro is integrated with your automation system.
Further information on integrating DP slaves can be found in the automation
system documentation.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address
First, set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit.
The following options are available:
Via the addressing plug
Via SIMOCODE ES.
SIMOCODE pro
2-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
Start SIMOCODE ES.
Open the menu Device > Open Online.
Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.

Confirm with OK.
Open the dialog Device Parameters > Bus Parameters.
Select the DP address.
Save the data in the basic unit with Target System > Download to Device.
The address is set. Confirm the change of address.
Table 2-5: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.

The switches are numbered.
For example, address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position.
If necessary, remove the PC cable from the system interface.
Plug the addressing plug into the system interface.

The "Device" LED lights up yellow.
Briefly press the Test/Reset button. The set address is accepted. The
"Device" LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.
Table 2-6: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
2-11
Additional, internal components of the basic unit

The local control [LC] station is already wired, the external components are
connected and the necessary internal connections have been made.
The following additional internal components, which have already been
connected as factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized, are now
required:
PROFIBUS DP bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands "LEFT", "OFF" and
"RIGHT"
PROFIBUS DP bit 0.5 for switching between the local control station [LC]
and PLC/PCS [DP] (remote)
Bit 0.5 = 0: Local control station [LC] active
Bit 0.5 = 1: PLC/PCS [DP] control station active.
The PLC/PCS [DP] control station and the change-over (plug S1) have
already been connected as factory default with the bits (sockets) of
PROFIBUS DP Cyclic Send Data. The assignment can be found in
SIMOCODE ES under Device Parameters > Motor Control > Control
Stations.
SIMOCODE pro
BU Outputs
Control Stations
BU Inputs
1
LEFT
2
3
OFF
QE1
RIGHT
QE2
LEFT
RIGHT
PROFIBUS DP
Cyclic
Receive
LEFT
Status ON<
OFF
OFF
RIGHT
ON>
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
DP
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.0
Cyclic
Send
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
DP
Bit 0.5
S1
Fig. 2-4: Schematic of basic unit internal components for this example
Not all pre-assigned Cyclic Send Data is shown here.

Assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Further Function
Modules > Outputs > Cyclic Send Data.
Configuration with PLC/PCS [DP] control station is complete
The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a
reversing starter with an additional control station via PROFIBUS DP.
The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled
by setting the corresponding bits.
SIMOCODE pro
2-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor protection
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about motor protection.
Motor protection includes
Overload protection
Thermistor protection.
Motor protection operates alongside motor control "at a higher level in the
background". All motor protection parameters are explained here. They can
be active or not, according to the control function selected.
Target groups
Configurators
Commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
Good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro
The principle of connecting plugs to sockets
Knowledge of electrical drive engineering.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device Parameters > Motor Protection.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3-1
Motor protection
3.1
Introduction
Description
The motor protection functions "Overload Protection", "Unbalance
Protection" "Stalled Rotor Protection" and "Thermistor Protection" are
described in Chapters 3.2 to 3.4.
Schematic
The following schematic diagram shows the "Ext. Protection" function block
("Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled Rotor Protection")
with optional parameter settings and events.
SIMOCODE pro
3-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor protection
Protection/Control
Overload Protection
QE1
Set current Is1
QE2
Tripping
Transformation ratio active 1)
QE3
QE4
QE5
Transformation ratio primary 1)

Transformation ratio secondary 1)
Set current Is2
Current from
current measuring
module
Transformation ratio active 1)
Event/Warning/Fault:
- Overload
Transformation ratio primary 1)
- Overload + phase failure

- Pre-warning overload
Transformation ratio secondary 1)
- Cooling down period active

- Pause time active
Class 5,10, ... 40

Response at pre-warning level
See
Table 3-1
- Time to trip (analog)
Extended parameters:
- Thermal motor model (analog)
Reset (manual, auto)
- Remaining cooling down period

(analog)
Type of load (3-ph., 1-ph.)
- Last trip current (analog)
Pause time
Cooling down period
Response at trip level
See
Table 3-1
Unbalance Protection
Unbalance protection level
See
Table 3-1
- Unbalance
See
Table 3-1
- Stalled rotor
Stalled Rotor Protection
Stalled rotor protection level
Fig. 3-1: "Ext. Protection" function block ("Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and
"Stalled Rotor Protection")
1) Adjustable transformation ratio when using interposing current transformers

with SIMOCODE pro V for basic unit 2 above version *E03*
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3-3
Motor protection
Adjustable responses "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled

Rotor Protection"
Response
At prewarning At trip level

level
level
"Unbalance"
"Stalled Rotor
Protection" level
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
0-25.5 s (0.5 s)
0-25.5 s (0.5 s)
0-25.5 s (0.5 s)
Tripping
Delay
Table 3-1: Responses for "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled Rotor Protection"
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in

Chapter "Important information".
Notice
Deactivate Unbalance Protection in SIMOCODE ES when the load type is
set to single-phase!
SIMOCODE pro
3-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor protection
3.2
Overload protection
Description
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in compliance with
IEC 60947-4-1. The trip class can be set to 8 different settings, ranging from
Class 5 to Class 40. Thus, the tripping time can be adapted precisely to the
power-up behavior of the motor, improving performance. Additionally, the
"Thermal motor model" and time to overload trip are calculated and made
available to the control system. After an overload trip, the remaining cooling
down period is displayed (see Class). The motor current is saved in the case
of an overload trip.
Depending on the control function, the set current Is is separately
parameterizable for one or two speeds (Is1 and Is2).
The motor rated current is usually set with set current I s1. This value can be
found on the type plate of the motor. It is the basis for calculating the
overload trip characteristic curve.
Set current Is2 is only necessary for motors with 2 speeds so that adequate
overload protection for the higher speed is also ensured. Generally, Is2
should be set higher than Is1.
Set current Is1
Range: Depends upon the selected current measuring module or
current/voltage measuring module.
Set current Is1:
0.3 A up to
3A
2.4 A up to
25 A
10 A
100 A
up to
20 A
up to
200 A
63 A
up to
630 A
Transformation ratio - active

When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped
several times through the current measuring module or the current/voltage
measuring module, you can enter the transformation ratio of the interposing
transformer.
Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option.
The parameterized set current thus continues to correspond to the actual
nominal motor current and does not have to be converted.
The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between nominal motor
current [A] and measuring current [A] or any multiple of this ratio.
Note
This parameter is only available when using basic unit 2 above version
*E03*.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3-5
Motor protection
Transformation ratio - primary

Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation Ratio - Active"
checkbox activated.
Range: 0 - 8191,875.
Transformation ratio - secondary
Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation Ratio - Active"
checkbox activated.
Range: 0 - 15.
Set current Is2
Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current/
voltage measuring module.
Set current Is2:
0.3 A up to
3A
2.4 A up to
25 A
10 A
up to
100 A
20 A
up to
200 A
63 A
up to
630 A
Transformation ratio - active

When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped
several times through the current measuring module or the current/voltage
measuring module, you can enter the transformation ratio of the interposing
transformer.
Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option.
The parameterized set current thus continues to correspond to the actual
nominal motor current and does not have to be converted.
The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between nominal motor
current [A] and measuring current [A] or any multiple of this ratio.
Note
This parameter is only available when using basic unit 2 above version
*E03*.
Transformation ratio - primary
Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation Ratio - Active"
checkbox activated.
Range: 0 - 8191,875.
SIMOCODE pro
3-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor protection
Transformation ratio - secondary

Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation Ratio - Active"
checkbox activated.
Range: 0 - 15.
Note
In the case of motors with two speeds, the same or different transformation
ratios can be set for each speed, depending upon whether the same or two
different interposing transformers is/are used for each speed.
Application examples
Example 1:
Rated motor current: 700 A.
A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing
transformer (transformation ratio 820:1), the secondary side is looped once
through a current measuring module (0.3 up to 3 A): Transformation ratio for
ls = 820:1; ls = 700 A
Settings (primary and secondary):
Set current Is1: 700 A
Transformation ratio - primary: 820
Transformation ratio - secondary: 1
Example 2:
Rated motor current: 225 A.
A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing
transformer (transformation ratio 820:1), the secondary side is looped twice
through a current measuring module (0.3 up to 3 A): Transformation ratio for
ls = 820 : 2, l s = 225 A
Settings (primary and secondary):
Set current Is1: 225 A
Transformation ratio - secondary: 2.
Example 3:
The motor cable is looped twice through a current measuring module (0.3
up to 3 A, for a motor with a rated current of 0.25 A): Transformation ratio
for Is = 1: 2; Is = 0.25 A
Settings (primary and secondary)
Set current Is1: 0.25 A
Transformation ratio - secondary: 2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3-7
Motor protection
Class
The class (trip class) indicates the maximum tripping time within which
SIMOCODE pro must trip cold at 7.2 times the set current Is (motor
protection according to IEC 60947). With regard to tripping time precision,
SIMOCODE pro fulfills the extended requirements of tolerance band E
according to IEC/EN 60947-4-1. Please take into account that with start-ups
> "Class 10", the admissible AC3 current of the contactor may have to be
reduced (derating), i.e. a larger contactor selected.
The following figure shows trip classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for 3pole symmetrical loads:
1,15
Fig. 3-2: Trip classes for 3-pole symmetrical loads
SIMOCODE pro
3-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor protection
The following figure shows trip classes 5, 10,15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for 2pole loads:
0,85
Fig. 3-3: Trip classes for 2-pole loads
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3-9
Motor protection
Response to overload
In the case of overload, the SIMOCODE pro response can be additionally
adjusted here.
Further information: See "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter
"Important information" and the "Responses" table in Chapter 3.1
"Introduction".
Notice
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to
"Tripping!"
Cooling down period
The cooling down period is the amount of time that must elapse before an
overload trip can be reset. This is usually five minutes. The thermal memory
(motor model see below) is deleted after the cooling down period elapses.
SIMOCODE pro supply voltage failures during this time extend the specified
time accordingly.
Range:
Cooling down
period:
60 to 6553.5 seconds
Default: 300 s
Thermal motor model (thermal memory)

When the motor rated current (Is) is at 100%, the "Thermal motor model" is
87% (1/1,15 x 100%) in a steady state and 100% at the moment of an
overload trip.
Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor
when tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an
overload trip). After this interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is
deleted and a new cold start is possible. This makes frequent start-ups
possible within a short period of time.
SIMOCODE pro
3-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor protection
The following schematic shows the cooling off response with and without
pause time:
Motor
ON
OFF
t
Thermal memory (motor model)
Without pause time
Trip level
100 %
Overload trip
t
With pause time
100 %
Trip level
No overload trip
t
Pause time
Thermal memory will be deleted after the pause time
elapses
Fig. 3-4: Cooling down response with and without pause time
Notice
Both the motor and the switching devices must be dimensioned specifically
for this load!
Pause time:
0 to 6553.5 seconds
Type of load
You can select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase
load.
For a single-phase type of load, Monitor Earth Fault and Unbalance
Protection must be deactivated.
Phase Failure Monitoring is deactivated automatically.
Type of load:
1-phase, 3-phase
See Table 1-20: Decoupling module requirements for star networks on Page
1-97.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3-11
Motor protection
Pre-alarm delay
The "Delay" parameter (default: 0.5s) determines the amount of time that
the pre-warning level (1.15 x Is) must be constantly exceeded before
SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise there will be no
reaction.
In the case of phase failure or unbalance > 50 %, this pre-warning will
already be issued at approx. 0.85 x Is.
Reset
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the "Overload", "Overload +
Unbalance" and "Thermistor" faults will be acknowledged automatically:
If the cooling down period has expired
If the thermistor value has dropped back down to the specified resetting
value.
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Manual", the faults must be acknowledged
by a reset signal:
"Reset" button on the basic unit
"Reset" button on the operator panel.
Standard functions "Reset"
For this, the "Reset - Input" (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding
sockets, e.g. using reset via bus.
Reset:
Manual, Auto
Warning
The "Auto-Reset" mode must not be used for applications where an
unexpected motor restart may cause personal injury or damage to property.
SIMOCODE pro
3-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor protection
3.3
Description
The extent of phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the
control system. A definable and delayable response can be tripped when an
adjustable limit has been overshot. If phase unbalance is greater than 50%,
a reduction in the tripping time according to the overload characteristic
curve takes place automatically, as the heat development in motors
increases under asymmetrical conditions.
Level
The level of unbalance to which SIMOCODE pro should react when overshot
is set here.
Level:
0 to 100 %
Default: 40 %
Response
Here you can choose the response of SIMOCODE pro in case of phase
unbalance:
See "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important
information" and the "Responses" table in Chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Delay
The unbalance level must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time
before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise there will
be no reaction.
Adjustment range: 0 - 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3-13
Motor protection
3.4
Description
After the motor current exceeds an adjustable stalled rotor level (current
limit), a definable and delayable response can be parameterized in
SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor can quickly be set to trip,
independently of the overload protection.
Stalled Rotor Protection is only active after the parameterized class time has
elapsed (e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds), and prevents unnecessarily high
thermal and mechanical loads, as well as premature aging of the motor.
Level
Upon exceeding the stalled rotor level, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to
the selected response.
Range:
Level:
0 to 1020% of Is
Response
Here you can determine the response when the stalled rotor level is
exceeded:
See "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important
information" and the "Responses" table in Chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Delay
The "Delay" parameter determines the amount of time that the stalled rotor
level must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the
desired response. Otherwise there will be no reaction.
Adjustment range: 0 - 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).
SIMOCODE pro
3-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor protection
3.5
Description
Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the
motor via binary PTC thermistors which can be connected to either basic
unit 1 (BU1) or basic unit 2 (BU2).
Thermistor protection is used for:
Motors with high switching frequencies
Converter operation
Motors with heavy starting
Intermittent and/or braking operation
Restricted air supply
Speeds below the rated speed.
In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or bearings of the
motor.
Schematic and characteristic curve
The resistance of the thermistors increases rapidly (erratically) when the
temperature limit is reached.
QE1
Thermistor
Tripping
QE2
QE3
QE4
T1
Thermistor
input
BU
See
Table 3-2
QE5
Event
- Thermistor trip level
T2
Response to sensor fault
See
Table 3-2
- Thermistor short circuit

- Thermistor open circuit
Fig. 3-5: Thermistor (Thermistor Protection) function block
Response
Overtemperature:
Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response if the temperature exceeds
the trip level.
Notice
For motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "Tripping"!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
3-15
Motor protection
Sensor fault (sensor circuit error):

Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response in the case of a short
circuit or an open circuit in the thermistor sensor cable.
Response
Trip level
Sensor fault
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Table 3-2: "Thermistor Protection, Binary" response
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important

information".
SIMOCODE pro
3-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on:
Control stations which you can select and enable according to need. The
following related topics are explained:
How control stations, operating modes and releases work together,
How control commands, e.g. "ON", "OFF", are switched through to the
control function.
Control functions you can select according to need. The following related
topics are explained:
How control commands, e.g. "ON", "OFF", are switched through from
the control stations to the contactor controls/relay outputs
Which parameters apply depending on the control function chosen.
Target groups
Configurators
PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
Electrical drive engineering
Motor protection.
Device parameter > Motor control.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-1
Motor control
4.1
Control stations
4.1.1
Description
Control stations are places from which control commands can be given to
the motor. The "Control Stations" function block is used for administration,
switching and prioritization of these different control stations.
SIMOCODE pro allows the parallel administration of up to four different
control stations. Dependent on the specified control function, up to 5
different control commands can be transmitted from every control station to
SIMOCODE pro.
Local in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands via pushbuttons.
PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system
(remote).
PC, control commands are issued via an operator control station or via
PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software.
Operator panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator
panel in the switchgear cabinet door.
Examples of control commands:
Motor ON (ON>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
Motor LEFT (ON<), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON>) for a reversing
starter
Motor SLOW (ON>), Motor FAST (ON>>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander
circuit.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to
arbitrary sockets (e.g. binary inputs on the basic unit, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for the control commands to take effect.
Up to 5 different control commands can be sent from each control station.
Up to 5 plugs (plug
ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>) are available on the
function block for each control station. The number of active plugs depends
on the chosen control function. With a direct starter, for example, only the
plugs "ON>" and "OFF" are active.
SIMOCODE pro
4-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Control stations
Control station - local control
In this case, the control devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor
and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The plugs of the "Control
Stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally the
function blocks for the basic units or the digital module inputs BU Inputs,
DM Inputs) for the control commands to take effect.
Notice
The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro
switches off the motor safely e.g. if a wire break occurs in the supply cable.
The precondition is that the control station is active.
Pushbutton
BU Inputs

ON <<
Releases
1
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
ON <
ON
OFF
3
OFF
ON >
ON >>
ON <<
PLC/PCS [DP]
Releases
ON
Fig. 4-1: Control station - local control
Control station - PLC/PCS

This control station is primarily intended for control commands from the
automation system (PLC/PCS) via the Cyclic Receive telegram from
PROFIBUS DP.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to
arbitrary sockets, normally the function blocks for the cyclic PROFIBUS DP
bits (Cyclic Receive) for the control commands to take effect.
ON >>
Cyclic Receive
ON <<
Bit 0.0
PLC
PLC/PCS [DP]
ON <
Releases
ON
OFF
DP
Number: 16
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Bit 1.7
ON <<
PC [DPV1]
Releases
Fig. 4-2: Control station - PLC/PCS
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-3
Motor control
Control station - PC
This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on an
arbitrary PC which, along with the automation system, is used as a second
master on the PROFIBUS DP. The control commands are sent via the
Acyclic Receive telegram from PROFIBUS DPV1.
Note
If the SIMOCODE ES or SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP, its control commands automatically take
effect via the PC [DPV1] control station. In this case connection is not required!
Acyclic Receive
Bit 0.0
PC
ON <<
PC [DPV1]
Releases
ON <
DP
Number: 16
ON
OFF
OFF
ON >
Bit 1.7
ON >>
<>/<<>>
Fig. 4-3: Control station - PC
Op. panel [OP]

R l
Control station - operator panel

This control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the
buttons on the 3UF72 operator panel, which can be mounted in a switchgear
cabinet door, for example. The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block
must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally to the function block for the
buttons of the operator panel - OP buttons) for the control commands to take
effect.
Notice
Since the operator panel only has four buttons for controlling the motor
feeder, one button must be used as a speed switch button for control
functions with two rotational speeds and two directions of rotation.
For this purpose, the button must be assigned to the internal control
command "[OP]<>/ <<>>".
Notice
If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a programming device is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, the control commands
automatically take effect via the operator panel [OP] control station and
must also be enabled here as applicable.
SIMOCODE pro
4-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
OP buttons
Operator
panel
<>/<<>>
Op. panel [OP]
ON <
Releases
ON
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >>
Fig. 4-4: Control station - operator panel
4.1.2
Operating modes and mode selectors
Operating modes
You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There
are four different operating modes you can switch between:
Local 1
Local 2
Local 3
Remote/Automatic: In this operating mode, the communication must be
carried out via PLC.
Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control
station (e.g local and PLC/PCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also
mandatory to operate the control stations selectively. Four operating modes
are provided for this purpose which can be selected via two control signals
(mode selectors). For each individual control station in every operating
mode, it can be stipulated if "ON commands" and/or "OFF commands" are to
be used. The operating modes are so controlled that only one operating
mode is active at any one time.
Example: There are three operating modes in a system:
Operating mode
Description
Key-operated switch
operation,
e.g. Local 1
Only local control entries are admissible!

All other control stations are locked.
Manual operation
e.g. Local 3
Only operator panel control commands and local control

commands can be issued.
Remote operation,
(e.g. Remote/Automatic)
Only PLC/PCS control commands are permitted; locally, only

OFF commands are permitted.
Table 4-1: Operating modes
The key-operated switch must be read in via an input to select these

operating modes. The remote switching operation should be controlled via
the bus. The key-operated switch operation has priority over all other
operating modes.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-5
Motor control
Mode selector
The S1/S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the operating modes
"Local 1", "Local 2", "Local 3" and "Remote/Automatic". The S1 and S2 plugs
must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for this.
The following table shows the operating modes, depending on the signal
status of the S1 and S2 mode selectors:
Operating mode
Input
Local 1
Local 2
Local 3
Remote/
Automatic
S1
S2
Table 4-2: Operating modes depending on S1 and S2
The different operating modes for enabling the control stations can be used
to specify the switch authorizations for the individual control stations
PLC/PCS [DP]
PC [DPV1]
Operator panel (OP)
Only the following are active:

The operating mode set by the plugs S1 and S2 of the "Control Stations"
function block
The releases selected on "Control Stations".
Example for a dynamic operating mode switching in relationship to time:
S1
S2
Key-operated
switch
Local 1
Remote operation Manual operation
Remote
Local 3
Remote operation
Key-operated
switch
Remote
Local 1
Time t
Fig. 4-5: Example - operating mode switching
SIMOCODE pro
4-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
4.1.3
Releases and enabled control command
Releases
Releases for the control commands "ON" and "OFF", which must be
activated, are assigned to each operating mode for each control station. This
means that depending on the operating mode, it can be specified for each
control station whether the motor may only be switched on, off or both on
and off. The corresponding checkbox
is activated in the "Control stations"
dialog in SIMOCODE ES.
Releases and enabled control command schematic
The following schematic shows the "Control Stations" function block and the
operating modes:
Control stations
Mode selector
S1
S2
ON <<
Activation of releases for

control commands "ON" and
"OFF" in SIMOCODE ES
0
1
1
0
Local 1 Local 2 Local 3 Remote
Local control
Releases
station [LC]
ON <
ON
Enabled
OFF
Disabled
OFF
ON >
ON >>
ON <<
PLC/PCS [DP]
ON <
Releases
ON
To the control function

"Protection/Control"
OFF
OFF
ON >
ON <<
ON >>
Enabled
ON <
OFF
ON <<
Control
command
PC [DPV1]
ON <
Releases
ON
ON >
ON >>
OFF
OFF
ON >
ON >>
<>/<<>>
Op. panel
[OP]
ON <
Releases
ON
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >>
Fig. 4-6: Function block "Control Stations"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-7
Motor control
Example:
Enabled commands
The following diagram shows an example of enabled commands for the
"Local 2" operating mode, "Dahlander reversing starter" control function:
Control commands "ON" (ON<<, ON<, ON>, ON>>)"

enabled
Control command "OFF" enabled
To the control function

"Protection/Control"
Fig. 4-7: Example for enabled commands
In the example, the motor can only be switched on and off in the "Local 2"
operating mode via the buttons (local) connected to the inputs of the basic
unit and the digital module.
SIMOCODE pro
4-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
4.1.4
Control station settings
Control stations
LC
ON<<
ON<
Description
Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets
,
but usually device inputs).
The "OFF" plug is 0-active on the control station [LC].
OFF
ON>
ON>>
PLC/PCS [DP]
ON<<
Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal

(arbitrary sockets
,
but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DP)
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
PC [DPV1]
ON<<
Activates the control stations via an arbitrary signal

(arbitrary sockets
,
but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DPV1)
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
Operator panel [OP]
<>/<<>>
Activates the control stations via an arbitrary signal

(arbitrary sockets
,
but usually operator panel buttons)
ON<
OFF
ON>
ON>>
Mode selector
S1
S1
For switching between the 4 operating modes Local 1,

Local 2, Local 3 and remote with arbitrary signals
(arbitrary sockets
, e.g. device inputs, control bits
from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table 4-3: Control station settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-9
Motor control
4.2
Control functions
4.2.1
Description
Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for
controlling load feeders.
They have the following important features:
Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off process
Monitoring the ON/OFF status
Tripping if a fault occurs.
For monitoring these statuses, SIMOCODE pro uses the auxiliary control
input "Feedback ON", which is usually derived directly from the current flow
in the main circuit via the current measuring modules.
All necessary interlocks and connections for the corresponding applications
are already implemented in the control functions.
Control functions contain:
Plugs
for
control commands (ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually
connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Auxiliary control inputs (plug
), e.g. Feedback ON
Sockets
for
Contactor controls QE1 to QE5.
Displays (lamp controls) QL, QLS.
Statuses, e.g. "Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>".
Faults, e.g. "Fault - Feedback (FB) ON",
"Fault - Antivalence".
Settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON/OFF, etc.
A logic component with all necessary interlockings and connections for the
control function.
Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is
active "at a higher level in the background". Motor protection and thermistor
protection are independent functions that switch off the motor when
activated via the control functions. Detailed description: See Chapter 3
"Motor protection".
SIMOCODE pro
4-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Control function schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of the control
function ("Protection/Control", "Extended Control" and "Extended Protection"
function blocks):
Plugs of the control commands are usually
connected with the "Enabled control
command" sockets.
Control commands
Control stations
Contactor controls
ON <<
ON <<
Protection/Control
QE1
ON <
ON <
Control function
QE2
OFF
OFF
ON >
ON >
QE4
ON >>
ON >>
QE5
QE3
(Motor protection **)
Enabled
Displays (lamp
control)
Settings:
Control
command
Aux. control inputs *)
FB ON
FC
FO
*) Abbreviations
FB ON
Feedback ON
QLE <<
(ON <<)
Control commands
Auxiliary control inputs QLE < (ON <)
QLA
(OFF)
QLE >
(ON >)
QLE >>
(ON >>)
QLS
TC
TO
ON <<
Feedback CLOSED
FO
Feedback OPEN
TC
Torque CLOSED
ON >
TO
Torque OPEN
ON >>
Fig. 4-8:
Status information,
e.g. PROFIBUS DP
ON <
FC
**) See also Chapter 3 "Motor

protection"
(Fault)
OFF
Pos. opening
Pos. closing
General representation of the control function ("Protection/Control" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-11
Motor control
General representation of the control function ("Extended Control" function block)
Extended Control
Status - Start active

Status - interlocking time active
Settings:
FB CLOSED
Timings
Operating mode
Star-delta
FB OPEN
TQ CLOSED
TQ OPEN
Fault - Execution ON command
Fault - Execution STOP command
Fault - FB ON
Fault - FB OFF
Status - Change-over pause active
Trip - Stalled positioner
Trip - Double 0
Trip - Double 1
Trip - End position
Trip - Antivalence
Fig. 4-9:
General representation of the control function ("Extended Control" function block)
Contactor controls:
The QE contactor controls are switched dependent on the incoming control
commands and taking the specified control function into consideration
including all corresponding interlocks, feedbacks, corresponding parameters
and the higher-level motor protection. In general, the QE contactor controls
are directly connected to the outputs of the basic unit or the digital modules
and switch the connected contactors using relays. The number of usable QE
contactor controls is directly dependent on the specified control function.
Lamp controls and status information:
The feeder status feedback is signaled via the status information or the QL
lamp controls. They are all directly dependent on the status of the auxiliary
control input "FB ON". The number of usable lamp controls and status
information is directly dependent on the specified control function.
Feeder status feedback:
Status information, e.g. "Status ON<": These are transmitted, for example, via
PROFIBUS DP to the automation system and signal the status of the feeder
there.
Displays (lamp control) "Display - QLE<": These can, for example, activate a
signal lamp or a pushbutton lamp for status display.
Note
If the motor is running in test operation, the QLE.../QLA lamp outputs show
a different response (e.g. flashing).
SIMOCODE pro
4-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
In addition to the status signals, the "QL..." lamp controls additionally

indicate the following:
Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
Saving change-over command (QLE lamp outputs are flickering)
Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.
Additional status information:
Start active: If "Motor" is selected as the load type, this signal is present
during the start process of the motor for the duration of the specified
class time (e.g. 10 s for Class 10). Exceptions are the "Overload relay"
and "Solenoid valve" control functions.
Interlocking time active: For control functions with a change in the
direction of rotation, the signal remains present until the specified
interlocking time has elapsed.
Change-over pause active: For the "Dahlander", "Pole-changing starter"
and "Star-delta" control functions the signal is present until the specified
time has elapsed.
Additional status information for the "Positioner" or "Solenoid valve" control
function:
Feedback CLOSED (FC)
Feedback OPEN (FO)
Torque CLOSED (TC)
Torque OPEN (TO).
These feedback signals specify the present status of the corresponding limit
switch and/or torque switch. The amount of usable status information is
directly dependent on the selected control function.
Additional fault messages for the "Positioner" or "Solenoid valve" control
function:
Stalled positioner: The torque switch has been activated before the
corresponding limit switch. The positioner may have stalled.
Double 0: Both torque switches have been activated
Double 1: Both limit switches have been activated
End position: Positioner has left the end position without receiving a
control command
Antivalence: The change-over contacts of the limit switch do not issue
an antivalent signal (only for the "Positioner 5" control function)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-13
Motor control
Extent and application

Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control
functions:
SIMOCODE
Control function
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Overload relay
Direct starter
Reversing starter
Circuit breaker
Star-delta starter
Star-delta reversing starter
Dahlander
Dahlander reversing Starter
Pole-changing starter
Solenoid valve
Positioner 1 to Positioner 5
Soft starter
Table 4-4: Control functions
SIMOCODE pro
4-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
4.2.2
General settings and definitions
Application selection
Selection of the control functions to be carried out by SIMOCODE pro:
Fig. 4-10:
Application selection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-15
Motor control
Parameter
Parameter
Description
ON <<, ON <, OFF, Are usually connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets
ON >, ON >>
of the "Control Station" function block. From there, the control
commands come from the different control stations. The number of
active inputs depends on the control function chosen. For example,
with a direct starter, only the inputs "ON >" and "OFF" are active.
Default: Connected
FB ON
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary

socket
, usually with "Status - Motor current flowing" socket) as
factory default. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not
required for signaling. Depending on the control function chosen,
this state is signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the
"Status - ON <<, - ON <, - ON >, - ON >>" signals. "No current
flowing" means: the motor is switched off. An auxiliary contact
from the contactor is not required for signaling. This state is
signaled by the QLA display and the "Status - OFF" signal.
Default: Status - Motor current flowing
FC, FO, TC, TO
Auxiliary control inputs for the "Positioner" and "Solenoid valve"

control function that are normally connected with the inputs of the
basic unit or the digital module are used to query the present
status of the torque switch and the limit switches that are wired to
the inputs.
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated:
The control command on the corresponding plug of the control
stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >,ON >>" is saved. It can only be
revoked by an "OFF" control command from the corresponding
control station. The auxiliary contact for locking the
contactor is no longer necessary. Motor feeders are usually
operated in locking mode. Locking is preset.
Activated:
Depending on the control function chosen, the non-maintained
command mode affects the plugs of all control stations "ON <,
ON <<, ON >, ON >>". A control command is only effective as
long as there is a "high signal".
Saving change-over Deactivated:

Change-over commands for switching from one direction of
command
rotation/rotational speed to the other are only implemented with
a previous "OFF" and after the interlocking time/change-over
pause has elapsed. This setting is usually used and is preset.
Activated:
Change-over commands for switching from one direction of
rotation/rotational speed to the other are implemented without a
previous "OFF" and after the interlocking time/change-over pause
has elapsed.
If the selected direction/speed cannot be executed immediately
due to a parameterized interlocking time/change-over pause, the
selection is signalized by flickering QLE displays. Your selection
can be cancelled at any time with "OFF".
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions
SIMOCODE pro
4-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Parameter
Description
Safety/PROFIsafe - Deactivated:
separate function
Safety-oriented tripping via the DM-F module also affects the
from control
SIMOCODE pro control function, so that the contactor control is
function
always tripped, too.
This setting is selected for applications where safety-oriented
tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Activated:
Safety-oriented tripping via the DM-F module does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function, so that the contactor control is
not tripped.
tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Load type
You can choose between:

Motor
Resistive load (e.g. heating):
Because generally no overcurrent flows in a resistive load during
switching on, the "Start active" status is not signaled. In this
case, the start-up override does not occur for the "Signaling",
"Warning" and "Tripping" functions.
Feedback time
SIMOCODE pro monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via
FB ON.
If the status of FB ON changes without a corresponding switching
command, "Fault - Feedback (FB)" switches off the feeder.
Default: 0.5 s.
The feedback time can be used to suppress such "feedback faults"
for a defined period of time, e.g. in the case of network
switches.When the motor is switched off,
SIMOCODE pro continuously checks if FB ON = 0. If the current
flows longer than the set feedback time without the "ON" control
command being issued, a fault message "Trip - Feedback (FB) ON"
is issued. The contactor controls can only be connected after the
fault has been rectified.
When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE pro continuously
controls if FB ON = 1. If no current flows for longer than the set
feedback time without the "OFF" control command being issued, a
fault message "Trip - Feedback (FB) OFF" is issued. The contactor
controls are deactivated.
Execution time
SIMOCODE pro monitors switching on/switching off. Switching on/

switching off must be completed within this time period.
Default: 1.0 s.
After the "ON" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must be
able to detect current in the main circuit within the execution time.
Otherwise, the fault message "Trip - Execution ON command" will
be issued. SIMOCODE pro deactivates the contactor controls.
After the "OFF" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must
not be able to detect any current in the main circuit after the
execution time has elapsed. Otherwise, the fault message "Trip Execution STOP command" will be issued. The contactor controls
can only be connected after the fault has been rectified.
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-17
Motor control
Parameter
Interlocking time
Description
SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters,
both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
interlocking time.
Default: 0 s.
Change-over pause In the "Dahlander" and "Pole-changing starter" control functions,

switching from FAST to SLOW can be delayed by the time
configured.
In the "Star-delta starter" control function, the change-over pause
time extends the time between switching off the star contactor and
switching on the delta contactor by the time configured.
Default: 0.00 s.
Max. star time
For the "Star-delta starter" or the "Star-delta reversing starter"

control function:
Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Max. star time: 0 - 255 s (default: 20 s)
Current measuring For the "Star-delta starter" or the "Star-delta reversing starter"
module installed
control function:
The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching
depend on the mounting place of the current measuring module.
Delta: Set current Is is reduced to In x 1/ 3
In supply cable: Set current
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
4-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
QE
Switch ON
ON
Tripping
OFF
OFF
0
Voltage failure,
e.g. pulsating current
FB ON
1
OFF
0
ET
FT
ET
FT
ET: Execution time

FT: Feedback time
Fig. 4-11: Execution time (ET) and feedback time (FT) in relation to FB ON
Faults
The contactor controls are deactivated.
The following is also issued:
A flashing signal on the QLS lamp control
A flashing signal on the "GEN. FAULT" LED
The "Status - General fault" signal
The corresponding signaling bit of the fault.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-19
Motor control
4.2.3
"Overload relay" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like a solid-state
overload relay. Control commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the
load. Control stations and inputs of the control function (e.g. ON >, OFF), do
not have any function in the case of overload relays.
When applying the control voltage, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes the
QE3 contactor control; it remains active until it is deactivated by the fault
message of a protection or monitoring system.
The QE3 contactor control must be connected to an arbitrary relay output
that switches off the contactor coil of the motor contactor in case of
overload.
Schematic
Protection/Control
Contactor controls
QE3
Overload relay
Motor protection
Load type
Displays
Auxiliary control inputs
FB ON*
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
QLS
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
Fig. 4-12: Schematic of the "Overload relay" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in:
Chapter 4.2.2 "General settings and definitions".
Overload relay
Description
FB ON
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary

socket
, usually with "Status - Motor current flowing" socket) as
factory default.
Load type

Motor
Resistive load (see Chapter 4.2.2 "General settings and
definitions")
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional fault
messages are avoided.
Activated:
SIMOCODE pro control function.
Table 4-6: Overload relay settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Note
In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset after an
overload trip (=0).
This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.
Note
Monitoring of the number of starts is not possible for this control function.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-21
Motor control
4.2.4
"Direct starter" control function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function.
Control commands
Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.
Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from arbitrary

control stations (see also the description of "control stations"). Thus, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably
to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated.
Schematic
Control commands
Protection/Control
Contactor controls
QE1
Direct starter
Motor protection
OFF
ON >
FB ON*
ON
Non-maintained
command mode
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Displays (lamps)
Load type
QLA
Feedback time
QLE>
(OFF)
(ON)
Execution time
QLS
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON>
*Feedback ON
Fig. 4-13: Schematic of the "Direct starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
4-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Settings
Direct starter
Description
OFF
OFF control command

(connection with arbitrary socket
,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON >
ON control command
,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON >" socket)
FB ON
Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON"

,
usually with "Status - Motor current flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Load type

Motor
definitions")
Feedback time
Range 0 - 25.5 seconds (0.5 s)
Execution time
Table 4-7: Direct starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-23
Motor control
4.2.5
"Reversing starter" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of
rotation of the motor (forwards and backwards).
Control commands
Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise, i.e.
forwards)
Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control (counter-clockwise, i.e.
backwards)
Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 and QE2 internal contactor controls.

Every fault message causes the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to be
deactivated.
Switching the direction of rotation
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal
"Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" has expired (motor switched off) AND
after the interlocking time has elapsed:
Via the OFF control command.
Directly, when the "Saving change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed
via the interlocking time.
SIMOCODE pro
4-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Schematic
Control commands
Protection/Control
Reversing starter
ON <
OFF
ON >
Motor protection
QE1
QE2
RIGHT
LEFT
Non-maintained
command mode
Change-over
command Saving
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Contactor controls
Displays
QLE<
(ON <)
QLA
QLE>
Load type
(OFF)
(ON >)
FB ON*
Feedback time
Execution time
Interlocking time
QLS
(Fault)
Status
ON <
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON
Interlocking time
Extended control
active
Fig. 4-14: Schematic of the "Reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-25
Motor control
Settings
Reversing starter
Description
ON <
ON < control command, counter-clockwise

,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON <" socket)
OFF
OFF control command

,
ON >
ON > control command, clockwise

,
FB ON

,
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Saving change-over Deactivated

command
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Load type

Motor
definitions")
Feedback time
Execution time
Interlocking time
Range 0 - 255 seconds (0 s)
Table 4-8: Reversing starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
4.2.6
"Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can mainly switch circuit breakers (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) ON and
OFF with this control function. The circuit breakers are connected to
PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro.
Control commands
Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control for a pulse of 400 ms.
Stop with "OFF" activates the QE3 contactor control for a pulse of 400 ms.
With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for a pulse of 400 ms
when the circuit breaker is tripped (alarm switch = ON).
The pulse of a control command is always fully executed before the "counter
pulse" is set.
Making internal assignments
You have to make the following assignments:
1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the
"ON Connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
2) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the
"OFF Connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
3) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input which is connected to the auxiliary switch
(AS) of the circuit breaker to the auxiliary control input "Feedback ON".
4) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input which is connected to the alarm switch (AS)
of the circuit breaker to the input (socket) of the "External fault 1" standard
function.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-27
Motor control
Schematic
Control commands
Protection/Control
QE1
400 ms
ON
Motor protection
Non-maintained
command mode
QE3
400 ms
OFF
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Displays
Circuit breaker
OFF
ON >

FB ON*
Auxiliary switch (AS)
Contactor controls
Load type
QLA
Feedback time
QLE>
(OFF)
(ON)
Execution time
QLS
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON
Fig. 4-15: Schematic of the "circuit breaker" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
4-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Settings
Circuit breaker
Description
OFF
OFF control command

,
ON >
ON control command
,
FB ON

(Connection always with socket
, (input), which the auxiliary
switch of the circuit breaker is connected to).
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Load type

Motor
definitions")
Feedback time
A repeated ON pulse is only output by the QE1 contactor control

once the set feedback time has elapsed. Therefore, the feedback
time should be greater than the motor stop time of the motor drive
of the circuit breaker. Range 0 - 25.5 seconds (0.5 s)
Execution time
Table 4-9: Circuit breaker settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-29
Motor control
4.2.7
"Star-delta starter" control function
Description
Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid
overloading the network. In this control function, SIMOCODE pro initially
starts the motor with a star-switched stator winding and then switches it to
delta.
Control commands
Start with "ON" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and
then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor)
Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.

to the "Enabled control command" sockets. Every fault message causes the
QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.
Switching from star to delta
For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:
Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the following thresholds:
- Transformer installed in delta circuit: I < 150 % I s
- Transformer installed in supply line: I < 90 % Is
Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Maximum star time" when
the current in the star operation does not sink below this threshold.
Safety guidelines
Notice
It is recommended to wire the QE contactor controls to the relay outputs of
the basic unit.
Notice
If you use internal earth-fault detection for star-delta circuits, this can lead to
false trippings. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero
due to harmonics.
SIMOCODE pro
4-30
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Notice
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a
current which is 1/ 3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter
control function.
Example: In = 100 A
Is = In x 1/ 3
Is = 100 A x 1/ 3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Is = 57.7 A
Change-over pause
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the change-over
pause.
Reason: For motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated
current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta
starting current if the change-over pause is too short. The motor EMF
decreases if the pause is longer.
Schematic
Control commands
Protection/Control
Contactor controls
QE1
Star-delta starter
OFF
ON >
Motor protection
Non-maintained
command mode
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
QE2
QE3
Star contactor
Delta contactor
Network contactor
Displays
Load type
QLA
Feedback time
QLE>
(OFF)
(ON)
Execution time
FB ON*
Change-over pause
Max.
star time
Transformer
mounted
QLS
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON >
Change-over pause
*Feedback ON
Extended control
active
Fig. 4-16: Schematic of the "Direct starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-31
Motor control
Settings
Star-delta starter
Description
OFF
OFF control command

,
ON >
ON control command
,
FB ON

,
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Load type

Motor
definitions")
Feedback time
Execution time
Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 - 655.3 seconds (10 ms increments) (0.00 s)

Max.
star time

Current measuring The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching
module installed 1) depend on the mounting place of the current measuring module.
In delta: Set current Is is reduced to In x 1/3 (default)
In supply cable: Set current Is = In (rated current of the motor)
Table 4-10: Star-delta starter settings
1)Notice
If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be
connected to the supply cable!
SIMOCODE pro
4-32
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
4.2.8
"Star delta reversing starter" control function
Description
With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of
rotation in star-delta operation.
Control commands
Clockwise rotation: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE1 contactor
control (star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor
control (network contactor, clockwise rotation)
Counter-clockwise rotation: Start with "ON <" first activates the QE1
contactor control (star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE4
contactor control (network contactor, counter-clockwise rotation)
Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls.

Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls
to be deactivated.
Switching from star to delta
For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:
Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the following thresholds:
- Transformer installed in delta circuit: I < 150 % I s
- Transformer installed in supply line: I < 90 % Is
Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Maximum star time" when
the current in the star operation does not sink below this threshold.
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal
"Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" has expired (motor switched off) AND
after the interlocking time has elapsed:
time.
Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
"interlocking time".
Start-up is always in star mode.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-33
Motor control
Safety guidelines
Note
It is recommended to wire the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to the relay
outputs of the basic unit. You need at least 1 digital module for this control
function.
Notice
If you use internal earth-fault detection for star-delta circuits, this can lead to
false trippings. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero
due to harmonics.
Notice
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a
current which is 1/ 3 smaller than normal must be set for the star-delta
starter control function.
Example: In = 100 A
Is = In x 1/ 3
Is = 100 A x 1/ 3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Is = 57.7 A
Change-over pause
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the change-over
pause.
Reason: For motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated
current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta
starting current if the change-over pause is too short. The motor EMF
decreases if the pause is longer.
SIMOCODE pro
4-34
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Schematic
Control commands
ON <
OFF
ON >
Protection/Control
Star-delta
reversing starter
Motor protection
Non-maintained
command mode
Change-over
command Saving
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
FB ON*
Load type
Feedback time
Contactor controls
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
Displays
QLE<
QLA
QLE>
QLS
Execution time
Interlocking time
Change-over pause
Max.
star time
*Feedback ON
Transformer
mounted
Extended control
Star contactor
Delta contactor
RIGHT - Network contactor
LEFT - Network contactor
(ON <)
(OFF)
(ON >)
(Fault)
Status
ON <
OFF
ON >
Change-over pause
active
Interlocking time
active
Fig. 4-17: Schematic of the "Star-delta reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control"
function block
Settings
Star-delta
reversing starter
Description
OFF
OFF control command

,
ON >
ON> control command

,
ON <
ON< control command

,
FB ON

,
Table 4-11: Star-delta reversing starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-35
Motor control
Star-delta
reversing starter
Non-maintained
command mode
Description
Deactivated
Activated

command
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Load type

Motor
definitions")
Feedback time
Execution time
Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 - 655.3 seconds (10 ms increments) (0 s)

Interlocking time
Max. star time

Current measuring The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching
module installed 1) depend on the mounting place of the current transformer/current
measuring module.
In delta: Set current Is is reduced to In x 1/ 3
In supply cable: Set current Is = In (rated current of the motor)
Table 4-11: Star-delta reversing starter settings (Cont.)
1) Notice
If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be
connected to the supply cable!
SIMOCODE pro
4-36
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
4.2.9
"Dahlander" control function
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator
winding at two speeds (FAST and SLOW). SIMOCODE pro wires the stator
winding via the contactors so that there is a high pole number at low speed
and a low pole number at high speed.
Control commands
SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE2 contactor control (SLOW).
FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star
contactor, FAST) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control
(network contactor, FAST)
Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.
Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be
deactivated.
Switching the speed
The speed can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired
(motor is switched off) AND when changing from "FAST" => "SLOW" after
the change-over pause has elapsed:
Directly when "Saving change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the "FAST" speed from being
switched on at the same time as the contactor for the "SLOW" speed.
Change-over pause
The "Change-over pause" parameter can be used to delay switching from
"FAST" to "SLOW" to give the motor enough time to run down.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-37
Motor control
Notice
Two set currents must be set for this control function:
Is1 for the slow speed
Is2 for the fast speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can in many cases be directly
measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you
will need two external current converters according to the corresponding
speed (e.g. 3UF18 with a 1 A secondary transformer rated current), whose
secondary cables must lead through the current measuring module with the
range 0.3 - 3 A. The set current Is1 or I s2 must be converted according to
the secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information,
see Chapter 3.2 "Overload protection".
Schematic
Control commands
Protection/Control
Contactor controls
QE1
Dahlander
Motor protection
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Non-maintained
command mode
Change-over
command Saving
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Load type
FB ON*
QE2
QE3
SLOW
Star contactor FAST
Displays
QLA
QLE>
QLE>>
Feedback time
FAST
QLS
Execution time
(OFF)
(ON >)
(ON >>)
(Fault)
Status
Change-over pause
OFF
ON >
ON >>
*Feedback ON
Change-over pause
Extended control
active
Fig. 4-18: Schematic of the "Dahlander" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
4-38
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Settings
Dahlander
Description
OFF
OFF control command

,
ON >
ON control command > (SLOW)

,
ON >>
ON >> control command (FAST)

,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON >>" socket)
FB ON

,
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated

command
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Load type

Motor
definitions")
Feedback time
Execution time

Table 4-12: Dahlander settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-39
Motor control
4.2.10
"Dahlander reversing starter" control function
Description
This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a
motor at both speeds.
Control commands
RIGHT - SLOW: Start with "ON >" activates the QE2 contactor control (RIGHTSLOW)
RIGHT - FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates the QE3 contactor control
(star contactor FAST) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor
control (RIGHT-FAST)
LEFT - SLOW: Start with "ON <" activates the QE4 contactor control
(LEFT-SLOW)
LEFT - FAST: Start with "ON <<" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star
contactor FAST) and then immediately activates the QE5 contactor control
(LEFT-FAST)
Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.

It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault message causes the contactor control to be deactivated.
The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status
- ON <" signal has expired (motor is switched off) AND the interlocking time
has elapsed:
via the "interlocking time".
Switching the speed
SIMOCODE pro
4-40
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Change-over pause
Safety guidelines
Note
You need at least one digital module for this control function. This control
function cannot be implemented with bistable relay outputs.
Notice
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-41
Motor control
Schematic
Control commands
Protection/Control
ON <<
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Dahlander
reversing starter
Motor protection
Non-maintained
command mode
Change-over
command Saving
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Load type
FB ON*
Feedback time
Execution time
Contactor controls
QE1
QE2
QE3
RIGHT - SLOW
Star contactor FAST
QE4
LEFT - SLOW
QE5
LEFT - FAST
Displays
QLE<<
QLE<
QLA
QLE>
Interlocking time
Change-over pause
RIGHT - FAST
QLE>>
QLS
(ON <<)
(ON <)
(OFF)
(ON >)
(ON >>)
(Fault)
Status
ON <<
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
*Feedback ON
Change-over pause
Extended control
active
Interlocking time
active
Fig. 4-19: Schematic of the "Dahlander reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control"
function block
SIMOCODE pro
4-42
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Settings
Dahlander
reversing starter
Description
ON <<
ON << control command (LEFT, FAST)

,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON <<" socket)
ON <
ON < control command (LEFT, SLOW)

,
OFF
OFF control command

,
ON >
ON > control command (RIGHT, SLOW)

,
ON >>
ON >> control command (RIGHT, SLOW)

,
FB ON

,
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated

Activated
command
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Load type

Motor
definitions")
Feedback time
Execution time
Interlocking time

Table 4-13: Control function settings for Dahlander reversing starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-43
Motor control
4.2.11
"Pole changing starter" control function
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator
windings at two speeds (FAST and SLOW).
Control commands
SLOW: Start with "ON >" activates the QE2 contactor control (SLOW).
FAST: Start with "ON >>" activates the QE1 contactor control (FAST).

Switching the speed
Change-over pause
Notice
SIMOCODE pro
4-44
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Schematic
Control commands
Protection/Control
Contactor controls
QE1
Motor protection
OFF
ON >
Non-maintained
command mode
ON >>
Change-over
command Saving
Separate failsafe
function from
control function

FB ON*
Load type
Feedback time
Execution time
QE2
FAST
SLOW
Displays
QLA
QLE>
QLE>>
QLS
(OFF)
(ON >)
(ON >>)
(Fault)
Status
Change-over pause
OFF
ON >
ON >>
*Feedback ON
Change-over pause
Extended control
active
Fig. 4-20: Schematic of the "Pole-changing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function
block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-45
Motor control
Settings
Chapter 4.2.2 "General settings and definitions"
Pole-changing
starter
Description
OFF
OFF control command

,
ON >
ON control command > (SLOW)

,
ON >>
ON >> control command (FAST)

,
FB ON

,
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated

command
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Load type

Motor
definitions")
Feedback time
Execution time

Table 4-14: Pole-changing starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-46
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
4.2.12
"Pole-changing reversing starter" control function
Description
This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a
motor at both speeds.
Control commands
RIGHT - SLOW: Start with ON > activates the QE2 contactor control
(RIGHT-SLOW)
RIGHT - FAST: Start with ON >> activates the QE1 contactor control
(RIGHT-FAST)
LEFT - SLOW: Start with ON < activates the QE4 contactor control
(LEFT-SLOW)
LEFT - FAST: Start with ON << activates the QE5 contactor control
(LEFT-FAST)
Stop with OFF deactivates the contactor controls.

control stations. Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command"
sockets.
has elapsed:
time.
Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
"interlocking time".
Switching the speed
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-47
Motor control
Change-over pause
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for "FAST" and "SLOW" from being
switched on simultaneously. The "Change-over pause" can be used to delay
switching from "FAST" to "SLOW" to give the motor enough time to run
down.
Safety guidelines
Note
At least one additional digital module is required for this control function.
Notice
SIMOCODE pro
4-48
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Schematic
Control commands
ON <<
Protection/Control
ON >
Pole-changing
reversing starter
Motor protection
Non-maintained
command mode
ON >>
Change-over
command Saving
ON <
OFF
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Load type
FB ON*
Contactor controls
QE1
QE2
RIGHT - SLOW
QE4
LEFT - SLOW
QE5
LEFT - FAST
Displays
QLE<<
QLE<
Feedback time
QLA
Execution time
QLE>
Interlocking time
RIGHT - FAST
QLE>>
Change-over pause
QLS
(ON <<)
(ON <)
(OFF)
(ON >)
(ON >>)
(Fault)
Status
ON <<
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
*Feedback ON
Change-over pause active

Extended control
Fig. 4-21: Schematic of the "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function,

"Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-49
Motor control
Settings
Pole-changing
reversing starter
Description
ON <<
ON << control command (LEFT, FAST)

,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON <<" socket)
ON <
ON < control command (LEFT, SLOW)

,
OFF
OFF control command

,
ON >
ON > control command (RIGHT, SLOW)

,
ON >>
ON >> control command (RIGHT, SLOW)

,
FB ON

,
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated

Activated
command
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Load type

Motor
definitions")
Feedback time
Execution time
Interlocking time

Table 4-15: Settings for pole-changing reversing starters
SIMOCODE pro
4-50
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
4.2.13
"Solenoid valve" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate a solenoid valve.
The solenoid valve is brought into the corresponding end position using the
control commands "OPEN" and "CLOSE". SIMOCODE pro must be informed
via corresponding limit switches (OPEN, CLOSED) when the end position
has been reached.
Control commands
OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control.
CLOSE: Start with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 contactor control.

Every fault message causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated
and puts the solenoid valve into the "CLOSED" position.
Safety guidelines
Notice
The motor protection functions are not active. A current measuring module
is not necessary.
Notice
If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the
solenoid valve is immediately switched OFF via the fault message "Trip Double 1" (= "CLOSED")
If the end position feedback is different to the control command, the
solenoid valve is immediately switched OFF via the fault message "Trip - End
position" (= "CLOSED")
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-51
Motor control
Schematic
Control commands
Protection/Control
Contactor controls
QE1
Solenoid valve
OFF
ON >
OPEN
Non-maintained
command mode
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Execution time
Displays
QLA
QLE>
Auxiliary control inputs*

FB ON
QLS
FC
(CLOSE)
(OPEN)
(Fault)
Status
FO
* Abbreviations
OFF
FC
Feedback CLOSED
FO
Feedback OPEN
ON >
Extended control
FC
FO
Fig. 4-22: Schematic of the "Solenoid valve" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
4-52
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Settings
Solenoid valve
Description
OFF
OFF control command (CLOSE)

,
ON >
ON control command (OPEN)

,
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Execution time
Time required to reach end position.

Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (default: 1.0 s)
Table 4-16: Solenoid valve control function settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-53
Motor control
4.2.14
"Positioner" control function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can control positioners/actuators with this control function.
The positioner is moved into the corresponding end position with the
"OPEN" and "CLOSE" control commands and is deactivated via its limit
switches (1-active) or torque switches (0-active).
The response of the limit/torque switches must be passed to
SIMOCODE pro via its inputs.
Control commands
OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control until "End
position OPEN" is reached (Feedback OPEN)
CLOSE: Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control until "End
position CLOSED" is reached (Feedback CLOSED)
The drive remains in the present position.

Function schematic
TO
Torque switch
TC
Motor shaft with springs
at the beginning and end
OPEN
CLOSED
FO
FC
Limit switch
Positioner
Gear
OPEN
CLOSED
Fig. 4-23: Function schematic of the torque and limit switches when controlling positioners
Switching the direction of travel

The direction of travel can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has
expired (motor is switched off) AND the interlocking time has elapsed:
time. Switching from one direction of travel to the other can be delayed
via the "interlocking time".
SIMOCODE pro
4-54
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Notice
The corresponding torque switch must not respond before the associated
limit switch when the torque switch TO (OPEN) and/or TC (CLOSED) is
connected. In this case, the positioner is switched off immediately with the
fault message "Trip - Blocked positioner".
If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the
positioner is immediately switched off via the fault message
"Trip - Double 1".
If both torque switches respond at the same time (TO=0 and TC=0), the
positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message "Trip - Double
0".
If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command,
the positioner is switched off with the fault message "Trip - End position
fault".
Schematic
Control commands
Protection/Control
Positioner
ON <
OFF
ON >
Motor protection
* Abbreviations
FB ON
FC
FB ON
Feedback ON
FC
Feedback CLOSED
FO
Feedback OPEN
TC
Torque CLOSED
TO
Torque OPEN
QE1
QE2
OPEN
CLOSED
Non-maintained
command mode
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Load type
Auxiliary control inputs*
Contactor controls
Feedback time
Displays
QLE<
CLOSED
QLA
QLE>
Stop
OPEN
Execution time
Interlocking time
QLS
Status
ON <
FO
TC
OFF
TO
ON >
(Fault)
CLOSED
STOP
OPEN
Positioner closes
Positioner opens
Extended control
FC
FO
TC
TO
Fig. 4-24: Schematic of the "Positioner" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-55
Motor control
Types of positioner control

The following table shows the five types of positioner control:
Type
Tripping
CLOSED
OPEN
TC
FC
FO
TO
Torque
Limit
Limit
Torque OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
Positioner 1
After reaching the end position FO
(OPEN) or FC (CLOSED).
Positioner 2
(OPEN) or FC (CLOSED) AND
response of the associated torque
switch TO (OPEN) or TC (CLOSED)
Positioner 3
(OPEN). After reaching the end
position 'CLOSED', the respective
torque switch TC must also respond
after the limit switch FC has
responded.
Positioner 4
After reaching the end position FC
(CLOSED). After reaching the end
position FO (OPEN), the respective
torque switch TO must also
respond after the limit switch FO
has responded.
Positioner 5
After reaching the end position or the
torque. The actuator is monitored by
either the limit switches or by the
torque switches. The switches are
implemented as change-over
contacts and are checked for
antivalence. In the case of nonantivalent feedback (e.g. FC=0 and
TC=0), SIMOCODE pro recognizes a
wire break and deactivates the
positioner with the fault message
"Trip - Antivalence"
Antivalent active
Antivalent active
Table 4-17: Types of positioner control
Notice
The signals of the torque switches and the limit switches must be wired to
the inputs of the basic unit. Torque switches must be 0-active, whereas the
limit switches must be 1-active.
SIMOCODE pro
4-56
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Settings
Positioner
Description
ON <
ON < control command (CLOSED)

,
OFF
Control command STOP

,
ON >
Control command ON > (OPEN)

,
FB ON

,
FC
Auxiliary control input "Feedback CLOSED"

,
usually with the socket of an input to which the limit switch is
connected)
FO
Auxiliary control input "Feedback OPEN"

,
usually with the socket of an input to which the limit switch is
connected)
TC
Auxiliary control input "Torque CLOSED"

,
usually with the socket of an input to which the torque switch is
connected)
TO
Auxiliary control input "Torque OPEN"

,
usually with the socket of an input to which the torque switch is
connected)
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Load type

Motor
definitions")
Table 4-18: Positioner control function settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-57
Motor control
Positioner
Description
Feedback time
Execution time
Time until the end position is reached.

Interlocking time
Table 4-18: Positioner control function settings (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
4-58
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
4.2.15
"Soft starter" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft
starter. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected via SIMOCODE pro to
the PROFIBUS DP.
Control commands
Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 contactor controls
Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the signal
"Feedback ON" has expired, the QE1 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later
in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter.
With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the
soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.

1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output which controls the coil
of the network contactor.
2) Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output from which the
"ON input" of the soft starter should be controlled.
3) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that supplies the 20 ms
acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.
4) Assign the "ON >" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control
commands.
5) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft
starter is connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External
fault 1".
6) The "Start-up end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the
inputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Notice
In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the "Execution time"
parameter in SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the smooth running
down time of the soft starter.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-59
Motor control
Schematic
Control commands
Protection/Control
Contactor controls
QE1
Soft starter
OFF
ON >
Motor protection
Non-maintained
command mode
QE3
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
QE4
Load type
QLA
Feedback time
FB ON*
Network contactor
20 ms
ON
Displays
QLE>
(OFF)
(ON >)
Execution time
QLS
(Fault)
Status
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON
Fig. 4-25: Schematic of "Soft starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Settings
Soft starter
Description
OFF
OFF control command

,
ON >
ON control command
,
FB ON

,
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:
Table 4-19: Soft Starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-60
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control
Soft starter
Description
Load type

Motor
definitions")
Feedback time
Execution time
At least > smooth running down time.

Table 4-19: Soft Starter settings (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-61
Motor control
4.2.16
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter
including an additional reversing contactor. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are
connected via SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP. With this control
function, SIMOCODE pro can also control the direction of rotation of the
motor (forwards and backwards).
Control commands
Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 contactor controls (clockwise,
i.e. forwards)
Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 and QE4 contactor controls (counterclockwise, i.e. backwards)
Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the
"Feedback ON" signal is no longer issued, the QE1 / QE2 contactor control is
deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft
starter.
With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the
soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.

has elapsed:
via the interlocking time.
SIMOCODE pro
4-62
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Motor control

of the network contactor (right).
of the network contactor (left).
3) Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output from which the
"ON input" of the soft starter should be controlled.
4) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that supplies the 20 ms
acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.
5) Assign the "ON >", "ON <" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled
control commands.
6) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft
starter is connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External
fault 1".
7) The "Start-up end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the
inputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Note
An additional digital module may be necessary for this control function.
Schematic
Control commands
ON <
OFF
ON >
Protection/Control
Soft starter with
reversing contactor
Motor protection
Non-maintained
command mode
Change-over
command Saving
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Feedback
FB ON*
Load type
Contactor controls
QE1
QE2
LEFT
QE3
20 ms
QE4
ON
Displays
QLE<
(ON <)
QLA
QLE>
Feedback time
QLS
Execution time
Status
ON <
Interlocking time
RIGHT
(OFF)
(ON >)
(Fault)
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON
Interlocking time
Extended control
active
Fig. 4-26: Schematic of the "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function, "Protection/
Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
4-63
Motor control
Settings
Soft starter with
reversing
contactor
Description
ON <
ON < control command, counter-clockwise

,
OFF
OFF control command

,
ON >
ON > control command, clockwise

,
FB ON

,
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated
Activated
Separate failsafe
function from
control function
Deactivated:
Activated:

Activated
command
Load type

Motor
definitions")
Feedback time
Execution time
Execution time > Smooth running down time

Interlocking time
Table 4-20: Soft starter with reversing contactor settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-64
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
-
Reversing starter 1),2)
Circuit breaker 1),2)
Star-delta
starter 2)
Solenoid valve 2)
Positioner 1 2)
Positioner 2 2)
Positioner 3 2)
Positioner 4 2)
Positioner 5 2)
Soft starter 2)
Soft starter
with reversing contactor 2)
Left
slow
Left
slow
LEFT
LEFT
ON<
2) Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V
LEFT
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
1) Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C
Left
fast
Left
fast
Pole-changing
reversing starter 2)
Pole-changing starter 2)
Dahlander
Dahlander 2)
Direct starter 1),2)
Star-delta reversing
starter2)
ON<<
OFF
OFF
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
CLOSED
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON>
Right
ON
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
Right
slow
Slow
Right
slow
Slow
Right
ON
ON
Right
Control station
Right
fast
Fast
Right
fast
Fast
ON>>
-
LEFT
QE2
OFF
pulse
Active
QE3
QE4
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
Right
slow
Slow
Right
slow
Slow
Right
Left
Network Network
contactor contactor
ON
Network
contactor
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
Right
fast
Fast
Right
fast
Fast
Reset
Reset
Fast
star
contactor
Fast
star
contactor
ON
command
ON
command
Left
slow
Left
slow
Star
Delta
Right
Left
contactor contactor Network Network
contactor contactor
Star
Delta
Network
contactor contactor contactor
ON
pulse
Right
ON
QE1
Contactor control
Left
fast
Left
fast
QE5
Left
fast
Left
fast
ON<<
QLA
(OFF)
QLE>
(ON>)
Lamp control
LEFT
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
Left
slow
Left
slow
LEFT
LEFT
ON<
OFF
OFF
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
CLOSED
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Right
ON
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
Right
slow
Slow
Right
slow
Slow
Right
ON
ON
Right
ON
ON>
Status information
QLE<
(ON<)
Right
fast
Fast
Right
fast
Fast
ON>>
QLE>>
(ON>>)
4.3
Overload 1),2)
Specification/
Control function
QLE<<
(ON<<)
Motor control
Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp

controls and status information for the control
functions
Table 4-21: Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for
control functions
4-65
Motor control
SIMOCODE pro
4-66
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the monitoring functions
Voltage monitoring
Cos phi monitoring
Active power monitoring
0/4 A - 20 mA monitoring
Operation monitoring
Temperature monitoring (analog)
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
As is the case with motor protection and motor control, the monitoring
functions work "in the background". All monitoring function parameters are
explained.
Target groups
Configurators
Programmers
Commissioners
Service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
SIMOCODE pro
Motor protection, motor control
Device parameters > Monitoring functions.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5-1
5.1
5.1.1
Description
SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase currents. By
evaluating the summation current of the three current values, the motor
feeder can be monitored for a possible fault current or earth fault.
Internal earth-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current/
voltage measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase
connection in networks that are either grounded directly or with low
impedance.
Internal earth-fault-monitoring can be activated by means of
parameterization. It covers two different operating conditions.
The normal operating condition up to 2 x Is. The effective operating current
must be smaller than twice the set current Is. Fault currents of > 30% of the
set current Is will be detected.
Start-up or overload operation from 2 x Is. The effective operating current is
more than twice the set current Is. Fault currents of > 15% of the effective
motor current will be detected.
Note
If you use internal earth-fault monitoring for star-delta circuits, false tripping
may occur. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to
harmonics.
External earth-fault monitoring via a summation current transformer and
an earth-fault module is normally used for networks that are grounded with
high impedance.
Rated fault currents of 0.3 A/ 0.5 A/ 1 A can be evaluated with the 3UL22
summation current transformer. The response delay of the summation
current transformer is 300 ms - 500 ms. This response delay can be further
delayed by parameterizing SIMOCODE pro accordingly.
A definable and delayable response can be parameterized when an earth
fault is detected.
An event is generated if the earth-fault limit is exceeded. You can set
additional trippings via parameterization.
If the rated fault currents are exceeded, SIMOCODE pro V reacts by either:
Turning off the contactor controls QE, or
By issuing a warning,
depending upon the configuration you have set.
SIMOCODE pro
5-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.1.2
Internal earth-fault monitoring
Response
Here you can set the SIMOCODE pro response to an internal earth fault:
information".
Current from
Current measuring
module or
Current/voltage
measuring module
Internal earth fault
External earth fault
Tripping
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Response/delay
See Table 5-1
Event "Internal
earth fault"
Event "Warning
external earth fault"
Fig. 5-1: "Earth-fault Monitoring" function block
Response
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay

X
X
X
X
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-1: "Internal earth-fault monitoring" response
Activity
Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether
the motor is running or not (operating state "ON").
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03
5-3
5.1.3
External earth-fault monitoring (with summation current transformer)
Response
Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro to an external earth fault:
information".
Current from
Summation current
transformer/
Earth-fault module
Tripping
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Event "External
earth fault"
Response/delay
See Table 5-2
Event "Warning
external earth fault"
Fig. 5-2: "Earth-fault Monitoring" function block
Response
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay

X
X
X
0 - 25.5 s (0.5) 1)
Table 5-2: "External earth-fault monitoring" response
1) Further delay of the summation current transformer delay
If the response is set to "Signaling" the "External earth fault" event will be
generated in the case of an earth fault.
If the response is set to "Warning", the "Warning external earth fault" event
will be generated in the case of an earth fault.
Activity
SIMOCODE pro
5-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.2
5.2.1
Description
Current limit monitoring is used for process monitoring, independent of
overload protection.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for
freely-selectable upper and lower current limits. The response of
SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level has been reached can be
freely parameterized and delayed.
Motor current measurement is carried out via current measuring modules or
current/voltage measuring modules.
Current limits
Tripping
Trip level: I> 1)

Response when I>
Current I_max from
Current measuring
(Current or
module or
Current/voltage
measuring module)
See
Table 5-3
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Event
- Trip level I>
Delay when I>

Warning level: I>
Response when I>
See
Table 5-4
Event
- Warning level I>
Delay when I>
Trip level: I< 2)

Response when I<
See
Table 5-5
Event
- Trip level I<
See
Table 5-6
Event
- Warning level I<
Delay when I<

Warning level: I<
Response when I<
Delay when I<
Hysteresis
1) Upper limit
2) Lower limit
Fig. 5-3: "Current Limits" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03
5-5
5.2.2
I> (upper limit)
Trip level, warning level

When monitoring current limits I> (upper limit), two different response levels
I> (upper limit) trip level, I> (upper limit) warning level can be parameterized
and monitored.
If the current of one or more phases exceeds the response level, current limit
monitoring responds.
Trip level:
0 to 1020% of Is in 4% increments
Warning level:
Trip level and warning level activity

The trip level/warning level is only effective when the motor is running, the
start-up procedure has been completed and there is no test position
feedback (TPF) (run+).
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is
overshot.
information".
Response
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
Trip level
X
X
X
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-3: "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I>
Response at warning level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning
level is overshot:
information".
Response
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
Warning level
X
X
X
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-4: "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I>
Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I> (upper limit):
Hysteresis
0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments

Default: 5 %
SIMOCODE pro
5-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.2.3
I< (lower limit)

When monitoring current limits I< (lower limit), two different response
levels (trip level/warning level) can be parameterized and monitored. If the
current of the phases (I_max) drops below the response level, current limit
monitoring responds.
Trip level:
Warning level:

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is
undershot:
information".
Response
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
Trip level
X
X
X
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-5: "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I<

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level is
undershot:
information".
Response
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
Warning level
X
X
X
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-6: "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I<
Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I< (lower limit):
Hysteresis
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03
0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments

Default: 5 %
5-7
5.3
Voltage monitoring
Description
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a
three-phase network or a one-phase network for freely selectable limits.
The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning level or trip level
can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage is measured by current/voltage measuring modules. This is based
on the minimal voltage of all voltages Umin.
Note
Please note that only phase voltage is available with SIMOCODE pro V basic
units up to version *E06*. If required, the line-to-line voltage can be
calculated from the phase voltage using the logic module "Calculator 1/2" as
follows: Line-to-line voltage = phase voltage * 1.73.
From version *E07* onwards, either phase voltage or line-to-line voltage can
be used.
Voltage monitoring
Tripping
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Trip level: U<

Trip level activity
Voltage Umin
via
Current/voltage
measuring module
See
Table 5-7
Event
- Trip level U<

Trip delay
Warning level: U<

Warning level activity
See
Table 5-8
Event
- Warning level U<

Warning delay
Hysteresis 1)
1) Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

Fig. 5-4: "Voltage Monitoring" function block
Furthermore, even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can
determine and signal the further availability of the feeder by measuring the
voltage directly at the circuit breaker or at the fuses in the main circuit.
SIMOCODE pro
5-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level).
If the voltage of one or more phases falls below the response level or
warning level, voltage monitoring responds.
Trip level:
0 - 2040 V in 8 V increments
Warning level:
0 - 2040 V in 8 V increments

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning
level is to take effect:
Always (on) 1)
Always, except TPF (on+)
If motor is running, except TPF (run)
Trip level/warning level always takes effect,

regardless of whether the motor is running or at
a standstill
regardless of whether the motor is running or at
a standstill.
Exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test
position
Trip level/warning level only takes effect if the
motor is ON and not in the test position
1) When using basic unit 2 (from version *E03*) with a current/voltage

measuring module
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is
undershot:
information".
Response
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
Trip level
X
X
X
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-7: "Trip level" response for voltage monitoring
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03
5-9

undershot:
information".
Response
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
Warning level
X
X
X
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-8: "Warning level" response for voltage monitoring
Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

Here you can set the hysteresis for voltage, cos phi and power.
0 to 15% of the threshold value

in 1% increments (5%)
SIMOCODE pro
5-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.4
Cos phi monitoring
Description
Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main
field of application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase
networks with loads that fluctuate significantly. The power factor fluctuates
more than either the motor current or the active power does, particularly in
the low-end performance area of a motor. Therefore, power factor
monitoring is particularly suitable for distinguishing between non-load
operation and faults, e.g. a broken drive belt or drive shaft. If the set trip
level or warning level is undershot, a signal is generated or the motor is
switched off, depending upon the setting.
Cos phi monitoring
Tripping
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Trip level
Cos phi from
Current/voltage
measuring module
Response
See
Table 5-9
Event
- Trip level cos phi <
See
Table 5-10
Event
- Warning level cos phi <
Delay
Warning level
Response
Delay
Hysteresis 1)
1)

(see "Voltage Monitoring" function block)
Fig. 5-5: "Cos Phi Monitoring" function block

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level)
for cos phi monitoring.
Trip level:
0 - 100 %
Warning level:
0 - 100 %
0 % = cos phi = 0.00

50 % = cos phi = 0.50
100 % = cos phi = 1.00
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03
5-11

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set trip level is
undershot:
information".
Response
Trip level
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-9: "Trip level" response for cos phi monitoring

undershot:
information".
Response
Warning level
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-10: "Warning level" response for cos phi monitoring
SIMOCODE pro
5-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.5
Description
SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via
the active power. For example, by monitoring the active power of a pump
motor, conclusions can be drawn from the active power level about the flow
rate or fluid fill levels. The active power curve of a motor is a precise
reflection of its actual load across the entire range. Excess load results in
increased wear of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature motor failure.
Insufficient active power can, for example, be a sign of non-load motor
operation.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the active power for
freely-selectable upper and lower current limits. The response of
SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level has been reached can be
freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage is measured by current/voltage measuring modules.
Power monitoring
Tripping
Trip level: P>
1)
Response when P>
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
See
Table 5-11
Event
- Trip level P>
See
Table 5-12
Event
- Warning level P>
Delay when P>
Active power from

Current/voltage
measuring module
Warning level: P>

Response when P>
Delay when P>
Trip level: P< 2)
Response when P<
See
Table 5-11
Event
- Trip level P<
Delay when P<

Warning level: P<
Response when P<
See
Table 5-12
Event
- Warning level P<
Delay when P<

Hysteresis 3)
1) Upper limit
2) Lower limit
3) Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power
(see "Voltage Monitoring" function block)
Fig. 5-6: "Power Monitoring" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03
5-13

With active power monitoring, you can parameterize two different response
levels (trip level/warning level) for the upper and lower limit.
Trip level
P> (upper limit)
P< (lower limit)
0.000 - 4294967.295 kW
Warning level
P> (upper limit)
P< (lower limit)
0.000 - 4294967.295 kW

Response when trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)
either undershot or overshot:
information".
Response
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
Trip level
X
X
X
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-11: "Trip level" response for active power monitoring
Response when warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set warning
level is either undershot or overshot:
information".
Response
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
Warning level
X
X
X
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-12: "Warning level" response for active power monitoring
SIMOCODE pro
5-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.6
0/4-20 mA monitoring
Description
With the aid of an analog module, SIMOCODE pro is capable of measuring
and monitoring further process variables as desired.
For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a pump against dry
operation, or a differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the
degree of pollution in a filter. If the fill level undershoots a specified level,
the pump can be switched off and, if a specific differential pressure value is
exceeded, the filter must be cleaned.
Monitor 0/4-20 mA
Trip level 0/4-20 mA >
Tripping
Trip level activity

Trip delay
See
Table 5-13
Marking trip level
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Event
- Trip level
0/4-20 mA >
Warning level 0/4-20 mA >

Warning delay
Analog input 1 of the
analog module
(AM Input 1)
See
Table 5-14
Event
- Warning level
0/4-20 mA >
Marking warning level

Trip level 0/4-20 mA <
Trip level activity
Trip delay
Marking trip level
See
Table 5-13
Event
- Trip level
0/4-20 mA <
Warning level 0/4-20 mA <

Warning delay
Marking warning level
See
Table 5-14
Event
- Warning level
0/4-20 mA <
Hysteresis
Fig. 5-7: "Monitoring 0/4-20 mA" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03
5-15
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a

transducer (standard 0/4 - 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed
to the "0/4-20 mA" function block via the analog module.
With 0/4-20 mA monitoring, you can parameterize two different response
levels (trip level/warning level) for the upper and lower limit.
Trip level
0/4-20> (upper limit)
0/4-20< (lower limit)
0.0 - 23.6 mA 8 (0.0 mA)
Warning level
0/4-20> (upper limit)
0/4-20< (lower limit)
0.0 - 23.6 mA (0.0 mA)

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning
level is to take effect:
Always (on)

regardless of whether the motor is running or
at a standstill
Always, except TPF (on+)

regardless of whether the motor is running or
at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e.
motor feeder is in the test position.
If motor is running, except TPF (run)
Trip level/warning level only takes effect if the

motor is ON and not in the test position
If motor is running, except TPF,

with start-up override (run+)
The trip level/warning level only takes effect if

the motor is running and the start-up
procedure has been completed, and there is
no test position feedback (TPF)
Response when trip level 0/4-20 mA> (upper limit),

0/4-20 mA< (lower limit)
either undershot or overshot:
information".
Response
Trip level
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-13: "Trip level" response for 0/4-20 mA monitoring
SIMOCODE pro
5-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Response when warning level 0/4-20 mA> (upper limit), 0/4-20 mA< (lower limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set warning
level is either undershot or overshot:
information".
Response
Warning level
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 5-14: "Warning level" response for 0/4-20 mA monitoring
Marking
The marking is stored in the device and allocated and displayed in the Faults/
Warnings online dialog. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g. "0/
4-20>". Range: Up to 10 characters.
Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA
Here you can set the fluctuation range for the analog signal:
Hysteresis for the analog signal
0 to 15% in 1% increments (5 %)
Note
Monitoring of a second process variable via input 2 of the analog module
can be done, for example, by free limit monitors.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03
5-17
5.7
5.7.1
Description
To avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors caused by excessive run or
stop times, SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times
of a motor and limit the number of motor starts in a defined time frame.
If an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal or warning can be
generated that indicates maintenance or replacement of the motor in
question is required.
After replacing the motor, the operating hours and motor stop times can be
reset.
To avoid excessive thermal strain and premature aging of a motor, the
number of motor starts in a selectable time frame can be limited. The
number of starts still possible is available for further processing in
SIMOCODE pro.
A low number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.
Note
Operating hours, motor stop times and the number of motor starts can be
monitored completely in the device and/or transmitted to the automation
system via PROFIBUS.
Tripping
Operating hours
Operating hours level
See
Table 5-15
Response
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Event
- Operating hours >
Motor stop time

Motor stop time level
Control
functions
Response
See
Table 5-15
Number of starts
Event - Motor stop time >
Permissible starts
Permissible starts
Time range for starts
Response at overshoot
See
Table 5-15
Event
- Number of starts >
Response at pre-warning
See
Table 5-15
- Just one start possible
Interlocking time
- No start possible
Fig. 5-8: "Operation Monitoring" function block
SIMOCODE pro
5-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Response
Response
Motor operating Motor stop time Number of

hours
monitoring level starts monitoring level
overshoot
Number of
starts pre-warning
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Table 5-15: "Operation monitoring" response
5.7.2
Operating hours monitoring

The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the operating hours
(service life) of a motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts
can be generated in good time as applicable.
Level
If the operating hours exceed the set response level, the monitoring
function responds.
Level:
0 to 1193046 hours (0 h)
Activity
Response
You can set the response for overshoot here.
information" and Table 5-15.
5.7.3
Motor stop time monitoring

System parts for important processes often have dual drives (A and B
drives). Ensure that these are always operated alternately. This prevents
long motor stop times and reduces the risk of non-availability. The motor
stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to generate an
alarm, thus initiating connection of the motor.
Level
The length of the permissible motor stop time is stipulated here; if
exceeded, the monitoring function responds.
Level:
0 to 65535 hours (0 h)
Activity
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03
5-19
Response
Here you can determine the response for when the permissible motor stop
time is exceeded:
5.7.4
Monitoring the number of starts

Monitoring the number of starts can protect system parts (motors and
switching devices such as soft starters and converters) from too many start
processes within a parameterizable time frame and, thus, prevent damage.
This is particularly useful for commissioning or manual control.
The following schematic illustrates the principle of monitoring the number of
starts.
1. Start within the time frame
Example:
3 starts allowed
Time frame
Pre-warning
Overshot
Fig. 5-9: Monitoring the number of starts
Permissible starts
The maximum number of starts is set here. The time interval "Time range
for starts" commences to run after the first start. After the second to last
permissible start has been executed, the "Just one start possible" prewarning is generated.
Permissible starts:
1 to 255
Time range for starts

The time range for permissible start processes is set here. The maximum
number of starts is only available again after the parameterized time range
for starts has elapsed. The number of available starts is shown by the analog
value "Permissible starts - Actual value".
Time range for starts:
00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss
Activity
Response at overshoot
Here you can set the response for when the number of starts within the
time range for starts has been overshot:
SIMOCODE pro
5-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Response at pre-warning
Here you can set the response required after the second to last start:
Interlocking time
If a new start command is issued within the time range for starts after the
last permissible start, this new start command will no longer be executed if
the setting "Response at overshoot - Tripping" has been set. "Trip - No. of
starts >" will be displayed and the set interlocking time activated.
Interlocking time:
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03
00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss
5-21
5.8
Schematic and characteristic curve

Temperature monitoring of, for example, motor windings, motor bearings,
coolant and gearbox temperature, can be carried out via up to three analog
temperature sensors such as NTC, KTY 83/84, PT100, PT1000.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring for overtemperature:
Separate levels can be set for the warning temperature and the switch-off
temperature.
Temperature monitoring is based upon the highest temperature in all sensor
measuring circuits of the temperature module.
Temperature monitoring
QE1
Tripping
Trip level
QE2
QE3

(Marking)
Max. temperature of all
sensor measuring circuits
of the temperature module
QE4
See
Table
"Response"
QE5
Event
- Temperature module
Trip level T>
Warning level
- Temperature module
Warning level T>
See
Table
"Response"
(Marking)
Hysteresis
Fig. 5-10: "Temperature Monitoring" function block
Settings
Temperature
Description
Trip level T>
- 273 C - 65262 C
Response at trip
level T >
Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the

following table and Chapter "Important information")
Marking trip level T >
No parameters. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g.

"Temperature>". Range: Up to 10 characters.
Warning level T >
- 273 C - 65262 C
Response warning
level T >
Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the

following table and Chapter "Important information")
Marking warning
level T >
No parameters. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g.

"Temperature>"; Range: Up to 10 characters.
Hysteresis
0 - 255 C in 1 C increments
Default: 5 C
Table 5-16: "Temperature monitoring" settings
SIMOCODE pro
5-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

The trip level/warning level always takes effect, independent of whether the
motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
Response
information".
Overtemperature: Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond
when the temperature has overshot the warning level/trip level.
Response
Warning level T>
Trip level T>
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Table 5-17: "Overtemperature" response
Notice
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "Tripping"!
Note
The sensor type, the number of measuring circuits in use and the response
to a sensor fault must be set in the "Temperature Module Inputs (TM
Inputs)" function block if temperature monitoring is being used.
Note
To monitor several sensor measuring circuits individually and independently,
a suitable number of free limit monitors can be linked to the "Temperature
Module Inputs (TM Inputs)" function block and differing limits set for the
individual temperature sensors, instead of the "Temperature Monitoring"
function block.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03
5-23
5.9
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
Description
Function for monitoring the interval between the connection and the
tripping of the enabling circuit (actuator tripping). The monitoring time starts
anew, every time the enabling circuit closes. This function supports you in
complying with test intervals that require verification.
In the enabling circuit of the DM-F Local and the DM-F PROFIsafe, relay
contacts carry out safety-oriented tripping. Whether the relay contacts of
the enabling circuit really open or not, can only be established via a change
in the switching state of the contacts.
The "Monitoring interval for mandatory testing" function supports the
system operator in the monitoring of the time that has elapsed since the
last connection of the enabling circuit.
When the adjustable limit has been reached, the set reaction follows
(deactivated, signaling, warning; see response). This is logged in the event
memory.
This monitoring function is an organizational measure that supports the
system operator in detecting faults by carrying out regular tests, see
information in the operating instructions on regularly testing the function of
a safety device. The monitoring function itself need not be safety-oriented.
Note:
The function "Time until test" is not safety-oriented.
Monitoring interval
for mandatory testing
Response
Time until test
Interval for mandatory testing
Test required
Fig. 5-11: "Monitoring Interval for Mandatory Testing" function block
Response
You can set the response here.
information".
Response
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Table 5-18: "Safe tripping" response
Test interval
Adjustable limit value for interval for mandatory testing:
Test interval:
0 to 255 weeks
SIMOCODE pro
5-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
5.10
Hysteresis for monitoring functions

The following diagram illustrates the function of the hysteresis for
monitoring functions:
0HDVXUHG
YDOXH
+\VWHUHVLV
7ULSOHYHO!
:DUQLQJOHYHO!
+\VWHUHVLV
+\VWHUHVLV
:DUQLQJOHYHO
7ULSOHYHO
+\VWHUHVLV
7LPH
6LJQDOLQJ
7ULSOHYHO!

7LPH
6LJQDOLQJ
:DUQLQJOHYHO!

7LPH
6LJQDOLQJ
:DUQLQJOHYHO

7LPH
6LJQDOLQJ
7ULSOHYHO

7LPH
7KHK\VWHUHVHVDUHDOZD\VEDVHGRQWKHUHVSHFWLYHO\VHWUHVSRQVHOHYHO
H[FHSWLRQWHPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJ
7KHWULSDQGZDUQLQJOHYHOHYHQWVFDQDOVREHGHOD\HGLQGLYLGXDOO\
Fig. 5-12: The hysteresis operating principle for monitoring functions
TL = Trip level (tripping)

WL = Warning level (warning)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050- 22 DS 03
5-25
SIMOCODE pro
5-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Outputs
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the outputs of
SIMOCODE pro:
Relay outputs on the basic unit and the digital modules
Operator panel LEDs
Send Data on the PROFIBUS DP.
Target groups
Programmers.
Necessary knowledge
PROFIBUS DP.
Further Function Blocks > Outputs.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6-1
Outputs
6.1
Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has various outputs. These are represented by different
function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. They are the outgoing SIMOCODE pro
interfaces. Within SIMOCODE pro, the outputs are represented as plugs on
the corresponding function blocks and can be assigned to any functions or
events via connections.
Outputs can be:
Output terminals
on the exterior of the basic unit, digital modules and the
analog module
LED on the operator panel for visualizing the operating state or different
statuses
Outputs to PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the various
output types:
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs
Output
Output terminals
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs
Output
LED operator panel
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs
Output
DP
PROFIBUS DP
Fig. 6-1: General representation of the various output types
SIMOCODE pro
6-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Outputs

Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, status display or
signaling via PROFIBUS DP. The system provides different types of outputs
depending on the device series and the expansion modules in use:
SIMOCODE
Outputs
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Basic unit outputs (BU Outputs)
Operator panel LED (OP LED)
Digital module 1 outputs (DM1 Outputs)
Digital module 2 outputs (DM2 Outputs)
Analog module output (AM Output)
Acyclic Send Data (Acyclic Send)
Cyclic Send Data (Cyclic Send)
Table 6-1: Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6-3
Outputs
6.2
Basic unit outputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Outputs" function block with three relay outputs.
You can switch contactors or lamps via these relay outputs. For this, the
inputs (plugs) of the function block must be connected to the respective
sockets (usually the QE contactor controls of the control function). The "BU
Outputs" function block consists of:
Three plugs corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3
Three relays
Output terminals.
Overall, there is one "BU Outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU Outputs" function block:
SIMOCODE pro
BU Outputs
1
2
Terminal numbers
Out1
2
Out2
6
Out3
7
Output terminals
Fig. 6-2: "BU Outputs" function block
Control of the main contactor in the motor feeder:
You can, e.g., define which relay output is used for controlling the motor
contactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired relay output to
the respective "QE." contactor control of the control function.
Lamp control for displaying operating states:

You can define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the
lamps/LEDs that display the operating states of the motor (Fault, ON,
OFF, Fast, Slow...).
To do this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE..."
contactor control of the control function. The following are specifically
intended for controlling lamps and LEDs:
In addition to the status displays, the "QL..." lamp controls automatically
signal via a 2Hz flash frequency:
Test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)
Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults
etc. to the relay outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Outputs
Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.
In most cases, the outputs of the basic unit will be connected to the QE or
QL outputs. By referring to Table 4-21 on page 4-65 you can determine
which QE outputs are required for which control functions.
Settings
BU Outputs
Outputs 1 to 3
Description
Control of the "BU Outputs" function block via any signal
(any sockets
,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.
usually from the QE contactor controls)
Table 6-2: Basic unit output settings
Defaults depend on the selected application (template): See Chapter E

"Example circuits".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6-5
Outputs
6.3
Operator panel LEDs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "OP LED" function block for controlling the seven
freely-assignable LEDs. The LEDs are in the operator panel and can be used
to display any status. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the "OP LED" function
block must be connected to the respective sockets (e.g. to the sockets for
the status information of the control function).
Note
The "OP LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is
connected and configured in the device configuration!
The "OP LED" function block consists of:
Four plugs, "OP LED Green 1" to "OP LED Green 4", corresponding to the
green LEDs. The green LEDs are optically/constructionally allocated to the
buttons on the operator panel. They normally display feedback concerning the
motor operating state.
Three plugs, "OP LED Yellow 1" to "OP LED Yellow 3", corresponding to the
yellow LEDs.
Four green LEDs
Three yellow LEDs (not for the operator panel with display).
Overall, there is one "OP LED" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Operator panel LEDs
The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel and the
LEDs:
Green 1 Green 2 Green 3 Green 4
TEST/
RESET
DEVICE
BUS
GEN. FAULT
Yellow 1 Yellow 2 Yellow 3

Fig. 6-3: Operator panel LEDs
SIMOCODE pro
6-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Outputs
LEDs of the operator panel with display

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with
display with LEDs:
Green 1
Green 2
Green 3
Green 4
Fig. 6-4: LEDs of the operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro V
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP LED" function block:
OP LED
LED
Green 1
Green 2
Green 3
Green 4
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Yellow 3
Fig. 6-5: Schematic of the "OP LED" function block
Note
The three yellow LEDs mentioned in this section are not available for the
operator panel with display. Status information can be read out here directly
via the display. The corresponding three plugs can also be connected via the
software. Nevertheless, they remain ineffective.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6-7
Outputs
Display of operating states:
You can define which LEDs are to be used for displaying the operating states
(Fault, ON, OFF, Fast, Slow...).
For this, connect the desired LED to the respective "QL." lamp control of the
control function.
In many cases, the LEDs are connected to the QL outputs. By referring to
Table 4-21 on page 4-65 you can determine which QL outputs are required
for which control functions.
Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to
the yellow LEDs.
Settings
OP LED
Green 1 to Green 4
Description
Control of the "OP LED" function block
with any signal
(any sockets
,
e.g. feedback concerning the "Motor" operating state)
Yellow 1 to Yellow 3* Control of the "OP LED" function block

with any signal
(any sockets
e.g. displays for status, events, faults)
Table 6-3: Operator panel LED settings
*) No function when using the operator panel with display

"Example circuits".
SIMOCODE pro
6-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Outputs
6.4
Digital module outputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks,
which are each equipped with two relay outputs. You can switch contactors
or lamps via these relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs of the "DM
Outputs" function blocks) must be connected to the respective sockets (e.g.
of the control function).
Note
"DM Outputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital
modules (DM) are connected and configured in the device configuration!
Each function block has
Two plugs, corresponding to relay outputs Out1, Out2
Two relays
Output terminals.
Overall, there is
one "DM1 Outputs" function block on BU2, and
one "DM2 Outputs" function block on BU2.
Note:
In addition to the two jointly-switched failsafe enabling circuits, the failsafe
DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules are equipped with two
standard relay outputs, the common ground of which is switched off for
safety reasons via an enabling circuit.
For the logical wiring, the standard relay outputs are always switched. The
state of the failsafe enabling circuits is not affected by the logical wiring.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM Outputs" function blocks:
DM1 Outputs
1
2
DM2 Outputs
Out1
Out2
Output terminals
1
2
Out1
Out2
Output terminals
Fig. 6-6: Schematic of the "DM1 Outputs"/"DM2 Outputs" function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6-9
Outputs
Controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder
You can define which relay output is to be used for controlling the main
contactor in the motor feeder.
For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE" contactor
control of the control function.
Controlling lamps for displaying operating states:
You can define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps/
LEDs that display the operating states of the motor (Fault, ON, OFF, Fast,
Slow...).
For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QL..." lamp
control of the control function.
Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to
the relay outputs.
In many cases, the outputs of the digital module will be connected to the
QE outputs. By referring to Table 4-21 on page 4-65 you can determine
which QE outputs are required for which control functions.
Settings
"DM1/DM2
Outputs"
Outputs 1 to 2
Description
Control of the "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks

with any signal
(any sockets
,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.
usually from the QE contactor controls)
Table 6-4: "DM1/DM2 Outputs" settings

"Example circuits".
SIMOCODE pro
6-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Outputs
6.5
Description
You can expand basic unit 2 with an analog output using the analog module.
The corresponding function block allows every analog value (2 byte/1 word)
in SIMOCODE pro to be output as a 0/4 A - 20 mA signal, for example, on a
connected pointer instrument. By activating the function block via the
"Assigned analog output value" plug with any integer value between 0 and
65535, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA will be sent
to the output terminals of the analog module.
Note
The "AM Output" function block can only be used if the analog module (AM)
is connected and configured in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM Output" function block:
AM Output
Assigned
analog output value
Start value of value range

End value of value range
OUT+
OUT-
Output signal
Fig. 6-7: Schematic of the "AM Output" function block
Settings
Signal/value
Range
Assigned analog output value
Any value (1 word/2 bytes) in

SIMOCODE pro
Output signal
0-20 mA or 4-20 mA
0 - 65535
0 - 65535
Table 6-5: "Analog module output" settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6-11
Outputs
Note
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an
analog input circuit, each input will require an additional, isolated external
current source connected in series. If the output of the analog module is not
being used by another application, it can also be used as a current source
for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and the
"End value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to
65535 for this. Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available
via the analog module output.
SIMOCODE pro
6-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Outputs
1) Output of the effective motor current - across the entire motor
current range
The motor current of a motor ranges from 0 to 8 A.
The rated current IN of the motor at nominal load is 2 A.
The parameterized set current Is in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the rated
current IN (2 A). In SIMOCODE pro, representation of the effective phase
currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current
I_max) corresponds to the selected range as a percentage of the
parameterized set current Is:
0 A motor current corresponds to 0 % of Is
8 A motor current corresponds to 400% of Is
The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is
1% (see measured values data record 94)
PRWRUFXUHQW,PD[
>,PD[RI,H@
$
HQWLUHUDQJH
PRWRUFXUUHQWRI,H
,1 ,H $
$,1
W>V@
Fig. 6-8: Application example: Motor current output - entire range
As a result,
The "Start value of value range" to be selected is:
The "End value of value range" to be selected is:
0
400.
AM Output
Assigned
analog output value
Max. current I_max
400
0-20 mA
OUT+
OUT-
Output signal
Fig. 6-9: Application example: Motor current output - output values to function block
AM Output
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:

0 % motor current corresponds to: 0 mA at the analog module output
400% motor current corresponds to: 20 mA at the analog module output.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6-13
Outputs
2) Output of the effective motor current - only part of the motor current
range (overload range)
The motor current of a motor ranges from 0 to 8 A.
The rated current IN of the motor at nominal load is 2 A.
The parameterized set current Is in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the rated
current IN (2 A). However, only the overload range (2 A - 8 A) is to be
displayed on a pointer instrument via the analog module output.
In SIMOCODE pro, representation of the effective phase currents or the
maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) corresponds
to the selected range as a percentage of the parameterized set current I s:
2 A motor current corresponds to 100 % of Is
8 A motor current corresponds to 400% of Is
The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1%
(see measured values data record 94).
PRWRUFXUUHQW,PD[
>,PD[RI,H@
$
3DUWLDOUDQJHRIWKHPRWRUFXUUHQW
2YHUORDGUDQJHRI,H
,1 ,H $
$,1
W>V@
Fig. 6-10: Application example: Motor current output - Overload range
As a result,
The "Start value of value range" to be selected is:
The "End value of value range" to be selected is:
100
400.
AM Output
Assigned
analog output value
Max. current I_max
100
400
0-20 mA
OUT+
OUT-
Output signal
Fig. 6-11: Application example: Motor current output - Output values to function block
AM Output

SIMOCODE pro
6-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Outputs
Note (concerning examples 1 and 2):

In SIMOCODE pro, phase currents are available as a percentage of the set
current Is. When using the analog module output to display the effective
motor current on a connected pointer instrument, the effective motor
current is always indicated as a percentage of the set current. If the
selected control function is for a motor with only one speed, the pointer
instrument can be in percent (% of Is) as well as absolute (e.g. in A).
In the case of motors/control functions with two speeds and, thus, two set
currents (e.g. pole-changing starters or Dahlanders), the motor current is
only shown on the pointer instrument as a percentage of the effective set
current Is1 or Is2, depending upon which of the two speeds (slow or fast) is
prevalent.
3) Output of any analog value from the automation system (cyclically

via PROFIBUS)
One word (2 bytes) can be transmitted cyclically from the automation
system to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS. Any value can be output as a 0/4
to 20 mA signal by directly connecting this cyclic control word from
PROFIBUS to the analog module output. If the transmitted value is in S7
Format (0 to 27648) it must be taken into consideration when
parameterizing:
AM Output
Assigned
analog output value
Cyclic Receive 2/3

(1 word, cycl. from the PLC)
27648
0-20 mA

OUT+
OUT-
Output signal
Fig. 6-12: Output of an analog value from the automation system
As a result,
The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 0
The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 27648.
0:
0 mA at the analog module output
27648: 20 mA at the analog module output.
0:
4 mA at the analog module output
27648: 20 mA at the analog module output.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6-15
Outputs
6.6
Cyclic Send
Description
The "Cyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be
transferred cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.
"Cyclic Send" function blocks consist of:
Eight bits each (two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
Four words (= eight bytes, byte 2 to 9 for four analog values, freely
parameterizable)
One output to PROFIBUS DP each.
Overall there are three "Cyclic Send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/9).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Send" function blocks:
Cyclic Send 0 with eight bits

for binary information
Cyclic Send 1 with eight bits

for binary information
Basic type 1 (for BU 2)

Basic type 2 (for BU1 and BU2)
Byte 0
Bit 0
Cyclic Send 0

Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 2
Bit 3
to PROFIBUS DP
DP
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 7
Cyclic Send 2/9 with four words (eight bytes)

for up to four analog values
DP
to PROFIBUS DP
Cyclic Send 2/3 with one word (two bytes)

for one analog value

Cyclic Send 2/9
Cyclic Send 2/9
Byte 2/3
Byte 2/3
Byte 4/5 to
Byte 6/7 PROFIBUS DP
Cyclic Send 1
DP
to
PROFIBUS DP
DP
Byte 8/9
Fig. 6-13: Schematic of the "Cyclic Send" function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
6-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Outputs
Cyclic services
Cyclic Send Data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between the DP
master and the DP slave. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data to
SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic send data to
the DP master.
Settings
Cyclic Send Data
Description
Byte 0 to 1
Bit 0 to bit 7
Basic types 1*, 2
Control of bits with any signals

(any sockets
e.g. device inputs, Send Data, etc.)
Byte 2/3
Basic types 1*, 2
Control of one word (two bytes) with any analog values

(any sockets
e.g. maximum current I_max, remaining cooling down period,
actual value of timers, etc.)
Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9

Basic type 1*
Control of three words (six bytes) with any analog values

(any sockets
)
Table 6-6: Cyclic Send Data settings
*) For basic unit 2 only

Byte 0 of the Send Data is already preset. Byte 2/3 is preset with the max.
current I_max!
See also Chapter 12.4 "Telegram description and data access".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
6-17
Outputs
6.7
Acyclic Send
Description
In addition to "Cyclic Send" it is also possible to transfer a further 16 bits of
binary information to the PLC/PC via acyclic services.
The "Acyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be
transferred acyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. The
inputs (plugs) of the function blocks must be connected to the respective
sockets.
The "Acyclic Send" function blocks consists of:
Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
One output to PROFIBUS DP each.
Overall, there is one "Acyclic Send" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic Send" function blocks:
Byte 0
Bit 0
Acyclic Send 0
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 2
Bit 3
to PROFIBUS DP
DP
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 7
Acyclic Send 1
to PROFIBUS DP
DP
Fig. 6-14: Schematic of the "Acyclic Send" function blocks
Acyclic services
Acyclic Send Data will only be transferred on request.
The information (two bytes) can be found in data record 203.
This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the
acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.
Settings
Acyclic Send Data

Byte 0 to 1
Bit 0 to bit 7
Description
Control of bits with any signals
(any sockets
, e.g. device inputs, Send Data, status information,
events, etc.)
Table 6-7: Acyclic Send Data settings
SIMOCODE pro
6-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Inputs
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the inputs of SIMOCODE pro.
The inputs are:
Binary inputs on the basic units and digital modules
Operator panel buttons
Analog module inputs
Receive data from PROFIBUS DP.
Target groups
Planners.
Necessary knowledge
The principle of connecting plugs to sockets.
Device parameters > Inputs.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7-1
Inputs
7.1
Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has various inputs. These are represented by the different
function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. These function blocks are the ingoing
SIMOCODE pro interfaces. Within SIMOCODE pro, these inputs are
represented as sockets on the corresponding function blocks and can be
assigned via connections to any functions. Inputs can be:
Input terminals
, located on the outside of the basic units and digital
modules
Buttons on the operator panel (one Test/Reset button, four freelyparameterizable buttons), and basic units (one Test/Reset button)
Inputs from PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of the input types:
SIMOCODE pro
Input
Input terminals
Sockets
SIMOCODE pro
Buttons
- Control commands
- Test/Reset
Input
Sockets
SIMOCODE pro
PROFIBUS DP
DP
Input
Sockets
Fig. 7-1: General representation of the input types
SIMOCODE pro
7-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Inputs

Inputs are used, for example, to input external signals e.g. via pushbuttons,
key-operated switches, etc. These external signals are processed further
internally via appropriate connections. The system has different inputs
depending upon the device series:
SIMOCODE
Inputs
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Basic unit inputs (BU Inputs)
Operator panel buttons (OP Buttons)
Digital module 1 inputs (DM1 Inputs)
Digital module 2 inputs (DM2 Inputs)
Temperature module inputs (TM Inputs)
Analog module inputs (AM Inputs)
Acyclic Receive (Acycl. Receive)
Cyclic Receive (Cycl. Receive)
Table 7-1: Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7-3
Inputs
7.2
Basic unit inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Inputs" function block with four binary inputs with
common ground potential. You can connect the buttons for a local control
station to the inputs. These signals can be further processed in
SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of the "BU Inputs"
function block.
The "BU Inputs" function block consists of:
Input terminals
located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding to
the sockets "BU Input 1" to "BU Input 4"
Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the
"Control Stations" function block
A socket for the "Test/Reset" button:
The function of the "Test/Reset" button is generally dependent upon the
operating status of the device:
- Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
- Test function for carrying out device tests.
In addition, other functions can be assigned to the "Test/Reset" button (e.g.
operation of the memory module and the addressing plug).
For this, see also Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset".
Overall, there is one "BU Inputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU Inputs" function block:
Basic unit (BU)
Terminal
numbers
BU Inputs
8
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
9
10
4
5
Button
Test/Reset
BU Test/Reset button
Fig. 7-2: Schematic of the "BU Inputs" function block
SIMOCODE pro
7-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Inputs
The inputs can be used, for example, for connecting the start and stop
buttons of the local control station, which can then be assigned to the "Local
Control Station" function block.
If assigned accordingly, the input signals can also be used to activate
function blocks such as "Reset" or "External Fault".
See Chapter 13.2.1 "Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling
module".
Settings
Basic unit
Delay time
Inputs
Description
You can set a delay time for the inputs, if required.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms
Table 7-2: "Basic unit inputs" settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7-5
Inputs
7.3
Description
The operator panel contains buttons 1 to 4 and the
"Test/Reset" button. Correspondingly, the "OP Buttons" function block is
available in SIMOCODE pro with five sockets.
Note
The "OP Buttons" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP)
is connected and configured in the device configuration!
Note
The operator panel with display does not have a Test/Reset button. The
allocated functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via
softkeys. Similarly, the corresponding status signal will then be available at
the "OP Test/Reset Button" socket.
Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4:
Buttons 1 to 4 are usually used to input control commands for the motor
feeder. Control commands can be, for example:
- Motor ON (ON >), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
Motor LEFT (ON<), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON >) for a reversing
starter.
- Motor SLOW (ON >), Motor FAST (ON >>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander
circuit.
However, the buttons 1 to 4 are not rigidly assigned to the above mentioned
control commands, and can be assigned to other functions via different
internal connection of the respective function block socket in
SIMOCODE pro.
Operator panel, "Test/Reset" button:
The function of the "Test/Reset" button is generally assigned to fixed
functions:
- Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
- Test function for carrying out device tests.
- Operation of the memory module or the addressing plug
Nevertheless, the status of the "Test/Reset" button can be read from the
corresponding socket of the function block and can be assigned to further
functions in SIMOCODE pro.
See also Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset", Chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP
address". and Chapter 14.3.2 "Securing and saving parameters"..
SIMOCODE pro
7-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Inputs

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel and
buttons:
Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4 Button "Test/Reset"
TEST/
RESET
DEVICE
BUS
GEN. FAULT
Fig. 7-3: Operator panel buttons
Buttons on the operator panel with display

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with
display and buttons:
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
Fig. 7-4: Buttons on the operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro V
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7-7
Inputs
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP Buttons" function block:
Button 1
OP Buttons
OP Button 1
Button 2
OP Button 2
Button 3
OP Button 3
Button 4
OP Button 4
Button
Test/Reset1)
OP - Test/Reset button
Fig. 7-5: Schematic of the "OP Buttons" function block
1) Operable via the menu on the operator panel with display
SIMOCODE pro
7-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Inputs
7.4
Digital module inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM Inputs" function blocks, each with 4 grouped
binary inputs with common ground potential. You can connect the buttons
for a local control station to the inputs. These signals can be further
processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of the
"DM Inputs" function blocks.
Note
The "DM Inputs" function blocks can only be used if the respective digital
module (DM) is connected and configured in the device configuration!
Note
When using the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe failsafe digital modules,
the input signals can be used as non-safety-oriented information.
Each "DM Inputs" function block consists of:
Input terminals
located on the outside of the digital module,
corresponding to the sockets "DM Input 1" to "DM Input 4"
Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the
"Control Stations" function block.
Overall, one function block "DM1 - Inputs" and "DM2 - Inputs" for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM1/DM2 Inputs" function blocks:
Digital module (DM)
Terminal
numbers
Digital module (DM)
DM1 Inputs
DM2 Inputs
25
25
IN1
23
IN2
24
IN2
IN3
IN4
24
IN3
26
26
IN4
27
IN1
23
27
Fig. 7-6: Schematic of the "DM1/DM2 Inputs" function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7-9
Inputs
The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe
digital module DM-F Local:
Digital module (DM)
DM1 Inputs
Terminal
numbers
Input
IN1
Start
23
IN2
Feedback
24
IN3
Cascade
IN4
Sensor 1
26
27
Sensor 2
Fig. 7-7: The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module
DM-F Local:
Input
Input
Start
Feedback
Cascade
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Description
1 - "tripped" state
Start: Start input state (Y33)
Feedback: Feedback circuit state (Y34): 1 - closed; 0 - open
Cascade input state (1)
Sensor circuit 1 state (Y12)
Sensor circuit 2 state (Y22).
Table 7-3: The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module
DM-F Local:
The following schematic shows the "DM1 inputs" function block as failsafe
digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:
Digital module (DM)
DM1 Inputs
Terminal
numbers
Input 1
IN1
Input 2
23
IN2
Input 3
24
IN3
Feedback
IN4
Sensor 1
26
27
Sensor 2
Fig. 7-8: The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module
DM-F Local:
Input
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Feedback
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Description
IN1 (83) state
IN2 (85) state
IN3 (89) state
FBC feedback circuit state (91): 1 - closed; 0 - open
-
Table 7-4: The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as failsafe digital module
DM-F PROFIsafe
SIMOCODE pro
7-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Inputs
Digital modules allow the number of binary inputs and binary outputs on
basic unit 2 to be increased in increments.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of twelve binary
inputs and seven binary outputs. If assigned accordingly, the input signals
can be also used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or
"External Fault". An external fault can be, for example, the binary signal of an
external speed monitor, signaling that the nominal speed of a motor has
been undershot.
See Chapter 1.7.7 "Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device
series".
Settings
Basic unit
Delay time
inputs
Description
If required, you can set a delay time for the inputs.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms
These values are valid for digital modules with a 24 V DC input
supply.
For digital modules with a 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply, the
values are approx. 40 ms higher.
Table 7-5: "DM1/DM2 inputs" settings
Notice
The delay times of the digital module inputs can only be set and/or are only
relevant when "monostable" or "bistable" is set for digital module 1. The
delay time can not be set if digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe. If digital
module 1 is a DM-F Local, the delay times can be set using the DIP
switches on the front of the DM-F Local.
Non-safety functions (failsafe digital modules)
If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the DM-F Local is a digital module
with non-safety inputs, relay outputs and diagnostics in a SIMOCODE pro
system.
If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, the DM-F PROFIsafe is a digital
module with non-safety inputs, relay outputs and diagnostics in a
SIMOCODE pro system.
Detailed information on failsafe digital modules:
See Chapter 1.7.7 "Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device
series".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7-11
Inputs
7.5
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "TM Inputs" function block with three analog sockets
corresponding to the three sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module. The temperature (in K) of the three measuring circuits can be read
from these sockets and processed internally. An additional analog socket
always supplies the maximum temperature of all three measured
temperatures. Furthermore, the two binary sockets of the function block
represent the status of the sensor measuring circuits. The temperatures can
be processed internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation
system via the "Cyclic Send" function blocks.
Note
The "TM Inputs" function block can only be used if the temperature module
(TM) is connected and configured in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "TM Inputs" function block:
TM Inputs
Inputs:
R
PT/KTY
50
1T3
51
2T3
52
3T3
53
1T2
54
2T2
55
3T2
56
T1
57
T1
Max. temperature
1
NTC
Terminal
numbers
Sensor type
Temperature 1
Temperature 2
Response at sensor fault/

Out of range
Temperature 3
Number of active sensors
Event
Range:
0 ... 65535 K
- Sensor fault
- Out of range
Fig. 7-9: Schematic of the "TM Inputs" function block
Notes on wiring
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors. You will
find further information in Chapter 13.3 "Wiring".
SIMOCODE pro
7-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Inputs
Among other things, you can monitor the following motor components:
Motor windings
Motor bearings
Motor coolant temperature
Motor gearbox oil temperature.
The individual temperatures of the three sensor measuring circuits can be
monitored independently of each other by connecting free limit monitors.
Settings
Temperature module
Description
Sensor type
PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC
Response 1) at sensor fault/

Out of range
Deactivated, signaling, warning, tripping
1 sensor, 2 sensors, 3 sensors
Table 7-6: Temperature module input settings
1)
Response
Sensor fault/Out of range
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Tripping
Delay
Table 7-7: "Sensor fault/Out of range" response

information".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7-13
Inputs
7.6
Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "AM Inputs" function block with two analog sockets,
corresponding to the two analog inputs of the analog module. The effective
analog value of each input can be read from these sockets and processed
internally. An additional binary socket of the function block represents the
status of the analog measuring circuits. The analog values can be processed
internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the
"Cyclic Send" function blocks.
Note
The "AM Inputs" function block can only be used if the respective analog
module (AM) has been connected and configured in the device
configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM Inputs" function block:
AM Inputs
Inputs:
Terminal
numbers
30
IN1+
Input signal
31
IN2+
Response at
Open circuit
Input 1
Active inputs
Event
Open circuit
33
IN1-
34
IN2-
Input 2
Range:
0 ... 27648
Fig. 7-10: Schematic of the "AM Inputs" function block
SIMOCODE pro
7-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Inputs
Typical applications are:
Fill-level monitoring for implementing dry running protection for pumps
Monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer.
Settings
Analog module
Description
Input signal
0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Response at open circuit
Signaling, warning, tripping
Active inputs
1 input, 2 inputs
Table 7-8: Analog module input settings
Note
Note
The value of the analog module inputs is in S7 format.
Notice
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an
analog input circuit, each input will require an additional, isolated external
current source connected in series. If the output of the analog module is not
being used by another application, it can also be used as a current source
for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and the
"End value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to
65535 for this. Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available
via the analog module output.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7-15
Inputs
7.7
Cyclic Receive
Description
With the "Cyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which cyclic data
from the automation system will be further processed via PROFIBUS DP in
SIMOCODE pro. These will normally be PLC/PCS binary control commands.
Connection with the "Control Stations" function block in SIMOCODE pro will
allow the motor to be controlled via PROFIBUS DP. Direct connection of the
analog value with the "AM Output" function block will result in, for example,
the cyclic output of the value sent via PROFIBUS at the output of the analog
module.
The "Cyclic Receive" function blocks consist of:
One word (= two bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely
programmable) for basic type 1
One input each from PROFIBUS DP.
Overall there are three "Cyclic Send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3)
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks:
Cyclic Receive 0
Cyclic Receive 1
Byte 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
DP
DP
From PROFIBUS DP
Cyclic Receive 2/3 1)
Bit 3
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 2
DP
From PROFIBUS DP
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 7
Byte 2/3
Analog value
1) BU2 with basic type 1 only

Fig. 7-11: Schematic of the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks
Cyclic services
The Cyclic Data is exchanged between DP master and DP slave once every
DP cycle. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data (Cyclic Receive) to
SIMOCODE pro each time. SIMOCODE pro responds by sending the cyclic
send data (Cyclic Send) to the DP master.
SIMOCODE pro
7-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Inputs
7.8
Acyclic Receive
Description
In addition to "Cyclic Receive", it is possible to transfer further data
acyclically to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP.
With the "Acyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which acyclic
information from PROFIBUS DP will be further processed in
SIMOCODE pro. For this, simply connect the sockets of the "Acyclic
Receive" function block to any other function blocks in SIMOCODE pro.
The "Acyclic Receive" function blocks consist of:
One word (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely
parameterizable)
One input each from PROFIBUS DP.
Overall there are three "Acyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3)
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic Receive" function blocks:
Acyclic Receive 0
Acyclic Receive 1
Byte 0
Bit 0
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
DP
DP
From PROFIBUS DP
Acyclic Receive 2/3 1)
Bit 3
Bit 2
DP
From PROFIBUS DP
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 7
Byte 2/3
Analog value
1) BU2 with basic type 1 only

Fig. 7-12: Schematic of the "Acyclic Receive" function blocks
Acyclic services
Acyclic data is only transferred on request.
The information (4 bytes) can be found in data record 202.
This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the
acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1. Connection monitoring is activated
every time the data set is received. The content of the data set is deleted
after a 5-second time-out has elapsed.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
7-17
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
In this chapter
This chapter provides information regarding the possibility of recording the
measured curves of different measured values, e.g. the motor current when
the motor is started, using SIMOCODE pro V.
The increasing wear on the motor and the equipment driven by the motor all
cause the motor current to change over time. By recording the motor
current at different points in time and making direct comparisons,
conclusions can be drawn regarding the condition of the motor and the
equipment.
Target groups
Configurators
Programmers
Commissioners
Service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
SIMOCODE pro
Motor protection, motor control
Device parameters > Analog value recording.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
8-1
Description
The "Analog Value Recording" function block can be used to record various
analog values (2 bytes/1word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time.
For example, you can use this function block to record the characteristic
curve of the motor current when the motor is started.
Recording is carried out directly in SIMOCODE pro on the basis of the motor
feeder and independently of PROFIBUS or the automation system. Every
analog value present at the "Allocated analog value" analog socket is
recorded and saved. The recording starts on the basis of the edge (positive/
negative) via any binary signal at the trigger input of the function block. Up
to 60 values can be saved internally in the device. The time frame of the
recording is indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:
Sampling time = sampling rate[s] * 60 values.
The pre-trigger can be used to specify how far in advance the recording
should commence before the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set
as a percentage of the entire sampling time. In addition, with
SIMOCODE ES you can also export the measured curve into a *.csv file for
further processing, for example, in MS Excel.
Functional principle
$OORFDWHGDQDORJYDOXH
HJPRWRUFXUUHQW,PD[>@
WLPH
3UHWULJJHU>@
6DPSOLQJUDWH>V@
6DPSOLQJWLPH 6DPSOLQJUDWH>V@

7ULJJHULQSXW
7ULJJHUHGJH SRVLWLYH

WLPH
Fig. 8-1: Functional principle of analog value recording
The old measured curve will be overwritten in SIMOCODE pro each time a
new trigger signal is sent to the trigger input.
SIMOCODE pro
8-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Analog Value Recording" function block:
Trigger input
Trigger edge
Assigned
analog value
Sampling rate
Pre-trigger
Fig. 8-2: Schematic of the "Analog Value Recording" function block
Settings
Signal/value
Range
Trigger input
Activate the analog value recording with

any signal
(any sockets
,
z. B. device inputs, current flowing)
Allocated analog value
Any value (1 word/2 bytes) in

SIMOCODE pro
Trigger edge
Positive/negative
Sampling rate
0.1 to 50 s in 0.1 s increments
Pre-trigger
0 to 100% in 5% increments
Table 8-1: "Analog value recording" settings
Application example
Record the motor current when the motor starts/sampling time = 12 s/pretrigger = 25% (3 s):

Motor current flowing
Max. current I_max
Positive
Trigger edge
0.2 s
Sampling rate
25 %
Pre-trigger
Fig. 8-3: Application example of the analog value recording
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
8-3
SIMOCODE pro
8-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Target groups
Configurators
PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
Knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
Device parameters > 3UF50 compatibility mode.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
9-1
Description
The 3UF50 compatibility mode is applied when a SIMOCODE-DP device is
to be replaced by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the
configuration.
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode you can operate a SIMOCODE pro V basic
unit 2 with a 3UF50 configuration.
In this case, the communication using SIMOCODE pro behaves the same as
communication using SIMOCODE-DP from the point of view of the PLC
(class 1 master).
Cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnostics and the DPV1 data
records (DR 130, DR 131, DR 133) of SIMOCODE DP are supported.
In order for the technical functions (parameterization) of SIMOCODE DP to
be integrated into the technical functions of SIMOCODE pro V, the device
parameters must be adjusted accordingly. The "Win SIMOCODE-DP
Converter" software supports you in this process. This software enables you
to convert the parameter files (smc files) created with Win SIMOCODE-DP
into SIMOCODE ES parameter files (sdp files).
Safety guidelines
Notice
Communication with a DP master (class 2 master), e.g. with the Win
SIMOCODE-DP Professional software via PROFIBUS DP, is not covered by
the 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Notice
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode, the start-up parameter block is always set,
i.e. the transmission of the device parameters
created using SIMOCODE-DP-GSD or the SIMOCODE-DP object manager
cannot be integrated into SIMOCODE pro V.
Notice
The 3UF50 compatibility mode supports SIMOCODE-DP projects in which
SIMCODE-DP is integrated via GSD SIEM8031.gs?, SIEM8069.gs? or via the
SIMOCODE-DP object manager (OM).
SIMOCODE pro
9-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Diagram of send and receive data

The following table shows the send and receive data in compatibility mode:
Receive
Basic type 1
SIMOCODEDP
0
1
2
Receive data
Basic type 1
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 2
SIMOCODEDP
Cyclic Receive Bit 0. . 1.7
Not supported
0
Receive data
Basic type 2
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 3
SIMOCODEDP
Not supported
Basic type 3
SIMOCODE
pro V
Receive data
Not supported
Table 9-1: "Receive" configuration
Send
Basic type 1
SIMOCODEDP
0
Basic type 1
SIMOCODE
pro V
Send Data
Cyclic Send
Bit 0.0 .. 1.7
Motor current
Specified: Max.
current I_max
Number of
starts
Number of starts
(Bytes 0 - 3)
Value
Counter 1
Counter 1
Actual value
Value
10 Counter 2
Counter 2
Actual value
11 Value sensor
TM - Max.
temperature
Basic type 2
SIMOCODEDP
0
1 Send Data
Basic type 2
SIMOCODE
pro V
Cyclic Send
Bit 0.0 .. 1.7
Basic type 3
SIMOCODEDP
0
Basic type 3
SIMOCODE
pro V
Cyclic Send
Bit 0.0 .. 1.7
1
Send Data
2
3
4
5
2
3
Motor current
Specified: Max.
current I_max
2
3
Acyclic Send
Bit 0.0 .. 1.7
6
7
8
Table 9-2: "Send" configuration
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
9-3
Diagram of diagnostics data

The following table shows the diagnostics data in the 3UF50-compatibility
mode:
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 - device-specific

diagnostics acc. to DP
standard SIMOCODE-DP
Byte
Bit

diagnostics acc. to
SIMOCODE-DP DPV1 standard
0x0B
0x81
0x04
0x00
Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V
Same as 3UF50 diagnostics
0x0E
7.0
Free
10.0
Free
7.1
Event: DP block
10.1
Event: DP block
Event - Start-up parameter

block active
7.2
Event: Emergency start
10.2
Event: Emergency start
Status - Emergency start executed
7.3
Event: HW test OK
10.3
Event: HW test OK
No fault - HW fault basic unit

No fault - Module fault
No fault - Temporary components
7.4
Free
10.4
Free
7.5
Event: Ext. event 1
10.5
Event: Ext. event 1
Event - Ext. fault 5
7.6
Event: Ext. event 2
10.6
Event: Ext. event 2
7.7
Event: Ext. event 3
10.7
Event: Ext. event 3
8.0
Warning: Ext. Warning
11.0
Warning: Ext. warning
Warning - Ext. fault 3
8.1
Warning: Unbalance > 40%
11.1
Warning: Unbalance > 40%
Warning - Unbalance
8.2
Event: Failure PLC-CPU
11.2
Event: Failure PLC-CPU
Status - PLC/PCS (inverted)
8.3
Warning: Sensor short circuit
11.3
Warning: Sensor short circuit
Warning - Thermistor short circuit
8.4
Event: Cooling down period

active
11.4
Event: Cooling down period

active
Status - Cooling down period active
8.5
Status: TPF
11.5
Status: TPF
Status - Test position (TPF)
8.6
Free
11.6
Free
8.7
Free
11.7
Free
9.0
Warning: Earth fault
12.0
Warning: Earth fault
Warning - Int. earth fault

or
Warning - Ext. earth fault
9.1
Warning: Overload
12.1
Warning: Overload
Warning - Overload
9.2
Warning: Overload + unbalance
12.2
Warning: Overload + unbalance
Warning - Overload + phase failure
9.3
Warning: I1 response level

overshot
12.3

overshot
Warning - Warning level I>
9.4

undershot
12.4

undershot
Warning - Warning level I<
9.5

overshot
12.5

overshot
9.6

undershot
12.6

undershot
Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode
SIMOCODE pro
9-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte
Bit

Byte
Bit

diagnostics acc. to
9.7
Warning: Thermistor
12.7
Warning: Thermistor
Warning - Thermistor overload

Warning - Thermistor open circuit
Warning - TM warning T>
Warning - TM sensor fault
Warning - TM out of range
10.0
Trip: Earth fault
13.0
Trip: Earth fault
Trip - Int. earth fault

or
Trip - Ext. earth fault
10.1
Trip: Overload
13.1
Trip: Overload
Trip - Overload
10.2
Trip: Overload + unbalance
13.2
Trip: Overload + unbalance
Trip - Overload + phase failure
10.3
Trip: I1 response level overshot
13.3
Trip - Trip level I>
10.4
Trip: I1 response level undershot 13.4
Trip: I1 response level undershot Trip - Trip level I<
10.5
10.6
Trip: I2 response level undershot 13.6
Trip: I2 response level undershot -
10.7
Trip: Thermistor
13.7
Trip: Thermistor
Trip - Thermistor overload

Trip - Thermistor short circuit
Trip - Thermistor open circuit
Trip - TM trip T>
Trip - TM sensor fault
Trip - TM out of range
11.0
Trip: FB ON
14.0
Trip: FB ON
Trip - Feedback ON
11.1
Trip: FB OFF
14.1
Trip: FB OFF
Trip - Feedback OFF
11.2
Trip: Motor blocked
14.2
Trip: Motor blocked
Trip - Stalled rotor
13.5
11.3
Trip: Positioner blocked
14.3
Trip: Positioner blocked
11.4
Trip: Double 0
14.4
Trip: Double 0
Trip - Double 0
11.5
Trip: Double 1
14.5
Trip: Double 1
Trip - Double 1
11.6
Trip: End position
14.6
Trip: End position
Trip - End position
11.7
Trip: Antivalence
14.7
Trip: Antivalence
Trip - Antivalence
12.0
Trip: ESB
15.0
Trip: ESB
Trip - Ext. fault 4
12.1
Trip: OPO
15.1
Trip: OPO
Trip - Operational protection OFF (OPO)
12.2
Trip: UVO
15.2
Trip: OPO
Trip - Undervoltage (UVO)
12.3
Trip: Ext. fault 1
15.3
Trip: Ext. fault 1
Trip - Ext. fault 1
12.4
Trip: Ext. fault 2
15.4
Trip: Ext. fault 2
Trip - Ext. fault 2
12.5
Trip: TPF fault
15.5
Trip: TPF fault
Trip - Cold starting (TPF) fault
12.6
Trip: Runtime ON
15.6
Trip: Runtime ON
Trip - Execution ON command
12.7
Trip: Runtime OFF
15.7
Trip: Runtime OFF
Trip - Execution STOP command
13.0
Trip: Parameter fault 0
16.0
Trip - Parameterization
13.1
16.1
13.2
16.2
13.3
16.3
13.4
16.4
Trip - Configuration fault
13.5
16.5
13.6
16.6
13.7
16.7
Trip - HW fault basic unit
Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
9-5
Byte
Bit

14 15
16 17
I of the overload trip [%/IE)]
Last trip current
18 19
Operating hours [10h]
Byte
Bit

diagnostics acc. to
Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
9-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
10
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the standard functions stored
as function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. Standard functions are typical motor
functions that can be activated according to need and, as applicable,
individually set for each motor feeder.
Target groups
Configurators
Programmers of application programs for reference purposes.
Necessary knowledge
Motor protection
Control functions, control stations.
Further function blocks > Standard functions.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10-1
Standard functions
10.1
Introduction
Description
So-called "Standard functions" in the form of function blocks are also stored
in SIMOCODE pro, and can be used as required. These function blocks may
contain:
Plugs (
)
Sockets (
) in the form of status information
Setting values, e.g. the response when external faults occur ("Signaling",
"Warning" or "Tripping").
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the function
block of a standard function:
Plug 1
Standard Function
Socket 1 - n
Plug n
Setting value
Fig. 10-1: General representation of the function block of a standard function

These function blocks work independently of the selected control function
and can be used as optional supplements. They are ready to be used and
only require activating by connecting the plug(s) of the respective function
block.
Depending on the device series, the system offers several different function
blocks for such standard functions:
SIMOCODE
Function block
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Test
Reset
Test Position Feedback (TPF)
External Fault
Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)
Emergency Start
Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring)
Table 10-1: Function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
10-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
SIMOCODE
Function block
pro C (BU1)
pro V (BU2)
Timestamping
Safe Tripping
Table 10-1: Function blocks (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10-3
Standard functions
10.2
Test/Reset
Test/Reset description
The function of the "Test/Reset" button on the basic unit or on the operator
panel is generally dependent upon the operating status of the device:
Reset function: If a fault occurs
Test function: In other operating states.
In addition to the Test/Reset button, SIMOCODE pro allows internal Test/
Reset tripping via the "Test" function blocks. The "Test" function block
consists of one plug.
Two function blocks, "Test 1" and "Test 2", for BU1 and BU2, whereby each
function block has a slightly different function:
Test 1: Test/trips the output relays
Test 2: Does not trip the output relays (normally for testing via the bus).
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of the "Test/Reset"
function blocks:
"Test/Reset" function blocks
Test 1
Test 2
Reset 1
Reset 2
Reset 3
Test 1
Test 2
Reset 1
Control functions
Reset 2
Reset 3
BU "TEST/RESET" button
Test/Reset buttons blocked
OP "TEST/RESET" button*
Fig. 10-2: "Test/Reset" function blocks
*) The operator panel with display does not have a Test/Reset button. The
respective functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via
softkeys.
SIMOCODE pro
10-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
Testing
Testing can be carried out as follows:
Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can
be deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
Via the plugs of the internal "Test 1" or "Test 2" function blocks
Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu
item).
Testing can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the thermal
motor model of the overload function, i.e. after switching off via test, the
system can be reset immediately.
Tripping only occurs for Test 1 when the operating mode is set to "Remote".
Reset function
Resetting can be carried out as follows:
Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can
be deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
Using the "Reset input" plug of the internal function blocks via the plugs of
the internal function blocks "Reset 1", "Reset 2" and "Reset 3".
Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu
item).
The "Reset" function block consists of one plug.
Overall, three function blocks, "Reset 1" through to "Reset 3" are available for
BU1 and BU2.
All reset inputs (sockets) are equal (OR function).
Test function
A SIMOCODE pro function test can also be initialized via the test function.
The test function comprises the following steps:
Lamp/LED test (test function < 2 s activated)
Testing the device functionality (test function activated for 2 s - 5 s )
For the "Test 1" function block only: Switching off the QE (test function
activated for > 5 s).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10-5
Standard functions
Test phases
The following table shows the test phases carried out when the "TEST/
RESET" button is pressed for the required length of time:
Test
phase
Status
Without main current

Fault 1)
O.K.
With main current

O.K.
Fault
Hardware test/lamp test

"DEVICE" LED
< 2s
Orange
Green
Orange
Green
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Show QL
Results of the hardware test/lamp test
"DEVICE" LED
2s - 5s
Green
Red
Green
Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control
Unchanged
Deactivated
Unchanged
Deactivated
Relay test
"DEVICE" LED
> 5s
Green
Red
Green
Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control
LED lit/activated
Deactivated
LED flashing
Deactivated
Deactivated
LED flickering
LED OFF
Deactivated
1) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s

Table 10-2: The states of the status LEDs/contactor controls during testing
Test settings
Test 1 to 2 -
Description
Input
Control of the "Test" function block from any signal (any sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Test/Reset
buttons blocked
The blue Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator
panel are usually intended for acknowledging faults and for carrying
out a device test.
The buttons can be blocked via "Test/Reset buttons blocked". These
can then be used for other purposes. On the operator panel with
display, blocking is carried out via the corresponding menu function.
(Default: Unblocked)
Table 10-3: Test settings
SIMOCODE pro
10-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
Acknowledgement of faults
Generally, the following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:
Faults can only be acknowledged
If the cause of the fault has been eliminated
If there is no "ON" control command pending.
A reset will not be possible if the cause of the fault has not been eliminated
and/or if an "ON" control command is pending. The reset will be saved
depending on the type of fault. Saving a reset is indicated by the "GEN.
FAULT" LED on the basic unit and on the control panel. The LED changes from
flashing to continuous signal.
Automatic acknowledgement of faults
Faults are automatically acknowledged in the following cases:
A reset has been saved and the cause of the fault is no longer present (user
has previously acknowledged the fault)
Auto-reset of overload tripping or thermistor tripping if motor protection
reset = auto (acknowledgement is automatic after the cooling down period
elapses). The motor cannot start immediately since resetting is not possible if
an ON command is pending.
If a configured module fails, all related faults will be acknowledged
automatically. However, a configuration fault will be generated (exception:
operator panel, if parameterized accordingly). This ensures that a module fault
does not cause the general fault to be acknowledged automatically.
If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via
parameterization), all related faults are acknowledged automatically (the
motor cannot start immediately since parameters cannot be entered if an ON
command is pending).
If a parameter of a function is changed from "Tripping" to "Warning", or to
"Signaling" or "Deactivated", all related faults will be acknowledged
automatically.
For an external fault: With its own parameter: "Auto-Reset".
Reset settings
Reset 1 to 3 Input
Description
Control of the "Reset" function block from any signal (any
sockets
,
Test/Reset buttons The blue Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and on the operator
blocked
panel are intended for acknowledging faults and carrying out device
tests.
The buttons can be blocked via "Test/Reset buttons blocked". These
can then be used for other purposes. On the operator panel with
display, blocking is carried out via the menu (default: Unblocked).
Table 10-4: Reset settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10-7
Standard functions
10.3
Test position feedback (TPF)
Description
You can carry out the "Cold starting" function test using the "Test Position
Feedback (TPF)" function block. For this purpose, the function block input
(plug) must be connected to the respective socket. The activated test
position will be indicated by the flashing QL of the control function.
The "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block consists of:
One plug
One "Status - Test position" socket.
This is set when a signal is pending at the input.
One "Trip - Test position feedback" socket.
This is set when:
"TPF" is activated although current is flowing in the main circuit
"TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the main circuit.
Overall, there is one "Test Position Feedback" function block for BU1 and
BU2.
Note
When the test position is enabled, the QLE/QLA sockets of the control
function are activated, to indicate test operation of the motor feeder via a
blinking button LED, for example.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Test Position Feedback" function block:
TPF
Status Test position
Input
Type
Trip Test position feedback fault
Fig. 10-3: "Test Position Feedback" function block
SIMOCODE pro
10-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
Cold starting
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the
network. However, the control voltage is connected.
The "Cold starting" function test is carried out in this state. Cold starting
means the motor feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.
To differentiate this function from normal operation, it must be enabled via
the socket on the function block.
Feedback stating that the motor feeder is isolated from the mains voltage
on the main current side can occur, for example, via an auxiliary contact of
the main switch in the motor feeder that is connected to any device input
(terminal). This is then internally connected to the "Test position feedback
(TPF) - Input" plug of the function block. When using current/voltage
measuring modules, this type of auxiliary contact is entirely unnecessary.
The "TPF" function block can be activated by monitoring for undervoltage
("Voltage Monitoring" function block).
Thereafter, the contactor outputs can be set via the control stations (see
Chapter 4.1 "Control stations"), enabling the current-free status to be tested.
If current flows erroneously during test operation, the contactor outputs are
switched off by "Trip - Test position feedback".
"Trip - Test position feedback (TPF)" fault message and acknowledgement
Notice
"Trip - Test position feedback (TPF)" will be generated if:
"TPF" is activated, although current is flowing in the motor feeder
"TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the motor feeder.
Acknowledge with "Reset".
Settings
Test position
feedback (TPF)
Description
Input
Activate the "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block with any
signal (any sockets
,
e. g. device input)
Type
Specification of the input logic

NO contact (1-active)
NC contact (0-active)
Table 10-5: Test position feedback (TPF) settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10-9
Standard functions
10.4
External fault
Description
The "External Faults 1-6" function blocks can be used to monitor any
statuses and/or external devices, to generate fault messages and, if
necessary, to switch off the motor. To do this, the inputs (plugs) of the
"External Fault" function blocks must be connected to any sockets (e.g.
device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.). External faults can also
be "marked" in SIMOCODE pro. This facilitates their allocation to the actual
malfunction. Example: Monitoring the rotational speed of the motor using
an external speed monitor.
The "External Fault" function block consists of:
Two plugs (1 plug for setting, 1 plug for resetting)
One "Event - External fault" socket. This is set when a signal is pending at the
input.
Four "External Faults 1 to 4" function blocks for BU1
Six "External Faults 1 to 6" function blocks for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "External Fault" function blocks:
External Fault 1
External Fault 2
Input
Input
Type
Activity
Reset
Type
Event Ext. fault 1
Response
Activity
Reset
Reset
(Marking)
External Fault 3
Reset
External Fault 4
Input
Type
Activity
Type
Event Ext. fault 3
Response
Activity
Reset
Reset
(Marking)
Event Ext. fault 4
Response
Reset
(Marking)
External Fault 5
External Fault 6
Input
Input
Type
Activity
Reset
Response
(Marking)
Input
Reset
Event Ext. fault 2
Type
Event Ext. fault 5
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Activity
Reset
Event Ext. fault 6
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Fig. 10-4: "External Fault" function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
10-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
Special reset options:

A special reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options
(remote reset, Test/Reset button, OFF command-reset). Furthermore, AutoReset can also be activated.
See below.
Settings
External fault
1 to 6 -
Description
Input
Control of the "External Fault" function block using the monitored

signal (arbitrary sockets
,
Type
Specification of the input logic:

Activity
Specify in which motor operating state the external fault is to be

evaluated:
Always:
Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or at
a standstill.
Only when the motor is ON:
Evaluation only when the motor is switched ON.
Response
Specification of the response to an external fault when activated via

the input (see the following table and Chapter "Important
information").
Reset
Acknowledgment of the "External fault" using an arbitrary signal

(arbitrary sockets
, e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset also by
Specification of further (common) acknowledgement options using

additional reset types:
Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and on the operator panel or,
in the case of the operator panel with display, via the menu (panel
reset)
Remote reset: Acknowledgement via Reset 1-3, DPV1, "Reset"
command
Auto-Reset: The fault is reset after the cause has been eliminated
(after removal of the activation signal)
OFF command-reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault.
Marking

"Rotational speed >", e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.
Range: Up to 10 characters.
Table 10-6: External fault settings
"External fault" response

Response
External fault
Fault/tripping
Warning
Event
Deactivated
Table 10-7: "External fault" response
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10-11
Standard functions
10.5
Operational protection OFF (OPO)
10.5.1
Response for positioner control function
Description
The "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block returns the positioner
to a safe position. In order to do this, the input (plug) must be connected to
the respective socket (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP,
etc.).
The "Operational Protection OFF" function block consists of:
One plug
One "Status - OPO" socket. This is set when a signal is pending at the input.
One "Trip - OPO fault" socket. This is set when the respective, safe end
position has been reached.
Overall, there is one Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block
available for BU2.
The following table shows the general functionality:
OPO
Initial position when OPO is pending

Positioner
is open
Positioner
opens
Positioner
stop/OFF
Positioner
closes
Positioner
is closed
Reaction to OPO
Parameterized
response
"Positioner
closes"
Parameterized
"Positioner
opens"
response
Fault
Reset:
With close
command
Fault
Reset:
With close
command
Fault
Reset:
With close
command
Positioner
closes
Positioner
closes
Positioner
closes
Positioner
closes
Fault
Reset:
With open
command
Fault
Reset:
With open
command
Fault
Reset:
With open
command
Positioner
opens
Positioner
opens
Positioner
opens
Positioner
opens
Table 10-8: General functionality of Operational protection OFF(OPO) for the "Positioner" control
function
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)"
function block:
Input
Operational Protection OFF

(OPO)
Status Operational protection OFF (OPO)
Positioner response
Type
Trip Operational protection OFF (OPO)
Fig. 10-5: "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block
SIMOCODE pro
10-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
Settings
Operational
protection OFF
(OPO)
Description
Input
Control of the "Operational Protection OFF" function block using the

monitored signal (any sockets
,
e. g. device inputs etc.)
Positioner
response
Specification of the response for the "Positioner" control function

when activated via the input:
CLOSED: Positioner moves to the "Closed"end position.
OPEN: Positioner moves to the "Open" end position.
Type
Specification of the input logic

Table 10-9: Operational protection OFF settings
Safety guidelines
Note
A "Trip - Operational protection OFF (OPO)" fault message is not generated if
the "OPO" command attempts to run the positioner to the end position in
which it is already in, or to which it is heading.
Note
No other control command (counter command or stop command) is carried
out while "Operational protection OFF (OPO)" is active.
Note
The "Trip - Operation protection OFF (OPO)" fault message must be
acknowledged using the open or closed control command, depending on
the present "OPO" end position.
Note
Acknowledgement is carried out even if the desired end position has not yet
been reached.
Note
The fault message is available as diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10-13
Standard functions
10.5.2
Response to other control functions
Description
For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated
between for OPO:
Motor in operation: The motor is switched off with a "Trip - Operational
protection OFF (OPO)" fault.
The motor is off. Initially no fault. The "Trip - Operational protection OFF
(OPO)" fault only occurs when an "ON command" is issued.
SIMOCODE pro
10-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
10.6
Power failure monitoring (UVO)
Description
The "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block is activated via the
plug. This is carried out via an external voltage relay that is connected to the
function block via the binary inputs of SIMOCODE pro.
Process (see process diagram below).
1) All contactors (QE) are immediately deactivated after response by the
monitoring relay/activation of the input (UVO).
2) The motor will be switched back to its previous status if the voltage returns
within the "power failure time". This can either take place immediately or can
be additionally delayed (restart time delay).
3) If the "power failure time" expires before the voltage returns, the device
signals a fault (UVO fault):
Prerequisite: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and not

interrupted.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)"
function block
UVO
Input*
Type
Trip Power failure (UVO)
Power failure time

Restart time delay
*Activation
External power failure monitoring
Fig. 10-6: Schematic of the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block
1)
UVO
t
Power failure
time
2)
Power failure
time
QE
3)
Fault
Fault
t
Fig. 10-7: Power failure monitoring (UVO) process diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10-15
Standard functions
Settings
Power failure
monitoring (UVO) -
Description
Input
Control of the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block

using the monitored signal (any socket
,
Type
Specification of the type of power failure monitoring:

Deactivated
Device supply is not interrupted.
The control voltage from SIMOCODE pro remains constant.
The interruption of the mains voltage must be measured, for
example, by a separate voltage relay.
Power failure time
Start time after power failure.

If the mains voltage returns within the power failure time, all the
drives that were connected before the power failure are
automatically reconnected.
If the mains voltage does not return within this time period, the
drives remain disconnected and the "Trip - Power failure (UVO)" fault
message is generated.
Once the mains voltage has returned, the fault message can be
acknowledged using "Reset".
Range:
0 to 25.5 s in 0.1 s increments
26 to 255 s in 1 s increments
256 to 2550 s in 10 s increments
Restart time delay

(staggered)
The restart time delay can be set so that not all motors restart
simultaneously (the mains voltage would otherwise fail again).
Range: 0 to 255 seconds.
Table 10-10: Power failure monitoring settings
SIMOCODE pro
10-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
10.7
Emergency start
Description
Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each
time it is activated. This allows the motor to be immediately restarted after
an overload trip. This function can be used to:
Enable a reset and start up the motor again immediately after an overload trip
Delete the thermal memory (motor model) during operation, if required.
Caution
If emergency starts are carried out too frequently this may lead to thermal
overloading of the motor!
Since emergency start is
edge-triggered, this function cannot permanently affect the thermal motor
model. An emergency start is carried out as follows:
Via the plug of the function block. To do this, the input (plug) of the function
block must be connected to an arbitrary socket (e.g. device inputs, control
bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.).
The "Emergency Start" function block consists of:
One plug
One "Status - Emergency start executed" socket. This is set when the
emergency start is carried out.
Overall, there is one "Emergency Start" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Emergency Start" function block:
Emergency start
Input
Status Emergency start

executed 1)
1) The "Emergency start executed" signal is triggered by the edge (input) and reset
when the current flows.
Fig. 10-8: Function block "Emergency Start"
Settings
Emergency start
Input
Description
Activate the "Emergency Start" function block from any signal (any
sockets
,
Table 10-11: Emergency start settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10-17
Standard functions
10.8
Description
Note:
Please note that the information made available for further processing is in
the form of non-safety-oriented signals.
Note:
Please note that the "Safe Tripping" function block is not a safety-oriented
tripping function.
The DM-F Local safety function is determined by the DIP switch setting on
the module only.
The DM-F PROFIsafe safety function is performed by the failsafe program in
the F-CPU.
The "DM-F Local Safe Tripping" function block consists of 3 sockets:
Event - DM-F LOCAL ok: The DM-F Local is ready for operation.
Event - Safe tripping: A safety-oriented tripping has been carried out.
Status - Enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.
The "DM-F PROFIsafe Safe Tripping" function block consists of 3 sockets:
Event - PROFIsafe active: Failsafe communication between the F-CPU and the
DM-F PROFIsafe is active.
Event - Safe tripping: A safety-oriented tripping has been carried out.
Status - Enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.
Overall one "Safe Tripping" function block is available for SAFETY (Local) or
PROFIsafe.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Safe Tripping" function block:
Safe Tripping
Response
DIP switch *)
DM-F Local o.k.

PROFIsafe active
Safe tripping
Enabling circuit
Fig. 10-9: "Safe Tripping" function block
SIMOCODE pro
10-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
Function of the SET/RESET button on DM-F Local
SET/RESET button
Fig. 10-10: SET/RESET button
See system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY".

DM-F Local - Automatic starting after power failure
Danger
Automatic starting after power failure. Risk of death or serious injury.
In the case of automatic starting after a power failure, the enabling circuits are
connected without pressing the Start button.
Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)
*)
Fig. 10-11: Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)
*) Notice:
The set DIP switch position in the SIMOCODE ES user interface (which can
be set using the mouse pointer) is transferred to the basic unit as part of the
download. However, it does not affect the function of the DM-F Local digital
module.
This way, the desired function is already set during parameterization.
The effective parameterization must be set using the DIP switches on the
front of the DM-F Local (see table below and/or "Failsafe digital module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10-19
Standard functions
SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual).

The basic unit compares the set position (from the download) with the
actual position at the DM-F Local. If these differ "Configuration deviation" is
output!
DIP switches (DM-F Local)
Description
With/without cross-circuit detection
Cross-circuit detection is only possible with

potential-free sensors. In this case, the
sensors must be connected between T1 - Y12,
Y33 and T2 Y22, Y34. The device anticipates
the T1 terminal test signal on terminals Y12
and Y33. Likewise, the T2 terminal test signal
is anticipated on terminals Y22 and Y34. In the
event of the signals on Y12, Y33 or Y22 , Y34
not corresponding to the T1 and T2 test
signals, the device detects a sensor fault.
When electronic sensors such as light arrays or
laser scanners are connected, cross-circuit
detection must be disabled. The DM-F Local no
longer monitors the sensor inputs for cross
circuiting. Usually, the outputs of safety
sensors (OSSD) are monitored for cross
circuiting in the sensor itself.
When the device has been parameterized as
"without cross-circuit detection", the T1 and T2
test outputs are switched off and must not be
reconnected. The DM-F Local anticipates a
+24 V DC signal from the same current source
from which the device is powered on inputs
Y12, Y22, Y33 and Y34 (DM-F Local-*1AB00
only) or from T3 (static +24 V DC).
With the DM-F Local-*1AU00 device version,
terminal T3 must be connected to the
potential-free sensor contacts, due to the
galvanic isolation of the input circuit and the
sensor supply.
1 NC contact + 1 NO contact
evaluation/2 NC contact evaluation
In addition to the 2-channel connection of

aligned sensor contacts (NC/NC), sensors with
opposing contacts (NC/NO often used for
magnetically-operated switches) can also be
evaluated. In this case, please ensure that the
NC contact is connected to Y12 and the NO
contact is connected to Y22.
2x 1-channel/1x 2-channel
2 sensors, each with one contact (2x 1channel) (NC/NC). Here, the sensors are
"AND"-connected with one another.
Simultaneity is not monitored.
1 sensor with 2 contacts (1x 2-channel) (NC/
NC). Here, it is expected that both contacts
open simultaneously.
Table 10-12: Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)
SIMOCODE pro
10-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
DIP switches (DM-F Local)

Delay time for
Sensor inputs 50 ms/10 ms
Description
During the delay time, sensor signal changes
are not evaluated.
Delay time 50ms: Changes in the switching
position of strongly bouncing contacts are
hidden (e.g. position switch on heavy
protective doors).
Delay time 10ms: The shorter delay time
allows for a quicker tripping of bounce-free
sensors (e.g. light arrays).
Sensor input automatic start/monitored Automatic start: The enabling circuits are
start
switched to the operative position, as soon
as the starting condition on sensor inputs
Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 have been fulfilled. The
start button connection terminal Y33 is not
queried.
Monitored start: The enabling circuits are
as the starting condition on sensor inputs
Y12, Y22, Y34 and 1 have been fulfilled and
the start button on terminal Y33 has
subsequently been actuated (start with the
falling edge).
Cascade input automatic start/
monitored start
Automatic start: The enabling circuits are

as the starting condition on cascade input 1
has been fulfilled, i.e. as soon as a static +24
V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3).
Monitored start: The enabling circuits are
as the starting condition on cascade input 1
has been fulfilled, i.e. as soon as a static +24
V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3) and the
start button on terminal Y33 has
subsequently been actuated (start with the
falling edge).
With/without start-up testing
After a voltage failure, start-up testing requires

that the sensors at Y12 and Y22 are actuated
once by the system operator.
With automatic starting/without

automatic starting after power failure
The DM-F Local can be parameterized, so that

the enabling circuits automatically switch to
the operative position after a power failure i.e.
without pressing the start button Y33.
Prerequisites:
Y12, Y22 or cascade input 1 are
parameterized for "monitored start".
The starting condition on the sensor inputs
and on the cascade input has been fulfilled.
Valid actuation of the start button prior to the
power failure i.e. the enabling circuits were in
the operative position.
Table 10-12: Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local) (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10-21
Standard functions

Before commissioning the DM-F PROFIsafe set the PROFIsafe address as
follows:
Switch position
Value
2 = 21
4 = 23
1=2
3=2
24
5=
6 = 25
16
32
7 = 26
64
8 = 27
128
9 = 28
256
10 = 29
512
Table 10-13: DIP switch settings (DM-F PROFIsafe)
When one DIP switch is set to ON, the respective value is active.
When more than one DIP switch is set to ON, the respective values must be added
up.
Briefly press the SET/RESET button.
LEDs from 1 to 10 show the current PROFIsafe address.
Setting the PROFIsafe address:
Switch off the supply voltage
Set the DIP switch configuration
Switch on the supply voltage.
SET/RESET button
Fig. 10-12: SET/RESET button
SIMOCODE pro
10-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
"Safe tripping" response 1)

Here, you set the SIMOCODE pro response to a safety-oriented tripping via
DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe.
Note:
The module response is not affected by this setting. In the event of the
conditions for safety-oriented tripping being fulfilled, the enabling circuits
are always opened!
Response
Safe tripping
Tripping
Deactivated
Signaling
Warning
Table 10-14: "Safe tripping" response
1) Note:
In the event that the option "DM-F LOCAL/PROFIsafe - separate function
from control function has been activated under "Motor control > Control
function > Operating mode", "Tripping" can no longer be set as response;
"Deactivated", "Signaling" or "Warning" are the only remaining options.
"Safe tripping" reset
Here, you can select manual or automatic acknowledging of SIMOCODE pro
faults caused by safety-oriented tripping (default: manual).
Reset:
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Manual, Auto
10-23
Standard functions
10.9
Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring)
Description
The "Watchdog" function block monitors communication with the PLC via
PROFIBUS DP, as well as the operating state of the PLC in the "Remote"
operating mode.
Schematic
Bus monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, the "Trip - Bus" fault is generated if
"Bus monitoring" is active
When, in the "Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1), the
Cyclic Data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted, e.g.
by the PROFIBUS DP connection being interrupted.
"Status - Bus o.k." can always be evaluated. If SIMOCODE pro is cyclically
exchanging data with the PLC,
"Status - Bus o.k." is set to "1".
PLC/PCS monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, "Trip - PLC/PCS" is generated if
"PLC/PCS monitoring" is activated.
The PROFIBUS DP switches to the "CLEAR" status when in the "Remote"
operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1).
The "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP
is in the "CLEAR" status, the "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" is set to "0".
If the "PLC/PCS monitoring - Input" is connected primarily to the "Cyclic
Receive - Bit 0.7" bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit only.
Watchdog (PLC/PCS monitoring)
Cyclic communication

Bus monitoring
PLC/PCS monitoring
PLC/PCS monitoring - Input

(level sensitive)
Status - PLC/PCS in Run

Status - Bus o.k. (Bus is active)
Trip - Bus
Trip - PLC/PCS
Bus response
Fig. 10-13: "Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring)" function block
Notice
"Bus monitoring" and "PLC/PCS monitoring" can only be effective if the DP
slave address monitoring is activated in the DP master system.
SIMOCODE pro
10-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Standard functions
Settings
Watchdog -
Description
PLC/PCS
monitoring - Input
Activates the "Watchdog" function block using the monitored signal

(arbitrary sockets
, e.g. control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Bus monitoring
Activated:
If a bus fault occurs, the "Trip - Bus" fault message is generated
and must be acknowledged
Deactivated:
No fault message; however, the "Status - Bus o.k." information
can be evaluated at anytime.
PLC/PCS
monitoring
Activated:
If an PLC fault occurs, the "Trip - PLC/PCS" fault message is
generated and must be acknowledged
Deactivated:
No fault message; however, the "Status - PLC/PCS in Run"
information can be evaluated at anytime.
Bus/PLC fault Reset
You can select whether faults are to be acknowledged

automatically or manually.
Range: Manual/Automatic
Table 10-15: Watchdog settings
"Bus fault"/"PLC/PCS fault" response

Response
Bus fault
PLC/PCS fault
Fault
Warning
Event
Deactivated
Table 10-16: "Bus fault"/"PLC/PCS fault" response
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
10-25
Standard functions
10.10
Timestamping
Description
SIMOCODE pro V can timestamp up to eight digital signals with high
temporal precision (10 ms). In the process, every change in the state of the
digital signal will be recorded.
Possible areas of application are:
Precise chronological recording of faults in a procedural system
Analysis of system interrelationships
Recording and signaling of time-critical signal changes
Prerequisite:
To use SIMOCODE pro V timestamping, the DP master being used must
support time synchronization functions via PROFIBUS (e.g. DP master
connections for SIMATIC S7 400), or a master clock must be used (e.g.
SICLOCK).
Process in STEP 7
Activation of the time synchronization for SIMOCODE pro V occurs
in STEP 7 HW Config in the slave properties under "Time Synchronization".
Notice
The set synchronization interval must correspond to the configuration of the
clock master.
For SIMOCODE pro, transmission of time-stamped information is analogous
to transmission with SIMATIC S7 IM 153-2.
Therefore, the "FB 62 TIMESTMP" function block can be used for further
processing of time-stamped information in the CPU, to transmit timestamped messages from the "Standard Library > Miscellaneous Blocks"
library.
Note
The "LADDR" parameter contains the diagnostic address of the DP slave
from STEP 7 HW Config.
LADDR2 contains the diagnostic address of slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro in the
DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master (integrated via OM SIMOCODE pro). For
all other configurations, LADDR2 will contain the same address as LADDR.
In contrast to the STEP7 FB62 online help, when integrating via GSD, the
slot number of the module is transmitted with Slot 1 for signal messages,
and with Slot 0 for special messages.
You will find further information about FB 62 in the STEP7 online help.
SIMOCODE pro
10-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
11
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the SIMOCODE pro logic
modules. Logic modules are function blocks which are modeled not only on
standard logic functions, e.g. truth tables (AND, OR,...), but also on counters
and timers. In addition to the predefined control functions, you can use this,
for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and
counter functions without depending on external components (relays).
Target groups
Configurators
Programmers.
Necessary knowledge
The basics of digital signal processing, e.g. timers, counters, etc.
Further function blocks > Logic modules.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-1
Logic modules
11.1
Introduction
Description
Freely programmable logic modules are function blocks that process input
signals and provide binary or analog output signals according to their
internal logic components. Logic modules can contain:
Plugs
An internal logic component
Sockets
Settings, e.g. the time for a timer.
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of a logic module:
Plug 1
Logic module
Socket 1 - n
(Logic component)
Plug n
Setting value
Fig. 11-1: General representation of a logic module

You can use the logic modules to carry out additional functions for your
application. These can be used, for example, to implement logical
operations, time relay functions and counter functions. Depending on the
device series, the system provides several logic modules:
SIMOCODE
Logic module
pro C
BU1
pro V
BU2
Number
Number
Truth tables 3 inputs/1 output
Truth tables 2 inputs/1 output
Truth tables 5 inputs/2 outputs
Timer
Counter
Signal conditioners
Non-volatile elements
Flashing
Flickering
Limit Monitor
Calculation modules (Calculator)*
Table 11-1: Freely-programmable logic modules
*) Only for basic unit 2 for version *E03* onwards
SIMOCODE pro
11-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
11.2
Truth table 3I/1O
Description
Truth table 3I/1O consists of:
Three plugs
One logic component
One socket.
You can choose from eight possible input conditions the ones with which to
generate an output signal.
Three truth tables, 1 to 3 for BU1
Six truth tables, 1 to 6 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 3I/1O" logic modules:
Input 1
Input 1
Truth Table 1 3I/1O

Output
Input 2
Input 3
Input 1
Input 1
Truth Table 3 3I/1O

Output
Input 3
Input 2
Output
Input 3
Input 2
Input 1
Truth Table 2 3I/1O
Input 2
Truth Table 4 3I/1O

Output
Input 2
Input 3
Input 1
Truth Table 5 3I/1O

Output
Input 3
Input 2
Truth Table 6 3I/1O

Output
Input 3
Fig. 11-2: "Truth Table for 3I/1O" logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-3
Logic modules
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:
Circuit:
S1
S2
S3
Q1
Q1 switches with:
(S1 or S2) and S3
or
S1 and S2 and S3
S1=
Input 1
S2=
Input 2
S3=
Input 3
Q1=
Output
Fig. 11-3: Example of a truth table
SIMOCODE pro
11-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
Circuit and parameterization

L1
N
Circuit:
Q1
BU Inputs
BU Outputs
BU
1
S1
Input 1
S2
Input 2
Truth Table 1 3I/1O

Output
Out1
3
S3
Input 3
Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Set bits for

output signals
Connect inputs, i.e.

Connecting plugs with sockets
Fig. 11-4: Example circuit and parameterization for truth table 3I/1O
Settings
Truth tables 1-6 3I/

1O Input 1 to 3
Description
Activate the truth table with any signal

(any sockets
Table 11-2: Settings for truth table 3I/1O
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-5
Logic modules
11.3
Truth table 2I/1O
Description
The truth table 2I/1O consists of:
2 plugs
One logic component
One socket.
You can choose from four possible input conditions the ones with which to
generate an output signal.
Overall, there are two truth tables (7 and 8) available for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 2I/1O" logic modules
Input 1
Input 1
Truth Table 7 2I/1O
Truth Table 8 2I/1O
Output
Output
Input 2
Input 2
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Circuit:
Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:
S1
S2
S1=
Input 1
S2=
Input 2
Q1=
Output
Q1 Q1 switches with:
S1 or S2
Fig. 11-6: Example of truth table 2I/1O
SIMOCODE pro
11-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
11.4
Truth table 5I/2O
Description
The truth table 5I/2O consists of:
Five plugs
One logic component
Two sockets.
You can choose from 32 possible input conditions the ones with which to
generate up to 2 output signals.
Overall, one truth table (9) is available for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 5I/2O" logic modules
Input 1
Truth Table 9 5I/2O
Input 2
Output 1
Input 3
Input 4
Output 2
Input 5
Settings
Truth table 9
5I/2O Input 1 to 5
Description
Activation by any signal

(any sockets
Table 11-3: Settings for truth table 5I/2O
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-7
Logic modules
11.5
Counter
Description
Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated
via the plugs "+" or "-".
The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The
counter is reset with "Reset".
The actual value is available as a socket for further processing and can also
be transmitted to the automation system.
Plug +: Increases the actual value by 1 (maximum: limit)
Plug : Decreases the actual value by 1 (minimum: 0).
Reset: Resets the actual value to 0.
The counter consists of:
3 plugs (input +, input and reset)
One logic component
One socket.
One "Actual value" analog socket with the current value in the range between
0 and the limit. It remains even if there is a voltage failure.
Two counters, 1 to 2 for BU1
Four counters, 1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Counter" logic modules:
Input +
Input
Reset
Input +
Limit
Output
Input
Actual value
Reset
Input +
Counter 3
Input
Reset
Input +
Counter 1
Limit
Output
Input
Actual value
Reset
Counter 2
Output
Limit
Actual value
Counter 4
Output
Limit
Actual value
Fig. 11-8: "Counter" logic modules
Note
The time between the events to be counted depends on:
- The input delay
- The device cycle time.
SIMOCODE pro
11-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
Note
The actual value remains the same
- During parameterization or failure of the supply voltage
- If there are simultaneous input signals at input + and input .
Note
The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.
Settings
Counters 1 to 4 -
Description
Input +
Increases the actual value by 1.

(any sockets
Input
Decreases the actual value by 1.

(any sockets
Reset
Resets the counter to 0 (count value and output)

(any sockets
Limit
The maximum value that can be reached when counting and where
the counter issues an output signal.
Range: 0 - 65535
Table 11-4: Counter settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-9
Logic modules
11.6
Timer
Description
The timer consists of:
Two plugs (input and reset)
One socket.
One "Actual value" analog socket with the actual value.
The actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and
can also be transmitted to the automation system.
If an input signal is pending, the timer can issue an output signal according
to the chosen timer type:
With closing delay
With closing delay with memory
With opening delay
Fleeting closing.
Two timers, 1 to 2 for BU1
Four timers, 1 to 4 for BU2
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Timer" logic modules
Input
Input
Timer 1
Timer 2
Output
Output
Type
Reset
Value
Input
Type
Actual value
Reset
Value
Input
Timer 3
Timer 4
Output
Output
Type
Reset
Value
Actual value
Type
Actual value
Reset
Value
Actual value
Fig. 11-9: "Timer" logic modules
Note
SIMOCODE pro
11-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
Note
The response of the plugs of all timers (input, reset) has been completely
changed to level-active for basic unit 1 from version *E05* and higher and
basic unit 2 from version *E03* and higher. Use of an unchanged parameter
file utilizing integrated timers may thus result in a different response if such
basic units are used. For example, if "Fixed level - '1'" is set at the timer
input, the timer function is automatically restarted after the timer reset
occurs. However, in timers with the parameterized type = "Fleeting closing"
there is no change in the response.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-11
Logic modules
Output response of the timer

(Basic unit 1 before version *E05* and basic unit 2 before version *E03*)
With closing delay:
Input
Reset
Time
t
Output
With closing delay with memory:

Input
Reset
Time
t
Output
With opening delay:
Input
Reset
Time
t
Output
Fleeting closing:
Input
Reset
Time
t
Output
Fig. 11-10: Output response of the timer (basic unit 1 before version *E05* and basic unit 2 before
version *E03*)
SIMOCODE pro
11-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
Output response of the timer

(Basic unit 1 from version *E05* onwards and basic unit 2 from version *E03* onwards)
With closing delay:
Input
Reset
Time
t
Output
With closing delay with memory:

Input
Reset
Time
t
Output
With opening delay:

Input
Reset
Time
t
Output
Fleeting closing:
Input
Reset
Time
t
Output
Fig. 11-11: Output response of the timer (basic unit 1 from version *E05* onwards and basic unit 2
from version *E03* onwards)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-13
Logic modules
Settings
Timers 1 to 4 -
Description
Input

(arbitrary sockets
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset
Resets the actual value to 0.

(arbitrary sockets
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type
Different output responses

Range: Closing delay, closing delay with memory,
opening delay, fleeting closing
Value
Time during which the timer provides an output signal when

activated, depending on the output response (type)
Range: 0 to 65535, unit 100 ms
Table 11-5: Timer settings
SIMOCODE pro
11-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
11.7
Signal conditioner
Description
If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioner can issue an output
signal according to the chosen signal conditioner type:
Non-inverting
Inverting
Edge rising with memory
Edge falling with memory.
You can set the output response.
The signal conditioner consists of:
One logic component
One socket.
Two signal conditioners for BU1 (signal conditioners 1 to 2)
Four signal conditioners for BU2 (signal conditioners 1 to 4).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Signal Conditioner" logic modules:
Input
Input
Signal Conditioner 1
Output
Reset
Output
Reset
Type
Input
Type
Input
Output
Reset
Output
Reset
Type
Type
Fig. 11-12: "Signal Conditioner" logic modules
Note
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-15
Logic modules
Types of signals/output responses
Level not inverted

Input
Reset
Output
Level inverted
Input
Reset
Output

Input
Reset
Output
Edge falling with memory

Input
Reset
Output
Fig. 11-13: Types of signals/output responses of the signal conditioners
SIMOCODE pro
11-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "Level inverted" type of signal:
Input
Reset
Output
Schematic
Input
Reset
>
=
Output
Table 11-6: NOR function
Settings
Signal conditioner
1 to 4 -
Description
Input

(any sockets
,
Reset
Resets the signal conditioner to 0.

(any sockets
,
Type

Range:
Level not inverted, level inverted,
edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory
Table 11-7: Signal conditioner settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-17
Logic modules
11.8
Non-volatile elements
Description
Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioners.
The output signals remain after failure of the supply voltage.
If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioner can issue an output
signal according to the chosen signal conditioner type:
Non-inverting
Inverting
Edge falling with memory.
You can set the output response.
The non-volatile element consists of:
One logic component
One socket.
Two non-volatile elements 1 to 2 for BU1
Four non-volatile elements 1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Non-volatile Element" logic modules
Input
Input
Non-vol. Elem. 1
Non-vol. Elem. 2
Output
Reset
Output
Reset
Type
Input
Type
Input
Non-vol. Elem. 1
Non-vol. Elem. 2
Output
Reset
Output
Reset
Type
Type
Fig. 11-14: "Non-volatile Element" logic modules
Note
SIMOCODE pro
11-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
Types of signals/output responses
Level not inverted

Input
Reset
Output
Level inverted
Input
Reset
Output
Voltage failure
Input
Reset
Output
Edge falling with memory
Voltage failure
Input
Reset
Output
Fig. 11-15: Signal types/output responses of non-volatile elements
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-19
Logic modules
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "Level inverted" type of signal:
Input
Reset
Output
Schematic
Input
Reset
>
=
Output
Table 11-8: NOR function
Settings
Non-volatile
elements
1 to 4 -
Description
Input

(any sockets
Reset
Resets the signal conditioner to 0.

(any sockets
Type

Range: Level not inverted, level inverted,
edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory
Table 11-9: Non-volatile element settings
SIMOCODE pro
11-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
11.9
Flashing
Description
If an input signal is pending at its plug, the "Flashing" logic module provides
a signal at its socket, which alternates between binary 0 and 1 with a fixed
frequency of 1 Hz. You can use this to make the LEDs on the operator panel
flash.
The logic module consists of:
One plug
One logic component
One socket.
Overall, three logic modules, "Flashing 1" through to "Flashing 3" are available
for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flashing" logic modules
Flashing 1
Flashing 2
Output
Input
Input
Output
Flashing 3
Output
Input
Fig. 11-16: "Flashing" logic modules
Settings
Flashing 1 to 3 Input
Description
(any sockets
, e.g. device inputs, status information, status, etc.)
Table 11-10: Flashing settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-21
Logic modules
11.10
Flickering
Description
You can use the "Flickering" logic modules to assign the "Flickering" function
to the operator panel LEDs (for example).
If an input signal is pending, the "Flickering" function block issues an output
signal with a frequency of 4 Hz.
The function block consists of:
One plug
One logic component
One socket.
Overall, three logic modules, "Flickering 1" through to "Flickering 3" are available
for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flickering" logic modules:
Flickering 1
Flickering 2
Output
Input
Input
Output
Flickering 3
Output
Input
Fig. 11-17: "Flickering" logic modules
Settings
Flickering 1 to 3 Input
Description
(any sockets
,
e. g. status information etc.)
Table 11-11: Flickering settings
SIMOCODE pro
11-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
11.11
Limit monitor
Description
Any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) can be monitored
for limit overshooting or limit undershooting. The limit monitor issues the
"Limit" signal at its socket. In addition, limit monitors can be "marked"
according to their function. Example: Monitoring the individual sensor
measuring circuits of the temperature module (Temperature 1 - 3) for
overtemperature.
The limit monitor consists of:
One analog plug
One logic component
One socket.
Overall, there are 4 limit monitors (1 to 4) available for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Limit Monitor" logic modules:
Limit Monitor 1
Type
Input
Limit
Event Limit value 1
Type
Input
Limit
Activity
Activity
Response
Response
(Marking)
(Marking)
Limit Monitor 3
Limit Monitor 4
Type
Input
Limit Monitor 2
Limit
Event Limit value 3
Type
Input
Limit
Activity
Activity
Response
Response
(Marking)
(Marking)
Event Limit value 2
Event Limit value 4
Fig. 11-18: "Limit Monitor" logic modules
Response
Response
Tripping
Warning
Signaling
Disabled
Delay
Limit 1 to 4
X
0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 11-12: Limit response

information".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-23
Logic modules
Functional principle
The limit signal issued depends on
The operating state of the motor
The TPF function
The parameterized "Activity":
ON
ON+
RUN
RUN+.
The following display shows a flow chart with the different "activity"
parameters.
Activity
Class time
OFF
Start
Motor is running
OFF
"ON"
Not with TPF 1)
"ON+"
Not with TPF 1)
"RUN"
Not with TPF 1)
"RUN+"
Time
1)
TPF: There is test position feedback, the motor feeder is in the test
position, i.e. its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the
control voltage is connected.
Fig. 11-19: Limit monitor activity
SIMOCODE pro
11-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
Settings
Limit Monitor
Description
Input
Analog plug of the limit monitor to be connected with the analog

value (2 bytes) which is to be monitored,
e.g. maximum current I_max, cooling down period, actual value of
timers, etc.)
Type
Specifies if the limit has to be monitored for overshooting or

undershooting.
Activity
Determines in which motor operating state the limit monitor is to

be evaluated:
ON, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is
running or not
ON+, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is
running or not
Exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in the test position
RUN, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is in the ON state and not in
the test position (TPF)
RUN+, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is running and the start-up
procedure is finished (i.e. the "Start active" message is no longer
pending) and there is no test position feedback (TPF); Example:
Cos phi monitoring.
Limit
Monitor response value. The return value is always determined by

the "Limit monitor - Delay" parameter.
Range: 0 - 65535.
Delay
Specifies the time period for which the limit must be constantly
overshot before the "Event - Limit" output is set.
Range: 0 - 25.5 s (0.5 s).
Marking

"Limit>"; Range: Up to 10 characters.
Table 11-13: Limit monitor settings
Note
When using limit monitors, always ensure that the correct range and unit
are used for the analog values connected to the limit input. These always
have a direct influence on the unit of the limit value to be set. The units and
the ranges of all relevant analog values can be found in Chapter B.9 "Data
record 94 - Measured values" and Chapter B.10 "Data record 95 - Service
data/statistical data".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-25
Logic modules
Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro:
Unit
Range
Temperatures (e.g. max. temperature)
1K
0 - 65535
Operating hours
1s
0 - 1193046
Motor stop time
1h
0 - 65535
Active power
1W
0 - 4294967295
Apparent power
1 VA
0 - 4294967295
Timer actual value
100 ms
0 - 65535
Currents (e.g. max. current I_max)
1% of Is
0 - 66535
0 - 27648 (S7 format)
Table 11-14: Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro
Thus, for example, a limit of 473 (K) should be parameterized for a limit
monitor to monitor a maximum temperature of 200 C.
SIMOCODE pro
11-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
11.12
Calculators (calculation modules)
Description
Both the "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" logic modules integrated in basic
unit 2 contain the standard calculation modes and enable all analog values
that occur in SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated and converted, e.g.
Conversion of the measured temperatures from K (Kelvin) to F or C
Conversion of the motor current from [%] to [A]
Conversion of the 0/4 - 20 mA signals of the analog module directly into fill
levels, pressures and flow rates.
The analog value (2 bytes/1 word) present at the analog sockets is
calculated using a defined formula and using freely-selectable parameters
(counters, denominators, operators, offsets). The result of the calculation is
output as an analog value at the analog socket of the logic module
(2 bytes/1 word) for further processing.
Each calculator consists of:
One analog plug (calculator 1) or two analog plugs (calculator 2)
One logic component
One analog socket.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Calculator" logic modules
Calculator 1
Counter
Input
Denominator
Offset
Output
Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2
Input 1
Operating mode
Counter 1
Denominator 1
Input 2
Output
Range: 0 - 65535
Operator
Offset
Counter 2
Denominator 2
Fig. 11-20: "Calculator" logic modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-27
Logic modules
Operating modes for calculator 2

The mode of the "Calculator 2" logic module can be changed via the
"Operating mode" parameter:
Operating mode 1
The analog value at input 1 is combined with the analog value at input 2 via a
pre-defined formula, using the specified parameters (counters, denominators,
offsets, operators).
The result is available as an analog value at the output of the function block
for further processing (1 word/2 bytes).
Operating mode 2
The analog values at input 1 and input 2 are processed together as a double
word. Input 1 represents the high word and input 2 the low word. The result
is calculated using the formula defined for this operating mode and using the
specified parameters (counters, denominators, offsets) and is output from
the function block as 1 word/2 bytes. In operating mode 2 it is also possible
to process double words (e.g. active power, apparent power) and to generate
2 bytes/1 word.
SIMOCODE pro
11-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Logic modules
Settings
Calculator
Description
Calculator 1 - Input
Any value (2 bytes/1 word)

Range: 0 - 65535
Calculated value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 - 65535
Range: -32766 to +32767, increment 1
Range: 0 - 255, increment 1
Range: 0 - 65535
Range: 0 - 65535
Range: 0 - 65535
1 or 2
+, -, *, /
Calculator 1 - Output
Calculator 1 - Counter
Calculation 1 - Denominator
Calculator 1 - Offset
Calculator 2 - Input 1
Calculator 2 - Input 2
Calculator 2 - Output
Calculator 2
Calculator 2
Calculator 2
Calculator 2
Calculator 2
Calculator 2
Calculator 2
Counter 1
Denominator 1
Counter 2 1)
Denominator 2 1)
Offset
Operating mode
Operator 1)
1) Only relevant for operating mode = 1

Table 11-15: Calculator settings
Formulae
Calculator 1
Input
Output
Counter
Denominator
Input
Offset
Calculator 2
Input 1
Input 2
Counter 1
Denominator 1
Output
Counter 2
Input 1
Operator
Denominator 2
Input 2
Offset
Operating mode 1
Calculator 2
Input 1
(High)
Output
Counter 1
Input 2
(Low)
Denominator 1
Input 1, input 2
Offset
Operating mode 2
Fig. 11-21: Calculator formulae
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
11-29
Logic modules
Examples
Example 1
Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from
K to C
TM Inputs
Calculator 1
Max. temperature
Unit = 1 K
Sensor type
1
* Input +
-273
0 ... 65535 C
Out of range
Fig. 11-22: Example 1
Example 2
Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from
K to F
TM Inputs
Calculator 1
Max. temperature
Unit = 1 K
Sensor type
9
* Input +
-460
0 ... 65535 F
Out of range
Example 3
Conversion of the motor current I_max. from % to A (e.g. set current
Is = 3.36 A) (only possible for motors with one rotational speed)
Calculator 1
336
* Input +
Max. current I_max

Unit = 1 %
0 ... 3427 (0 ... 34.72 A)
100
SIMOCODE pro
11-30
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
12
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the options of SIMOCODE pro
communication, e.g. communication with a PLC. The default receive, send
and diagnostics data settings are sufficient for almost all applications and as
such, the parameterization only has to be changed to a small extent.
Otherwise, you can adapt the settings of the individual bits specifically for
your application.
Target groups
Configurators
PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You will find the following dialogs in SIMOCODE ES:
Device Parameters > Bus Parameters
Further function blocks > Outputs > Acyclic send data
Further function blocks >Outputs > Cyclic send data.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-1
Communication
12.1
Definitions
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol (decentralized peripherals). The
main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange between the central
DP master and the I/O devices.
PROFIBUS DPV1
PROFIBUS DPV1 is an extension of the DP protocol. It enables acyclic data
exchange of parameter, diagnostic, receive and test data.
DP master
A master is designated as a DP master if it works with the DP protocol
according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Class 1 master
A class 1 master is an active station on the PROFIBUS DP. The cyclic data
exchange with other stations is characteristic for this type of master. Typical
class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.
Class 2 master
A class 2 master is an optional station on the PROFIBUS DP.
Typical class 2 masters are, for example:
PC/programming devices with the SIMOCODE ES software
SIMATIC PDM (PCS7)
PC with SIMATIC powercontrol software (power management).
DPV1 slave
A slave is designated as a DPV1 slave if it is operated on the PROFIBUS bus
with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50 170
standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
GSD
Device data (GSD) include DP slave descriptions in a uniform format. Using
GSD (device data) makes it easier to parameterize the DP slaves in a DP
master system.
OM SIMOCODE pro
OM SIMOCODE pro (object manager) is used instead of GSD (device data)
to integrate SIMOCODE pro into STEP7.
OM SIMOCODE pro enables the use of SIMOCODE ES (if it is installed) for
parameterization within STEP7.
SIMOCODE pro
12-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
SIMATIC PDM
Software package for the configuration, parameterization, commissioning
and maintenance of devices (e.g. transducers, controllers, SIMOCODE) and
for configuring networks and PCs.
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave
A SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a slave which is fully integrated into STEP7. It
is connected via OM SIMOCODE pro. It supports the S7 model (diagnostic
alarms, process alarms).
Writing data
Writing data means that data is transmitted to the SIMOCODE pro system.
Reading data
Reading data means that data is transmitted from the SIMOCODE pro
system.
PROFIsafe
A safety profile developed and tested according to IEC 61508 for the widelyused PROFIBUS and PROFINET fieldbus protocols.
The PROFIsafe profile determines how failsafe safety devices (e.g.
EMERGENCY-STOP buttons) are connected to programmable controllers via
PROFIBUS.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-3
Communication
12.2
Data transfer
Options for data transfer

The following figure shows the options for data transfer:
Class 1 master
SIMATIC S7 with PROFIBUS DP communication processor
Class 2 master
PC or programming device with
SIMOCODE ES
Maximum of two class

2 masters possible
Data transfer to class 1 master,

depending on the slave operating
mode (see Chapter 12.5.1 "Slave
operating modes")
PROFIBUS DPV1 standard extension: Parameterization,

diagnostics, receiving, sending, testing via PROFIBUS DPV1
PC/programming devices with

SIMOCODE ES
Parameterizing, diagnostics, receiving,
sending, testing via system interface
Fig. 12-1: Options for data transfer
Communication principle
The following figure shows the communication principle and the way data is
transmitted depending on the master and slave operating modes:
Class 1 master
Cyclic I/O
Class 2 master (max. 2)

PLC CPU
Acyclic
Acyclic
Acyclic
PC or PCS
e.g. SIMOCODE ES
PLC
Communication processor
Configuration
GSD
Startup
parameter
block
SIMOCODE pro
3UF7
Diagnostics
DPV0
Cyclic send data
Cyclic receive data
DPV1
Alarms
Parameter
Data records
Data records
DPV1
Fig. 12-2: Communication principle
SIMOCODE pro
12-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
12.3
Failsafe data transfer via PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe

From version E07, SIMOCODE pro V supports safe tripping of motors by
means of data transfer via the PROFIsafe profile in connection with a
failsafe controller (F-CPU) and the SIMOCODE pro expansion module
DM-F PROFIsafe.
You can find further information on this function in the system manual "Failsafe
Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-5
Communication
12.4
Telegram description and data access
12.4.1
Cyclic data
Cyclic data is exchanged between the PROFIBUS DP master and the DP
slave once every DP cycle. The PROFIBUS DP master module then sends
the receive data to SIMOCODE pro.
In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the send data to the master module.
Cyclic data is accessed via the inputs (send data) and outputs (receive data)
in the PLC program.
The length of the cyclic data which is to be transferred is already set when
SIMOCODE pro is integrated into the DP master system. This is achieved by
selecting the basic type which in turn determines the structure and the
length of the cyclic data.
The following basic types are available:
Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro:
Designation
Basic type 1
Length
Designation
Information
4 bytes of receive data Cyclic Receive Bit 0.0 to 1.7
BU2
Cyclic Receive Analog value

Basic type 2
2 bytes of receive data Cyclic Receive Bit 0.0 to 1.7
BU1
BU2
PROFIsafe
5 bytes of receive data 1 bit user data, assigned

permanently to the relay
enabling circuits
BU2
Table 12-1: Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro
Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master:

Designation
Basic type 1
Length
10 bytes send data
Designation
Cyclic Send Bit 0.0 to 1.7
Cyclic Send Analog inputs 1 to 4
Basic type 2
4 bytes send data
Cyclic Send Bit 0.0 to 1.7

Cyclic Send Analog Input 1
PROFIsafe
4 byte inputs
No user data
Information
BU2
BU1
BU2
BU2
Table 12-2: Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master
The cyclic data contents (digital/analog information) is set by

parameterization, e.g. with the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
The cyclic I/O data is already preset when the type of application (control
functions) is selected when the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization
software is started (see Chapter B.21 "Assignment of cyclic receive and
send data for predefined control functions").
SIMOCODE pro
12-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
12.4.2
Diagnostics data and alarms

Diagnostics data contains important information about the status of
SIMOCODE pro. This simplifies troubleshooting.
In contrast to cyclic data, the diagnostics data is only transmitted to the
master module if it changes.
PROFIBUS DP differentiates between:
Standard diagnostics
Status information
Channel-related diagnostics
Process and diagnostic alarms according to DPV1.
Configure diagnostic response

In SIMOCODE pro, you can set which diagnostic events trigger the
transmission of diagnostics data or the alarms to the PLC:
Diagnostics for device faults, e.g. parameterization errors, hardware faults
Diagnostics for process faults:
For events which are marked with "F" in the "DP Diagnostics" column in
Table B-9: Data record 92 - Diagnostics
diagnostics data or alarms are transferred to the PLC.
Diagnostics for process warnings:
For events which are marked with "W" in the "DP Diagnostics" column in
Diagnostics for process events:
For events which are marked with "E" in the "DP Diagnostics" column in
Set the response in the Device Parameters > Bus Parameters >
Diagnosis.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-7
Communication
12.4.3
Configuration of the slave diagnostics
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Station status 1 to 3
Byte 3
Master PROFIBUS address
Byte 4
Byte 5
High byte
Low byte
Byte 6
Byte 7
Identification-related diagnostics
Byte 8
.
.
.
Byte 27
Standard
diagnostics
Manufacturer's
identification
Status information
Byte 28
Byte 29
Byte 30
(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)
Byte 31
Byte 32
Byte 33
(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)
Byte 28+n
.
.
.
Byte 48+n
Diagnostic alarm (temporary)
Byte 28+n
.
.
.
Byte 48+n
Process alarm (temporary)
Advanced
diagnostics
Fig. 12-3: Configuration of the slave diagnostics
The maximum length of the diagnostic telegram is 62 bytes.
SIMOCODE pro
12-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
Station status - definition

The station status provides an overview of the state of a DP slave.
Station status 1
Bit
Meaning
Cause/corrective measures
The DP slave cannot be

addressed by the DP master.
Check the following:

Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on
the DP slave?
Is the bus connection plug plugged in?
Is the DP slave connected to the power
supply?
Is the RS-485 repeater configured
correctly?
The DP slave is not yet ready for the The DP slave is just starting up.
data transfer.
Wait until the startup is completed.
The configuration data sent from the

DP master to the DP slave does not
correspond to the configuration of
the DP slave.
Check whether the correct station type and

the correct configuration of the DP slave
has been entered in the configuration
software.
External diagnostics is available

(general diagnostics display)
Evaluate the identification-related

diagnostics, the status information and/or
the channel-related diagnostics.
Bit 3 is reset as soon as all errors are
rectified. The bit is reset if there is a new
diagnostic message in the bytes of the
above-mentioned diagnostic functions.
The required function is not

supported by the DP slave
Check the configuration.
The DP master cannot interpret the

response of the DP slave.
Check the bus configuration.
The DP slave type does not

correspond to the software
configuration.
Enter the correct station type in the

configuration software.
The DP slave has been

parameterized by another DP master
(not by the DP master which has
access to the DP slave at the
moment).
Bit is always 1 when you are accessing the

DP slave from the programming device or
from another DP master (for example).
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master
which parameterized the DP slave is in the
"Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic
byte.
Table 12-3: Configuration of station status 1 (byte 0)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-9
Communication
Station status 2
Bit
Meaning
The DP slave must be parameterized again.
There is a diagnostic message. The DP slave will not function until the fault is
rectified (static diagnostic message).
The bit is always "1" when the DP slave with this PROFIBUS address is present.
Address monitoring is activated for this DP slave.
The DP slave received the "FREEZE" control command 1).
The DP slave received the "SYNC" control command 1) .
0: Bit is always "0".
The DP slave is deactivated, i.e. it is decoupled from the current

processing.
1) Bit is only updated if another diagnostic message also changes.

Table 12-4: Configuration of station status 2 (byte 1)
Station status 3
Station status 3 is not relevant for the slave diagnostics.
Bit
0 to 7
Meaning
Bits are always "0".
Table 12-5: Configuration of station status 3
Master PROFIBUS address - definition

The PROFIBUS address of the DP master (class 1 master) is stored in the
"Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte which:
Parameterized the DP slave
Has read and write access to the DP slave.
The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.
Manufacturer's identification - definition
A code is stored in the manufacturer's identification which describes the DP
slave type.
Byte 4
80H
Byte 5
FDH
Manufacturer's identification for

SIMOCODE pro
Table 12-6: Configuration of the manufacturer's identification
SIMOCODE pro
12-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
Identification-related diagnostics - definition

Identification-related diagnostics begins at byte 6 and is 2 bytes long.
Identification-related diagnostics - configuration
7 6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 6 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
= 0x42
Length of identification-related diagnostics
including byte 6 (= 2 bytes)
Code for identification-related diagnostics
7 6 5
0 Bit number
GSD
Byte 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x
0: Identification-related diagnostics is not available
1: Identification-related diagnostics is available
6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 7 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0
OM SIMOCODE pro
0: Identification-related diagnostics is not available

1: Identification-related diagnostics is available
Fig. 12-4: Configuration of identification-related diagnostics
Status information - definition

The status information provides the detailed status of SIMOCODE pro.
If SIMOCODE pro is operated downstream from the Y-link (module for
connecting single-channel DP slaves to S7-400H), the so-called H_STATUS is
also signaled (see Fig. 12-6 "H_STATUS configuration").
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-11
Communication
Status information - configuration

The status information is configured as follows:
Byte 8
7 6 5
0 Bit number
= 0x14
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Length of the status information
including byte 8 (= 20 bytes)
7
Byte 9
0
Status information
0x81
7
Byte 10
Byte 11
0x00
7
Slot number
GSD:
0x01
OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
..
.
Byte 12
Detailed status information
Byte 27
Fig. 12-5: Status information configuration
Detailed status information can be found in Chapter A.5 "Detailed messages

of the slave diagnostics".
SIMOCODE pro
12-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
The H_STATUS is configured as follows:

7 6 5
Bit number
Byte 8
Length of H_STATUS including byte 8
Code for device-related diagnostics
Bit number
Byte 9
0x1E = Switching by DP master
0x1F = H_STATUS
7
Byte 10
0
0x00
Always "0"
Byte 11
Not relevant
Byte 12
Not relevant
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte 13
H_STATUS
0 0
Deactivated
Activated
Hardware fault
Data exchange
Master - state - clear
Baud rate detected
Byte 14
Byte 15
0x04
0x00
Always "4"
Always "0"
Fig. 12-6: H_STATUS configuration
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-13
Communication
Channel-related diagnostics - definition

Channel-related diagnosis is a detailed version of the identification-related
diagnostics. It supplies information about the device faults of
SIMOCODE pro.
Channel-related diagnostics - configuration
The channel-related diagnostics is configured as follows:
6 5
Byte 28 1 0 0 0 0 0 x
0 Bit number
x
0x80 GSD
0x83 OM SIMOCODE pro
Code for channel-related diagnostics
7 6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 29 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Input/output channel
6 5
0 Bit number
Byte 30 0 0 0
Error type 9 or 16 (table below)

Channel type:
000B: No special channel type
Byte 31 to
byte 33
Next channel-related diagnostic message

(Allocation as for byte 28 to 30)
Fig. 12-7: Configuration of the channel-related diagnostics
The block for the channel-related diagnostics, which has a length of 3 bytes,
is either missing (if there is no channel-related diagnostics) or is available
once or twice.
Error types
The diagnostic message is output on channel 0.
No.
Error type
Meaning/cause
F9
01001:
Error
Internal fault/device fault

Error during self-test
F16
10000:
Parameterization
error
Incorrect parameter value
Exact information: See

Chapter B.8 "Data record
92 - Device diagnostics".
Table 12-7: Error types
SIMOCODE pro
12-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
Alarms - diagnostic alarm

Device errors or parameter errors are alarm sources for diagnostic alarms.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a diagnostic alarm, the OB 82 diagnostic
alarm is started in the SIMATIC S7.
Diagnostic alarm - configuration
The diagnostic alarm is configured as follows:
Byte 28+n 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
= 0x14
Length of the diagnostic alarm

including header byte (= 20 bytes)
7
Byte 29+n
0
Diagnostic alarm
0x01
7
Byte 30+n
Byte 31+n
0x00
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Slot number
GSD:
0x01
Bit number
Byte 32+n
Contents of data record 1
Byte 48+n
n = 0; 3; 6
Fig. 12-8: Configuration of the diagnostic alarm
The first byte of the block for diagnostic alarms can be moved by 3 or 6
bytes depending on the number of blocks for channel-related diagnostics.
You will find a detailed description of the information contained in data
record 1 in Chapter B.2 "Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-15
Communication
Alarms - process alarm

Process faults, warnings and status information are alarm sources for
process alarms.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a process alarm, the OB 40 process alarm
is started in the SIMATIC S7.
Process alarm - configuration
The process alarm is configured as follows:
7 6 5
0
Byte 28+n 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Bit number
= 0x14
Length of the process alarm

including header byte (= 20 bytes)
7
Byte 29+n
0
Process alarm
0x02
7
Byte 30+n
Byte 31+n
0x00
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Slot number
GSD:
0x01
Bit number
Byte 32+n
Detailed status information
Byte 48+n
n = 0; 3; 6
Fig. 12-9: Configuration of the process alarm
The first byte of the block for process alarms can be moved by 3 or 6 bytes
depending on the number of blocks for channel-related diagnostics.
Detailed status information can be found in Chapter A.5 "Detailed messages
of the slave diagnostics".
SIMOCODE pro
12-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
12.5
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems
12.5.1
Slave operating modes

The following table shows an overview of the slave operating modes which
SIMOCODE pro can be operated with on the class 1 master:
Class 1 master
SIMOCODE pro
connected as:
DP master
manufacturerindependent,
without DPV1 alarms
DP master
manufacturerindependent,
with DPV1 alarms
S7 master
DPV1 slave
via GSD
Cyclic data
exchange
Standard
diagnostics
Status information
Parameterization
during startup (only
BU1)
Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records (if
supported by the
master)
Cyclic data
exchange
Standard
diagnostics
Status information
Process and
diagnostic alarm
Parameterization
BU1)
Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
Cyclic data
exchange
Standard
diagnostics
Status information
Process and
diagnostic alarm
Parameterization
BU1)
Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
Cyclic data
exchange
Standard
diagnostics
Process and
diagnostic alarm
Parameterization
during startup
Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
S7 slave via
OM
SIMOCODE pro
Table 12-8: Slave operating modes of SIMOCODE pro
12.5.2
Preparing the data transfer

In order to communicate with the class 1 master (PLC), a connection
according to Table 12-8: Slave operating modes of SIMOCODE pro must be
present and the PROFIBUS-DP address must be configured.
See Chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP address" for more
information about setting the address.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-17
Communication
12.5.3
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the

configuration software
SIMOCODE pro is connected as a standard slave in your system via the
GSD file.
You can download the GSD file
From the internet at http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd (switchgears).
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro C:
SI0180FD.GSG (German)
SI0180FD.GSE (English).
SI0180FD.GSF (French).
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro V:
SI1280FD.GSG (German)
SI1280FD.GSE (English).
SI1280FD.GSF (French).
Notice
If you want to utilize the complete functionality of SIMOCODE pro (e.g.
timestamping), your configuration tool must support GSD files - Rev. 5 such
as STEP7 V5.3 and higher.
The following table describes how to integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7
and SIMOCODE pro from the hardware catalog.
Step
STEP7 , V5.1+SP2 onwards
Start STEP7 and in the HW Config select the menu command

"Options > Install GSD file".
In the following dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm
with "OK" -->. The field device is displayed in the hardware catalog in the
"PROFIBUS DP" directory under "Other field devices > Switching devices
> SIMOCODE pro".
Enter "SIMOCODE pro C" or "SIMOCODE pro V" on the PROFIBUS.
Only for SIMOCODE pro V:
SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or
basic type 2). See Chapter 12.4.1 "Cyclic data". The default is basic type 2.
If you wish to use "basic type 1", delete the default "basic type 2" module
and insert "basic type 1" instead.
Only for the failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe: Insert the
"PROFIsafe" module into the second position (in addition to "basic type 1"
or "basic type 2").
You can find further information on using DM-F PROFIsafe in the system
manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY".
Check the set DP alarm mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the release of
the DPV1 alarms in the properties of the DP slave.
These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostics data and alarms
(see Chapter 12.6 "Evaluating diagnostics data" and Chapter 10.10
"Timestamping").
Only for SIMOCODE pro C:
It is possible to set the device parameters which are automatically
transmitted to SIMOCODE pro during every startup in the object
properties under "Parameterization > Device-specific parameters" (see
Chapter 12.8.3 "Parameter data during startup").
3
4
Table 12-9: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuration software
SIMOCODE pro
12-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
12.5.4
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via

GSD) in STEP7 HW Config
SIMOCODE pro can be integrated as a PDM object in the STEP7 HW Config
of the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) software from version 6.0 +
SP1 onwards. The PDM option "Integration in STEP7" is required for this.
The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro as a PDM
object in the STEP7 HW Config from the hardware catalog.
Step
STEP7 , V5.1+SP2 onwards
Start STEP7 and open the "HW Config".
To integrate SIMOCODE pro as a PDM object, navigate to the

"PROFIBUS DP > Devices" directory in the hardware catalog.
Enter
"SIMOCODE pro C (PDM)" or
"SIMOCODE pro V (PDM)" on the PROFIBUS.
basic type 2). See Chapter 12.4.1 "Cyclic data". The default is basic type 2.
If you wish to use "basic type 1", delete the default "basic type 2" module
and insert "basic type 1" instead.
Only for the failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe: Insert the
"PROFIsafe" module into the second position (in addition to "basic type 1"
or "basic type 2".)
manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY ".
Check the set DP alarm mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the release of
the DPV-1 alarms in the properties of the DP slave.
These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostics data and alarms
(see Chapter 12.6 "Evaluating diagnostics data" and Chapter 10.10
"Timestamping").
Start SIMATIC PDM to create the device parameters by double clicking on

the slave symbol (see Chapter 12.8.2 "SIMATIC PDM").
Table 12-10:
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via GSD) in
STEP7 HW Config
12-19
Communication
12.5.5
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro

The "OM SIMOCODE pro" software must be installed to utilize the
advantages of SIMOCODE ES and parameterize SIMOCODE pro from the
STEP7 HW Config. OM SIMOCODE pro is included in the scope of supply
of the "SIMOCODE ES Premium" software.
Install the corresponding software.
The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro in
the STEP7 HW Config from the hardware catalog.
Step
STEP7
Start STEP7 and open the "HW Config".
To integrate SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave, navigate in the hardware

catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP > Devices > Motor Management System"
directory.
Enter
SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 1) or
SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 2) on the PROFIBUS.
basic type 2). See Chapter 12.4.1 "Cyclic data".
Insert the desired basic type "basic type 1" or "basic type 2" as a module.
Only for the failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe: Insert the desired
basic type "Basic type 1 - PROFIsafe" or "Basic type 2 - PROFIsafe" as a
module.
manual "Failsafe Digital Modules
SIMOCODE pro SAFETY".
Start the "SIMOCODE ES" software to generate the device parameters

with the "Parameters" button under "Parameters" in the object properties
of slot 4 of this S7 slave. The created parameters are incorporated in
STEP7 and are automatically transmitted to SIMOCODE pro during
startup
(see Chapter 12.8.3 "Parameter data during startup").
Table 12-11: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro
If SIMOCODE pro is integrated as an S7 slave you can use the routing

function in connection with SIMOCODE ES Premium. A prerequisite for
using this function is that a network connection (for example via Industrial
Ethernet) can be established between the PC with SIMOCODE ES installed
and the SIMATIC controller which supports routing.
In this manner, routing can be used to reach all SIMOCODE pro devices that
are connected to the controller.
SIMOCODE pro
12-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
12.6
Evaluating diagnostics data

The way in which the diagnostics data is read out depends in which DP
master system you have integrated SIMOCODE pro and how the integration
was carried out (see Chapter 12.5 "Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP
master systems").
12.6.1
SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD
DP master with DPV1 alarm support (DPV1 alarm mode)

(e.g. all newer SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
The diagnostics data is transmitted and evaluated via diagnostic alarms in
DP master systems with DPV1 alarm support.
A precondition is that the alarms in the PROFIBUS configuration tool
(diagnostic alarms, process alarms) are enabled.
You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been carried
out and whether the alarms are enabled using the configuration tool in the
properties of the DP slave. In SIMATIC STEP7 this is carried out in HW
Config via the properties of the DP slave.
Response and process in STEP7
A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new device fault,
whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for all new process faults,
warnings and status information. If OB 82 or OB 40 are not programmed, the
CPU goes into "STOP" mode.
Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP7
The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM".
The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO"
parameter contains the alarm information described in Section "Diagnostic
alarm - configuration" and Section "Process alarm - configuration". The first
byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.
Note
The interface of the SFB 54 "RALRM" is identical to the FB "RALRM" as
defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy
Function Blocks according to IEC 61131-3" standard.
You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.
DP master without DPV1 alarm support (DPV0 alarm mode)
(e.g. all older SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
SIMOCODE pro diagnostics data can be evaluated via device-specific
diagnostics (status information) and channel-related diagnostics (as part of
extended diagnostics, see Chapter 12.4.3 "Configuration of the slave
diagnostics") in DP master systems without DPV1 alarm support.
You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been carried
out using the configuration tool in the properties of the DP slave.
Device-specific diagnostics contain detailed information about faults,
warnings and status information which are recorded by the process via
SIMOCODE pro. Information concerning hardware faults is transmitted via
channel-related diagnostics.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-21
Communication
Response and process in STEP7:

The OB 82 in the CPU is started for every new diagnostics (device or process
fault, warning or status information). If the OB 82 is not programmed, the
CPU switches to "STOP" mode.
Reading out slave diagnostics with STEP7
It can be ascertained which DP slave has transmitted diagnostics data by
evaluating the start information of OB 82 ("OB82_MDL_ADDR" variable).
OB82_MDL_ADDR corresponds to the configured diagnostic address of the
slave in the HW Config. The diagnostics data is then read, e.g. in the cyclic
part of the user program with the SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG".
The diagnostics data which is read with the SFC 13 corresponds to the
configuration described in Chapter 12.4.3 "Configuration of the slave
diagnostics".
You will find further information about SFC 13 in the STEP7 online help.
12.6.2
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES

The diagnostics data concerning diagnostic alarms and process alarms is
transmitted and evaluated during the integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7
slave.
DP masters which are operated in "DPV1" DP mode

(e.g. all newer SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new device
fault, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for all new process
faults, warnings and status information.
If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not programmed, the CPU switches to "STOP"
mode.
Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP7:
The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM".
The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO"
parameter contains the alarm information described in Section "Diagnostic
alarm - configuration" and Section "Process alarm - configuration". The first
byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.
You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.
SIMOCODE pro
12-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
DP masters which are operated in "S7 compatible" DP mode

(e.g. all older SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new device
fault, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every new process
fault, warning or status information.
If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not programmed, the CPU switches to "STOP"
mode.
You will find more information about device faults in the start information of
OB 82 in the "OB82_MDL_DEFECT" variable.
The start information of the OB 40 contains the "OB40_POINT_ADDR"
variable, which in turn contains the data of the process alarm that is
described in bytes 32 to 35 (see Section "Process alarm - configuration").
The reading of the complete diagnostics can then be initiated from OB 40,
while (for example) the complete diagnostics data record 92 is read, e.g. in
the cyclic user program with the SFC 59 "RD_REC".
You will find further information about SFC 59 in the STEP7 online help.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-23
Communication
12.7
Data records
Data records contain additional information about the DP slave which can
only be read or partly written.
These data records can be accessed for reading and writing via acyclic DPV1
functions. This makes it possible, for example, to operate, monitor and
parameterize SIMOCODE pro.
You can use these functions if they are supported by the DP master. You will
find an overview of the data records provided by SIMOCODE pro in
Chapter B "Data formats and data records".
Special function blocks must be started in the user program in the PLC for
access to the DPV1 data records unlike access to cyclic I/O data.
Access to data records in STEP7

Read and write access to data records is gained by starting the system
functions SFC 59 "RD_REC" and SFC 58 "WR_REC" or via system function
blocks SFB 52 "RDREC" and SFB 53 "WRREC" for CPUs that support the
"DPV1" DP mode.
Note
The interface of the SFB 52 "RDREC" and the SFB 53 "WRREC" is identical to
the FB "RDREC" and "WRREC" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline
PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC
61131-3" standard.
You will find further information about SFB and SFC in the STEP7 online
help.
SIMOCODE pro
12-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
12.8
Parameterization via PROFIBUS
12.8.1
SIMOCODE ES Premium
With SIMOCODE ES Premium you can parameterize all the SIMOCODE pro
devices which are connected to the same PROFIBUS DP network from a
central location. Parameter data which has been previously created with the
software can therefore be transmitted directly to SIMOCODE pro via
PROFIBUS DP.
Note
A PC with a system connection for PROFIBUS (e.g. SIMATIC NET CP 5512
or CP 5611) is required to carry out online functions via PROFIBUS DP, e.g.
transfer of SIMOCODE pro parameters.
The above-mentioned system connections for PROFIBUS are operated
together with SIMOCODE ES Premium as a class 2 master and use acyclic
DPV1 communication functions for the communication with
SIMOCODE pro.
If SIMOCODE pro is integrated as an S7 slave you can use the routing
function in connection with SIMOCODE ES Premium. A prerequisite for
using this function is that a network connection (for example via Industrial
Ethernet) can be established between the PC with SIMOCODE ES installed
and the SIMATIC controller which supports routing.
In this manner, routing can be used to reach all SIMOCODE pro devices that
are connected to the controller.
Notice
The startup parameter block (Device Parameter > Bus Parameter) must
always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwriting the
device parameters with any existing parameter data during startup.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-25
Communication
12.8.2
SIMATIC PDM
The standard version of SIMATIC PDM (PDM Basic) provides you with a
comparable functionality to SIMOCODE ES for parameterization of
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS:
The following additional functions are available with the PDM option
"Integration in STEP7":
"Offline saving" of SIMOCODE pro parameter data in the STEP7 project and
manual transmission (no automatic transfer of parameter data during
startup!)
"Routing via S7 stations".
Example: Parameterization of all SIMOCODE pro devices from a central
engineering station, together with hardware components which provide a
data record gateway (CP443-5 Extended, IE/PB link), also in connection with
different networks.
Notice
The startup parameter block (Device Parameter > Bus Parameter) must
always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwriting the
device parameters with any existing parameter data during startup.
You will find further information about SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC PDM
manual.
SIMOCODE pro
12-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Communication
12.8.3
Parameter data during startup

Parameters are transferred to the device during every startup of
SIMOCODE pro on PROFIBUS DP.
Depending on the master module and the type of integration used, either
standard parameters or standard parameters and device-specific
parameters (SIMOCODE pro parameters) are transferred. The parameters
are saved in the PLC or in the DP master and are transferred automatically
to the DP slave during the system startup.
You can set the device-specific parameters:
With the configuration tool when the GSD (BU1 only) is loaded, e.g. with
STEP7 HW Config. This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C. The
SIMOCODE pro parameters are created by configuring the device-specific
parameters in the slave properties.
In the "SIMOCODE ES" software during the integration of SIMOCODE pro in
STEP7 HW Config as an S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro.
This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V. You can
start the "SIMOCODE ES" software for easy configuration of the
parameterization from STEP7 HW Config using the button in the "Parameter"
tab in the object properties of slot 4.
Notice
In order to be able to carry out the device parameterization during startup,
the startup parameter block ("Device Parameter > Bus Parameter") must
remain unset.
SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized with the device-specific parameters
stored in the DP master, and any existing parameters in the device are
overwritten.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
12-27
Communication
12.9
Timestamping/time synchronization
See Chapter 10.10 "Timestamping".
SIMOCODE pro
12-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about mounting and wiring individual
SIMOCODE pro components.
Target groups
Technicians
Electricians
Maintenance and service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-1
13.1
General information about mounting and wiring
Safety guidelines
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electric shock and
burning. Ensure the system and the device are disconnected from voltage
before beginning work.
Notice
Please also observe the following SIMOCODE pro operating instructions
(enclosed with the devices):
Device
Order No.
Basic unit
3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Operator panel
3ZX1012-0UF72-1AA1
3ZX1012-0UF78-2BA1
Operator panel with display
3ZX3012-0UF72-2AA1
Digital module
3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
3ZX1012-0UF73-1BA1
Failsafe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe
3ZX1012-0UF73-3BA1
Expansion modules
3ZX1012-0UF75-1BA1
3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Door adapter
3ZX1012-0UF78-1AA1
Decoupling module
3ZX1012-0UF71-5BA1
SIMOCODE pro
13-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Mounting lugs for screw attachment

Notice
For technical reasons, there are two different mounting lugs for the screw
attachment:
For basic units, expansion modules,
and the decoupling module:
Order no. 3RP1903
For current measuring modules,
and current/voltage measuring modules.
45 mm and 55 mm width:
Order no. 3RP1900-0B
Removable terminals
Notice
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain
position!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-3
13.2
Mounting
13.2.1
Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module

You can attach these system components as follows:
Snap-on mounting onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail, without tools
Snap-on mounting of the basic units onto current measuring modules of
45 mm and 55 mm width (up to 100 A) with integrated standard mounting rail
without tools
Screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order no: 3RP1903) and screws for
mounting on a level surface.
These mounting lugs are only suitable for basic units, expansion modules and
the decoupling module!
Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails
SIMOCODE pro C
BU1
SIMOCODE pro V
SIMOCODE pro V
with increased installation
depth
Expansion module,
decoupling module
BU2
Snap-on mounting onto a current measuring module

e.g. a 45 mm wide current measuring module with BU1
DM-F,
DM-DO
Screw attachment
3RP1903
5 mm
3RP1903
5 mm
Fig. 13-1: Mounting of basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module
SIMOCODE pro
13-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.2.2
Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

See system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY",
Chapter 5 "Mounting and connection".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-5
13.2.3
Current measuring modules

Current measuring modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or
screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RP1900-0B) and screws
for mounting on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for
current measuring modules (and current/voltage measuring modules)! For
current measuring modules up to 25 A you will require an additional 25 mm
spacer.
Current measuring modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail or screw
attachment
Current measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.
3UF7100-1AA00-0
3UF7101-1AA00-0
3UF7102-1AA00-0
10 A up to 100 A
0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A
Snap-on mounting
55 mm width
45 mm width
Screw attachment
3RP1900-0B
3UF7103-1AA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Snap-on mounting or
Screw attachment
3RP1900-0B
25 mm spacer
3UF7103-1BA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Snap-on mounting or
screw attachment
3UF7104-1BA00-0
63 A up to 630 A
screw attachment
Fig. 13-2: Mounting the current measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
13-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.2.4

Current/voltage measuring modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail
mounting or screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RP1900-0B)
and screws for mounting on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only
suitable for current/voltage measuring modules (and current measuring
modules)! For current/voltage measuring modules up to 25 A you will require
an additional 25 mm spacer.
Current/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail or
screw attachment.
Current/voltage measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.
3UF7110-1AA00-0
3UF7111-1AA00-0
3UF7112-1AA00-0
10 A up to 100 A
0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A
Snap-on mounting
55 mm width
45 mm width
Screw attachment
3RP1900-0B
3UF7113-1AA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Snap-on mounting or
screw attachment
25 mm spacer
3UF7113-1BA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Snap-on mounting or
screw attachment
3RP1900-0B
3UF7114-1BA00-0
63 A up to 630 A
screw attachment
Fig. 13-3: Mounting the current/voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-7
13.2.5
Operator panel and operator panel with display

Operator panels are designed to be installed e.g. in the front panels of
motor control centers or in switchgear cabinet doors.
Install as follows:
Step
Description
Make a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or switchgear cabinet door. Dimensions
(see Fig. 13-4 and 13-5).
Position the operator panel or the operator panel with display in the cutout.
Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel
Lock the operator panel in position by tightening the four mounting bracket
screws.
Table 13-1: Sequence for installing the operator panel/operator panel with display
Mounting bracket
Operator panel
90+0.5
30+0.5
Cutout
4 x 0.15 + 0.05 Nm
Front panel
switchgear
cabinet door
etc.
Fig. 13-4: Mounting the operator panel
SIMOCODE pro
13-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Mounting bracket
4 x 0.15 + 0.05 Nm
91.5+0.5
54.5+0.5
Cutout
Front panel
switchgear cabinet door
etc.
Fig. 13-5: Mounting the operator panel with display
Warning
To ensure IP54 tightness and the correct functionality of the operator panel,
the tightening torque of the screws provided must not be set too high when
mounting and the seal provided must be applied.
Note
Only a connecting cable is required for connecting the operator panel with
display to SIMOCODE pro (see Chapter 1.6 "Overview of system
components"). Additional wiring for the power supply or ground is not
required.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-9
13.2.6
Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel

To exchange a 3UF52 operator panel for the smaller 3UF720 operator panel,
proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Unscrew the four mounting bracket screws and remove the 3UF52 operator
panel from the front panel or switchgear cabinet door.
Ensure that the dimensions of the cutout in the front panel or switchgear
cabinet door measure 91.5 +0.5 mm (width) and 54.5+0.5 mm (height)
(see Fig. 13-6)
Slide the seal provided onto the operator panel adapter (see Fig. 13-6).
Position the operator panel adapter in the cutout.
Position the operator panel in the adapter.
Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel
Lock the operator panel in position by tightening the four mounting bracket
screws (see Fig. 13-7 and safety guidelines!).
Table 13-2: Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel
4x
Fig. 13-6: Mounting the operator panel adapter (1)
SIMOCODE pro
13-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
IP54
Fig. 13-7: Mounting the operator panel adapter (2)
Warning
To ensure IP54 tightness and the correct functionality of the operator panel,
the tightening torque of the screws provided must not be set too high when
mounting and the seal provided must be applied.
Notice
A SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 system operator panel can not be used with
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5, and vice versa.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-11
13.3
Wiring
13.3.1
Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module

Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module have removable
terminals. You do not have to detach the wiring to exchange these devices!
Removable terminals
Basic units
Expansion modules/
decoupling module
A
A, C, D: Coding
Fig. 13-8: Removable terminals on basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module
Notice
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain
position!
Cables
The cable cross sections are the same for all devices. The following table
shows cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the
cables for the removable terminals:
Removable terminals
Screwdriver
PZ2/
5 mm - 6 mm
Strip lengths
Tightening torque
TORQUE: 7 LB.IN - 10.3 LB.IN
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
Cable cross section
10
Solid
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 /

1 x 0.5 mm2- 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12
10
Finely stranded
with/without
end sleeve
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 /

1 x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16/1x AWG 20 to 14
Table 13-3: Cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables
SIMOCODE pro
13-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Supplying the inputs of the basic unit

There are three possibilities for supplying the inputs:
a): 24 V DC internal
b): 24 V DC external However, input 3 is the reference potential, i.e.
three inputs are available.
c): 24 V DC external Only possible for basic units with a supply voltage of
24 V DC!
a)
b)
24 V DC internal, 4 inputs usable
c)
24 V DC external, 3 inputs usable
Basic unit (BU)
24 V DC external, 4 inputs usable
Basic unit (BU)
BU Inputs
Basic unit (BU)
BU Inputs
BU Inputs
IN1
IN1
IN2
IN2
IN2
IN3
IN3
IN3
IN4
IN4
IN4
IN1
(not usable)
24 V DC
A1
A2
Only possible for the basic unit with 24 V DC

supply voltage!
Fig. 13-9: 24 V DC for supplying the inputs
All inputs work reactionless, i.e. the signal statuses on neighboring inputs
do not influence each other.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-13
Basic unit pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Connection
Assignment
Upper terminals
1
Ground for relay outputs 1 and 2
Relay output OUT1
Relay output OUT2
Digital input IN3
Digital input IN4
3 4 IN3 IN4 5
T2
6 OUT3 7 24V 8 9 IN1 IN2 10 T1
SIMOCODE PRO
Thermistor connection (binary PTC)

DEVICE
Relay output OUT3
Relay output OUT3
24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4
Digital input IN1
10
Digital input IN2
T1
Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
BUS
GEN. FAULT
TEST/
RESET
PROFIBUS DP
T2
1 OUT1 2 .2
Lower terminals
A1
Pin 1 supply voltage
A2
Pin 2 supply voltage
PROFIBUS DP pin A
PROFIBUS DP pin B
SPE/PE
A1
A2
B SPE/PE
System shielding
Table 13-4: Pin assignment for the removable terminals of the basic unit
Sequence for wiring the removable terminals for basic units

Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
If you wish to use the A/B terminals for PROFIBUS DP, connect the
PROFIBUS DP cable-shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.
Notice
The A/B terminals are an alternative to the 9-pole SUB-D connection! Baud
rates of up to 1.5 MBit/s are possible!
Connect the system shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.
Table 13-5: Wiring the removable terminals of the basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
13-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Basic unit connection example
b)
a)
T1
T2
IN1
10
IN2
IN3
IN4
24 V
1
OUT1
2
OUT2
3
Device
Bus
Gen. Fault
6
OUT3
7
PROFIBUS DP
A1
B
A
Max. 1.5 MBd
A2
SPE/PE
Fig. 13-10: Basic unit connection example
Supplying the inputs of the digital module

Digital module with 24 V DC input supply
Digital module with 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply
24 V DC external
110 V up to 240 V AC/DC external
Digital module (DM)

N/M
Digital module (DM)
DM Inputs
N/M
DM Inputs
~
IN1
IN1
IN2
IN2
IN3
IN3
IN4
IN4
Fig. 13-11: Supplying the inputs of the digital module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-15
Digital module pin assignment

Connection
Assignment
Upper terminals
20
Ground for relay outputs 1 and 2
21
Relay output OUT1
22
Relay output OUT2
23
Digital input IN1
24
Digital input IN2
25
N/M for IN1 to IN4
20
OUT1 21 .2 22
23 IN1 IN2 24
25
Lower terminals
26
Digital input IN3
27
Digital input IN4
PE
System shielding
READY
26 IN3 IN4 27
PE
Table 13-6: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module
SIMOCODE pro
13-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Digital module connection example
23 IN1
24 IN2
26 IN3
27 IN4
AC
+
DC
25 N/M
20
21
OUT1
Ready
22
OUT2
PE
Fig. 13-12: Digital module connection example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-17
Earth-fault module pin assignment

Connection
Assignment
Upper terminals
40
Input C1 summation current

transformer
40 C1
43
Input C2 summation current

transformer
43 C2
Lower terminals
PE
System shielding
READY
EM
3UF7 5001AA000
G/YYMMDD
*Exx*
PE
Table 13-7: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the earth fault module
SIMOCODE pro
13-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Earth-fault module connection example
L1
L2
L3
N
Z2
3UL22
Z1
*)
*) Cable shielding recommended
40 43
C1 C2
Ready
PE
Fig. 13-13: Earth-fault module connection example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-19
Temperature module pin assignment

Connection
Assignment
Upper terminals
50
Input T3, temperature sensor 1
51
52
53
54
55
50 1T3 51 2T3 52 3T3

53 1T2 54 2T2 55 3T2
Lower terminals
56
Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
57
Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
PE
System shielding
READY
TM
3UF7 7001AA000
G/YYMMDD
56
T1
57
*Exx*
PE
Table 13-8: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the temperature module
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors.

2-wire temperature sensors:
Bridge the T2 terminals with the T3 terminals.
3-wire temperature sensors.
Assign terminals 56 and 57 doubly when three sensors are used.
SIMOCODE pro
13-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Temperature module connection example
3 x max.
1)
3 x max.
2)
*)
*) Cable shielding recommended
*)
T1 1T2 1T3
T1 2T2 2T3
T1 3T2 3T3
T1 1T2 1T3
T1 2T2 2T3
T1 3T2 3T3
53 50 54 51 55 52
1T2
1T3
2T2
2T3
3T2
3T3
Ready
T1 T1
56 57
PE
NTC temperature sensor:

NTC type: B 57227-K333-A1
Q 63022-K7182-S1
R
J
Fig. 13-14: Temperature module connection example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-21
Analog module pin assignment

Connection
Assignment
Upper terminals
30
Analog input IN1+
31
Analog input IN2+
33
Analog input IN1+
34
Analog input IN2+
30 IN1+ 31 IN2+
33 IN1- 34 IN2-
Lower terminals
36
Analog output OUT+
37
Analog output OUT+
PE
System shielding
READY
AM
3UF7 4001AA000
G/YYMMDD
*Exx*
36 +OUT- 37 PE
Table 13-9: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the analog module
SIMOCODE pro
13-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Analog module connection example
L+
2 x max.
IIN (0/4 mA - 20 mA)
(potential-free current source, e.g. isolation amplifier)
*)
IN1+
IN2+
30 33
IN1IN231 34
IN1+ IN1- IN2+ IN2Ready
OUT+ OUT36
37
PE
*)
+
RL
-
*) Cable shielding recommended for up to 30 m

and for outside of the switchgear cabinet.
Cable shielding necessary for over 30 m
IOUT (0/4 A - 20 mA)
RL < 500 Ohm
Fig. 13-15: Analog module connection example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-23
Decoupling module pin assignment

Connection
Assignment
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
PE
System shielding
READY
DCM
3UF7 1501AA000
G/YYMMDD
*Exx*
PE
Table 13-10: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the decoupling module
Decoupling module connection example
Ready
Fig. 13-16: Decoupling module connection example
Wiring the removable terminals of the expansion modules and the decoupling
module
Connect the system shielding to the PE terminal.
SIMOCODE pro
13-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.3.2
Wiring:
Warning
Loss of safety function possible.
For the 24 V DC power supply, always use a power supply according to IEC
60536 protection class III (SELV or PELV).
Note
Surge suppressors are required for inductive loads.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-25
Digital module DM-F Local pin assignment

Connection
Assignment
Upper terminals
60, 66
Digital module, relay outputs 1 (60)

and 2 (66)
61, 67
Relay enabling circuit 1, NO contact
62, 68
Y12, Y22
T1, T2
Sensor input channel 1, channel 2

Supply for sensor inputs
(24 V DC, pulsed)
Y33
Start button (start after rising and

falling edge)
Y34
Feedback circuit
Lower terminals
A1(+)
Voltage supply connection 110 to

240 V AC/DC or +24 V DC
A2(-)
N or -24 V
Ground (reference potential sensor

inputs, only 3UF7320-1AU00-0)
Cascade input
T3
Supplying the sensor inputs (24 V

DC, static)
PE
Protective earth
Table 13-11: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module DM-F Local, 24 V DC
and 110-240 V UC version.
SIMOCODE pro
13-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe pin assignment

Connection
Assignment
Upper terminals
80, 86
Digital module, relay outputs 1 (80)

and 2 (86)
81, 87
82, 88
83 (IN1)
85 (IN2)
89 (IN3)
84
90 (T)
91 (FBC)
Digital module inputs 1,2,3
Digital module supply

Inputs 1 to 3 24 V DC
Feedback circuit supply (FBC)
24 V DC
Feedback circuit
Lower terminals
A1(+)
Voltage supply connection 110 to

240 V AC/DC or +24 V DC
A2(-)
N or -24 V
Ground (reference potential inputs,

only 3UF7320-1AU00-0)
PE
Protective earth
Table 13-12: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module DM-F PROFIsafe,
24 V DC version and 110-240 V UC version
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-27
Digital module DM-F Local connection example

DM-F Local with cross circuit detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels,
monitored start.
Warning
The protection stipulated must be observed!
This ensures safe tripping in the event of a fault.
DIAZED 4 A, gLgG
-Q4
START
-Q1
Y22
T2
Y34
Y12
T1
Y33
T3
61
62
ON
1
2
3
4
READY
DEVICE
OUT
IN
GF
CH1
5
6
Safety logic
CH2
8
9 10
Digital module output
OUT1
OUT2
A1
+/L
A2
-/N
60
66
67
68
Q3
Q4
Q2
Q1
PE
Fig. 13-17: Connection example "DM-F Local with cross circuit detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels,
monitored start"
Further connection examples:

SIMOCODE pro
13-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe connection examples

Warning
The protection stipulated must be observed!
This ensures safe tripping in the event of a fault.
-Q1
DIAZED 4 A, gLgG
-Q4
83
85
(IN1) (IN2)
READY
DEVICE
OUT
89
84
(IN3)
(24 V=) (FBC)
91
90
81
82
(T)
CH1
Safety logic
CH2
GF
Digital module output
OUT1
OUT2
A1
+/L
A2
-/N
80
86
87
88
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
PE
Fig. 13-18: Block diagram DM-F PROFIsafe
Connection examples:
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-29
13.3.3

Select a suitable current measuring module for measuring current,
depending on the motor current size:
Through-hole technology up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are
passed through the through-hole openings.
Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to
Siemens contactors.
The following table shows the various current measuring modules:
3UF7100-1AA00-0
0.3 A - 3 A
through-hole
openings: 7.5 mm
Main circuit connection

Through-hole
technology
3UF7102-1AA00-0
10 A - 100 A
through-hole
openings: 14 mm
3UF7101-1AA00-0
2.4 A - 25 A
through-hole
openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7103-1AA00-0
20 A - 200 A
through-hole
openings: 25 mm
3UF7103-1BA00-0
20 A - 200 A
Conductor cross
section:
16 mm - 95 mm,
AWG 5 to 3/0
L1
L2
L3
N
L1 L2 L3
Bus connection
system
T1 T2 T3
M
3~
3UF7104-1BA00-0
63 A - 630 A
Conductor cross
section:
50 mm - 240 mm,
AWG 1/0 kcmil to
500 kcmil
Table 13-13: Current measuring modules
Notice
When connecting or routing the cables of the individual phases of the main
circuit, ensure correct assignment of the phases on the current measuring
module and correct routing direction!
Observe the information in the operating instructions!
SIMOCODE pro
13-30
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.3.4

Select a suitable current/voltage measuring module for measuring current
and voltage, depending on the motor current size:
Through-hole technology up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are
passed through the through-hole openings.
Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to
Siemens contactors.
The following table shows the various current/voltage measuring modules:
Current/voltage measuring
modules
3UF7110-1AA00-0
0.3 A - 3 A
through-hole
openings: 7.5 mm
Main circuit
connection
Through-hole
technology
3UF7111-1AA00-0
2.4 A - 25 A
through-hole
openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7112-1AA00-0
10 A - 100 A
through-hole
openings: 14 mm
L1
L2
L3
N
3UF7113-1AA00-0
20 A - 200 A
through-hole
openings: 25 mm
3UF7113-1BA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Conductor cross
section:
16 mm - 95 mm,
AWG 6 to 3/0
L1 L2 L3
Bus connection
system
L1 L2
L3
T1 T2 T3
M
3~
3UF7114-1BA00-0
63 A - 630 A
Conductor cross
section:
50 mm - 240 mm,
AWG 1/0 kcmil to
500 kcmil
Table 13-14: Current/voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-31
Safety guidelines
Note
Measuring voltage or power values:
For current/voltage measuring modules, connect the main circuit L1, L2, L3
with the connection terminals (L1, L2, L3) of the removable terminals via a
3-core cable. The supply cables may require additional cable protection, for
example, via short-circuit proof cable or fuses.
Notice
When connecting or routing the cables of the individual phases of the main
circuit, ensure correct assignment of the phases on the current/voltage
measuring modules and correct routing direction! Observe the information
in the operating instructions!
Removable terminals
The following table shows cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening
torques of the cables for the removable terminals:
Removable terminals
Screwdriver
Tightening torque
PZ2/ 5 mm 6 mm
Strip lengths

0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
Cable cross section
10
Solid
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 /

1 x 0.5 mm2- 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14/1x AWG 20 to 12
10
Finely stranded
with/without
end sleeve
2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 /

1 x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16/1x AWG 20 to 14
Table 13-15: Cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables
The following is a representation of the pin assignment of the removable

terminals:
Bottom
Upper
L1, L2, L3:
Terminals for connecting the 3-wire
cable of the main circuit
Fig. 13-19: Pin assignment of the terminals of the current/voltage measuring modules
Caution
The L1 and L3 phases are interchanged on the upper/lower terminals!
SIMOCODE pro
13-32
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.3.5
Measuring current with an external current transformer (interposing

transformer)
Description
SIMOCODE pro can be operated with external current transformers. The
secondary cables of the current transformer are looped through the three
through-hole openings of the current measuring module, and shortcircuited. The secondary current of the external current transformer is the
primary current of the SIMOCODE pro current measuring module.
Notice
If the main circuit is using rated current, the secondary current of the
current transformer must be within the setting range of the current
measuring module used!
Main circuit
Secondary circuit
L1 L2 L3
K1
K2
Current measuring
module 3UF 71
K3
Basic unit
3UF 70
M
3~
3UF18 current transformer
Fig. 13-20: Measuring current with an external 3UF18 current transformer
Transformation ratio
The transformation ratio is calculated using the following formula:
Primary current (external current transformer)
Transformation ratio =
Secondary current x number of loops n
(ext. current transformer)
(current measuring module)
In the following examples, the displayed actual current flowing does not
need to be converted, even when an interposing transformer is used, since
SIMOCODE pro only outputs the proportional value, based upon the
parameterized set current Is.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-33
Technical data of the current transformer

Secondary current:
1A
Frequency:
50 Hz/60 Hz
Transformer rating:
Recommended > 2.5 VA, according to the secondary

current and cable length
Overcurrent factor:
5P10 or 10P10
Accuracy class:
Example 1:
3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
Primary current: 820 A at nominal load
Secondary current: 1 A
SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,
Set current 0.3 to 3 A
This means:
The secondary current of the current transformer is 1 A at the rated load
and is, therefore, within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the current
measuring module used
The set current Is to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 1 A.
Secondary circuit
Main circuit
L1 L2 L3
K1
Current measuring
module 3UF 71
K2
K3
Adjustment range:
0.3 A - 3 A
M
3~
Primary current at
nominal load: 820 A
Basic unit
3UF 70

Secondary current: 1 A
Set current Is: 1 A
Fig. 13-21: Example (1 of 2) for current measuring with an 3UF18 external current transformer
SIMOCODE pro
13-34
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Example 2:
3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
Primary current: 205 A at nominal load
Secondary current: 0.25 A
SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,
Set current 0.3 to 3 A
This means:
The secondary current of the current transformer is 0.25 A at the rated
load and is, therefore, not within the 0.3 A to 3 A setting range of the
current measuring module used.
The secondary current must be boosted by multiple looping of the
secondary cables through the through-hole openings of the current
measuring module. Double-looping results in 2 x 0.25 A = 0.5 A.
The set current Is to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 0.5 A.
Main circuit
L1 L2 L3
Secondary circuit
Double-looping through of the secondary cables
K1
Current measuring
module 3UF 71
K2
K3
Adjustment range:
0.3 A - 3 A
M
3~
Primary current at
nominal load: 205 A
Basic unit
3UF 70

Secondary current: 2 x 0.25 A
Set current Is: 0.5 A
Fig. 13-22: Example (2 of 2) for measuring current with an 3UF18 external current transformer
Note
When using basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from version *E03* onwards,
the set current does not have to be converted. It will correspond to the
rated current flowing on the main current side.
Additional entry of the transformation ratio of the current transformer
(interposing transformer) will result in automatic conversion in the device.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-35
13.4
System interfaces
13.4.1
General
Please observe the following:
SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the
system interfaces.
Connecting cables of different lengths are available for connecting the system
components.
The system is always configured according to the basic unit. Basic units have
two system interfaces:
Bottom: For outgoing connecting cables that, in the case of BU1, always
lead to the current measuring module.
Front: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module
or operator panel, or for PC cables, memory modules or addressing
plugs.
Current measuring modules have one system interface:
Bottom or front: Incoming connecting cable from the basic unit.
Expansion modules have 2 interfaces on the front.
Left: For incoming connecting cables from the upstream expansion
module or basic unit BU2.
Right: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module
or operator panel, and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing
plugs.
Decoupling modules have 2 interfaces on the front:
Left: For incoming connecting cables from the upstream expansion
module or basic unit BU2.
Right: Exclusively for the outgoing connecting cable to the current/
voltage measuring module.
Operator panels have two system interfaces:
Front: For PC cables, memory modules and addressing plugs.
Rear side: For incoming connecting cable from the upstream expansion
module or basic unit.
System interfaces not in use are closed with the cover.
Warning
Applies to system interfaces on operator panels and on door adapters (IP54
degree of protection):
When using for the first time, press the cover firmly against its stop in the
socket!
SIMOCODE pro
13-36
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Fig. 13-23: Closing the system interface using the system interface cover on the door adapter
Fig. 13-24: Closing the system interface using the system interface cover on the operator panel
Fig. 13-25: Closing the system interface using the system interface cover on the operator panel
with display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-37
Example
The following figure shows an example of a SIMOCODE pro V installation:
Basic units (BU)
Expansion modules (DM, AM, EM, TM)

Incoming, from
Expansion module
Basic unit BU2
Outgoing, to
Decoupling module
Outgoing, to
Expansion module
Operator panel
Outgoing, to
Expansion module
Operator panel
Digital module DM-F Local,

DM-F PROFIsafe
Incoming, from
Expansion module
Basic unit BU2
Incoming, from
Basic unit
Outgoing, to
Expansion module
Operator panel
Operator panel (OP)
UF-01130
Incoming, from
Upstream expansion module
Basic unit
SIMOCODE pro V
Basic unit (BU2)
Current measuring
module (IM)
Expansion modules
UF-01130
Operator panel (OP)
Cover
Fig. 13-26: Example of system interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-38
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.4.2
System interfaces on basic units, expansion modules, decoupling module,

current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules
The system interfaces are located on the front and bottom of the basic
units. Other system components can be connected here:
Via a connecting cable, e.g. digital modules, current measuring modules
By plugging them in directly, e.g. addressing plugs and memory modules.
System interfaces not in use can be closed using the system interface
cover.
Notice
Only connect system interfaces when disconnected from voltage!
Basic units
Expansion modules/
Decoupling module
System
interfaces
Memory module,
addressing plug,
Connecting cable
2 system
interfaces
System
interface
Connecting cable
Removable terminals
System
interface
Connecting cable
Removable terminals
Fig. 13-27: Connecting system components to the system interface
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-39
Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface

Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure
that the catches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into
place.
For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be
used for the current measuring module!
Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use
Table 13-16: Connecting to the system interface
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
Color coding
Catches
1
2
System interfaces on the
front side and bottom
Cover
Catches
Connecting
cable
Fig. 13-28: Procedure for connecting to the system interfaces
Safety guidelines
Notice
For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be
used for the current measuring module!
SIMOCODE pro
13-40
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Notice
Only a current/voltage measuring module may be connected to the system
interface on the right of the decoupling module. Memory modules,
addressing plugs or PC cables will not be recognized there.
Notice
Observe the color coding for the connecting cable (see diagram)!
13.4.3
System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe

SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-41
13.4.4
System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with
display
The operator panel has two system interfaces:
Rear side system interface. This is not normally accessible on an integrated
operator panel. The incoming cable from the basic unit or expansion module
is always connected here.
Front system interface. This is normally accessible on an integrated operator
panel. Components are only connected directly when needed, and removed
again after use.
These can be:
Memory module
Addressing plug
PC cable for connecting a PC/programming device
Cover (if the system interface is not in use).
Rear system interface
Front system interface
Connecting cable
e.g. memory module
Fig. 13-29: System interfaces on the operator panel
Rear system interface
Front system interface
e.g. memory module

Fig. 13-30: System interfaces on the operator panel with display
SIMOCODE pro
13-42
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel and the
operator panel with display
Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure
that the catches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into
place.
The incoming connecting cable is connected to the rear side.
Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use
Table 13-17: Connecting system components to the system interface
Notice
In order to ensure IP54 degree of protection, press the cover firmly against
its stop in the socket when using for the first time (see figure!).
When mounting the operator panel using the screws provided, ensure the
tightening torque is not set too high.
Note
Throughout connection, you can place the cover on one of the two "park
positions" (see Figure 13-31).
Notice
Observe the color coding for the connecting cable (see diagram)!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-43
Front
Cover
Park pos.
Rear
Catches
1
1
2
Catches
Color coding
Connecting cable
Fig. 13-31: Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel
SIMOCODE pro
13-44
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Front
Cover
Park position
Rear
Fig. 13-32: Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel with
display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-45
13.5
PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket

The PROFIBUS DP can only be connected to the basic unit.
Notice
The 9-pole SUB-D connection is an alternative to the A/B terminals!
Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the basic unit

Proceed as follows:
Step
1
Description
Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable with the 9-pole SUB-D plug to the
PROFIBUS DP interface.
Table 13-18: Wiring the removable terminals of the digital module
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
9-pole
SUB-D plug
PROFIBUS DP interface
9-pole SUB-D socket
PROFIBUS DP cable
Fig. 13-33: Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the 9-pole SUB-D socket
SIMOCODE pro
13-46
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13.6
Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP
Specifications
The key data contained in this chapter is valid for Siemens products and
cables.
PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) installation guidelines
For electrical PROFIBUS networks, please also adhere to the
PROFIBUS DP/FMS installation guidelines of the PROFIBUS User
Organization. They contain important information about the cable routing
and commissioning of
PROFIBUS networks.
Publisher:
PROFIBUS User Organization
Haid-und-Neu-Strasse 7
76131 Karlsruhe, Germany
Tel.: +49 721 96 58 590
Fax: +49 721 96 58 589
Internet: http://www.profibus.com
Guidelines, Order No. 2.111
See also the "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks" manual at
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1971286.
Application of bus termination modules
The 3UF1900-1K.00 bus termination module is primarily intended for use in
MCC motor feeders. It provides correct bus termination, even for removed
MCC plug-in units. The bus termination module can also be utilized when a
standard SUB-D plug cannot be used for the last device on a bus line.
The 3UF1900-1KA00 bus termination module may also be connected to 220/
230 V, 380/400 V, 115/120 V or 24 V AC. The 3UF1900-1KB00 version can be
used for 24 V DC.
Fig. 13-34: Bus termination module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
13-47
SIMOCODE pro
13-48
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Commissioning and service
14
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about how SIMOCODE pro is
commissioned, how components are replaced and how statistics are read.
Target groups
Commissioners
Technicians
Necessary knowledge
General basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro, e.g. from Chapter 1
SIMOCODE ES software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14-1
14.1
General information about commissioning and service
Safety guidelines
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electric shock and burning. Ensure
the system and the device are disconnected from voltage before beginning
work.
Notice
Please also observe the following SIMOCODE pro operating instructions
Device
Order No.
Basic unit
3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Operator panel
3ZX1012-0UF72-1AA1
3ZX1012-0UF78-2BA1
3ZX3012-0UF72-2AA1
Digital module
3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
3ZX1012-0UF73-1BA1
3ZX1012-0UF73-3BA1
Expansion modules
3ZX1012-0UF75-1BA1
3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Door adapter
3ZX1012-0UF78-1AA1
Decoupling module
3ZX1012-0UF71-5BA1
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for commissioning and
servicing:
SIMOCODE pro is already mounted and wired
The motor is switched off.
SIMOCODE pro
14-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Notes on parameterizing
You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:
With the memory module in which the parameters have already been saved
from a basic unit. The memory module is plugged into the system interface.
If the memory module is connected to the system interface and the supply
voltage returns to the basic unit, the basic unit will be automatically
parameterized by the memory module. The parameters can also be loaded
into the basic unit from the memory module by briefly pressing the Test/
Reset button.
With the SIMOCODE ES software via the serial interface:
The PC/programming device is connected to the system interface with the
PC cable.
With an automation system and/or SIMOCODE ES software via
PROFIBUS DP. For this, the PROFIBUS DP cable should be connected to the
PROFIBUS DP interface of the basic unit.
Commissioning options
There are two commissioning options:
1. Normal case: SIMOCODE pro has not yet been parameterized and still has
the factory settings:
When connected to PROFIBUS DP, the "Bus" LED flashes green when a DP
master is connected.
2. SIMOCODE pro has already been parameterized:
The parameters have already been loaded into the basic unit.
The parameters from a previous application still exist. Check whether
the parameters (e.g. the set current) apply to the new application.
Change these accordingly, if necessary.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14-3
14.2
Commissioning
14.2.1
Sequence
Please observe the information in the previous Chapter "General information
about commissioning and service" on Page 14-2.
To commission SIMOCODE pro, proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Switch on the supply voltage. In a fault-free state, the following LEDS should
light up or flash green:
"Device" (lights up)
"Bus" if PROFIBUS DP is connected (lights up or flashes).
Continue with step 2.
Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display.
You will find further information in Chapter 14.2.3 "Diagnostics via LED display
on the basic unit and on the operator panel". Try to rectify the fault.
If you wish to make SIMOCODE pro available on the PROFIBUS DP, set the
PROFIBUS DP address. You will find further information about this in Chapter
"Setting the PROFIBUS DP address" on Page 14-5.
Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the existing parameterization e.g. with

a PC via SIMOCODE ES software.
For this, connect the PC/programming device to the system interface with the
PC cable (see the figure below).
Notice
For basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C), only use the front system interface!
Start SIMOCODE ES.
Table 14-1: Commissioning the basic unit
PC cable,
Order No. 3UF7940-0AA00-0
Fig. 14-1: Connecting a PC to the basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
14-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14.2.2
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Note
This setting cannot be carried out if the Test/Reset button has been blocked.
Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Set desired valid address on the DIP switch.

The switches are numbered.
For example address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position.
Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights
up yellow.
Briefly press the Test/Reset button. The set address is accepted. The
"Device" LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.
Table 14-2: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Start SIMOCODE ES.
Open the menu Switchgear > Open Online.
Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.

Confirm with OK.
Open the dialog Device Parameters > Bus Parameters.
Select the DP address.
Save the data in the basic unit with

Target System > Load to Switchgear. The address is set.
Table 14-3: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Setting the PROFIsafe address on DM-F PROFIsafe

SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14-5
14.2.3
Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel
The basic units and the operating panel have three LEDs for displaying
specific device states:
LED
Status
Display
Description
Device
Device
status
Green
Device is ready for

operation
Green
flickering
Internal fault
Yellow
Memory module or
addressing plug
recognized, Test/Reset
buttons control the
memory module or
addressing plug
Yellow
flashing
Memory module/
addressing plug read in;
factory settings
configured (duration: 3s)
Yellow
flickering
Memory module
programmed (duration:
3s)
Red
Parameterization
incorrect (also Gen.
Fault on)
Parameterize again and

switch the control
voltage off and on again
Basic unit defective

(also Gen. Fault on)
Replace basic unit!
Red
flashing
Memory module,
addressing plug,
expansion modules
defective (also Gen.
Fault on - flashing)
Reprogram/replace the
memory module,
replace the expansion
modules
Off
Supply voltage too low
Check whether the

supply voltage is
connected/switched on
Off
Bus not connected or

bus fault
Connect the bus or

check bus parameters
Green
flashing
Baud rate recognized/

communication with
PC/programming device
Green
Communication with
PLC/PCS
Red
Fault pending; reset has

been saved
Rectify fault, e.g.

overload
Red
flashing
Fault pending; reset has

not been saved
Rectify fault, e.g.

overload
Off
No fault
Bus
Gen.
Fault
Bus
status
Fault
status
Corrective measures for

faults
Send back the basic unit
Table 14-4: Diagnostics via LED display
SIMOCODE pro
14-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14.2.4
Diagnostics via LED display on the digital modules DM-F Local or

DM-F PROFIsafe
See Chapter D.5.2 "Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
digital modules" or system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro
SAFETY"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14-7
14.3
Service
14.3.1
Preventive maintenance
Preventive maintenance is an important step towards avoiding faults and
unforeseen costs. Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance
so that e.g. production losses due to plant downtimes are avoided.
Preventive maintenance ensures that all components are always kept in
perfect working order.
Reading out statistical data

SIMOCODE pro provides statistical data that can be read out, for example
with
SIMOCODE ES under Target System > Service Data/Statistical Data. For
example, via "Motor Operating Hours" and "Number of Starts", you can
decide whether motor and/or motor contactors should be replaced.
Fig. 14-2: Reading out statistical data
SIMOCODE pro
14-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14.3.2
Securing and saving parameters

Always save the parameters in the memory module or in a SIMOCODE ES
file. This particularly applies if you replace a basic unit, or if you wish to
transfer data from one basic unit to another.
Saving parameters from the basic unit into the memory module
Note
This function will not be available if the Test/Reset button has been blocked.
Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up
yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "TEST/RESET"
button for approx. 3 seconds. The parameters will be saved in the memory
module. After successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for
approx. 3 seconds.
If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Table 14-5: Saving the parameters into the memory module
Saving parameters from the basic unit into a SIMOCODE ES file

Note
Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Start SIMOCODE ES.
Open the menu Target System > Load into PC. The parameters are loaded
into the main memory from the basic unit.
Click on the menu Switchgear > Save copy as .... The parameters are saved
from the main memory into a SIMOCODE ES file.
Table 14-6: Saving parameters into a SIMOCODE ES file
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14-9
Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit
Note
Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up
yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, briefly press the "TEST/
RESET" button. The parameters will be transferred to the basic unit. After
successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx.
3 seconds.
If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Table 14-7: Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit
Notice
If the memory module is plugged in, the parameters will be transferred from
the memory module to the basic unit when the supply voltage is switched
on.
Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into the basic unit
Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Start SIMOCODE ES.
Click on the menu Switchgear > Open. The parameters from the
SIMOCODE ES file will be transferred to the main memory.
Click on the menu Target system > Load into switchgear. The parameters
will be saved into the basic unit from the main memory.
Table 14-8: Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
14-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14.3.3
Replacing SIMOCODE pro components
Safety guidelines
Warning
The main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit
must be switched off before replacing current measuring modules and
current/voltage measuring modules.
Notice
Please observe the information contained in the operating instructions!
Notice
It is not necessary to detach the wiring from the removable terminals to
replace the components!
Replacing a basic unit

Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
Save the parameters. See Chapter "Securing and saving parameters" on Page
14-9.
Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic
unit.
If necessary, pull the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable out of the
system interface.
Remove the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
Demount the basic unit.
Remove the removable terminals of the new basic unit.
Mount the new basic unit.
Plug in the wired removable terminals.
Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.
10
Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
11
Save the parameters into the basic unit. See Chapter "Securing and saving
parameters" on Page 14-9.
12
Switch on the main power for the feeder.
Table 14-9: Replacing a basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14-11
Replacing an expansion module or a decoupling module

Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
unit.
system interface.
Demount the expansion module or the decoupling module.
Remove the removable terminals of the new expansion or decoupling module.
Mount the new expansion module or decoupling module.
10
Table 14-10: Replacing an expansion module or a decoupling module
Replacing a DM-F
Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
First, switch off the main power for the feeder and then the supply voltage for
the basic unit and the DM-F.
system interface.
Demount the DM-F.
Remove the removable terminals of the new DM-F.
Mount the new DM-F.
Only DM-F PROFIsafe:

Set the DIP switch setting for the PROFIsafe address according to the
configuration in the F-controller (see "Configuring the DM-F PROFIsafe and
integrating it into the failsafe automation system" in the system manual
"Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY").
10
Switch on the supply voltage for the DM-F and the basic unit.
11
Only DM-F Local:

Configure the DM-F Local correctly (see chapter "Configuring the DM-F Local"
in the system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY")
12
Table 14-11: Replacing a DM-F
SIMOCODE pro
14-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module
Proceed as follows:
Step
Description
unit.
Pull out the connecting cable from the system interface.
Pull out the removable terminal from the module as illustrated below
(Current/voltage measuring modules only).
Disconnect the three cables of the three phases of the main circuit.
Replace the module (see Chapter 13.2.3 "Current measuring modules" and
Chapter 13.2.4 "Current/voltage measuring modules").
Connect the three cables of the main circuit, leading them through the
through-hole openings.
Plug the removable terminals onto the module (current/voltage measuring

modules only).
10
Table 14-12: Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
Fig. 14-3: Replacing current/voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14-13
14.3.4
Resetting the factory settings

With the factory settings, all parameters are reset to the factory values.
Resetting the factory settings with the Test/Reset button on the basic unit
Proceed as follows (also deletes any previous password setting!):
Step
Description
Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.
Press the Test/Reset button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.
Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The Device LED lights up
yellow.
Release the Test/Reset button after approx. two seconds.
Press the Test/Reset button again after approx. two seconds.
Release the Test/Reset button after approx. two seconds.
Press the Test/Reset button again after approx. two seconds.
Factory settings are reset.
Table 14-13: Resetting factory settings with the Test/Reset button on the basic unit
Notice
If any one of the steps is not carried out correctly, the basic unit will revert
to normal operation.
Notice
This function is always active, independent of the "Test/Reset - Button
blocked" parameter.
Resetting the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software
Prerequisite: SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC/programming device
via PROFIBUS DP or via the system interface and SIMOCODE ES is started.
Proceed as follows (resets to factory settings, excluding the password):
Step
Description
Click on the menu Switchgear > Open Online.
In the menu, select Target System > Command > Factory Settings.
Confirm with "Yes".
Factory settings are reset.
Table 14-14: Resetting the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software
SIMOCODE pro
14-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14.4
Error buffer/reading out error protocol

Timestamping in the error buffer is based on the operating hours
(resolution: 1 s) of SIMOCODE pro.
The "Error/Fault" and "Power - On" events are logged. Each of these events is
given a timestamp.
Error/Fault:
The last 21 errors are stored in a ring buffer, whereby the incoming error
(rising edge) is always logged. An outgoing error (falling edge) will not be
logged.
Power - On:
If the most recent entry is "Power - On", this is not logged multiple times.
Instead, the error number is used as a power on counter. Thus, the error
buffer cannot be deleted by frequent on/off operations.
Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.
The data will be displayed via the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
Example:
Fig. 14-4: Example of event logging using the "SIMOCODE ES" software
SIMOCODE pro has an error buffer, in which the 21 most recent errors/
faults, "Power - On" events" are recorded with a timestamp. Timestamps are
based upon the operating hours of the device (resolution 1 s), i.e. the
amount of time that the device is supplied with control supply voltage.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
14-15
Example:
The most recent "Power - On" event was logged at a device operating time
of 17 days, 21 hours and 31 minutes. Therefore, at the moment of "Power On", the device was operating (supplied with voltage) for 17d 21h 31min.
The "No. of Starts >" fault was logged at a device operating time of 18 days,
22 hours, 17 minutes, i.e. 24 h 46 min after the most recent "Power - On".
When using a DM-F, the events "Enabling circuit closed" and "Enabling circuit
open" are logged for the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F PROFIsafe in a
separate window:
Time
Event: "Enabling circuit closed" or "Enabling circuit open"
Number:
Line 1: 200 or 202
Line 2: 201 or 203
Text:
Line 1: "DM-F Local enabling circuit 0 -> 1" or DM-F PROFIsafe enabling
circuit 0 -> 1"
Line 2: "DM-F Local enabling circuit 1 -> 0" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling
circuit 1 -> 0".
The current DIP switch position of the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F
PROFIsafe is displayed under "DIP switch position DM-F during the last
event"
See also Chapter B.6 "Data record 72 - Error buffer".
14.5
Event buffer
In addition to the error buffer, various events can be stored in the event
buffer
Note:
From firmware version 3.0, the event buffer will be supported with the
following content from basic unit 2:
Entry 1 contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed"
Entry 2 contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit open"
See also Chapter B.7 "Data record 73 - Event memory".
SIMOCODE pro
14-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
15
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about troubleshooting.
Target groups
Commissioners
Configurators
PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro
Knowledge about SIMOCODE ES software
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
15-1
Event
(alphabetical)
Description
Troubleshooting
Acknowledg Contactor
ement/fault control
rectification
Error
no.*)
Analog module
open circuit
The analog value measuring

circuit is open.
Check the transducer

and the measuring
circuit.
Reset
64
Antivalence
Only for positioner 5 control

function: The change-over
contacts of the limit switch do
not issue an antivalent signal.
Limit switch defect, limit

switch open circuit
Configuration
fault
The configured device

configuration does not match
the existing configuration.
Please check whether

all configured
components are
present.
Check the actual
configuration using
"Configuration".
DM-F feedback
circuit
DM-F Local or
Check the wiring of
DM-F PROFIsafe has detected a
the feedback circuit
fault in the feedback circuit
Check the contact
(when the enabling circuit is
blocks in the feedback
being switched on, the feedback
circuit.
circuit must be closed.);
The "GF" (Gen. Fault) LED on the
front of the DM-F Local or DMF PROFIsafe flashes red
Tripped
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped
Rectify fault
so that the
feedback
circuit is
closed.
Tripped
DM-F safetyThe DM-F has tripped the

oriented tripping enabling circuit for safety
reasons.
The motor can only be

switched on again after
the DM-F module
enabling circuits have
been closed.
Acknowledg Tripped
e with
"Reset", if
auto-reset is
not active.
DM-F - Test
requirement
The DM-F Local or DM-F

PROFIsafe
enabling circuits have not been
opened and closed again within
the configured time period.
The function of the

enabling circuit relay
contacts can only be
tested when they are
switched.
Carry out a function test.
Please adopt
the
measures
intended for
this case.
DM-F wiring
DM-F module wiring fault (short- Check the wiring of

circuit to ground in the sensor
the sensor circuit/
circuit/feedback circuit);
feedback circuit
The "GF" (Gen. Fault) LED on the Rectify the fault.
front of the DM-F Local is lit red.
DM-FL Configuration
deviation
The effective configuration of

the DM-F Local does not
correspond to the parameterized
set configuration.
Reset
Tripped
Check whether the

effective configuration of
the DM-F Local
corresponds to the
parameterized set
configuration. Correct
the effective
configuration by
changing the DIP switch
settings or adjusting the
set configuration by
means of
parameterization if
required.
Table 15-1: Alarms, faults and system events
SIMOCODE pro
15-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Event
(alphabetical)
Description
Troubleshooting
ement/fault control
rectification
DM-FL Configuration
mode
The DM-F Local is in

"Configuration mode";
The "DEVICE" LED on the front
of the DM-F Local is lit yellow.
Complete the
configuration (see
system manual "Failsafe
Digital Module
SIMOCODE
pro Safety", Chapter 7.4)
DM-FL - Cross
circuit
DM-F Local sensor circuit cross Check the wiring of

Reset
circuit.
both sensor circuits for
The "GF" (Gen. Fault) LED on the
cross circuiting
front of the DM-F Local is lit red. Rectify the fault.
Tripped
DM-FL Simultaneity
The DM-F Local has detected a

discrepancy fault in the twochannel sensor circuit.
Please check the contact Rectify the

blocks in the sensor
fault by
circuit.
opening or
closing the
sensor
inputs
Tripped
DM-FL waiting
for start-up test
The DM-F Local is in the

"Waiting for start-up test" state.
Carry out the start-up

test by actuating the
sensor in the sensor
circuit.
DM-FP F PRM
error
The specified PROFIsafe profile

parameters are erroneous or the
specified
PROFIsafe address does not
correspond to the configuration.
Please check the

PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe
parameters of
SIMOCODE pro, which
were set on the DP
Master system.
Double 0
Both torque switches have

activated simultaneously. The
motor feeder has been turned
off.
Open circuit torque

switch.
Torque switch is
defective.
Tripped
13
Double 1
Both limit switches have

activated simultaneously.
Limit switch is defective.
Tripped
14
End position
Except positioner 5 control

function: The state of the limit
switch has changed without a
command (positioner has left
the end position without a
command)
"OPEN/
CLOSED"
counter
command.
Tripped
15
Execution
ON command
The motor feeder could not be

Main circuit is
turned on after an ON command
interrupted (fuse,
is issued.
circuit breaker)
The motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective
Parameter execution
time is too short.
Reset or
OFF
command/
countercommand
Tripped
Error
no.*)
Table 15-1: Alarms, faults and system events (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
15-3
Event
(alphabetical)
Description
Execution
The motor feeder could not be
STOP command turned off after a STOP
command was issued.
Troubleshooting
ement/fault control
rectification
The contactor contact Rectify the

is welded
fault;
Parameter execution
reset
time is too short
The "open" end
position has not been
reached during the
parameterized runtime
(only for the
"Positioner" and
"Solenoid valve" control
functions).
Error
no.*)
Tripped
Tripped
29
External earth
fault
External earth-fault monitoring

Please check the motor
has activated. An impermissibly connection cable for
high fault current is flowing.
damage.
External fault
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
A signal is pending at the input

Check the motor feeder.
(socket) of the "External fault 1,
2, 3, 4, 5 or 6" standard function.
Tripped
56, 57,
58,
59,
60, 61
Feedback (FB)
OFF
The current flow in the motor

feeder has been interrupted
without the motor feeder being
turned off.
Tripped
11
Feedback (FB)
ON
Current is flowing in the motor Contactor contacts

feeder without the motor feeder
have been manually
being switched on
activated
Contactor has not
been switched on via
SIMOCODE
Rectify the
fault;
Reset or
OFF
command
Tripped
10
Hardware fault
The SIMOCODE pro basic unit

hardware is defective.
Please replace the basic Rectify the

unit.
fault
See Chapter 13
"Mounting, wiring,
interfaces".
Tripped
Internal earth
fault
Internal earth-fault monitoring

response. An impermissibly high connection cable for
fault current is flowing.
damage.
Tripped
28
Just one start

possible
The start after the next one

should not be carried out until
the interlocking time has
expired.
Module fault
At least one SIMOCODE pro

module is not ready for use.
Tripped
Reset
The main circuit has

Reset or
been interrupted (fuse, OFF
circuit breaker, main
command
switch).
The motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective
Reset
The connecting cable Rectify the

is defective or has not fault; reset
been plugged in
correctly.
Module is defective.
Please replace the
module.
For this, see
Chapter 13 "Mounting,
wiring, interfaces".
SIMOCODE pro
15-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Event
(alphabetical)
Description
Module supply
voltage is not
present
Supply voltage on the DM The terminals are not Rectify the

F Local is too low or not present. wired properly
fault; reset
Module is defective.
Please replace the
module.
For this, see
Motor operating The configured limit value for

hours >
the motor operating hours has
been exceeded.
Motor stop
time >
Troubleshooting
ement/fault control
rectification
Error
no.*)
Tripped
Please adopt the

maintenance measures
intended for the feeder.
The configured limit value for

Please adopt the
motor stop time monitoring has maintenance measures
been exceeded.
intended for the feeder.
If possible, switch on the
feeder.
No start possible The permissible number of

starts in the monitoring
timeframe has been attained.
The next start should not be
carried out until the interlocking
time has expired.
Reset
Tripped
Operational
protection OFF
(OPO)
An "Operational protection OFF

(OPO)" signal is pending.
A switched-on motor feeder has
been switched off.
Switching on is not possible
while the OPO signal is pending.
Reset
Tripped; for
positioners:
QE1 or QE2
switched on
until end
position is
reached depending
upon
configuration
Overload
The motor feeder has been

overloaded.
Please check the motor Reset, auto- Tripped

and the application that reset
is being driven by the
motor.
the cooling down period
has expired or after an
emergency start.
Overload and
unbalance

asymmetrically overloaded.
Possible causes:
Phase failure
Fault in the motor windings.
Check the motor feeder Reset or

and the motor.
auto-reset
has expired or after an
emergency start.
Tripped
19
25,26,
27
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
15-5
Event
(alphabetical)
Description
Troubleshooting
Parameter
changes not
allowed in the
current
operating state
It is not possible to change at

least one parameter in the
current operating state
Many parameters can

only be changed if the
motor feeder is switched
off and is not in the
"Remote" operating
mode.
For an overview of
parameters that can
always be changed,
see: Chapter "Data
formats and data
records" on Page B-1.
Parameter is
incorrect
("Event"
category)
There is an error in the

parameter data transmitted to
the device.
Errors in the parameter data can
occur, for example, if device
parameterization was not carried
out with SIMOCODE ES or
SIMATIC PDM.
Check the parameter

data (data records 130 133) that has been
transmitted to the device
for the correct content.
Parameter is
incorrect
("General fault"
category)
The parameter data is incorrect. The designation of the

faulty parameter can be
found via the number
(byte No.) in the system
manual, Chapter A
"Tables".
Permissible
The permissible number of
number of starts starts in the monitoring
exceeded
timeframe has already been
exceeded. The next start should
not be carried out until the
interlocking time has expired.
Phase unbalance The limit value for phase
unbalance has been exceeded.
Phase unbalance can cause an
overload.
Possible causes:
Phase failure
Fault in the motor windings.
Power failure
(UVO)
The power failure lasted longer

than the set power failure time.
Pre-warning
overload
(I > 115%)
The motor feeder is in overload

operation.
If this condition continues to
persist, the motor feeder will
trip within a short period of time
due to overload.
Check the motor feeder

and the motor.
ement/fault control
rectification
Error
no.*)
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped
Reset
Tripped
Reset
Tripped
Rectify the
fault;
Reset or
OFF
command
Tripped
52
18

and the application that
motor.
SIMOCODE pro
15-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Event
(alphabetical)
Description
Troubleshooting
ement/fault control
rectification
Error
no.*)
Required
function is not
supported
At least one parameterized

Activate only the
function is not supported by the functions that are
version of the basic unit.
supported by the version
of the basic unit.
For example,
SIMOCODE pro V basic
units with the version
*E01* do not support
voltage measurement,
the temperature module
or the analog module.
Stalled
positioner
The torque switch has activated The positioner may be

before or without the respective
blocked.
limit switch.
Acknowledge the fault
by releasing with the
"OPEN/CLOSED"
counter command.
Please check the
positioner application
and the limit switches
"OPEN/
CLOSED"
counter
command.
Tripped
12
Stalled rotor
The maximum motor current has Please check the

exceeded the threshold for
application that is being
stalled rotor protection.
driven by the motor.
Possible cause: The motor is
blocked.
Reset
Tripped
48
Start-up
The start-up parameter block
parameter block prevents adoption of
active
SIMOCODE pro parameters that
can be saved in the DP Master.
The block must be set when:
SIMOCODE ES
or
SIMATIC PDM
is used for parameterizing.
The block may not be set if:
SIMOCODE pro C/V is
integrated in STEP7 via the
SIMOCODE pro object
manager (OM)
or
SIMOCODE pro C has been
parameterized via GSD.
Notice
The parameter block is not active
in the case of devices that are st
set to the factory settings or
devices that have been reset to
the factory settings!
Status - Cooling
down period
active

switched off due to overload.

has expired.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
15-7
Event
(alphabetical)
Description
Status - DM-F
enabling circuit
Shows the status of the

enabling circuit:
closed
or
tripped
Status The thermal memory has been

Emergency start deleted with the function
executed
"Emergency start".
Troubleshooting
ement/fault control
rectification
Error
no.*)
The motor can be

switched on again
immediately after an
overload trip.
Status - Test
position (TPF)
The motor feeder is in the test

position (TPF).
The main current circuit has
been interrupted and "cold
starting" of the feeder can be
carried out.
Temperature
module Warning level
exceeded
The temperature warning level

has been exceeded.
Temperature
module out of
range
Temperature sensor is delivering Check the temperature

impermissible values.
sensor.
Reset
Tripped
37
Temperature
module sensor
fault
Either a short circuit or an open

circuit has occurred in the
temperature sensor circuit.
Check the temperature

sensor and the sensor
cable.
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped
36
Test position
feedback (TPF)
Current is flowing in the motor

feeder although the motor
feeder is in the test position
(TPF).
The main circuit is not

interrupted in test
operation.
Reset or
OFF
command
Tripped
Test trip

checked and switched off by a
test trip.
Reset
Tripped
65
17
Check the temperature

measuring station.
35
Thermistor open An open circuit has occurred in

circuit
the thermistor sensor cable.
Check the thermistor

sensor cable and the
thermistor.
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped
33
Thermistor short A short circuit has occurred in

circuit
the thermistor sensor cable.
Check the thermistor

sensor cable and the
thermistor.
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped
32
Thermistor trip
level
Thermistor protection response. Please check the motor Reset, auto- Tripped
The temperature of the motor is and the application that reset
too high.
motor.
The motor cannot be
switched on again until
the temperature has
reached the switch-back
point of the thermistor.
31
Trip antivalence
The limit switches are not

reporting any antivalent signals.
Limit switch open

circuit
Please check the
positioner application
and the limit switches
Counter
command
"OPEN/
CLOSED"
Tripped
16
SIMOCODE pro
15-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Event
(alphabetical)
Description
Troubleshooting
ement/fault control
rectification
Error
no.*)
Trip - Bus
PROFIBUS DP communication
has been interrupted or is
interrupted
Check the PROFIBUS

connection (plugs,
cables, etc.)
Reset, auto- Tripped

reset
Trip end position Positioner/solenoid valve has left

the end position without a
command being issued. The
motor feeder has been switched
off.
Acknowledge the fault

by releasing with the
counter command
"OPEN/CLOSED".
Reset;
counter
command
Trip - PLC/PCS
The PLC controlling the feeder

was or is in the STOP state.
Please check the

operating state of the
PLC.
Reset, auto- Tripped

reset
Trip temporary
components
(e.g. memory
module)
One of the following

components is defective:
Addressing plug
Memory module
PC cable.
Please replace the

defective components.
For this, see
Rectify the
fault; reset
Tripped
Tripped
Warning level 0/ The measured value at the

4 - 20 mA<
analog input has undershot the
undershot
warning level.
Check the measuring

station.
47
Warning level 0/ The measured value at the

4 - 20 mA >
analog input has overshot the
overshot
warning level.
Check the measuring

station.
46
Warning level
cos phi <
Please check the

44
Warning level I> The maximum current has

overshot
overshot the warning level.
Please check the

40
Warning level I< The maximum current has

undershot
undershot the warning level.
Please check the

41
Warning level P> The active power of the motor

overshot
has overshot the warning level.
Please check the

42
Warning level P< The active power of the motor

Please check the
undershot
has undershot the warning level. application that is being
43
Warning level U< The voltage in the motor feeder Check the motor feeder.
undershot
has undershot the warning level.
Possible causes:
Undervoltage in the network
Fuse has tripped.
45
The power factor cos phi has

undershot the warning level.
Possible cause: The motor is
being operated without a load.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
15-9
Event
(alphabetical)
Description
Wrong password SIMOCODE pro parameters are

protected by a password.
An attempt has been made to
change the parameters without
entering the password.
Troubleshooting
ement/fault control
rectification
Error
no.*)
Please use the correct

password for changing
the parameters.
If you do not know the
password, new
parameters can only be
entered after the factory
settings have been
restored.
For a description of
factory settings, please
refer to Chapter 14.3.4
"Resetting the factory
settings".
*) See "Error number" in Chapter B.6 "Data record 72 - Error buffer"
SIMOCODE pro
15-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Tables
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find various tables which can help you when working
with SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
Configurators.
Necessary knowledge
Thorough knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
A-1
A-2
-
Positioner 5 2)
Soft starter 2)
Soft starter with

reversing contactor 2)
Left
OFF
OFF
CLOSED STOP
CLOSED STOP
CLOSED STOP
CLOSED STOP
Right
slow
Slow
Right
slow
Slow
Right
ON
ON
Right
ON
ON>
Right
ON
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED OPEN
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CLOSED STOP
Left
slow
1) Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C

2) Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V
Positioner 3 2)
Positioner 2 2)
Positioner 4 2)
Positioner 1 2)
Left
fast
Pole changing
Solenoid valve 2)
Pole-changing starter 2)
Left
slow
Left
fast
Dahlander
Star-delta
starter 2)
Circuit breaker 1),2)
Left
Dahlander 2)
Reversing starter 1),2)
Left
Direct starter 1),2)
ON<
Star-delta
ON<<
Right
fast
Fast
Right
fast
Fast
ON>>
Left
QE2
OFF
pulse
Active
QE3
QE4
QE5
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
Right
slow
Slow
Right
slow
Slow
Reset
Left
fast
Left
fast
ON
command
ON
command
Left
slow
Fast
Left
star
slow
contactor
Fast
star
contactor
Right
Left
Reset
network network
contactor contactor
ON
network
contactor
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
Right
fast
Fast
Right
fast
Fast
Star
Delta
Right
Left
contactor contactor network network
contactor contactor
Star
Delta
Network contactor contactor contactor
ON
pulse
Right
ON
QE1
Contactor control
Left
fast
Left
fast
ON<<
CLOSED STOP
OFF
OFF
CLOSED STOP
CLOSED STOP
Left
Right
slow
Slow
Right
slow
Slow
Right
ON
ON
Right
ON
ON>
Right
ON
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED OPEN
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
CLOSED STOP
QLE>
(ON>)
Status information
QLA
(OFF)
Lamp control
CLOSED STOP
Left
slow
Left
slow
Left
Left
ON<
QLE<< QLE<
(ON<<) (ON<)
Right
fast
Fast
Right
fast
Fast
ON>>
QLE>>
(ON>>)
A.1
Overload 1),2)
Designation /
control function
Control station
Tables
Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and

status information for the control functions
Table A-1: Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status information for control functions
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
Tables
A.2
Abbreviations and specifications
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
Abbreviation
Meaning
BU1
Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)
BU2
Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
IM
UM
DM1
Digital module 1
DM2
Digital module 2
DM-FL
DM-FP
OP
Operator panel
OPD
AM
Analog module
EM
Earth-fault module
TM
Temperature module
Th
Thermistor
GF
General fault, control function
Cyclic
Cyclic
Acyclic
Acyclic
Fault
Status information
Warning
Table A-2: Abbreviations
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
A-3
Tables
Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Example
Designation
Type
Reserved
Byte[4]
Cos phi
Byte
Reserved
Byte[5]
Max. current I_max
Word
Range
Unit
Information
0 .. 100
1%
BU2
0 .. 65535
1 % / Is
BU1 BU2
Entries in italics are

not relevant (reserved)
and, when writing,
should be filled with "0"
Entry relevant for basic unit

and basic unit 2
Parameters can be changed while running.

Fig. A-1: Table specifications
Event - PRM error number (bytes):

If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group
(PRM group) which caused the error is transmitted here.
Byte.Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Reserved
4.0
Device configuration (12)
Parameter group 12
...
0.0
...
Fig. A-2: Example for parameter group
SIMOCODE pro
A-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Tables
A.3
Socket assignment table - digital

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (digital). You
only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user
program to fill data records and write these back.
No.
0
Designation
Information
Not connected
BU1 BU2
Fixed level 0
BU1 BU2
Fixed level 1
BU1 BU2
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Static level
Designation
BU Test/Reset button
BU1 BU2
BU Input 1
BU1 BU2
10
BU Input 2
BU1 BU2
11
BU Input 3
BU1 BU2
12
BU Input 4
BU1 BU2
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
16
Basic unit (BU)
Digital module DM
17
DM1 - Input 1
DM1
DM1 - Input 2
DM1
18
DM1 - Input 3
DM1
19
DM1 - Input 4
DM1
20
DM2 - Input 1
DM2
21
DM2 - Input 2
DM2
22
DM2 - Input 3
DM2
23
DM2 - Input 4
DM2
24
DM-FL sensor channel 1 Y12
DM-FL
25
DM-FL sensor channel 2 Y22
DM-FL
26
Reserved
27
Reserved
28
Reserved
29
Reserved
30
Reserved
31
Reserved
32
OP Test/Reset button
OP OPD
33
Operator panel OP/OPD
OP Button 1
OP OPD
34
OP Button 2
OP OPD
35
OP Button 3
OP OPD
36
OP Button 4
OP OPD
37
Reserved
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
A-5
Tables
No.
Designation
38
41
Information
Reserved
39
40
Designation
Reserved
DPV1/RS-232 interface
(acyclic data)
Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.0
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
42
BU1 BU2
43
BU1 BU2
44
BU1 BU2
45
BU1 BU2
46
BU1 BU2
47
BU1 BU2
48
BU1 BU2
49
BU1 BU2
50
BU1 BU2
51
BU1 BU2
52
BU1 BU2
53
BU1 BU2
54
BU1 BU2
55
56
57
PLC/PCS interface PLC [DPV0]

(cyclic data)
BU1 BU2
Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.0
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
58
BU1 BU2
59
BU1 BU2
60
BU1 BU2
61
BU1 BU2
62
BU1 BU2
63
BU1 BU2
64
BU1 BU2
65
BU1 BU2
66
BU1 BU2
67
BU1 BU2
68
BU1 BU2
69
BU1 BU2
70
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
71
72
Enabled control command
Enabled control command - ON <<
73
Enabled control command - ON <
74
Enabled control command - OFF
75
Enabled control command - ON >
76
Enabled control command - ON >>
77
Reserved
78
Reserved
79
Reserved
Dependent on the control

function
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
A-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Tables
No.
80
Designation
Contactor controls
Designation
Contactor control 1 QE1
81
82
83
84
85
Reserved
86
Reserved
87
88

function
Reserved
Lamp controls
Display - QLE<< (ON <<)
89
Display - QLE< (ON <)
90
Display - QLA (OFF)
91
Display - QLE> (ON >)
92
Display - QLE>> (ON >>)
93
Display - QLS (fault)
94
Reserved
95
96
Information

function
BU1 BU2
Reserved
Status information - General
Status - General fault
BU1 BU2
97
Status - General warning
BU1 BU2
98
Status - Device
BU1 BU2
99
Status - Bus
BU1 BU2
100
Status - PLC/PCS
BU1 BU2
101
Status - Motor current flowing
IM UM
102
Reserved
103
104
Reserved
Status information - Receive
Status - ON <<
105
Status - ON <
106
Status - OFF
107
Status - ON >
108
Status - ON >>

function
109
BU1 BU2
110
Status - Interlocking time active
All reversing starters and

positioners
111
Star-delta,
Dahlander,
Pole changing starter
112
Status - Runs in open direction
113
Status - Runs in close direction
114
Status - FC
115
Status - FO
116
Status - TC

function
117
Status - TO
118
Status - Cold starting (TPF)
BU1 BU2
119
Status - OPO
BU2
120
Status - Remote mode
BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
A-7
Tables
No.
121
Designation
Status information - Protection
Designation
Information
IM UM
122
IM UM
123
Status - Pause time active
IM UM
Status - Device test active
BU1 BU2
Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3
UM
126
UM
127
Status - DM-F enabling circuit
DM-F
124
Status information - Miscellaneous
125
128
Event - Overload operation
IM UM
129
Events - Protection
Event - Unbalance
IM UM
130
Event - Overload
IM UM
131
Event - Overload + phase failure
IM UM
132
Event - Internal earth fault
IM UM
133
Event - External earth fault
EM
134
Event - Warning ext. earth fault
EM
135
Event - Thermistor overload
Th
136
Event - Thermistor short circuit
Th
137
Event - Thermistor open circuit
Th
138
Event - TM warning T>
TM
139
Event - TM Trip T>
TM
140
Event - TM sensor fault
TM
141
Event - TM out of range
TM
142
Reserved
143
Reserved
144
Event - Warning I>
IM UM
145
Events - Level monitoring
Event - Warning I<
IM UM
146
Event - Warning P>
UM
147
Event - Warning P<
UM
148
Event - Warning cos phi<
UM
149
Event - Warning U<
UM
150
Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA>
AM
151
Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA<
AM
152
Event - Trip I>
IM UM
153
Event - Trip I<
IM UM
154
Event - Trip P>
UM
155
Event - Trip P<
UM
156
Event - Trip cos phi<
UM
157
Event - Trip U<
UM
158
Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA>
AM
159
Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA<
AM
160
Event - Stalled rotor
IM UM
161
Reserved
162
Reserved
163
Event - No start possible
BU1 BU2
164
Event - No. of starts >
BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
A-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Tables
No.
Designation
165
Designation
Event - Just one start possible
Information
BU1 BU2
166
Event - Motor operating hours >
BU1 BU2
167
BU1 BU2
168
Event - Limit 1
BU2
169
Event - Limit 2
BU2
170
Event - Limit 3
BU2
171
Event - Limit 4
BU2
172
Event - External fault 1
BU1 BU2
173
BU1 BU2
174
BU1 BU2
175
BU1 BU2
176
BU2
177
BU2
178
Reserved
179
Reserved
180
Event - Analog module open circuit
AM
181
Event - DM-F safety-oriented tripping
DM-F
182
Event - DM-F - Test requirement
DM-F
183
Reserved
184
Events - Miscellaneous
Events - Time stamp function
185
186
Events - Miscellaneous
Events - System interface
189
190
Event - DM-FL safety o.k
DM-FL
Event - PROFIsafe active
DM-FP
Event - Configured operator panel missing
BU1 BU2
Reserved
Warnings - Miscellaneous
191
192
BU2
Reserved
187
188
Event - Timestamping function active + OK
Trip - General
Warning - DM-F feedback circuit
DM-F
Warning - DM-FL simultaneity
DM-FL
BU1 BU2
193
Trip - Module fault (e.g. IM, DM)
BU1 BU2
194
Trip - Temporary components (e.g. memory

module)
BU1 BU2
195
BU1 BU2
196
BU1 BU2
197
Trip - Bus
BU1 BU2
198
Trip - PLC/PCS
BU1 BU2
199
Reserved
200
Trip - Controlling
Trip - Execution Time ON
201
Trip - Execution time OFF
202
Trip - FB ON
203
Trip - FB OFF
204
Positioner
205
Trip - Double 0
Solenoid valve/positioner
206
Trip - Double 1
207
Trip - End position
Not for overload relays
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
A-9
Tables
No.
Designation
Designation
Information
208
Trip - Antivalence
Positioner
209
Trip - Cold starting (TPF) error
BU1 BU2
210
Trip - UVO fault
BU2
211
Trip - OPO fault
BU2
212
Reserved
213
Reserved
214
Reserved
215
216
Reserved
Freely-programmable elements
Truth Table 1 3I/1O output
BU1 BU2
217
BU1 BU2
218
BU1 BU2
219
BU2
220
BU2
221
BU2
222
BU2
223
BU2
224
Truth Table 9 5I/2O output 1
BU2
225
Truth Table 9 5I/2O output 2
BU2
226
Reserved
227
Reserved
228
Reserved
229
Reserved
230
Reserved
231
Reserved
232
Timer 1 output
BU1 BU2
233
Timer 2 output
BU1 BU2
234
Timer 3 output
BU2
235
Timer 4 output
BU2
236
Counter 1 output
BU1 BU2
237
Counter 2 output
BU1 BU2
238
Counter 3 output
BU2
239
Counter 4 output
BU2
240
Signal Conditioner 1 output
BU1 BU2
241
BU1 BU2
242
BU2
243
BU2
244
Non-volatile Element 1 output
BU1 BU2
245
BU1 BU2
246
BU2
247
BU2
248
Flashing 1 output
BU1 BU2
249
Flashing 2 output
BU1 BU2
250
Flashing 3 output
BU1 BU2
251
Flickering 1 output
BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
A-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Tables
No.
Designation
Designation
Information
252
Flickering 2 output
BU1 BU2
253
Flickering 3 output
BU1 BU2
254
Reserved
255
Reserved
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
A-11
Tables
A.4
Socket assignment table - analog

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (analog).
You only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user
program to fill data records and write these back.
All inputs for analog data can only process values of type "Word" (2 bytes). In
order to also be able to process values of type "Byte", the following applies:
The byte value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0.
No.
Designation
Unit
Information
Not connected
Reserved
BU1 BU2
Reserved
Reserved
Timer 1 - Actual value
100 ms
BU1 BU2
100 ms
BU1 BU2
100 ms
BU2
100 ms
BU2
Counter 1 - Actual value
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
10
BU2
11
BU2
12
Reserved
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
16
Max. current I_max
1 % / Is
IM UM
17
Current I_L1
1 % / Is
IM UM
18
Current I_L2
1 % / Is
IM UM
19
Current I_L3
1 % / Is
IM UM
20
Phase unbalance
1%
IM UM
21
Reserved
22
Reserved
23
Reserved
24
Voltage U_L1
1V
UM
25
Voltage U_L2
1V
UM
26
Voltage U_L3
1V
UM
27
Cos phi
1%
UM
28
Reserved
29
Reserved
30
Reserved
31
Reserved
32
Thermal motor model
2%
IM UM
33
Time to trip
100 ms
IM UM
34
Recovery time
100 ms
IM UM
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog
SIMOCODE pro
A-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Tables
No.
Designation
Unit
Information
35
Last trip current
1 % / Is
IM UM
36
TM - Max. temperature
1K
TM
37
TM - Temperature 1
1K
TM
38
TM - Temperature 2
1K
TM
39
TM - Temperature 3
1K
TM
40
41
Motor stop time
1h
BU1 BU2
42
DM-F - Time until test required
1 week
DM-F
43
Reserved
44
AM - Input 1
See 1)
AM
45
AM - Input 2
See 1)
AM
46
Reserved
47
Reserved
BU1 BU2
48
Acyclic Receive - Analog value
BU1 BU2
49
Cyclic Receive - Analog value
BU2
50
Reserved
51
Reserved
52
Motor operating hours - H word
BU1 BU2
53
Motor operating hours - L word
BU1 BU2
54
Int. motor operating hours - H word
55
Int. motor operating hours - L word
1s
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
56
Device operating hours - H word
BU1 BU2
57
Device operating hours - L word
BU1 BU2
58
Number of starts - H word
BU1 BU2
59
Number of starts - L word
BU1 BU2
60
Int. number of starts right - H word
BU1 BU2
61
Int. number of starts right - L word
BU1 BU2
62
Int. number of starts left - H word
BU1 BU2
63
Int. number of starts left - L word
BU1 BU2
64
Reserved
..
Reserved
69
Reserved
70
Active power P - H word
71
Active power P - L word
72
Apparent power S - H word
73
Apparent power S - L word
75
Reserved
..
Reserved
255
Reserved
1W
1VA
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog (Cont.)
1) S7 format:
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
0/4 mA=0
20 mA=27648
A-13
Tables
A.5
Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics

The following table contains the detailed messages of the slave diagnostics
for status information and the process alarm. This information is also
contained in data record 92.
Byte.Bit
0.0
Status information
Trip - Controlling
Trip - Execution ON command
Information
BU1 BU2
0.1
BU1 BU2
0.2
Trip - FB ON
BU1 BU2
0.3
Trip - FB OFF
BU1 BU2
0.4
BU1 BU2
0.5
Trip - Double 0
BU1 BU2
0.6
Trip - Double 1
BU1 BU2
0.7
Trip - End position
BU1 BU2
1.0
Trip - Antivalence
BU1 BU2
1.1
BU1 BU2
1.2
Trip - UVO fault
BU2
1.3
Trip - OPO fault
BU2
1.4
Reserved
2.0
2.1
Reserved
Trip - Protection
Trip - Unbalance
IM UM
2.2
Trip - Overload
IM UM
2.3
IM UM
2.4
IM UM
2.5
EM
2.6
Reserved
2.7
Th
3.0
Th
3.1
Th
3.2
Reserved
3.3
Trip - TM tripping T>
TM
3.4
TM
3.5
TM
3.6
4.0
4.1
4.2
Reserved
Trips Level monitoring
Trip - Trip I>
IM UM
Trip - Trip I<
IM UM
Trip - Trip P>
UM
4.3
Trip - Trip P<
UM
4.4
Trip - Trip cos phi<
UM
4.5
Trip - Trip U<
UM
4.6
Trip - Trip 0/4-20 mA>
AM
4.7
Trip - Trip 0/4-20 mA<
AM
5.0
IM UM
5.1
Reserved
Table A-5: Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics
SIMOCODE pro
A-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Tables
Byte.Bit
Status information
5.4
Trip - Number of starts >
5.5
6.0
6.1
Information
BU1 BU2
Reserved
Trips Miscellaneous
Trip - Ext. fault 1
BU1 BU2
Trip - Ext. fault 2
BU1 BU2
6.2
Trip - Ext. fault 3
BU1 BU2
6.3
Trip - Ext. fault 4
BU1 BU2
6.4
Trip - Ext. fault 5
BU2
6.5
Trip - Ext. fault 6
BU2
6.6
Reserved
6.7
Reserved
7.0
Trip - Analog module open circuit
7.1
Trip - Test trip
BU1 BU2
7.2
DM-F safety-oriented tripping
DM-FL DM-FP
7.3
Trip - DM-F wiring
DM-FL DM-FP
7.4
Trip - DM-F cross circuit
DM-FL
8.0
Warnings - Protection
AM
Warning - Overload operation
IM UM
8.1
Warning - Unbalance
IM UM
8.2
Warning - Overload
IM UM
8.3
IM UM
8.4
Warning - Internal earth fault
IM UM
8.5
Warning - External earth fault
EM
8.6
Reserved
8.7
Th
9.0
Th
9.1
Th
9.2
TM
9.3
Reserved
9.4
Warning - M sensor fault
TM
9.5
TM
9.6
10.0
10.1
Reserved
Warnings Level monitoring
Warning - Warning I>
IM UM
Warning - Warning I<
IM UM
10.2
Warning - Warning P>
UM
10.3
Warning - Warning P<
UM
10.4
Warning - Warning cos phi <
UM
10.5
Warning - Warning U<
UM
10.6
Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA>
AM
10.7
Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA<
AM
11.0
Warning - Stalled rotor
IM UM
11.1
Reserved
11.3
Warning - No start possible
BU1 BU2
11.4
Warning - Number of motor starts>
BU1 BU2
11.5
Warning - Just one start possible
BU1 BU2
11.6
Warning - Motor operating hours >
BU1 BU2
Table A-5: Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
A-15
Tables
Byte.Bit
Status information
11.7
12.0
Information
Warning - Motor stop time >

Warnings - Miscellaneous
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
12.1
BU1 BU2
12.2
BU1 BU2
12.3
BU1 BU2
12.4
BU2
12.5
BU2
12.6
Reserved
12.7
Reserved
13.0
Warning - Analog module open circuit
13.1
Warning - DM-F safety-oriented tripping
13.2
Warning - Test requirement
13.3
Reserved
13.4
Reserved
13.5
Reserved
13.6
DM-FL DM-FP
13.7
Warning - DM-FL
DM-FL
14.0
14.1
BU2
DM-FL DM-FP
Reserved
Status information - Protection
IM UM
14.2
IM UM
14.3
IM UM
14.4
Reserved
14.5
Reserved
14.6
Status information - Receive
14.7
15.0
BU1 BU2
Reserved
Event - Start-up parameter block active
BU1 BU2
Event - Parameter changes not allowed in the

current operating state
BU1 BU2
15.2
Event - Device does not support the required

functions
BU1 BU2
15.3
Event - Wrong parameter
BU1 BU2
15.4
Event - Wrong password
BU1 BU2
15.5
Event - Password protection active
BU1 BU2
15.6
Event - Factory settings
BU1 BU2
15.7
Event - Parameterization active
BU1 BU2
17.0
Event - DM-FL - Configuration mode
DM-FL
17.1
Event - DM FL - Configuration deviation
DM-FL
17.2
Event - DM-FL waiting for start-up test
DM-FL
17.3
Event - DM FP F PRM error
DM-FP
17.4
Reserved
15.1
Events Parameterization
Table A-5: Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
A-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the data records of
SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
Configurators
PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
Thorough knowledge of writing and reading data records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-1
Data records - overview

Data record No.
Description
Read/write
S7 system diagnostics
Read
63
Read
67
Process image of the outputs
Read
69
Process image of the inputs
Read
72
Error buffer
Read
73
Event memory
Read
92
Device diagnostics
(faults, warnings, status information)
Read
94
Measured values
Read
95
Service/statistical data
Read/write
130
Basic device parameters 1 (BU1 BU2)
Read/write
131
Basic device parameters 2 (BU1 BU2)
Read/write
132
Extended device parameters 1 (BU2)
Read/write
133
Extended device parameters 2 (BU2)
Read/write
139
Marking
Read/write
160
Communication parameters
Read/write
165
Identification
Read/write
202
Acyclic receive
Read/write
203
Acyclic send
Read
224
Password protection
Write
Table B-1: Data records - overview
SIMOCODE pro
B-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.1
Handling data records

This section contains helpful information about how best to handle data
records.
B.1.1
Writing/reading data records
Access to data records via slot and index

Slot: Access via slot 1
Index: Data record number
Writing/reading data records with STEP 7

You can access the data records from the user program.
Writing data records:
S7 DPV1 master: By calling SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58
S7 master:
By calling SFC 58
Reading data records:
S7 DPV1 master: By calling SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59
S7 master:
By calling SFC 59"
Further information
You will find further information on the SFBs:
In the "System Software for S7-300/400, System and Standard Functions"
reference manual
In the STEP7 online help.
Byte arrangements
When data which is longer than one byte is saved, the bytes are arranged as
follows ("big endian"):
Byte arrangement
Byte 0
High byte
Byte 1
Low byte
Byte 2
High byte
Byte 3
Low byte
Byte 0
High byte
Byte 1
Low byte
Byte 0
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 1
Data type
High word
Double word (D-word)
Low word
Word
Byte
Fig. B-1: Byte arrangement in "big endian" format
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-3
B.1.2
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
Abbreviation
Meaning
BU1
Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)
BU2
Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
IM
UM
DM1
Digital module 1
DM2
Digital module 2
DM-FL
DM-FP
OP
Operator panel
OPD
AM
Analog module
EM
Earth-fault module
TM
Temperature module
Th
Thermistor
CF
Control function
Cyclic
Cyclic
Acycl.
Acyclic
Fault
Status information
Warning
Table B-2: Abbreviations
SIMOCODE pro
B-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.1.3
Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Example
Designation
Type
Reserved
Byte[4]
Cos phi
Byte
Reserved
Byte[5]
Max. current I_max
Word
Range
Unit
Information
0 .. 100
1%
BU2
0 .. 65535
1 % / Is
BU1 BU2
Entries in italics are

not relevant (reserved)
and, when writing,
should be filled with "0"
Entry relevant for basic unit

and basic unit 2
Parameters can be changed while running.

Fig. B-2: Specifications
Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system

components are used.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-5
B.2
Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics
Byte DR0 DR1

Bit
Designation
Type
No error
Error
0.0
Module fault/OK
Bit
0.1
Internal fault
Bit
0.2
External fault
Bit
0.3
Channel fault
Bit
0.4
External auxiliary voltage missing Bit
0.5
Front panel plug missing
Bit
0.6
Module not parameterized
Bit
0.7
Wrong parameters on module
Bit
1.0
Module type
Bit[4]
1.4
Channel information available
Bit
1.5
Application information available
Bit
1.6
Substitute diagnostic alarm
Bit
1.7
Reserved = 0
Bit
2.0
Application module wrong/

missing
Bit
2.1
Communication fault
Bit
2.2
Operating status (0=RUN,

1=STOP)
Bit
2.3
Time monitoring activated
Bit
2.4
Supply voltage within module

failed
Bit
2.5
Battery flat (BATTF)
Bit
2.6
Total backup power failed
Bit
2.7
Reserved = 0
Bit
3.0
Rack failure (detected by IM/UM)
Bit
3.1
Processor failure
Bit
3.2
EPROM error
Bit
3.3
RAM error
Bit
3.4
ADC/DAC error
Bit
3.5
Blown fuse
Bit
3.6
PRAL missing
Bit
3.7
Reserved = 0
Bit
4.0
Channel type
Byte
0x7D
0x7D
5.0
Length of the channel specific

diagnostics
Byte
0x20
0x20
6.0
Number of channels
Byte
0x01
0x01
7.0
Channel fault vector (one bit per

channel)
Byte
0x00
0x01
8.0
Reserved
Bit
8.1
Short circuit
Bit
8.2
Undervoltage
Bit
8.3
Overvoltage
Bit
Information
Table B-3: Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics
SIMOCODE pro
B-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte
Bit
DR0
DR1
Designation
Type
No error
Error
8.4
Overload
Bit
8.5
Overtemperature
Bit
8.6
Open circuit
Bit
8.7
Upper limit overshot
Bit
9.0
Lower limit undershot
Bit
9.1
Error
Bit
9.2
Reserved
Bit
9.3
Reserved
Bit
9.4
Reserved
Bit
9.5
Reserved
Bit
9.6
Reserved
Bit
9.7
Reserved
Bit
10.0
Parameterization error
Bit
10.1
Sensor or load voltage missing
Bit
10.2
Fuse defective
Bit
10.3
Reserved
Bit
10.4
Earth fault
Bit
10.5
Reference channel fault
Bit
10.6
Process alarm missing
Bit
10.7
Actuator warning
Bit
11.0
Actuator trip
Bit
11.1
Bit
11.2
External fault
Bit
11.3
Non-specific error
Bit
11.4
Reserved
Bit
11.5
Reserved
Bit
11.6
Reserved
Bit
11.7
Reserved
Bit
12.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
Information
Error F9
Error F16
Table B-3: Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-7
B.3
Data record 63 - Analog value recording
Byte.Bit
Designation
Type
Range
Information
0.0
StartPos
Word
BU2
2.0
Channel No.
Byte
BU2
3.0
Analog value record currently running
Bit
0, 1
BU2
3.1
Trigger event occurred
Bit
0, 1
BU2
3.2
Reserved
Bit[6]
4.0
Measured value (0)
Word
0 ... 65535
BU2
6.0
Measured value (1)
Word
0 ... 65535
BU2
122.0
Measured value (59)
Word
0 ... 65535
BU2
124.0
Reserved
Byte[76]
...
Table B-4: Data record 63 - Analog value recording
The unit of the measured value is dependent on the assigned analog value.
You will find all the available analog values with their units in Chapter A.4
"Socket assignment table - analog".
B.4
Byte.Bit
Data record 67 - Process image of the outputs

Designation
Default
(also see parameters)
Type
0.0
Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0
Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON<
Bit
0.1
Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] OFF
Bit
0.2
Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON>
Bit
0.3
Test 1
Bit
0.4
Motor protection - Emergency start
Bit
0.5
Mode selector S1
Bit
0.6
Reset 1
Bit
0.7
Not assigned
Bit
1.0
Not assigned
Bit
1.1
Not assigned
Bit
1.2
Not assigned
Bit
1.3
Not assigned
Bit
1.4
Not assigned
Bit
1.5
Not assigned
Bit
1.6
Not assigned
Bit
1.7
Not assigned
Bit
2.0 to 3.7
Cyclic receive - Analog value
Not assigned
Word
Information
BU1 BU2
BU2
Table B-5: Data record 67 - Process image of the outputs
SIMOCODE pro
B-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.5
Byte.Bit
Data record 69 - Process image of the inputs

Designation
Default
(also see parameters)
Status - ON <
Type
0.0
Cyclic send - Bit 0.0
0.1
Status - OFF
Bit
0.2
Status - ON >
Bit
0.3
Event - Overload operation
Bit
0.4
Bit
0.5
Bit
0.6
Bit
Information
Bit
0.7
Bit
1.0
Not assigned
Bit
1.1
Not assigned
Bit
1.2
Not assigned
Bit
1.3
Not assigned
Bit
1.4
Not assigned
Bit
1.5
Not assigned
Bit
1.6
Not assigned
Bit
1.7
Not assigned
Bit
2.0
PLC/PCS analog input 1
Max. current I_max
Word
4.0
Not assigned
Word
BU2
6.0
Not assigned
Word
BU2
8.0
Not assigned
Word
BU2
BU1 BU2
Table B-6: Data record 69 - Process image of the inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-9
B.6
Data record 72 - Error buffer
Byte.Bit
Entry
0.0
Designation
Type
Information
Time stamp
D-word
BU1 BU2
Type
Byte
BU1 BU2
5.0
Error number
Byte
BU1 BU2
6.0
Time stamp
D-word
BU1 BU2
4.0
10.0
11.0
Type
Byte
BU1 BU2
Error number
Byte
BU1 BU2
Time stamp
D-word
BU1 BU2
Type
Byte
BU1 BU2
Error number
Byte
BU1 BU2
...
120.0
124.0
21
125.0
Table B-7: Data record 72 - Error buffer
Time stamp
The operating hours of the device are used as a time stamp (resolution: 1 s).
Type/error number
If the type has the value 71, the entry contains an error: Refer to the error
numbers for detailed information. You will find the meaning in the "Error
number" column of "Data record 92 - Diagnostics" in Chapter B.8 "Data
record 92 - Device diagnostics".
If the type has the value 255, the entry displays "Power - On". In this case,
the error number contains the number of power on operations, reduced by 1
(0 = 1x power on, ...).
SIMOCODE pro
B-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.7
Data record 73 - Event memory
Byte.Bit
Entry
0.0
Designation
Type
Information
Time stamp
D-word
BU2
Type
Byte
BU2
5.0
Information
Byte
BU2
8.0
Time stamp
D-word
BU2
4.0
12.0
13.0
Type
Byte
BU2
Information
Byte
BU2
Table B-8: Data record 73 - Event memory
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-11
B.8
Byte.Bit
0.0
1.0
Data record 92 - Device diagnostics
Designation
Information
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
1.2
Status - Device
BU1 BU2
1.3
Status - Bus
BU1 BU2
1.4
Status - PLC/PCS
BU1 BU2
1.5
Status - Motor current flowing
IM UM
2.0
Reserved
Status information Status - ON <<
- Receive
2.1
Status - ON <
2.2
Status - OFF
2.3
Status - ON >
2.4
Status - ON >>
2.5
BU1 BU2
2.6
All reversing starters

and positioners
2.7
Star-delta, Dahlander,
pole-changing
starters
Dependent on the
control function
3.0
Status - Runs in open direction
3.1
Status - Runs in close direction
3.2
Status - FC
3.3
Status - FO
3.4
Status - TC
3.5
Status - TO
3.6
BU1 BU2
3.7
Status - OPO
BU2
4.0
4.1

Status information Status - Emergency start executed
- Protection
Dependent on the
control function
BU1 BU2
IM UM
4.2
Status - Cooling down period active IM UM
4.3
4.4
Status information Status - Device test active

- Miscellaneous
4.5
Error No.
***)
Reserved
Status information Status - General fault
- General
1.1
1.6
DP
Diagn.*)
IM UM
BU1 BU2
UM
4.6
UM
4.7
Status - DM-F enabling circuit
DM-F
SIMOCODE pro
B-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte.Bit
5.0
Designation
Events - Protection Event - Overload operation
Information
Event - Unbalance
5.2
Event - Overload
IM UM
5.3
Event - Overload + phase failure
IM UM
5.4
Event - Internal earth fault
IM UM
5.5
Event - External earth fault
EM
5.6
Event - Warning ext. earth fault
EM
5.7
Event - Thermistor overload
Th
6.0
Event - Thermistor short circuit
Th
6.1
Event - Thermistor open circuit
Th
6.2
Event - TM warning T>
TM
6.3
Event - TM Trip T>
TM
6.4
Event - TM sensor fault
TM
6.5
Event - TM out of range
TM
6.6
Reserved
Events - Level
monitoring
Error No.
***)
IM UM
IM UM
5.1
7.0
DP
Diagn.*)
Event - Warning I>
IM UM
7.1
Event - Warning I<
IM UM
7.2
Event - Warning P>
UM
7.3
Event - Warning P<
UM
7.4
Event - Warning cos phi<
UM
7.5
Event - Warning U<
UM
7.6
Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA>
AM
7.7
Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA<
AM
8.0
Event - Trip I>
IM UM
8.1
Event - Trip I<
IM UM
8.2
Event - Trip P>
UM
8.3
Event - Trip P<
UM
8.4
Event - Trip cos phi<
UM
8.5
Event - Trip U<
UM
8.6
Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA>
AM
8.7
Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA<
AM
9.0
Event - Stalled rotor
IM UM
9.1
Reserved
9.3
Event - No start possible
BU1 BU2
9.4
Event - No. of starts >
BU1 BU2
9.5
Event - Just one start possible
BU1 BU2
9.6
Event - Motor operating hours >
BU1 BU2
9.7
BU1 BU2
10.0
Event - Limit 1
BU2
10.1
Event - Limit 2
BU2
Table B-9: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-13
Byte.Bit
Designation
10.2
Information
Event - Limit 3
BU2
Event - Limit 4
BU2
BU1 BU2
10.5
BU1 BU2
10.6
BU1 BU2
10.7
BU1 BU2
11.0
BU2
11.1
BU2
11.2
Reserved
11.3
Reserved
11.4
Event - Analog module open circuit
AM
11.5
Event - DM-F safety-oriented

tripping
DM-F
11.6
Event - DM-F - Test requirement
DM-F
10.3
10.4
Events Miscellaneous
11.7
12.0
Event - Timestamping function

active + ok
BU2
Reserved
Events Miscellaneous
12.3
12.4
Events - System
interface
12.5
12.6
Event - DM-FL safety ok
DM-FL
Event - DM-F PROFIsafe active
DM-FP
Event - Configured operator panel

missing
BU1 BU2
Event - Module not supported
BU1 BU2
Event - No module voltage
BU2
Event - Memory module read in
BU1 BU2
13.1
Event - Memory module

programmed
BU1 BU2
13.2
Event - Memory module erased
BU1 BU2
13.0
Error No.
***)
Reserved
Events - Time
stamp function
12.1
12.2
DP
Diagn.*)
Events - Memory
module
13.3
Reserved
13.7
Event - Addressing Event - Addressing plug read in

plug
BU1 BU2
14.0
Events Parameterization
Event - Start-up parameter block

active
BU1 BU2
14.1
Event - Parameter changes not

allowed in the current operating
state
BU1 BU2
14.2
Event - Device does not support the BU1 BU2

required functions
14.3
Event - Wrong parameter
BU1 BU2
14.4
Event - Wrong password
BU1 BU2
14.5
Event - Password protection active
BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
B-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte.Bit
Designation
14.6
Information
Event - Factory settings
BU1 BU2
14.7
Event - Parameterization active
BU1 BU2
15.0
Event - PRM error number (bytes)

**)
BU1 BU2
16.0
Event - DM-FL configuration mode
DM-FL
16.1
Event - DM-FL configuration

deviation
DM-FL
16.2
Event - DM-FL waiting for start-up

test
DM-FL
16.3
Event - DM FP PRM error
DM-FP
16.4
17.0
DP
Diagn.*)
Reserved
Warnings Protection
Warning - Overload operation
IM UM
17.1
Warning - Unbalance
IM UM
17.2
Warning - Overload
IM UM
17.3
IM UM
17.4
Warning - Internal earth fault
IM UM
17.5
Warning - External earth fault
EM
17.6
Reserved
17.7
Th
18.0
Th
18.1
Th
18.2
TM
18.3
Reserved
18.4
Warning - TM sensor fault
TM
18.5
TM
18.6
Reserved
Warning - Warning I>
IM UM
19.1
Warning - Warning I<
IM UM
19.2
Warning - Warning P>
UM
19.3
Warning - Warning P<
UM
19.4
Warning - Warning cos phi <
UM
19.0
Error No.
***)
Warnings Level monitoring
19.5
Warning - Warning U<
UM
19.6
Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA>
AM
19.7
Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA<
AM
20.0
Warning - Stalled rotor
IM UM
20.1
Reserved
20.3
Warning - No start possible
BU1 BU2
20.4
Warning - Number of motor starts>
BU1 BU2
20.5
Warning - Just one start possible
BU1 BU2
20.6
Warning - Motor operating hours >
BU1 BU2
20.7
Warning - Motor stop time >
BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-15
Byte.Bit
21.0
Designation
Warnings Miscellaneous
Information
DP
Diagn.*)
BU1 BU2
21.1
BU1 BU2
21.2
BU1 BU2
21.3
BU1 BU2
21.4
BU2
21.5
BU2
21.6
Reserved
21.7
Reserved
22.0
Warning - Analog module open

circuit
AM
22.1
Warning - DM-F safety-oriented

tripping
DM-F
22.2
Warning - DM-F test requirement
DM-F
22.3
Reserved
22.6
DM-F
22.7
Error No.
***)
Warning - DM-FL simultaneity
DM-FL
BU1 BU2
F9
23.1
Trip - Module fault

(e.g. IM, UM, DM module)
BU1 BU2
F9
23.2
Trip - Temporary components (e.g.

memory module)
BU1 BU2
F9
23.3
BU1 BU2
F16
23.4
BU1 BU2
F16
23.5
Trip - Bus
BU1 BU2
23.6
Trip - PLC/PCS
BU1 BU2
23.7
Reserved
23.0
24.0
Trips General
Trips Receive
Trip - Runtime ON
CF = positioner
24.1
CF = positioner
24.2
Trip - FB ON
CF = positioner
10
24.3
Trip - FB OFF
CF = Positioner
11
24.4
CF = positioner
12
24.5
Trip - Double 0
CF = positioner
13
24.6
Trip - Double 1
CF = positioner
14
24.7
Trip - End position
CF = positioner
15
25.0
Trip - Antivalence
CF = positioner
16
25.1
BU1 BU2
17
25.2
Trip - UVO fault
BU2
18
25.3
Trip - OPO fault
BU2
19
25.4
Reserved
26.0
Reserved
SIMOCODE pro
B-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte.Bit
26.1
Designation
Trip - Protection
Trip - Unbalance
Information
IM UM
DP
Diagn.*)
F
Error No.
***)
25
26.2
Trip - Overload
IM UM
26
26.3
IM UM
27
26.4
IM UM
28
26.5
EM
29
26.6
Reserved
26.7
Th
31
27.0
Th
32
27.1
Th
33
27.2
Reserved
27.3
Trip - TM trip T>
TM
35
27.4
TM
36
27.5
TM
37
27.6
Reserved
Trip - Trip I>
IM UM
40
28.1
Trip - Trip I<
IM UM
41
28.2
Trip - Trip P>
UM
42
28.3
Trip - Trip P<
UM
43
28.4
Trip - Trip cos phi<
UM
44
28.5
Trip - Trip U<
UM
45
28.6
Trip - Trip 0/4-20 mA>
AM
46
28.7
Trip - Trip 0/4-20 mA<
AM
47
29.0
IM UM
48
29.1
Reserved
29.4
Trip - Number of starts >
BU1 BU2
52
Trip - External fault 1
BU1 BU2
56
30.1
BU1 BU2
57
30.2
BU1 BU2
58
30.3
BU1 BU2
59
30.4
BU2
60
30.5
BU2
61
30.6
Reserved
28.0
Trips - Level
monitoring
29.5
30.0
Reserved
Trips Miscellaneous
30.7
Reserved
31.0
Trip - Analog module open circuit
AM
64
31.1
Trip - Test trip
BU1 BU2
65
31.2
Trip - DM-F safety-oriented tripping DM-F
31.3
Trip - DM-F wiring
DM-FL
31.4
Trip - DM-FL cross circuit
DM-FL
31.5
Reserved
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-17
*) The "DP Diagn." column contains the bits which are additionally available
in the diagnostics using PROFIBUS DP:
F: Fault
M: Status information
W: Warning
F9, F16:Error types
See also Chapter A.5 "Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics".
**) Event - PRM error number (bytes):
If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group
(PRM group) which caused the error is transmitted here. You will find the
parameter groups in the parameter data records 130 to 133.
Byte.Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Reserved
4.0
Device configuration
(see above)(12)
Parameter group 12
...
0.0
Fig. B-3: Example for parameter group
***) See "Error number" in Chapter B.6 "Data record 72 - Error buffer".
SIMOCODE pro
B-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.9
Data record 94 - Measured values
Byte.Bit
Designation
Type
Range
Unit
Information
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Thermal motor model
Byte
0 .. 255
See 2)
IM UM
5.0
Phase unbalance
Byte
0 .. 100
1%
IM UM
0 .. 100
1%
UM
6.0
Cos phi
Byte
7.0
Reserved
Byte[5]
12.0
Max. current I_max
Word
0 .. 65535
1 % / Is
IM UM
14.0
Current IL1
Word
0 .. 65535
1 % / Is
IM UM
16.0
Current IL2
Word
0 .. 65535
1 % / Is
IM UM
18.0
Current IL3
Word
0 .. 65535
1 % / Is
IM UM
20.0
Last trip current
Word
0 .. 65535
1 % / Is
IM UM
22.0
Time to trip
Word
0 .. 65535
100 ms
IM UM
24.0
Cooling down period
Word
0 .. 65535
100 ms
IM UM
26.0
Voltage UL1
Word
0 .. 65535
1V
UM
28.0
Voltage UL2
Word
0 .. 65535
1V
UM
30.0
Voltage UL3
Word
0 .. 65535
1V
UM
32.0
AM - Output
Word
0 .. 32767
AM
34.0
AM - Input 1
Word
0 .. 32767
AM
36.0
AM - Input 2
Word
0 .. 32767
38.0
AM - Input 3
Word
0 .. 32767
See 1)
AM
AM
3)
TM
40.0
TM - Max. temperature
Word
0 .. 65535
1 K see
42.0
TM - Temperature 1
Word
0 .. 65535
1 K see 3)
TM
3)
TM
44.0
TM - Temperature 2
Word
0 .. 65535
1 K see
46.0
TM - Temperature 3
Word
0 .. 65535
1 K see 3)
TM
48.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
52.0
Active power P
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
1W
UM
56.0
Apparent power S
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
1 VA
UM
60.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
Table B-10: Data record 94 - Measured values
1) S7 format:
0/4 mA = 0
20 mA = 27648
2) Representation of the "Thermal motor model":
Value always refers to symm. trip level,
representation in 2% increments in bits 6 - 0 (range 0 to 254%),
bit 7 shows unbalance (fixed level 50%).
3) Representation in Kelvin.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-19
B.10
Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data
Writing the service data/statistical data

Writing is only possible if password protection is not active.
Additional abbreviations
r/w:
r:
Byte.Bit
0.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
18.0
20.0
22.0
24.0
26.0
28.0
30.0
32.0
34.0
36.0
40.0
44.0
48.0
52.0
56.0
60.0
64.0
68.0
value can be written/changed

value can only be read
Designation
Coordination
DM-F - Time until test required
Reserved
Number of parameterizations
Number of internal overload trips
Motor stop time
Calculation module 1 - Output
Calculation module 2 - Output
Reserved
Int. motor operating hours
Device operating hours
Number of starts
Internal number of starts right
Internal number of starts left
Energy consumed
Reserved
Type
Byte[4]
Byte
Byte
Byte[2]
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Byte[4]
D-word
D-word
D-word
D-word
D-word
D-word
D-word
Byte[8]
Range
0 .. 255
0 .. 255
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0 .. 65535
0
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF
Unit
1 week
1h
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
1s
1s
1s
1 kWh
Information
r 1)
r
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU2
r
r/w
r
r/w
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU2
BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
r/w
r
r
r/w
r
r
r/w
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
UM
Table B-11: Data record 95 - Diagnostics - Statistical data
1) Can only be written when the start monitoring function is active!
SIMOCODE pro
B-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.11
Byte
Bit
Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Device configuration (12)
Byte[8]
4.0
Device class
Byte
5, 9
5 = BU1
9 = BU2
BU1 BU2
BU2
5.0
Thermistor (Th)
Bit
0, 1
1 = active; thermistor in the BU
BU1 BU2
5.1
Reserved
Bit[7]
6.0
Operator panel (OP or OPD)
Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
6.1
Analog module (AM)
Bit
0, 1
BU2
6.2
Bit
0, 1
BU2
6.3
Bit
0, 1
BU2
6.4
Digital module 1 (DM1)
Bit[2]
0 .. 2
6.6
Digital module 2 (DM2)
Bit[2]
0 .. 2
7.0
Reserved
Bit[8]
8.0

(IM/UM)
Bit[7]
0 .. 5
8.7
Voltage measuring module

(UM)
Bit
0, 1
9.0
Reserved
10.0
Control function (CF)
BU1 BU2
0x00
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x20
0x21
0x30
0x31
0x40
0x41
0x50
0x60
0x61
0x62
0x63
0x64
0x70
0x71
11.0
Reserved
0 = no digital module
1 = monostable
2 = bistable
BU2
BU2
0 = no current measurement
1 = 0.3 A - 3 A
2 = 2.4 A - 25 A
3 = 10 A - 100 A
4 = 20 A - 200 A
5 = 63 A - 630 A
BU1 BU2
BU2
0x00 = Overload
0x10 = Direct starter
0x11 = Reversing starter
0x12 = Linked device
0x20 = Star-delta starter
0x21 = Star-delta
reversing starter
0x30 = Dahlander
0x31 = Dahlander
reversing starter
0x40 = Pole-changing starter
0x41 = Pole-changing
reversing starter
0x50 = Solenoid valve
0x60 = Positioner 1
0x61 = Positioner 2
0x62 = Positioner 3
0x63 = Positioner 4
0x64 = Positioner 5
0x70 = Soft starter
0x71 = Soft starter with
reversing contactor
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
Bit[8]
Table B-12: Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-21
Byte
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
12.0
Bit parameters (16)
12.0
No configuration fault due to

OP
Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
12.1

active
Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
12.2
Test/Reset buttons blocked
Bit
0, 1
12.3
Bus and PLC/PCS - Reset
Bit
0, 1
12.4
Reserved
Bit
12.5
Reserved
Bit
12.6
Reserved
Bit
12.7
Reserved
Bit
13.0
Diagnostics for process events Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
13.1
Diagnostics for process

warnings
0, 1
BU1 BU2
Bit
BU1 BU2
0 = Manual, 1 = Auto
BU1 BU2
13.2
Diagnostics for process faults
Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
13.3
Diagnostics for device faults
Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
13.4
Reserved
Bit
13.5
Reserved
Bit
13.6
Bus monitoring
Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
13.7
PLC/PCS monitoring
Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
14.0
Overload protection - Type of

load
Bit
0, 1
0 = 3-phase, 1 = 1-phase
IM UM
0, 1
0 = Manual, 1 = Automatic
IM UM
14.1
Overload protection - Reset
Bit
14.2
Reserved
Bit
14.3
Saving change-over command Bit
0, 1
14.4
Non-maintained command
mode
0, 1
Bit
14.5
Cold starting level (TPF)
Bit
0, 1
0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact
BU1 BU2
14.6
Load type
Bit
0, 1
0 = Motor, 1 = Resistive load
BU1 BU2
14.7
Reserved
Bit
15.0
External fault 1 - Type
Bit
0, 1
0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact
BU1 BU2
15.1
Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
15.2
Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
15.3
Bit
0, 1
15.4
External fault 1 - Activity
Bit
0, 1
15.5
Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
15.6
Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
15.7
Bit
0, 1
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
0 = Always, 1 = Only motor ON
BU1 BU2
Table B-12: Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1 (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
16.0
Bit[2] - Parameters (20)
16.0
Thermistor Overload response
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
Th
16.2
Thermistor - Response
to sensor error
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
Th
16.4
Internal earth fault - Response Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
16.6
Motor protection Overload response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
17.0
Motor protection - Overload

response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
17.2
Motor protection - Unbalance

response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
17.4
Trip response I>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
17.6
Warning response I>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
18.0
Trip response I<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
18.2
Warning response I<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
18.4
Stalled rotor - Response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
18.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
19.0
Monitoring the number of

Bit[2]
starts - Response at overshoot
0, 1, 2, 3
BU1 BU2
19.2

starts - Response at prewarning
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
BU1 BU2
19.4

monitoring - Response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
BU1 BU2
19.6
Motor stop time monitoring Response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
BU1 BU2
20.0
Ext. fault 1 - Response
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
BU1 BU2
20.2
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
BU1 BU2
20.4
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
BU1 BU2
20.6
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
BU1 BU2
21.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
21.2
Basic unit - Delay inputs
Bit[2]
0-3
Offset 6 ms
BU1 BU2
21.4
Timer 1 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
21.6
Timer 2 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0 = With closing delay

1 = Closing delay with memory
2 = With opening delay
3 = With fleeting closing
BU1 BU2
0 = Non-inverting
1 = Inverting
2 = Edge rising with memory
3 = Edge falling with memory
BU1 BU2
0 = Deactivated
1 = Signaling
2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
0
BU1 BU2
22.0
Signal conditioner 1 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
22.2
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
BU1 BU2
22.4
Non-volatile
element 1 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
22.6
Non-volatile
element 2 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
BU1 BU2
23.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
BU1 BU2
23.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
BU1 BU2
23.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-23
Byte
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Bit[2]
Default
Note
Information
23.6
Reserved
24.0
BU1 BU2
24.0
External fault 1 Reset also by
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
0101B Bit[0] = Panel reset

Bit[1] = Auto-reset
0101B Bit[2] = Remote reset
Bit[3] = OFF command reset
BU1 BU2
24.4
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
25.0
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
0101B
BU1 BU2
25.4
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
0101B
BU1 BU2
26.0
Limit monitor - Hysteresis for

limit monitors
Bit[4]
0 .. 15
BU1 BU2
26.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
27.0
Reserved
Bit[4]
27.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
BU1 BU2
28.0
Byte parameters (28)
28.0
Internal earth fault - Delay
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
29.0
Overload protection - Class
Byte
5, 10 .. 35,
40
10
BU1
BU2
30.0
Motor protection - Delay

with overload operation
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
31.0
Motor protection - Unbalance

level
Byte
0 .. 100
40
IM/UM
32.0
Unbalance protection - Delay

with unbalance
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
33.0
Interlocking time
Byte
0 .. 255
34.0
FB time
Byte
0 .. 255
0 = Deactivated
35.0
Trip level I>
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
36.0
Warning level I>
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
37.0
Trip level I<
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
38.0
Warning level I<
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
39.0
Stalled rotor level
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
40.0
Trip delay I>
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
41.0
Warning delay I>
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
42.0
Trip delay I<
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
43.0
Warning delay I<
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
44.0
Blocking delay
Byte
0 .. 255
IM/UM
45.0

starts - Permissible starts
Byte
1 .. 255
BU1
BU2
46.0
Reserved
Byte
47.0
Reserved
Byte
48.0
Truth table 1 type 3I/1O
Byte
0 .. 11111111B 0
BU1 BU2
49.0
Byte
0 .. 11111111B 0
BU1 BU2
50.0
Byte
0 .. 11111111B 0
BU1 BU2
51.0
Reserved
Byte
SIMOCODE pro
B-24
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
52.0
Word parameters (32)
52.0
Motor protection - Cooling

down period
54.0
Motor protection - Pause time Word
0 .. 65535
0 = Deactivated
56.0
Execution time
Word
0 .. 65535
10
0 = Deactivated
58.0

starts - Time range for starts
Word
0 .. 65535
BU1
BU2
60.0

starts - Interlocking time
Word
0 .. 65535
BU1
BU2
62.0
Stop time level >
Word
0 .. 65535
BU1
BU2
64.0
Timer 1 - Limit
Word
0 .. 65535
BU1
BU2
66.0
Timer 2 - Limit
Word
0 .. 65535
BU1
BU2
68.0
Counter 1 - Limit
Word
0 .. 65535
BU1
BU2
70.0
Counter 2 - Limit
Word
0 .. 65535
BU1
BU2
72.0
Reserved
Word
74.0
Reserved
Word
Word
600 .. 65535
3000
76.0
D-word parameters (36)
76.0
Enabled commands
0 .. 1..1B
0..0B
80.0
Motor protection - Set current D-word

I s1
1)
30
84.0
Motor operating hours level >
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 0
88.0
Reserved
D-word
Bit[32]
IM/UM
IM/UM
IM/UM
BU1
BU2
1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM/UM and the conversion factor
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-25
B.12
Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
4.0
BU - Output 1
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
5.0
BU - Output 2
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
6.0
BU - Output 3
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
7.0
Reserved
Byte
8.0
OP - LED green 1
Byte
0
0 .. 255
OP OPD
9.0
OP - LED green 2
Byte
0 .. 255
OP OPD
10.0
OP - LED green 3
Byte
0 .. 255
OP OPD
11.0
OP - LED green 4
Byte
0 .. 255
OP OPD
12.0
OP - LED yellow 1
Byte
0 .. 255
OP
13.0
OP - LED yellow 2
Byte
0 .. 255
OP
14.0
OP - LED yellow 3
Byte
0 .. 255
OP
15.0
Reserved
Byte
16.0
Byte
0 .. 255
0
105
Default: Status ON<
BU1 BU2
17.0
Byte
0 .. 255
106
Default: Status OFF
BU1 BU2
18.0
Byte
0 .. 255
107
Default: Status ON>
BU1 BU2
19.0
Byte
0 .. 255
128
Default: Event Overload

operation
BU1 BU2
20.0
Byte
0 .. 255
110
Default: Status Interlocking time

active
BU1 BU2
21.0
Byte
0 .. 255
120
Default: Status Remote mode
BU1 BU2
22.0
Byte
0 .. 255
96
Default: Status General fault
BU1 BU2
23.0
Byte
0 .. 255
97
Default: Status General warning
BU1 BU2
24.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
25.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
26.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
27.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
28.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
29.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
30.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
31.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
32.0
Acyclic send - Bit 0.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
33.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
Table B-13: Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2
SIMOCODE pro
B-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
34.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
35.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
36.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
37.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
38.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
39.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
40.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
41.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
42.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
43.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
44.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
45.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
46.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
47.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
48.0
Monitoring PLC/PCS input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
49.0
Motor protection - Emergency start
Byte
0 .. 255
60
50.0
Reserved
Byte
51.0
Reserved
Byte
52.0
Mode selector S1
Byte
0 .. 255
53.0
Mode selector S2
Byte
0 .. 255
Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.4
IM UM
61
Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.5
BU1 BU2
Default: Fixed
level value "1"
BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-27
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
54.0
Control station - Local control [LC] ON <
Byte
0 .. 255
55.0
Control station - Local control [LC] OFF
Byte
0 .. 255
Dependen
t on the
control
function
56.0
Control station - Local control [LC] ON >
Byte
0 .. 255
57.0
Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON <
Byte
0 .. 255
56
Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.0
58.0
Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] OFF
Byte
0 .. 255
57
Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.1
59.0
Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON >
Byte
0 .. 255
58
Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.2
60.0
Control Station - PC[DPV1] ON <
Byte
0 .. 255
61.0
Control Station - PC[DPV1] OFF
Byte
0 .. 255
62.0
Control station - PC[DPV1] ON >
Byte
0 .. 255
63.0
Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON <
Byte
0 .. 255
64.0
Control station - Operator panel [OP] OFF
Byte
0 .. 255
65.0
Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON >
Byte
0 .. 255
66.0
Control function - ON <
Byte
0 .. 255
73
Default: General
control station
ON <
67.0
Control function - OFF
Byte
0 .. 255
74
Default: General
control station OFF
68.0
Control function - ON >
Byte
0 .. 255
75
Default: General
control station
ON >
69.0
Control function - Feedback ON
Byte
0 .. 255
101
Default: Status Motor current

flowing
70.0
External fault 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
71.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
72.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
73.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
74.0
External fault 1 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
75.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
76.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
77.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
78.0
Cold starting (TPF)
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
79.0
Test 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
59
80.0
Test 2 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
81.0
Reset 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
62
Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.3
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
Default: Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.6
BU1 BU2
82.0
Reset 2 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
83.0
Reset 3 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
84.0
Reserved
Byte
85.0
Reserved
Byte
86.0
Reserved
Byte
SIMOCODE pro
B-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
87.0
Reserved
Byte
88.0
Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 1
Byte
0 .. 255
0
BU1 BU2
89.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
90.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
91.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
92.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
93.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
94.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
95.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
96.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
97.0
Reserved
Byte
98.0
Timer 1 - Input
Byte
0
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
99.0
Timer 1 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
100.0
Timer 2 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
101.0
Timer 2 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
102.0
Counter 1 - Input +
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
103.0
Counter 1 - Input -
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
104.0
Counter 1 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
105.0
Counter 2 - Input +
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
106.0
Counter 2 - Input -
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
107.0
Counter 2 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
108.0
Signal conditioner 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
109.0
Signal conditioner 1 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
110.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
111.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
112.0
Non-volatile element 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
113.0
Non-volatile element 1 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
114.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
115.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
116.0
Flashing 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
117.0
Flashing 2 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
118.0
Flashing 3 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
119.0
Flickering 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
120.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
121.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU1 BU2
122.0
Analog parameters (44)
122.0
PLC/PCS analog input
Byte
0 .. 255
16
123.0
Reserved
Byte
Default: Max.
current I_max
BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-29
B.13
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Unit
Default
Note
Information
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Bit parameters (17)
4.0
3UF50 - Compatibility mode
Bit
0, 1
4.1
3UF50 operating mode
Bit
0, 1
4.2
Reserved
Bit
4.3
Reserved
Bit
4.4
Reserved
Bit
4.5
Reserved
Bit
4.6
Reserved
Bit
4.7
Reserved
Bit
5.0
Reserved
Bit
5.1
Reserved
Bit
5.2
Reserved
Bit
5.3
Reserved
Bit
5.4
Analog module - Measuring range

Input
Bit
5.5
Analog module - Measuring range

Output
Bit
5.6
Reserved
Bit
5.7
Reserved
Bit
6.0
Overshooting/undershooting limit 1
Bit
0, 1
6.1
Bit
0, 1
6.2
Bit
0, 1
6.3
Bit
0, 1
6.4
Line-to-line voltage
Bit
0, 1
0 = No, 1 = Yes BU2
6.5
OPO level
Bit
0, 1
0 = NO
Contact,
1 = NC
Contact
6.6
Positioner response for OPO
Bit
0, 1
0 = CLOSED, 1 BU2
= OPEN
6.7
Star-delta - Transformer mounting
Bit
0, 1
0 = Delta
1 = In supply
cable
0 = NO
Contact
1 = NC
Contact
BU2
0 = DPV0,
1 = DPV1
BU2
0
0, 1
0, 1
AM
0
0
0 = 0..20 mA
1 = 4-20 mA
AM
0
0
7.0
External fault 5 - Level
Bit
0, 1
7.1
External fault 6 - Level
Bit
0, 1
7.2
Reserved
Bit
7.3
Reserved
Bit
7.4
Monitoring external fault 5
Bit
0, 1
7.5
Monitoring external fault 6
Bit
0, 1
0 = ">"
(Overshooting)
1 = "<"
(Undershootin
g)
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
0
0
0 = Always
1= Motor ON
BU2
BU2
Table B-14: Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1
SIMOCODE pro
B-30
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Unit
Default
7.6
Reserved
Bit
7.7
Reserved
Bit
8.0
Calculation module 2 - Operating

mode
Bit
8.1
Reserved
Bit
8.2
DM-F - Safe tripping function
Bit
0, 1
8.3
DM-F - Safety-oriented tripping

reset
Bit
8.4
Timestamping active
Bit
8.5
Reserved
Bit
8.6
Reserved
Bit
8.7
Reserved
Bit
9.0
DM-FL - Configuration 1
Bit
0, 1
Note
Information
0 = Word
1= D-word
BU2
0 = No
1 = Yes
DM-F
0, 1
0 = Manual,
1 = Auto
DM-F
0, 1
BU2
0
0, 1
9.1
Bit
0, 1
9.2
Bit
0, 1
9.3
Bit
0, 1
9.4
Bit
0, 1
9.5
Bit
0, 1
Configurable
parameters
comparable
with the
module
configuration
DM-FL
DM-FL
DM-FL
DM-FL
DM-FL
DM-FL
9.6
Bit
0, 1
DM-FL
9.7
Bit
0, 1
DM-FL
10.0
10.0
3UF50 basic type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
BU2
10.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
10.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
10.6
UVO operating mode
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
0=
Deactivated,
1 = Activated
11.0
Trip monitoring U<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
11.2
Warning monitoring U<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
UM
0 = ON
(always)
UM
1 = ON+
(always, not
TPF)
2 = RUN
(motor ON, not
TPF)
11.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
11.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
0
0
BU2
Table B-14: Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1 (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-31
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Unit
Default
12.0
Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
12.2
Warning monitoring 0/4-20 mA>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
12.4
Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
12.6
Warning monitoring 0/4-20 mA<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
13.0
Monitoring limit 1
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
13.2
Monitoring limit 2
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
13.4
Monitoring limit 3
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
13.6
Monitoring limit 4
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
14.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
14.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
14.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
14.6
AM - Active inputs
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
15.0
DM - Delay inputs
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
Bit[2]
10 ms
Note
Information
0 = ON
(always)
1 = ON+
(always, not
TPF)
2 = RUN
(motor ON, not
TPF)
3 = RUN+
(motor ON, not
TPF,
start-up
override)
AM
AM
AM
AM
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
0 = 1 input
1 = 2 inputs
2 = 3 inputs
AM
Offset 6ms
DM1 DM2
0=
Deactivated
1 = Signaling
2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
15.2
AM - Response for open circuit
1, 2, 3
15.4
EM - Response to an external earth Bit[2]

fault
1, 3
15.6
EM - Response to warning of an
external earth fault
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
16.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
16.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
16.4
DM-F - Test requirement response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
16.6
DM-F - Safety-oriented tripping

response
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
17.0
TM - Trip response T>
Bit[2]
1, 3
17.2
TM - Warning response T>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
17.4
TM - Response to a sensor fault/

out of range
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
17.6
TM - Active sensors
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
0=
Deactivated
1 = Signaling
2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
AM
EM
EM
DM-F
DM-F
TM
TM
TM
0 = 1 sensor
1 = 2 sensors
2= 3 sensors
TM
SIMOCODE pro
B-32
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Unit
Default
18.0
Trip response P>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
18.2
Warning response P>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
Note
0=
Deactivated
1 = Signaling
2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
Information
UM
UM
18.4
Trip response P<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
18.6
Warning response P<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
UM
19.0
Trip response cos phi<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
UM
19.2
Warning response cos phi<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
UM
19.4
Trip response U<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
UM
UM
19.6
Warning response U<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
UM
20.0
Trip response 0/4-20 mA>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
AM
20.2
Warning response 0/4-20 mA>
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2
AM
20.4
Trip response 0/4-20 mA<
Bit[2]
0, 1, 3
AM
0, 1, 2
AM
20.6
Warning response 0/4-20 mA<
Bit[2]
21.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
21.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
21.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
21.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
22.0
Response - External fault 5
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
22.2
Response - External fault 6
Bit[2]
1, 2, 3
22.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
22.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
23.0
Analog value recording - Trigger

edge
Bit[2]
23.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
23.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
23.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
24.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
24.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
24.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
24.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
25.0
Timer 3 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
25.2
Timer 4 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
0, 1
0=
Deactivated
1 = Signaling
2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
0 = Positive
1 = Negative
BU2
BU2
BU2
0
0 = With
BU2
closing
BU2
delay
1 = Closing
delay with
memory
2 = With
opening
delay
3 = With
fleeting
closing
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-33
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Unit
Default
25.4
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
25.6
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
26.0
Non-volatile
element 3 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
26.2
Non-volatile
element 4 - Type
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
26.4
Calculation module 2 - Operator
Bit[2]
0, 1, 2, 3
26.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
27.0
Reserved
Bit[2]
27.2
Reserved
Bit[2]
27.4
Reserved
Bit[2]
27.6
Reserved
Bit[2]
28.0
28.0
TM - sensor type
Bit[3]
+Bit
28.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
29.0
29.4
Note
Information
0 = Noninverting
1=
Inverting
2 = Edge rising
with memory
3 = Edge
falling with
memory
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
0 = +,
1 = -,
2 = *,
3=/
000B - 100B
000B
000B = PT100, TM
001B = PT1000
010B = KTY83
011B = KTY84
100B = NTC
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
Bit[4]
0 - 1111B
0101B Bit[0] =
Panel reset,
0101B Bit[1] =
Auto-reset,
Bit[2] =
Remote reset,
Bit[3] = OFF
command
reset
30.0
Reserved
Bit[4]
30.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
31.0
Reserved
Bit[4]
31.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
32.0
Bit[4]
0 .. 1111B
BU2
32.4
Bit[4]
0 .. 1111B
BU2
33.0
Is1 conversion factor - Denominator Bit[4]
0 .. 15
BU2
33.4
Is2 conversion factor - Denominator Bit[4]
0 .. 15
34.0
Hysteresis P - Cos phi - U
Bit[4]
0 .. 15
34.4
Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA
Bit[4]
0 .. 15
1%
AM
35.0
Hysteresis free limits
Bit[4]
0 .. 15
1%
BU2
35.4
Reserved
Bit[4]
36.0
36.0
Reserved
Byte
0
BU2
BU2
BU2
1%
UM
SIMOCODE pro
B-34
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Unit
Default
Note
Information
37.0
EM - Delay
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
EM
38.0
Trip level cos phi<
Byte
0 .. 100
1%
UM
39.0
Warning level cos phi<
Byte
0 .. 100
1%
UM
40.0
Trip level U<
Byte
0 .. 255
8V
UM
41.0
Warning level U<
Byte
0 .. 255
8V
UM
42.0
Trip level 0/4-20 mA>
Byte
0 .. 255
*128
AM
43.0
Warning level 0/4-20 mA>
Byte
0 .. 255
*128
AM
44.0
Trip level 0/4-20 mA<
Byte
0 .. 255
*128
AM
45.0
Warning level 0/4-20 mA<
Byte
0 .. 255
*128
AM
46.0
Trip delay P>
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
UM
47.0
Warning delay P>
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
UM
48.0
Trip delay P<
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
UM
49.0
Warning delay P<
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
UM
50.0
Trip delay cos phi<
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
UM
51.0
Warning delay cos phi<
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
UM
52.0
Trip delay U<
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
UM
53.0
Warning delay U<
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
UM
54.0
Trip delay 0/4-20 mA>
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
AM
55.0
Warning delay 0/4-20 mA>
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
AM
56.0
Trip delay 0/4-20 mA<
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
AM
57.0
Warning delay 0/4-20 mA<
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
AM
58.0
Delay limit 1
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
BU2
59.0
Delay limit 2
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
BU2
60.0
Delay limit 3
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
BU2
61.0
Delay limit 4
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
BU2
62.0
TM - Hysteresis
Byte
0 .. 255
1K
TM
63.0
Max. star time
Byte
0 .. 255
1s
20
64.0
UVO time
Byte
0 .. 255
100 ms
BU2
65.0
Staggering time
Byte
0 .. 255
1s
BU2
66.0
Analog value recording Sampling rate
Byte
0 .. 20
5%
BU2
67.0
Calculation module 2 Denominator 1
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
68.0
Calculation module 2 - Counter 2
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
69.0
Calculation module 1 Denominator
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
Star-delta
starter
70.0
Byte
0 .. 11111111B
BU2
71.0
Byte
0 .. 11111111B
BU2
72.0
Byte
0 .. 11111111B
BU2
73.0
Calculation module 2 - Counter 1
Byte
-128 .. 127
BU2
74.0
Calculation module 2 Denominator 2
Byte
-128 .. 127
BU2
75.0
DM-F - Test requirement level
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
1 week
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-35
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Unit
Default
Note
Information
76.0
Word parameters (33)
76.0
Analog module - Start value output Word
0 .. 65535
78.0
Analog Module - End value output
Word
0 .. 65535
27648 Value for 20

mA
AM
80.0
TM - Trip level T>
Word
0 .. 65535
1K
TM
82.0
TM - Warning level T>
Word
0 .. 65535
1K
TM
84.0
Limit monitor 1 - Limit
Word
0 .. 65535
BU2
86.0
Word
0 .. 65535
BU2
88.0
Word
0 .. 65535
BU2
90.0
Word
0 .. 65535
BU2
92.0
Timer 3 - Limit
Word
0 .. 65535
100 ms
BU2
100 ms
Value for
0/4mA
AM
94.0
Timer 4 - Limit
Word
0 .. 65535
BU2
96.0
Counter 3 - Limit
Word
0 .. 65535
BU2
98.0
Counter 4 - Limit
Word
0 .. 65535
BU2
100.0
Change-over pause
Word
0 .. 65535
10 ms
102.0
Analog value recording Sampling rate
Word
1 .. 50000
1 ms
100
BU2
104.0
Is1 conversion factor - Counter
Word
0 .. 65535
BU2
106.0
Is2 conversion factor - Counter
Word
0 .. 65535
BU2
108.0
D-word parameters (37)
108.0
Motor protection - Set current Is2
D-Word
1)
112.0
Trip level P>
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W
UM
116.0
Warning level P>
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W
UM
120.0
Trip level P<
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W
UM
124.0
Warning level P<
D-word
0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W
UM
128.0
Truth table 9
type 5I/2O - Output 1
Bit [32]
0 .. 1..1B
BU2
132.0
Truth table 9
type 5I/2O - Output 2
Bit [32]
0 .. 1..1B
BU2
136.0
Calculation module 2, offset
D-word
-0x80000000 ..
0x7FFFFFFF
BU2
140.0
Calculation module 1, counter/

offset
D-word
2x
-32768..32767
BU2
10 mA
1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM/UM and the conversion factor
SIMOCODE pro
B-36
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.14

(plug
)
Byte.
Bit
0.0
Designation
(PRM group)
Reserved
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
Byte[4]
4.0
4.0
DM1 - Output 1
Byte
0 .. 255
DM1
DM-F
5.0
DM1 - Output 2
Byte
0 .. 255
DM1
FM-F
6.0
DM2 - Output 1
Byte
0 .. 255
DM2
7.0
DM2 - Output 2
Byte
0 .. 255
DM2
8.0
Reserved
Byte
9.0
Reserved
Byte
10.0
Reserved
Byte
11.0
Reserved
Byte
12.0
Timestamping - Input 0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
13.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
14.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
15.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
16.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
17.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
18.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
19.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
20.0
Analog value recording - Trigger input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
21.0
Reserved
Byte
22.0
Control station - Local control [LC] ON <<
Byte
0 .. 255
23.0
Control station - Local control [LC] ON >>
Byte
0 .. 255
24.0
Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON <<
Byte
0 .. 255
25.0
Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON >>
Byte
0 .. 255
26.0
Control station - PC[DPV1] ON <<
Byte
0 .. 255
27.0
Control station - PC[DPV1] ON >>
Byte
0 .. 255
28.0
Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON >> Byte
0 .. 255
29.0
Control station - Operator panel [OP]<>/

<<>>
Byte
0 .. 255
30.0
Control function - ON <<
Byte
0 .. 255
31.0
Control function - ON >>
Byte
0 .. 255
32.0
Auxiliary control input - FC
Byte
0 .. 255
33.0
Auxiliary control input - FO
Byte
0 .. 255
34.0
Auxiliary control input - TC
Byte
0 .. 255
35.0
Auxiliary control input - TO
Byte
0 .. 255
Dependen
t on the
control
function
36.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
37.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
Table B-15: Data record 133 - Extended device parameters
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-37
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
Default
Note
Information
38.0
Reserved
Byte
39.0
Reserved
Byte
40.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
41.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
42.0
Reserved
Byte
43.0
Reserved
Byte
44.0
UVO fault
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
45.0
OPO error
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
46.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
47.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
48.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
49.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
50.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
51.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
52.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
53.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
54.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
55.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
56.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
57.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
58.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
59.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
60.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
61.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
62.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
63.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
64.0
Timer 3 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
65.0
Timer 3 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
66.0
Timer 4 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
67.0
Timer 4 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
68.0
Counter 3 - Input +
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
69.0
Counter 3 - Input -
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
70.0
Counter 3 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
BU2
71.0
Counter 4 - Input +
Byte
0 .. 255
72.0
Counter 4 - Input -
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
73.0
Counter 4 - Reset
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
74.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
75.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
76.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
77.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
78.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
79.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
80.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
Table B-15: Data record 133 - Extended device parameters (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-38
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Byte.
Bit
Designation
(PRM group)
Type
Range
81.0
Byte
82.0
Reserved
Byte
83.0
Reserved
Byte
84.0
Reserved
Byte
85.0
Reserved
Byte
86.0
Reserved
Byte
87.0
Reserved
Byte
88.0
Analog parameters (45)
88.0
Analog module - Output
Byte
0 .. 255
Default
0 .. 255
Note
Information
BU2
AM
89.0
Analog input limit 1
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
90.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
91.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
92.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
93.0
Calculation module 1 - Input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
94.0
Analog value recording - Analog input
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
95.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
96.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
97.0
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
98.0
Calculation module 2 - Input 1
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
99.0
Calculation module 2 - Input 2
Byte
0 .. 255
BU2
Table B-15: Data record 133 - Extended device parameters (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-39
B.15
Data record 139 - Marking

The diagnostics
External fault 1 to 6 (status information, warnings and faults)
Limit 1 to 4 (status information)
TM warning T>/tripping T> (status information, warnings and faults)
Warning/tripping 0/4 - 20 mA mA<> (status information, warnings and
faults)
can be parameterized to have various meanings e.g. fill level >, bearing hot,
etc. To simplify diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device. These
can be created, read out and displayed, for example, with SIMOCODE ES
The texts do not contain any functions.
Byte.Bit
Designation
Type
Information
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Reserved
Byte[6]
10.0
Marking - External fault 1
Byte[10]
BU1 BU2
20.0
Byte[10]
BU1 BU2
30.0
Byte[10]
BU1 BU2
40.0
Byte[10]
BU1 BU2
50.0
Byte[10]
BU2
60.0
Byte[10]
BU2
70.0
Reserved
Byte[10]
80.0
Reserved
Byte[10]
90.0
Marking - Limit 1
Byte[10]
BU2
100.0
Marking limit 2
Byte[10]
BU2
110.0
Marking limit 3
Byte[10]
BU2
120.0
Marking limit 4
Byte[10]
BU2
130.0
Marking - TM warning T>
Byte[10]
BU2
140.0
Marking - TM trip T>
Byte[10]
BU2
150.0
Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA>
Byte[10]
BU2
160.0
Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA<
Byte[10]
BU2
170.0
Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA>
Byte[10]
BU2
180.0
Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA<
Byte[10]
BU2
190.0
Reserved
Byte[10]
Table B-16: Data record 139 - Marking
SIMOCODE pro
B-40
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.16
Data Record 160 - Communication parameters

Notice
Only the address is relevant for writing. The baud rate is recognized
automatically. The current baud rate is read.
Byte.Bit
Designation
Type
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Station address
Byte
5.0
Baud rate
Byte
6.0 to 9.0
Reserved
Byte[6]
10.0
PROFIsafe address (read only)
Word
Information
BU1 BU2
BU2
Table B-17: Data record 160 - Communication parameters
B.17
Data record 165 - Identification
Byte.Bit
Designation
Type
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Plant identifier
Byte[32]
36.0
Byte[22]
58.0
Date
Byte[16]
74.0
Reserved
Byte[38]
112.0
Comment
Byte[54]
Information
BU1 BU2
Table B-18: Data record 165 - Identification
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-41
B.18
Data record 202 - Acyclic receive
Description
The acyclic receive data can be used for any functions. The receive data is
available as device-internal outputs (sockets).
Byte.Bit
Designation
Type
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Acyclic receive - Bit 0.0
Bit
4.1
Bit
4.2
Bit
4.3
Bit
4.4
Bit
4.5
Bit
4.6
Bit
4.7
Bit
5.0
Bit
5.1
Bit
5.2
Bit
5.3
Bit
5.4
Bit
5.5
Bit
5.6
Bit
5.7
Bit
6.0
Acyclic receive - Analog value
Word
Information
BU1 BU2
Table B-19: Data record 202 - Acyclic receive
SIMOCODE pro
B-42
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.19
Data record 203 - Acyclic send
Description
Any data can be transmitted via the acyclic send data. The send data is
available as device-internal inputs (plugs).
Byte.Bit
Designation
Type
0.0
Bit
0.1
Bit
0.2
Bit
0.3
Bit
0.4
Bit
0.5
Bit
0.6
Bit
0.7
Bit
1.0
Bit
1.1
Bit
1.2
Bit
1.3
Bit
1.4
Bit
1.5
Bit
1.6
Bit
1.7
Bit
Information
BU1 BU2
Table B-20: Data record 203 - Acyclic send
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-43
B.20
Data record 224 - Password protection
Description
Password protection ON
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is
activated and the password is accepted. If, at the time of receiving,
"Password protection ON" and the password are not the same, the event
"Event - Wrong password" is set and no change is carried out.
Password protection OFF
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection
is deactivated. If the password is false, the event "Event - Wrong password" is
set and no change is carried out.
Byte.Bit
Designation
Type
0.0
Reserved
Byte[4]
4.0
Control flag: 0 = password protection OFF

1 = password protection ON
Bit
4.1
Reserved
Bit[31]
8.0
Password
Byte[8]
16.0
Reserved
Byte[8]
Information
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
Table B-21: Data record 224 - Password protection
SIMOCODE pro
B-44
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for

predefined control functions
B.21.1
Overload relay
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value)
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Test 1 - Input
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Not connected
Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/Reset -> Reset 1 - Input
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Byte 2/3 (analog value)
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Event - Pre-warning overload (I>115 %)
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Maximum current I_max
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-22: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, overload relay
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-45
B.21.2
Direct starter
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OFF
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON
Further function blocks -> Standard functions - Test/Reset -> Test 1 - Input
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> Mode selector S1
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-23: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, direct starter
SIMOCODE pro
B-46
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.3
Reversing starter
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Status - ON <
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-24: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, reversing starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-47
B.21.4

Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-25: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
SIMOCODE pro
B-48
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.5
Star-delta starter
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Status - OFF
Status - ON
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-26: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, star-delta starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-49
B.21.6

Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Table B-27:
Status - ON <
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, star-delta reversing starter
SIMOCODE pro
B-50
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.7
Dahlander
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >>
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Status - ON >>
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-28: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, Dahlander
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-51
B.21.8

Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <<
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Status - ON >>
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Status - ON <<
Not connected
Status ON <
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-29: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, Dahlander reversing starter
SIMOCODE pro
B-52
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.9
Pole changing starter

Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Status - ON >>
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-30: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, pole-changing starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-53
B.21.10

Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <<
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Table B-31:
Status - ON >>
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Status - ON <<
Not connected
Status ON <
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, pole-changing reversing starter
SIMOCODE pro
B-54
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.11
Solenoid valve
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> CLOSED
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OPEN
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Status - OFF (Closed)
Status - ON > (Open)
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-32: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, solenoid valve
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-55
B.21.12
Positioner
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> CLOSED
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> STOP
Device parameters -> Motor control -> Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OPEN
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Status - ON < (Closed)

Status - OFF (Stop)
Status - ON > (Open)
Status - Positioner runs in open direction
Not connected
Status - Positioner runs in close direction
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-33: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, positioner
SIMOCODE pro
B-56
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B.21.13
Soft starter
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-34: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, soft starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
B-57
B.21.14

Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.3
Bit 0.4
Bit 0.5
Bit 0.6
Bit 0.7
Bit 1.0
Bit 1.1
Bit 1.2
Bit 1.3
Bit 1.4
Bit 1.5
Bit 1.6
Bit 1.7
Status - ON <
Status - OFF
Status - ON >
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Table B-35: Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, soft starter with reversing contactor
SIMOCODE pro
B-58
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Dimension drawings
In this chapter
This chapter contains the technical dimension drawings of the
SIMOCODE pro system components.
Target groups
Configurators
Technicians.
Necessary knowledge
Thorough knowledge of switchgear configuration.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C-1
Dimension drawings
3UF70 basic unit
C.1.1
SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 basic unit
80
106
12
C.1
45
36
86
Fig. C-1: SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 basic unit
SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic unit
80
106
12
C.1.2
45
65
115
Fig. C-2: SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic unit
SIMOCODE pro
C-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Dimension drawings
3UF710 current measuring module
C.2.1

3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A
84
C.2
45
40
7,5
T1
T2
38
T3
Fig. C-3: Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A,

3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C-3
Dimension drawings

3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A
94
C.2.2
55
67
14
T3
T2
65
T1
Fig. C-4: Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A
SIMOCODE pro
C-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Dimension drawings
C.2.3

3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A
120
79
95
95
140
78
25
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C-5
Dimension drawings
C.2.4

3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A
120
95
9
17
79
95
119
37
47
84
140
Fig. C-6: Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A
SIMOCODE pro
C-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Dimension drawings
C.2.5

3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A
145
50
25
85
122
147
57
11
125
6
148
60,5
60,5
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C-7
Dimension drawings
C.3
C.3.1

3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A
45
85
5
7
21
31
66
11
Fig. C-8: Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A

3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A
SIMOCODE pro
C-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Dimension drawings
C.3.2

3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A
55
94
20
12
23
60
92
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C-9
Dimension drawings
C.3.3

3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A

Fig. C-10: Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A
SIMOCODE pro
C-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Dimension drawings
C.3.4

3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A
37
17
79
79
95
119
95
120
47
140
Fig. C-11: Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C-11
Dimension drawings
C.3.5

3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A
48
25
122
147
88
1
1
32
125
67
149
145
SIMOCODE pro
C-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Dimension drawings
3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator panels
C.4.1
3UF7200 operator panel
36
29
C.4
96
29
89
Fig. C-13: 3UF7200 operator panel
96
55
3UF7210 operator panel with display
60
C.4.2
29
33
91,5
Fig. C-14: 3UF7210 operator panel with display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C-13
Dimension drawings
Expansion modules/decoupling module
68
92
10
C.5
22,5
115
110
15
Fig. C-15: Expansion modules/decoupling module
Versions:
3UF73 digital modules
3UF7500 earth-fault module
3UF7700 temperature module
3UF7400 analog module
3UF715 decoupling module
SIMOCODE pro
C-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Dimension drawings
C.6
Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-F PROFIsafe
Fig. C-16: Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-PROFIsafe
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
C-15
Dimension drawings
C.7
Accessories
C.7.1
Door adapter
IP54
24,5+0,5
.4
17
13.5+0.5
.1
0
R2
37
370,1
46
IP54
R2
13.5+0.5
.4
39
26.5+0.5
37
Fig. C-17: Door adapter
C.7.2

Fig. C-18: Operator panel adapter
SIMOCODE pro
C-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about SIMOCODE pro technical data.
Target groups
Configurators.
Necessary knowledge
Thorough knowledge of switchgear configuration
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D-1
Technical data
D.1
Common technical data
Specifications
EN 60204-1, EN 1760-1, DIN EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 61508
Test verification documents
Certificates:
Permiss. ambient temperature

In operation
-25 C - +60 C1)
For storage and transport
-40 C - +80 C 2)
Site altitude above sea level

< 2000 m
< 3000 m
Max. +50 C (no safe isolation)
< 4000 m
Max. +40 C (no safe isolation)
Degree of protection
(according to IEC 60529)
IP20
All components (except current
measuring module with bus
connection, operator panel and door
adapter)
Current measuring module with
bus connection
IP00
Operator panel (front) and door

adapter (front) with cover
IP54
Shock resistance (sine pulse)

according to DIN EN 60068-2-27
15 g / 11 ms
Mounting position
Any
Frequencies
50/60 Hz 5 %
EMC stability according to

IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1,
SN 27095, NE21
DM-F: IEC 61326-3-1
Corresponds to Degree of Severity 3
Conducted interference, burst

according to IEC 61000-4-4
2 kV (power ports)
overvoltage limiter is required

for inductive loads .
1 kV (signal ports)
Conducted interference, high
frequency according to
IEC 61000-4-6
10 V
Conducted interference, surge

according to IEC 61000-4-5
2 kV (line to earth)
1 kV (line to line)
Electrostatic discharging,
ESD according to IEC 61000-4-2
8 kV (air discharge)
6 kV (contact discharge) 3)
Field-related interference according

to IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m
SIMOCODE pro
D-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
This is a Class A product. This product can

cause radio interference if used in a
domestic environment. Therefore, the user
may need to implement suitable
countermeasures.
Conducted and emitted

interference
DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022 (CISPR11/CISPR22)

(corresponds to Degree of Severity A)
Safe isolation
according to IEC 60947-1
All SIMOCODE pro circuits are isolated from each other

according to IEC 60947-1, i.e. dimensioned with double
creepage distance and air clearance.
Notice
Please observe the information in the "Safe Isolation" test
report, No. 2668.
Connecting cable 3UF73

Rated voltage
Rated operating voltage
1)
2)
3)
300 V
24 V
For 3UF721 operator panel with display 0 C - 60 C

For 3UF721 operator panel with display -20 C - 70 C
For 3UF721 operator panel with display 4 kV
Table D-1: Common technical data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D-3
Technical data
D.2
Technical data of the basic units
Mounting
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or

screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED
Red: "Function test was negative, device is blocked"

Green: "Ready for operation"
Yellow: "Memory module or addressing plug detected"
OFF: "No control supply voltage"
Green "BUS" LED
Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"

Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/
programming device"
Red "GEN. FAULT" LED
Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
"TEST/RESET" button
Resetting the device after tripping

Function test (system self-test)
Operation of memory module, addressing plug
System interfaces
Front
For connecting an operator panel or expansion modules. The

memory module, addressing plug or a PC cable can also be
connected to the system interface for parameterization
purposes.
Bottom
For connecting a current measuring module or current/

voltage measuring module
Interface design
Connection system
RS485
9-pole SUB-D socket (12 MBit)
Terminals (1.5 MBit), connection cross section as per control
circuit
Connection of a PROFIBUS DP cable via terminal connection or
9-pole SUB-D socket.
Rated control supply voltage Us

(according to DIN EN 61131-2)
110 V - 240 V AC/DC 50/60 Hz
24 V DC
Operating range
0.85 x Us - 1.1 x Us -
0.8 x Us - 1.2 x Us -
Basic unit 1 (3UF7000)
7 VA/5 W
5W
Basic unit 2 (3UF7010)

(including two expansion modules
connected to basic unit 2)
10 VA 7 W
7W
Rated insulation
voltage Ui
300 V (for Degree of Pollution 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage

Uimp
4 kV
Power consumption
SIMOCODE pro
D-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
Mains buffering time

(longer power failures lead to
shutdown of the relay outputs
(monostable))
Type 50 ms
SIMOCODE pro C 24 V DC
110 V - 240 V AC/DC
SIMOCODE pro V 24 V DC
SIMOCODE pro V 110 V - 240 V AC/DC
Type 50 ms
Type 200 ms
Relay outputs:
Number
Function
Isolated NO contacts (NO contact response parameterizable

via internal signal conditioning), 2 relay outputs with common
ground, one separate relay output, freely-assignable to control
functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or operating
state status information.)
Mandatory short-circuit protection Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A

(IEC 60947-5-1)
for auxiliary contacts (relay
Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic
outputs)
(IEC 60947-5-1)
Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
Rated uninterrupted current
5A
6 A at max. +50 C
Rated switching capacity
AC-15
DC-13
Inputs (binary)
4 inputs with a common ground that are supplied via the device
electronics (24 V DC) for measuring process signals (e.g. local
control station, key-operated switch, limit switch, etc.), freelyassignable to control functions.
24 V DC
Cable lengths (single)
Input characteristic
6 A/24 V AC
2 A/24 V DC
6 A/120 V AC
0.55 A/60 V DC
3 A / 230 V AC
0.25 A/125 V DC
300 m
Type 1 according to EN 61131-2
Thermistor motor protection

(PTC binary)
Total cold resistance
< 1.5 kOhm
Response value
3.4 kOhm - 3.8 kOhm
Return value
1.5 kOhm - 1.65 kOhm
Cable lengths
Cross section: 2.5 mm2

1.5 mm2
0.5 mm2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Length: 2 x 250 m
2 x 150 m
2 x 50 m
D-5
Technical data
Connection
removable terminal block with screw connection
Tightening torque

0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections:

- Solid
2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm - 4 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 14/1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeve
2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 16/1x AWG 20 to 14
Table D-2: Technical data of the basic units
SIMOCODE pro
D-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
D.3
Technical data of the current measuring modules or

current/voltage measuring modules
Mounting
Set current Is = 0.3 A - 3 A;
2.4 A - 25 A; 10 A - 100 A
(3UF71.0, 3UF71.1, 3UF71.2)

Set current Is = 20 A - 200 A

(3UF7103, 3UF7 113)
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails, screw

attachment onto the mounting plate or direct mounting onto
the contactor
Set current Is = 63 A - 630 A

(3UF7104, 3UF7 114)
Screw attachment to the mounting plate or direct mounting

onto the contactor
System interface
For connection to a basic unit or decoupling module
Main circuit
Set current Is
3UF71.0: 0.3 A - 3 A
3UF71.3: 20 A - 200 A
3UF71.1: 2.4 A - 25 A
3UF71.4: 63 A - 630 A
3UF71.2: 10 A - 100 A
Rated insulation voltage Ui (at
Degree of Pollution 3)
690 V 1)
Rated operational voltage Ue
690 V

Uimp
6 kV 2)
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Type of current
Three-phase current
Short circuit
Additional short-circuit protection in main circuit

required 3)
+/- 3 %
Accuracy of current measuring
(ranging from 1 times the
minimum set current Iu to 8 times
the maximum set current Io)
Typical measuring range of the
voltage measuring
Line-to-line voltage/voltage
between lines (e.g. UL1L2)
Phase voltage (e.g. UL1)
Accuracy
Voltage measuring in the range
230 V - 400 V
Cos phi measurement (in the
nominal load range cos phi = 0.4 0.8)
Apparent power measurement (in
the nominal load range)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
110 V - 690 V (only the phase voltages are available in the

system as measured values)
65 V - 400 V
+/- 3 % (typical)
+/- 5 % (typical)
+/- 5 % (typical)
D-7
Technical data
Notes on voltage measuring:

Caution
must be used with a decoupling
Note that the supply cables for voltage measurement may
module for certain network types.
require additional cable protection.
See table 1-35 in Chapter 1.7.6
"Decoupling module (DCM) for
current/voltage measuring modules,
SIMOCODE pro V device series.".
Through-hole opening
Diameter
Set current 0.3 A - 3 A;

2.4 A - 25 A
7.5 mm
Set current 10 A - 100 A
14.0 mm
Set current 20 A - 200 A
25.0 mm
Bus connection 4)
Set current Is
20 A - 200 A
63 A - 630 A
Connection screw
M8x25
M10x30
Tightening torque
10 Nm - 14 Nm
2
14 Nm - 24 Nm
Solid with cable lug
16 mm - 95
mm2 4)5)
50 mm2 - 240 mm2 4)6)
Stranded with cable lug
25 mm2- 120 mm2 4)5)
70 mm2- 240 mm2 4)6)
AWG cable
6 kcmil - 300 kcmil
1/0 kcmil - 500 kcmil
Connection for voltage measurement

Tightening torque

0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm

- Solid
2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm 2- 4 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12
2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14
1) for 3UF7103 and 3UF7104 up to 1000 V

2) for 3UF7103 and 3UF7104 up to 8 kV
3) More information can be found at http://www.siemens.com/simocode and D.7 "Shortcircuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and
690 V" on Page D-24.
4) Screw connection is possible with an appropriate 3RT19... box terminal.
5) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section
larger than 95 mm2, the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain phase
separation.
6) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46234 to cables with a cross section
larger than 240 mm2 and when connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables
with a cross section larger than 185 mm2, the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover
is required to maintain phase separation.
Table D-3: Technical data of the current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
D-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
D.4
Technical data of the decoupling module
Mounting

screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs.
Display
Green "READY" LED
System interfaces
The left interface is for connection to a basic unit or an

expansion module, the right interface is exclusively for
connection to a current/voltage measuring module.
Connection cross sections

Tightening torque

0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm

- Solid
2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm - 4 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 14/1x AWG 20 to 12
2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 16/1x AWG 20 to 14
Table D-4: Technical data of the decoupling module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D-9
Technical data
D.5
Technical data of the expansion modules
D.5.1
Technical data of the digital modules
Mounting

Display
Green "READY" LED
Continuous light: "Ready for operation"

Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces
For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion

module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module or the operator panel
Control circuit
Rated insulation
voltage Ui
300 V (for Degree of Pollution 3)

Uimp
4 kV
Relay outputs
Number
Function
Stipulated short-circuit protection

for auxiliary contacts (relay
outputs)
Rated uninterrupted current

Rated switching capacity
Inputs (binary)
2 monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on version)

Isolated NO contacts (NC contact response parameterizable
via internal signal conditioning), relay outputs all with common
ground, freely-assignable to control functions (e.g. network,
star or delta contactor or operating state status information).
Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A
(IEC 60947-5-1)
Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic
(IEC 60947-5-1)
Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
5A
6 A at max. +50 C
AC-15
6 A/24 V AC
6 A/120 V AC
3 A/230 V AC
DC-13
2 A/24 V DC 0.55 A/60 V DC 0.25 A/125 V DC
4 externally supplied, isolated inputs (24 V DC or 110 V - 240 V
AC/DC, depending on version), with common ground for
measuring process signals (e.g. local control station, keyoperated switches, limit switches, ...), freely-assignable to
control functions.
24 V DC
300 m
110 V - 240 V AC/DC

200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF/km)
SIMOCODE pro
D-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
Connection
removable terminal block with screw connection
Tightening torque

0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm

- Solid
2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm 2- 4 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12
2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14
Table D-5: Technical data of the expansion modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D-11
Technical data
D.5.2
Technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules
Mounting
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or screw

attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Enclosure width
45 mm
System interfaces
For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module or the
operator panel
Rated control supply

voltage Us (according to
DIN EN 61131-2)
AC/DC 110 V - 240 V 50/60 Hz DC 24 V
Operating range
24 V DC: 0.8 up to 1.2 Us

110 V - 240 V AC/DC: 0.85 up to 1.1 Us
Power consumption
DM-F Local:
DC 24 V: 3 W
AC/DC 110 V - 240 V: 9.5 VA/4.5 W
DM-F PROFIsafe:
DC 24 V: 4 W
AC/DC 110 V - 240 V: 11,0 VA/5.5 W
Safe isolation according

to IEC 60947-1
Between relay enabling circuits/relay outputs

and electronics
Rated insulation
voltage Ui
300 V (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
4 kV
Power loss ride-through

time
DC 24 V: typ. 20 ms at 0,8xUs
AC/DC 110 V - 240 V: typ. 20 ms at 0,85xUs
typ. 200 ms at 230 V
Relay outputs
Quantity
Function
Electrical service life of

relay outputs

Common connection is internally disconnected in a fail-safe manner
by a relay enabling circuit
Normally open contact, freely assignable to the control functions
0.1 million switching cycles (AC-15, 230 V/3 A)
Relay enabling circuits

Quantity
2 common switching-type, fail-safe relay enabling circuits
Function
Fail-safe normally open contacts
Prescribed short-circuit
protection for relay
enabling circuits/relay
outputs
Fuse links operating class gL/gG 4 A (IEC 60947-5-1), separate for

each relay enabling circuit
SIMOCODE pro
D-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
Rated uninterrupted current of relay enabling
circuits
Rated switching
capacity of relay
enabling circuits
5A
AC-15: 3 A / AC 24 V; 3 A / AC 120 V; 1,5 A / AC 230 V

DC-13: 4 A / DC 24 V; 0,55 A / DC 60 V; 0,22 A / DC 125 V; 0,11 A / DC 250 V
Electrical service life of
0.1 million switching cycles (AC-15, 240 V/ 2 A)
Switching rate of the
2000/h
Connection
Removable terminal block with screw connection
Tightening torque
Torque: 7 lb.in to 10.3 lb.in

0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
relay enabling circuits

relay enabling circuits
Connection cross-sections:
- solid
2x 0.5 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 ... 4 mm 2

2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded with

end sleeve
2x 0.5 mm2 ... 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm 2 ... 2.5 mm2

2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
Table D-6: Technical data of the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D-13
Technical data
D.5.3
Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module
LED display
DM-F Local
Color
Meaning
"READY"
OFF
System interface disconnected/supply voltage too

low/device defective
Green
Device is ready for operation/system interface OK
Flashing
green
Device is ready for operation/system interface is

inactive or faulty
OFF
Green
Device is ready for operation
Flashing
green
Self-test
Yellow
Configuration mode
Flashing
yellow
Configuration fault
Red
Device is defective or interrupted
OFF
Safety-oriented output inactive
Green
Safety-oriented output active
Flashing
green
Feedback circuit not closed when starting condition

has been fulfilled
OFF
Input inactive
Green
Input active
Flashing
green
Fault recognized (e.g. cross circuit at the input, sensor

simultaneity not fulfilled)
OFF
No general fault
Red
General fault (wiring fault, cross circuit, configuration

fault)
Flashing red
General fault (enabling circuit fault, simultaneity not

fulfilled)
OFF
Cross-circuit detection OFF
Yellow
Cross-circuit detection ON
Flashing
yellow
Configuration mode awaits confirmation
"DEVICE"
"OUT"
"IN"
"GF"
"1"
SIMOCODE pro
D-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
"2"
"3"
"4"
"5"
"6"
"7"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
OFF
NC contact/NO contact
Yellow
NC contact/NC contact
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
OFF
2 x 1-channel
Yellow
1 x 2-channel
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
OFF
Delay time Y12, Y22, Y34 50 ms
Yellow
Delay time Y12, Y22, Y34 10 ms
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
OFF
Sensor circuit, automatic start
Yellow
Sensor circuit, monitored start
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
OFF
Cascade input 1, automatic start
Yellow
Cascade input 1, monitored start
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
OFF
With start-up testing
D-15
Technical data
"8"
Yellow
Without start-up testing
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
OFF
Automatic starting after power failure
Yellow
No automatic starting after power failure
Flashing
yellow
Flickering
yellow
Configuration fault
DIP switch
Setting of the safety functions
SET/RESETbutton
Application of parameters set via DIP switch

Resetting of faults (also possible via "TEST/RESET" on basic unit)
Inputs with safety relay

function
2 sensor inputs 24 V DC (Y12, Y22)

Supply via terminal T1 or T2 with cross-circuit monitoring or external
supply without cross-circuit monitoring
Functions parameterizable via DIP switch
1 start signal input 24 V DC (Y33)
For monitored reconnection of the relay enabling circuits after a
safety-oriented disconnection
Supply via terminal T2 or T3
1 cascading input 24 V DC (1)
For use in connection with a higher-level safety relay
Supply via terminal T2 or T3
1 feedback circuit input 24 V DC (Y34)
For contactor monitoring of the motor and incoming supply
contactors via seriesconnected auxiliary switch normally-closed
contacts
Supply via terminal T3
Cable length sensor

input and start signal
input (single)
1500 m
Table D-7: Technical data of the digital module DM-F Loca
SIMOCODE pro
D-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
D.5.4
Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module
LED display
DM-F PROFIsafe
Color
Meaning
OFF
System interface disconnected/supply voltage too

low/device defective
Green
Device is ready for operation/system interface OK
Flashing
green
Device is ready for operation/system interface is

inactive or faulty
OFF
Green
Device is ready for operation
Red
Device is defective or interrupted
OFF
Safety-oriented output inactive
Green
Safety-oriented output active
Flashing
green
Feedback circuit not closed when starting condition

has been fulfilled
OFF
No general fault
Red
General fault (PROFIsafe inactive, incorrect PROFIsafe

address, wiring fault, device defective)
"1"
Yellow
PROFIsafe address 1
"2"
Yellow
PROFIsafe address 2
"3"
Yellow
PROFIsafe address 4
"4"
Yellow
PROFIsafe address 8
"5"
Yellow
PROFIsafe address 16
"6"
Yellow
"7"
Yellow
"8"
Yellow
"9"
Yellow
"10"
Yellow
"READY"
"DEVICE"
"OUT"
"GF"
DIP switch
SET/RESET button
Inputs (binary)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Setting of the safety functions

Application of parameters set via DIP switch
Resetting of faults (also possible via "TEST/RESET" onbasic unit)
3 inputs 24 V DC (83, 85, 89)
Supply via terminal 84 or external supply
Common connected, electrically isolated inputs for acquiring processsignals (e.g., local control station, keyswitch, limit switch, etc.), freelassignable to control functions
D-17
Technical data
Input with safety relay

function
1 feedback circuit input 24 V DC (91/FBC)

For contactor monitoring of the motor and incoming supply
contactors via series-connected auxiliary switch normally-closed
contacts
Supply via terminal 90/T
Cable length (single)
300 m
Table D-8: Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module
Safety-related technical data of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules:
See chapter "Technical Data" in the system manual "Failsafe Digital Modules
SIMOCODE pro Safety".
SIMOCODE pro
D-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
D.5.5
Technical data of the analog module
Mounting

Display
Green "READY" LED

System interfaces

Control circuit
Type of connection:
2-wire connection
Inputs:
Channels
2 (passive)
Parameterizable measuring
ranges
0/4 mA - 20 mA
Cable shielding
Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the switchgear

cabinet; shielding mandatory for cables over 30 m
Max. input current

(destruction limit)
40 mA
Accuracy
1 %
Input resistance
50 Ohm
Conversion time
150 ms
Resolution
12 bit
Open circuit detection
For measuring range 4 mA - 20 mA
Isolation of the inputs to the

device electronics
No
Output:
Channels
Parameterizable output range
0/4 mA - 20 mA
Cable shielding
Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the switchgear

cabinet; shielding mandatory for cables over 30 m
Max. output voltage
30 V DC
Accuracy
1 %
Max. output load
500 Ohm
Conversion time
25 ms
Resolution
12 bit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D-19
Technical data
Short-circuit proof
Yes
Isolation of the output to the

device electronics
No
Connection:
Tightening torque

0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm

- Solid
2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm 2- 4 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12
2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14
Table D-9: Technical data of the analog module
D.5.6
Technical data of the earth-fault module
Mounting

Display
Green "READY" LED

System interfaces

Control circuit
Connectable 3UL22 summation
current transformer with rated
fault currents IN
IEarth fault < 50 % IN
IEarth fault > 100 % IN
0.3 / 0.5 / 1 A
Response delay (conversion time)
300 ms - 500 ms, additionally delayable
No tripping
Tripping
Connection:
Tightening torque

0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm

- Solid
2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12
2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14
Table D-10: Technical data of the earth-fault module
SIMOCODE pro
D-20
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
D.5.7
Technical data of the temperature module
Mounting

Display
Green "READY" LED

System interfaces

Sensor circuit
Conversion time
500 ms
Type of connection
2 or 3-wire connection
Typical sensor current:

PT100
1 mA (typical)
PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC
0.2 mA (typical)
Open circuit detection/short-circuit

detection/measuring range:
PT100/PT1000
Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 C - +500 C
KTY83-110
KTY84
NTC
Short circuit; measuring range: +80 C - +160 C
Measuring accuracy at an ambient

temperature of 20 C (T20)
<+ 2 K
Deviation due to ambient

temperature (as % of measuring
range)
0.05 per K deviation from T20
Isolation of the inputs to the

device electronics
No
Connection:
Tightening torque

0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm

- Solid
2x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm 2- 4 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 14/1 x AWG 20 to 12
2x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm 2 / 1x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2

2 x AWG 20 to 16/1 x AWG 20 to 14
Table D-11: Technical data of the temperature module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D-21
Technical data
D.6
Technical data of the operator panels
D.6.1
Technical data of the operator panel
Mounting
Installation in a switchgear cabinet door or in a front panel, with

IP54 system interface cover.
Display
Red: Blocked
Green:
Flashing green:
Yellow:
OFF:
"Function test was negative, device is

blocked"
"Ready for operation"
"No connection to basic unit"
"Memory module or addressing plug
detected"
"No control supply voltage"
Green "BUS" LED
Continuous light:
Flashing:
"Communication with PLC/PCS"

"Baud rate recognized/communication
with PC/programming device"
Continuous light/
flashing:
"Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
3 yellow LEDs / 4 green LEDs
For freely assigning any status signals
Buttons
Test/Reset
Resetting the device after tripping

Function test (system self-test)
Operation of memory module, addressing plug
Control buttons
Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable
System interfaces
Front
For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug or a PC

cable for parameterization purposes
Rear
For connecting a cable to the basic unit or the expansion

module
Table D-12: Technical data of the operator panels
SIMOCODE pro
D-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
D.6.2
Technical data of the operator panel with display
Mounting
Installation in a switchgear cabinet door or in a front panel,

with IP54 system interface cover.
Display
Red: Blocked
Green:
Flashing green:
Yellow:
OFF:
"Function test was negative, device is

blocked"
"Ready for operation"
"No connection to basic unit"
"Memory module or addressing plug
detected"
"No control supply voltage"
Green "BUS" LED
Continuous light:
Flashing:
"Communication with PLC/PCS"

"Baud rate recognized/communication
with PC/programming device"
Continuous light/
flashing:
"Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
4 green LEDs
For freely-assigning any status signals (preferably for feedback

on the switching state, e.g. ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT)
Display
Graphic display of current measured values, operating and

diagnostics data or status information.
Buttons
Control buttons
Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable
Arrow keys
Navigation in the display menu
Softkeys
Various functions, depending upon the menu, e.g. test,

reset, operation of memory module and addressing plug
System interfaces
Front
For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug or a PC

cable for parameterization purposes.
Rear
Connection to the basic unit or expansion module
Table D-13: Technical data of the operator panel with display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D-23
D-24
5.0
6.5
9.0
6.5
12.0
17.0
18.0
25.0
25.0
3TF69
2)
2)
820
630
630
820
630
630
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
820
630
630
225.0
265.0
280.0
400.0
450.0
225
265
300
400
500
662
630
502
182
215
243
324
405
225
265
300
400
500
662
630
502
/ 182.3
/ 214.7
/ 243
/ 324
/ 405
/ 225
/ 265
/ 300
/ 400
/ 500
/ 93.2
/ 121.5
/ 149.9
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
662
630
502
182.3
214.7
243
324
405
225
265
300
400
500
93.2
121.5
149.9
20.0
24.0
24.0
47.0
58.0
58.0
93.2
100.0
4.0
5.2
6.3
5.2
9.0
13.0
13.0
20.0
24.0
572
572
440
160
188
213
284
355
225
265
300
400
500
81.7
107
131
22.3
29.4
32.7
49.0
53.0
59.0
81.7
100.0
7.0
9.0
10.0
9.0
12.0
16.0
16.0
22.3
25.0
5.0
6.5
9.0
6.5
12.0
16.0
16.0
22.3
25.0
4.0
5.2
6.3
5.2
9.0
13.0
13.0
20.0
24.0
/ 20.0
/ 24.0
/ 24.0
/ 47.0
/ 53.0
/ 58.0
/ 81.7
/ 100.0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
3.0
3.0
/ 690V
/
/
572
572
440
572
572
440
/ 159.8 / 159.8
/ 188.2 / 188.2
/ 213 / 213
/ 284 / 284
/ 355 / 355
/ 225 / 225
/ 265 / 265
/ 300 / 300
/ 400 / 400
/ 500 / 500
/ 81.7 / 81.7
/ 106.5 / 106.5
/ 131.4 / 131.4
/ 22.3
/ 29.4
/ 32.7
/ 49.0
/ 53.0
/ 59.0
/ 81.7
/ 100.0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
3.0
3.0
2) Cannot be mounted on contactors

3) Observe operating voltage
4) Ensure that the safety margin between the maximum AC-3 operating current and the fuse rating is sufficient.
5) Assignment and short-circuit devices according to IEC60947-4-1
With type of assignment 1, contactors and starters may not endanger either persons or systems in the event of a short circuit
and must not be suitable for further operation until they have been repaired or the respective parts have been replaced.
With type of assignment 2, contactors and starters may not endanger either persons or systems in the event of a short circuit
and must be suitable for further operation. There is a danger of contact welding.
0.30 - 3.0A with

3UF1868-3GA00
Size 14
3TF69
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
225
265
300
400
500
225
265
300
400
500
225.0
265.0
300.0
400.0
500.0
225
265
300
400
500
93.2
122
150
/ 25.5
/ 33.0
/ 38.5
/ 56.0
/ 61.0
/ 69.0
/ 93.2
/ 100.0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
400V / 500V
3.0
3.0
531
531
408
146
172
195
260
325
194
228
258
344
430
74.8
98
120
20.3
28.0
29.4
45.0
47.0
53.0
74.8
97.5
12.0
15.0
15.0
20.3
25.0
5.0
6.5
9.0
3.0
3.0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
20.0
24.0
24.0
45.0
47.0
53.0
74.8
97.5
9.0
13.0
13.0
20.3
24.0
4.0
5.2
6.3
3.0
3.0
/ 690V
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
531 /
531 /
531
531
408
/ 146.3
/ 172.3
/ 195
/ 260
/ 325
/ 194
/ 228
/ 258
/ 344
/ 430
408 /
146
172
195
260
325
194
228
258
344
430
/ 74.8 / 74.8
/ 98 / 97.5
/ 120 / 120.3
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
12.0
15.0
15.0
20.3
25.0
20.3
28.0
29.4
45.0
47.0
53.0
74.8
97.5
/
/
/
7.0
9.0
9.5
/
/
400V / 500V
3.0
3.0
2.4 - 25A
Size S0
0.3 - 3.0A
Size S00
20-200A
Size S6
0.30 - 3.0A with

3UF1868-3GA00
Size 14
63-630A
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1066
3RT1075
3RT1076
3RT1264
3RT1265
3RT1266
3RT1275
3RT1276
2)
3TF68
/ 115.0 / 115.0
/ 150.0 / 150.0
/ 185.0 / 170.0
25.5
33.0
38.5
56.0
61.0
69.0
93.2
100.0
7.0
9.0
11.0
9.0
12.0
17.0
18.0
25.0
25.0
3.0
3.0
/ 690V
/
/
63-630A
115.0
150
185
20.0
24.0
24.0
47.0
58.0
58.0
100.0
4.0
5.2
6.3
5.2
9.0
13.0
13.0
20.0
24.0
3.0
3.0
Size S10/S12
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
400V / 500V
3.0
3.0
Overload relay
Setting range
(Type)
Size S10/S12
20-200A
Size S6
/ 32.0
/ 40.0
/ 50.0
/ 65.0
/ 80.0
/ 95.0
/ 100.0
5.0
6.5
9.0
6.5
12.0
17.0
18.0
25.0
25.0
3.0
3.0
/ 690V
/
/
25
10-100A
32.0
40.0
50.0
65.0
80.0
95.0
100.0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
3.0
3.0
20
Size S2/S3
3RT1034
3RT1035
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1046
3RT1054
3RT1055
7.0
9.0
12.0
9.0
12.0
17.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
/
/
400V / 500V
3.0
3.0
Class
Rated operating current Is/AC-3 in A at
15
10-100A
3RT1015
3RT1016
3RT1017
3RT1023
3RT1024
3RT1025
3RT1026
3RT1034
3RT1035
3RT1015
3RT1016
5 and 10
Size S2/S3
2.4 - 25A
Size S0
0.3 - 3.0A
Contactor
3TF69
3TF69
2)
2)
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1066
3RT1075
3RT1076
3RT1264
3RT1265
3RT1266
3RT1275
3RT1276
3TF68 2)
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
3RT1034
3RT1035
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1046
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1015
3RT1016
3RT1017
3RT1023
3RT1024
3RT1025
3RT1026
3RT1034
3RT1035
3RT1015
3RT1016
Contactor
500
500
376
135.0
159.0
180.0
240.0
300.0
173.3
204.1
231
316
385
69.0
90
111
19.1
26.5
26.5
41.7
45.0
50.0
69.0
90.0
12.0
14.0
14.0
19.1
25.0
7.0
9.0
9.0
3.0
3.0
19.1
26.5
26.5
41.7
45.0
50.0
69.0
90.0
12.0
14.0
14.0
19.1
25.0
5.0
6.5
9.0
3.0
3.0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
19.1
24.0
24.0
41.7
45.0
50.0
69.0
90.0
9.0
13.0
13.0
19.1
24.0
4.0
5.2
6.3
3.0
3.0
/ 690V
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
500
500
376
135.0
159.0
180.0
240.0
300.0
173.3
204.1
231
316
385
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
35
Class
500
500
376
135.0
159.0
180.0
240.0
300.0
173.3
204.1
231
316
385
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
17.6
25.0
25.0
38.2
43.0
47.0
63.0
82.0
12.0
13.0
13.0
17.6
25.0
5.0
6.5
9.0
3.0
3.0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
17.6
24.0
24.0
38.2
43.0
47.0
63.0
82.0
9.0
13.0
13.0
17.6
24.0
4.0
5.2
6.3
3.0
3.0
/ 690V
/
/
469
469
340
344
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
126
146
165
220
275
152
180
204
469
469
344
340
126
146
165
220
275
152
180
204
126
146
165
220
275
152
180
204
/ 469
/ 469
/ 344
/ 340
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
64.0 / 64.0 / 64.0

82 / 82.0 / 82.0
102 / 102.0 / 102.0
17.6
25.0
25.0
38.2
43.0
47.0
63.0
82.0
12.0
13.0
13.0
17.6
25.0
7.0
9.0
9.0
3.0
3.0
400V / 500V
40
438
438
317
316
133
150
200
250
131
156
177
74
93
16.1
23.5
23.5
34.5
40.0
44.0
57.0
74.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
16.1
23.5
7.0
8.5
8.5
3.0
3.0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
438
438
317
316
133
150
200
250
131
156
177
4.0
5.2
6.3
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
438
438
317
316
133
150
200
250
131
156
177
74.0
93.0
16.1
23.5
23.5
34.5
40.0
44.0
57.0
74.0
/ 9.0
/ 12.0
/ 12.0
/ 16.1
/ 23.5
3.0
3.0
/ 690V
/
/
74.0 /
93.0 /
16.1
23.5
23.5
34.5
40.0
44.0
57.0
74.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
16.1
23.5
5.0
6.5
8.5
3.0
3.0
400V / 500V
Rated operating current Is/AC-3 in A at
/ 69.0 / 69.0
/ 90.0 / 90.0
/ 111.0 / 111.0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
400V / 500V
30
0.30 - 3.0A with

3UF1868-3GA00
Size 14
63-630A
Size S10/S12
20-200A
Size S6
10-100A
Size S2/S3
2.4 - 25A
Size S0
0.3 - 3.0A
Size S00
Overload relay
Setting range
(Type)
3TF69
3TF69
2)
2)
3RT1064
3RT1065
3RT1066
3RT1075
3RT1076
3RT1264
3RT1265
3RT1266
3RT1275
3RT1276
2)
3TF68
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1056
3RT1034
3RT1035
3RT1036
3RT1044
3RT1045
3RT1046
3RT1054
3RT1055
3RT1015
3RT1016
3RT1017
3RT1023
3RT1024
3RT1025
3RT1026
3RT1034
3RT1035
3RT1015
3RT1016
Contactor
Type 3NA
800
800
800
500
500
500
630
630
500
500
500
800
800
355
355
355
125
125
160
200
200
200
355
355
35
35
35
63
63
63
100
125
125
35
35
630
630
4)
4)
400
400
400
500
500
500
500
500
800
800
4)
500
315
315
315
63
63
80
125
160
160
315
315
20
20
20
25
25
25
35
63
63
20
20
630
630
4)
4)
400
400
400
500
500
500
500
500
800
800
500 4)
315
315
315
63
63
80
125
160
160
315
315
20
20
20
25
25
25
25
63
63
20
20
500
4)
400
400
400
500
500
500
500
500
315
315
315
63
63
80
125
160
160
315
315
20
20
20
25
25
25
25
63
63
20
20
5)
aM
630
630
630
250
315
315
400
500
400
400
400
630
630
160
200
200
50
50
50
63
80
100
160
200
20
20
20
50
50
Type 3ND
690V/
50kA
Type of assignment
1
2
gL(gG)
Type 5SE
Type 5SB
LV HRC
Operating class
NEOZED
DIAZED
3)
690V/
100kA
Fuse links
415V/
50kA
BS88
Fuses
630
630
500
400
400
400
450
500
450
450
450
800
800
250
315
315
63
80
80
125
160
160
250
315
20
20
20
25
25
25
25
63
63
20
20
standards
British
1600
1600
1600
600
700
800
1000
1200
600
700
800
1000
1200
450
500
500
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
400
60
60
60
70
70
70
100
100
100
10
10
RK5/CLASS L
600V
Standard shortcircuit
Ratings
UL listed
Fuses
D.7
Size S00
Overload relay
Setting range
(Type)
690V/
50kA
Technical data
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for

short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
16,0A
3RT2018
25,0A
25,0A
25,0A
3RT2025
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
12,0A
17,0A
25,0A
32,0A
38,0A
3RT2024
3RT2025
3RT2026
3RT2027
3RT2028
100A
17,0A
3RT2024
ohne Schtz
25A
12,0A
ohne Schtz
2)
12,0A
3RT2017
3A
3RT2018
9,0A
3A
3RT2017
3RT2016
3A
3RT2016
7,0A
3A
3RT2015
3A
3RT2015
9,2A /
7,7A
6,0A /
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
25A
/
9,0A
25A
8,9A
6,7A
6,7A
4,9A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
100A / 100A
/ 32,0A / 21,0A
/ 32,0A / 21,0A
/ 18,0A / 13,0A
/ 17,0A / 13,0A
/ 12,0A /
/ 25,0A / 21,0A
/ 25,0A / 21,0A
/ 18,0A / 13,0A
/ 17,0A / 13,0A
/ 12,0A /
15
9,2A
7,7A
6,0A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
25A
25A
25A
9,0A
100A
100A
23,0A / 20,0A / 20,0A
23,0A / 20,0A / 20,0A
18,0A / 18,0A / 13,0A
17,0A / 17,0A / 13,0A
12,0A / 12,0A /
100A
23,0A / 20,0A / 20,0A
23,0A / 20,0A / 20,0A
18,0A / 18,0A / 13,0A
17,0A / 17,0A / 13,0A
12,0A / 12,0A /
8,9A
6,7A
6,7A
4,9A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
/ 690V
13,0A / 12,4A /
10,7A /
9,0A
7,0A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
400V / 500V
20
9,2A
7,7A
6,0A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
25A
25A
25A
9,0A
100A / 100A
20,0A / 20,0A / 17,0A
20,0A / 20,0A / 17,0A
16,0A / 16,0A / 13,0A
16,0A / 16,0A / 13,0A
12,0A / 12,0A /
100A /
20,0A / 20,0A / 17,0A
20,0A / 20,0A / 17,0A
16,0A / 16,0A / 13,0A
16,0A / 16,0A / 13,0A
12,0A / 12,0A /
8,9A
6,7A
6,7A
4,9A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
/ 690V
11,5A / 11,5A /
10,0A /
9,0A
7,0A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
400V / 500V
Bemessungsbetriebsstrom Ie/AC-3 in A bei
/ 690V
5 u.10
/ 12,4A /
400V / 500V
ohne Schtz
2)
Schtz
25
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
/ 9,2A / 6,7A
/ 7,7A / 6,7A
/ 6,0A / 4,9A
/ 25A / 25A
30
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
25A / 25A
9,5A / 8,9A
9,0A / 6,7A
7,7A / 6,7A
6,0A / 4,9A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
/ 690V
12,0A / 12,0A / 9,0A
25A
9,5A
9,0A
9,0A
7,0A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
400V / 500V
12,0A / 12,0A /
100A / 100A / 100A
18,0A / 18,0A / 15,0A 17,0A / 17,0A / 15,0A
18,0A / 18,0A / 15,0A 17,0A / 17,0A / 15,0A
14,8A / 14,8A / 13,0A 14,0A / 14,0A / 13,0A
14,8A / 14,8A / 13,0A 14,0A / 14,0A / 13,0A
12,0A / 12,0A /
100A / 100A / 100A
18,0A / 18,0A / 15,0A 17,0A / 17,0A / 15,0A
18,0A / 18,0A / 15,0A 17,0A / 17,0A / 15,0A
14,8A / 14,8A / 13,0A 14,0A / 14,0A / 13,0A
14,8A / 14,8A / 13,0A 14,0A / 14,0A / 13,0A
12,0A / 12,0A / 9,0A
25A
10,3A / 10,3A / 8,9A
9,5A
9,0A
7,0A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
/ 690V
CLASS
400V / 500V
2) kein Schtzanbau mglich

3) Betriebsspannung beachten
4) Beachten Sie, da der maximale AC-3 Betriebsstrom einen gengenden Sicherheitsabstand vom Sicherungsnennstrom besitzt.
5) Zuordnung und Kurzschlueinrichtungen gem IEC60947-4-1
Bei Zuordnungsart 1 darf das Schtz oder der Starter im Kurzschlussfall Personen und Anlage nicht gefhrden
und braucht fr den weiteren Betrieb ohne Reparatur und Teileerneuerung nicht geeignet zu sein.
Bei Zuordnungsart 2 darf das Schtz oder der Starter im Kurzschlussfall Personen und Anlage nicht gefhrden
und muss fr den weiteren Gebrauch geeignet sein. Die Gefahr der Kontaktverschweiung ist gegeben.
3UF71021AA00-0/
3RB29062JG1
10 - 100A
2.4 - 25A
3UF71011AA00-0/
3RB29062DG1
Baugre S0
2.4 - 25A
3UF71011AA00-0/
3RB29062DG1
0.3 - 3.0A
3UF71001AA00-0/
3RB29062BG1
Baugre S00
(Typ)
Einstellbereich
berlastrelais
35
16,0A
16,0A
13,4A
13,4A
12,0A
100A
16,0A
16,0A
13,4A
13,4A
12,0A
25A
8,8A
8,5A
8,5A
7,0A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
25A / 25A
8,8A / 8,8A
8,5A / 6,7A
7,7A / 6,7A
6,0A / 4,9A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
/ 690V
/ 16,0A / 15,0A
/ 16,0A / 15,0A
/ 13,4A / 13,0A
/ 13,4A / 13,0A
/ 12,0A /
/ 100A / 100A
/ 16,0A / 15,0A
/ 16,0A / 15,0A
/ 13,4A / 13,0A
/ 13,4A / 13,0A
/ 12,0A / 9,0A
400V / 500V
40
15,0A
15,0A
13,0A
13,0A
12,0A
100A
15,0A
15,0A
13,0A
13,0A
12,0A
25A
8,3A
8,0A
8,0A
7,0A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
25A /
25A
8,3A / 8,3A
8,0A / 6,7A
7,7A / 6,7A
6,0A / 4,9A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
/ 690V
/ 15,0A / 15,0A
/ 15,0A / 15,0A
/ 13,0A / 13,0A
/ 13,0A / 13,0A
/ 12,0A /
/ 100A / 100A
/ 15,0A / 15,0A
/ 15,0A / 15,0A
/ 13,0A / 13,0A
/ 13,0A / 13,0A
/ 12,0A / 9,0A
400V / 500V
125A
125A
100A
63A
63A
315A
125A
125A
100A
63A
63A
125A
50A
50A
35A
35A
35A
35A
35A
35A
35A
50A
50A
35A
25A
25A
315A
50A
50A
35A
25A
25A
50A
25A
25A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
Betriebsklasse gG
TYP 3NA, 5SB, 5SE
50A
50A
50A
32A
32A
50A
50A
50A
32A
32A
50A
25A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
Zuordnungsart
5)
25A
25A
20A
20A
20A
25A
25A
20A
20A
20A
25A
20A
16A
16A
16A
16A
16A
16A
16A
16A
Betriebsklasse aM
Typ 3ND
125A
125A
100A
63A
63A
315A
125A
125A
100A
63A
63A
125A
50A
35A
35A
35A
35A
35A
35A
35A
35A
BS88
50A
50A
35A
25A
25A
315A
50A
50A
35A
25A
25A
50A
25A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
Sicherungen
415V/
80kA
NH DIAZED, NEOZED
690V/
100kA
British Standards
690V/
100kA
Sicherungseinstze 3)
High ShortCircuitRating
400A
100A
10A
400A
100A
10A
Sicherungen
RK5/CLASS L
UL-gelistetete
Standard
ShortCircuitRating
600V
Technical data
Table D-14: Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V
for 3UF7
D-25
Technical data
The selection tables for fuseless motor feeders can be found in the manuals
"Configuring SIRIUS Innovations - Selection Data for Fuseless and Fused Load
Feeders"
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188 and
"Configuration Manual SIRIUS Configuration - Selection data for Fuseless Load
Feeders"
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/40625241.
SIMOCODE pro
D-26
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Technical data
D.8
Typical reaction times
D.8.1
SIMOCODE pro C device series

Time: Inputs
Basic unit
Set delay time
Thermistor
400 ms
PROFIBUS
30 ms
Current measuring
200 ms
300 ms - 600 ms +
Set delay
Time: Processing
Time: Outputs
10 ms
30 ms
30 ms
Table D-15: Typical reaction times for SIMOCODE pro C device series
D.8.2
SIMOCODE pro V 1) device series

Time: Inputs
Time: Processing
Time: Outputs
Basic unit
Set delay time
10 ms
Thermistor
400 ms
PROFIBUS
5 ms
Current measuring
300 ms
Voltage measurement
300 ms
Active power/cos phi
1000 ms
300 ms - 600 ms +
Set delay
Earth-fault module/
external earth fault
300 ms - 500 ms +
Set delay
Digital module (24 V)
15 ms + delay
25 ms
Digital module
(110 V - 240 V)
50 ms + delay
25 ms
Analog module
150 ms
25 ms
Temperature module
500 ms
DM-F Local
75 ms + delay time
30 ms
DM-F PROFIsafe
15 ms + delay
30 ms
5 ms
5 ms
1) Based upon a typical hardware set-up: Basic unit + current measuring module
+ 2 expansion modules
Table D-16: Typical reaction times for SIMOCODE pro V device series
Reaction time = inputs conversion time + internal processing time + outputs

conversion time
Example:
You wish to switch a relay output of the basic unit via PROFIBUS when the
"remote" bit is set:
SIMOCODE pro C:
Reaction time = 30 ms + 30 ms + 10 ms = 70 ms
SIMOCODE pro V:
Reaction time = 5 ms + 5 ms + 10 ms = 20 ms
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D-27
Technical data
SIMOCODE pro
D-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Example circuits
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find example circuits for the following
parameterizable control functions:
Overload relay
Direct starter
Reversing starter
Star-delta starter
Dahlander
Solenoid valve
Positioner
Soft starter
Direct starter for 1-phase loads
Target groups
This manual is addressed to the following target groups:
Planners
Configurators
Technicians
Electricians
Commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
Basic SIMOCODE pro knowledge (see Chapter 1)
Basic knowledge of SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-1
Example circuits
E.1
General
Aim of the example circuits

The examples should:
Show you how to implement a circuit for a specific control function
using SIMOCODE pro
Help you modify these examples for your application
Help you implement other applications easily.
Fundamental steps
Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main circuit
devices and control and signaling devices) (see circuit diagrams)
Implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions, with control
and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (internal
SIMOCODE pro wiring) (see function circuit diagrams with the function
blocks of the graphical editor of the "SIMOCODE ES" configuration software).
Setting up the cyclic receive and send data for the communication of
SIMOCODE pro with a PLC (see function circuit diagrams and the
"Assignment of cyclic receive and send data" tables)
Prerequisites
Load feeder/motor is present
PLC/PCS with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
The main circuit is already connected
PC/programming device is present
SIMOCODE ES software is installed
The basic unit has the factory settings. More information about how to apply
the factory settings can be found in the "Resetting the factory settings"
section of the SIMOCODE pro manual.
SIMOCODE pro
E-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Example circuits
E.2
"Overload relay" example circuit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-3
-T10
-Q1
Current measurement
I> I> I>
BU
-X2
-M1
-X1
-K1
/.5
3
2
1
6
4
2
5
3
1
M PE
3 AC
-A10
PTC
X9
IN1
Basic Unit
Mains contactor
IN2
SIMOCODEpro C/V
Profibus DP
-X19
PE
/.2
PROFIBUS
18
19
20
SPE/PE
-X1
CT
T1
T2
A
B
A
B
10
IN3
IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11
1
2
I>
230V AC
-X19
OUT1
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
5
8
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
OUT2
C 1,6A
-K1
-F12
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
OUT3
I>
SYS
1
2
A1
A2
24V
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
3
5
2
4
6
6
5
4
1
2
3
U
V
W
2
5
1
3
6
7
3
4
1
2
6
7
E-4
A1
E.2.1
A2
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
"Overload relay" circuit diagram
Fig. E-1: "Overload relay" circuit diagram
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
/.2
PE
Example circuits
E.2.2
"Overload relay" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-2: "Overload relay" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-5
-T10
-X1
-M1
-X2
-X1
-Q2
/.4
Current measurement
3
2
1
BU
M
3 AC
PE
/.2
PE
I > I > I >
6
4
2
5
3
1
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
3
5
2
4
6
6
5
4
1
2
3
U
V
W
CT
/.2
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
-A10
PTC
T1
T2
X9
-S11
-X19
IN1
=DOL
IN2
-S12
Basic Unit
SIMOCODEpro C/V
Profibus DP
-X19
PROFIBUS
18
19
20
A
B
IN3
IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11
I>
230V AC
Local
Off
Local
On
Motor contactor
C 1,6A
-F12
-Q2
OUT1
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
1
2
1
2
A1
A2
24V
SPE/PE
9
11
13
14
5
8
A
B
A
B
10
12
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
OUT2
I>
OUT3
DEVICE
BUS
Operator Panel
-A12
OFF
GEN.FAULT
ON
TEST/
RESET
"Direct starter" circuit diagram
21
E.3.1
22
"Direct starter" example circuit
4
10
E.3
9
8
2
A1
A2
3
4
1
2
1
3
5
6
7
6
E-6
SYS
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
Fig. E-3: "Direct starter" circuit diagram
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
PE
Example circuits
E.3.2
"Direct starter" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-4: "Direct starter" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-7
-T10
I> I> I>
BU
-X1
-X2
-Q2
/.4
-M1
Current measurement
3
2
1
6
4
2
5
3
1
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
3
5
-X1
PE
M PE
3 AC
/.2
-Q3
/.4
/.2
-A10
PTC
X9
-S11
-S12
IN2
SIMOCODEpro C/V
Basic Unit
-X19
IN1
PROFIBUS
Profibus DP
-X19
SPE/PE
9
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
PE
2
4
6
6
5
4
1
2
3
U
V
W
CT
T1
T2
1
3
5
2
4
6
18
19
20
-S13
IN3
11

IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11
I>
Local
Run signal - left
Local
Run signal - right

Motor contactor
Run singal - left
Local
Off
Motor contactor
Run signal - right
-Q2
C 1,6A
-Q3
-F12
230V AC
OUT1
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
1
2
1
2
A1
A2
24V
A
B
13
14
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
I>
OUT2
2
A1
A2
A
B
A
B
10
12
21
OUT3
-A12
BUS
ON<
Operator Panel
DEVICE
OFF
GEN.FAULT
ON>
TEST/
RESET
"Reversing starter" circuit diagram
22
E.4.1
10
"Direct starter" example circuit
13
E.4
14
5
8
9
8
3
4
1
2
1
3
A1
A2
6
7
6
E-8
SYS
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
Fig. E-5: "Reversing starter" circuit diagram
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
Example circuits
E.4.2
"Reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-6: "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-9
/.6
-Q1
-T10
-X1
Current measurement
-X2
1
2
3
I > I > I >
1
3
5
2
4
6
BU
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
2
3
-A10
PTC
X9
-S11
-X19
IN1
IN2
-S12
Basic Unit
SIMOCODEpro V
Profibus DP
-X19
SPE/PE
9

C4
CT
T1
T2
A5
A1
A3
13
-Q1
/.6
IN3
-Q1
/.6
IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11

I>
ff
OUT1
Circuit-breaker (MCCB) on
Circuit-breaker (MCCB) o
Checkback signal
LS on
Checkback signal
LS triggered
Local Control
ON
Local Control

-Q1
/.6
C 1,6A
-F12
230V AC
A2
A
B
A
B
10
C5
4
X1.1
C1
A1
24V
A
B
22
21
X1.3
X1.2
D1
D2
1
2
5
8
X1.4
PROFIBUS
X20.1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
14
X20.2
I>
OUT2
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
D3
D4
1
2
1
3
X20.3
OUT3
Device
X20.5
I> I> I>
1
3
5
2
4
6
X1.3
BUS
/.4
X1.4
Operator Panel
-A11
/.2
-Q1
X1.1
X1.2
/.3
SYS
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
X20.4
6
7
X1.5
X1.6
OFF
GEN.FAULT
ON
X20.1
X20.2
X20.3
X20.4
X20.5
TEST/
RESET
/.4
E-10
SYS
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
Example circuits
E.5
"Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" example
circuit
E.5.1
"Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" circuit diagram
Fig. E-7: "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" circuit diagram
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
Example circuits
E.5.2
"Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-8: "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-11
-X2
-Q2
/.5
1
2
3
I> I> I>
1
3
5
2
4
6
Current measurement
2
4
6
1
3
5
*)
-A10
PTC
-Q4
/.4
IN1
-S11
-X19
IN2
-S12
Basic Unit
SIMOCODEpro V
Profibus DP
-X19
PROFIBUS
I>
OUT2
-Q2
OUT3
SYS
-A11
*) An electronic/mechanical interlock is recommended for Q3/Q4
Local
Off
Star contactor
Delta contactor

-Q3
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
Mains contactor
-Q4
OUT1
-F12
C 1,6A
230V AC
Local
On
IN4
I>
IN3
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
BUS
Operator Panel
DEVICE
ON
OFF
GEN.FAULT
TEST/
RESET
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)
W2
W1
V1 M V2
3
AC
U2
U1
-M1
-X2
BU
-Q3
/.4
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
2
3
CT
PE
/.2
1
3
5
2
4
6
5
6
4
X9
1
3
5
2
4
6
T1
T2
/.2
SPE/PE
9
C4
-X1
PE
A5
A1
A3
A
B
13
4
C3
A
B
A
B
10
C5
5
8
C2
C1
D1
D2
1
2
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
E.6.1
PE
"Star-delta starter" circuit example
14
E.6
22
21
2
A1
A2
A1
A2
24V
D3
D4
1
2
1
3
A2
A1
6
7
A1
A2
E-12
SYS
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
Fig. E-9: "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
Example circuits
E.6.2
"Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)
Fig. E-10: "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-13
-X2
W2
W1
V1 M V2
U1 3 AC U2
-M1
-X2
BU
-Q3
/.4
1
3
5
1
2
3
-Q2
/.5
-T10
I> I> I>
Current measurement
2
4
6
-X1
1
2
3
1
3
5
2
4
6
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
PE
*)
-A10
CT
PE
/.2
1
3
5
2
4
6
5
6
4
PTC
-Q4
/.4
IN1
X9
IN2
-S12
Basic Unit
SIMOCODEpro V
-X19
-S11
PROFIBUS
Profibus DP
-X19
1
3
5
2
4
6
T1
T2
/.2
SPE/PE
9
I>
OUT2
-Q2
OUT3
SYS
-A11
Local
Off
Star contactor
Delta contactor
Mains contactor
-Q3
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
-Q4
OUT1
C 1,6A
-F12
230V AC
IN4
I>
Local
On
IN3
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
C4
14
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
PE
A5
A1
A3
A
B
13
4
C3
D1
D2
1
2
A
B
A
B
10
C5
5
8
C2
C1
22
21
2
A1
A2
A1
A2
24V
D3
D4
1
2
1
3
A2
A1
6
7
A1
E-14
A2
BUS
Operator Panel
DEVICE
ON
OFF
GEN.FAULT
TEST/
RESET
E.6.3
SYS
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)
Fig. E-11: "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
Example circuits
E.6.4
"Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply

cable)
Fig. E-12: "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-15
;
7
4

;

,! ,! ,!

4

3(
;
4

0
:
:
9 0 9
8 $& 8
%8
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
7
/
7
/
7
/

37&
$
&7
4

;
3URILEXV'3
;
,1
6,02&2'(SUR9
%DVLF8QLW
,1
6
352),%86
6
6
,1
,1
'HYLFH
%86
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
&$
)
,!
,!
287
/RFDO
/HIW
/RFDO
2II
%86
21
2SHUDWRU3DQHO
'(9,&(
,1
,1
6,02&2'(SUR9
9$& 'LJLWDO0RGXOH
287
2))
7(67
5(6(7
,1
287
*(1)$8/7
21!
"Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram
/RFDO
5LJKW
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
,1
10

$QHOHFWURQLFPHFKDQLFDOLQWHUORFNLVUHFRPPHQGHGIRU44
4
$
$
E.7.1
'HOWDFRQWDFWRU
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
/HIW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
5LJKW
4
4
287
&$
)
4
287
9$&

&

7
7

$
%
$
%
'
'

$
$
9
6<6
1$&+]9
/
1
"Star-delta reversing starter" circuit example
3(
E.7
3(

$
'
'

$
;

6<6

$

$
$
$
63(3(

$

3(
6<6
5HDG\
$

$
%

$
$
$
$
$

&

&

&
&

1$&+]9
/
1
6<6
E-16

13($&+]9
/
/
/
1
3(
Example circuits
Fig. E-13: "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
Example circuits
E.7.2
"Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-14: "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-17
-X2
-Q3
/.4
-T10
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
1
2
3
I > I > I >
1
3
5
2
4
6
-X1
C urrent measurement
2
4
6
1
2
3
BU
-M1
W1
V2 M V1
3
AC
U1
U2
W2
-X2
-Q2
/.4
-A10
*)
PTC
-Q4
/.5
IN1
-X19
Profibus DP
Basic Unit
-X19
IN2
IN3
IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11
-S13
-S12
I>
230V AC
Local
Slow
Local
Off
Local
Fast
Star contactor
Fast
Mains contactor
Slow
-Q4
OUT3
OUT2
I>
Mains contactor
Fast
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
-Q2
C 1,6A
-F12
-Q3
OUT1
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
-S11
PROFIBUS
SIMOCODEpro V
X9
1
3
5
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
PE
9
C4
PE
/.2
5
3
1
6
4
2
6
5
4
SPE/PE
13
CT
PE
T1
T2
/.2
A
B
A
B
14
2
4
6
A
B
10
C5
21
A1
A2
24V
A5
A1
A3
A2
A4
4
C3
13
22
D1
D2
1
2
5
8
C2
C1
14
2
A1
D3
D4
1
2
1
3
6
7
A2
-A11
EIN>>
Operator Panel
DEVICE
OFF
GEN.FAULT
EIN>
TEST/
RESET
"Dahlander" circuit diagram
A1
E.8.1
A2
"Dahlander" circuit diagram
A1
E.8
A2
E-18
SYS
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
Fig. E-15: "Dahlander" circuit diagram
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
Example circuits
E.8.2
"Dahlander" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-16: "Dahlander" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-19
-X2
-Q21
/.5

1
2
3
1
3
5
PE
-X2
-Q41
/.5
/.2
-M1
W1
W2
V2 M V1
3 AC
U1
U2
-Q22
/.7
BU
2
4
6
Current measurement
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
3
5
2
4
6
-T10
1
3
5
2
4
6
1
2
3
1
3
5
2
4
6
4
5
6
-Q42
/.6
PTC
-A10
CT
I > I > I >
/.2
-Q3
/.6
IN1
Basic Unit
-S12
IN2
SIMOCODEpro V
-X19
-S11
PROFIBUS
Profibus DP
-X19
X9
-X1
PE
5
3
1
6
4
2
T1
T2
1
3
5
-S13
IN3
IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11
-Q41
OUT2
-Q3
OUT3
-A11
N/M
PE
-S14
-X19
IN1

-Q42
25
-S15
IN2
IN3
SIMOCODEpro V
OUT1
Digital Module
BUS
ON<
-Q22
Operator Panel
DEVICE
<>/<<>>
OFF
GEN.FAULT
ON>
IN4
OUT2

TEST/
RESET
Mains contactor
Fast
Right
Mains contactor
Slow
Right
Star contactor
Fast
Mains contactor
Slow
Left
Mains contactor
Fast
Left
Local
Off
Local
Slow
Right
Local
Fast
Right
Local
Slow
Left
Local
Fast
Left

"Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram
/.7
C 1,6A
I>
-A12
E.9.1
-Q21
230V AC
-F12
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
"Dahlander reversing starter" example circuit
I>
OUT1
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
E.9
PE
9
C4
13
14
2
4
6
A
B
SPE/PE
A
B
10
C5
21
22
D1
D2
1
2
A1
A2
24V
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
/.5
A
B
4
C3
13
2
A1
A2
A5
A1
A3
A2
A4
5
8
D3
D4
1
2
1
3
A1
A2
6
7
SYS
23
SYS1
A1
A2
B4
13
14
A1
21
24
B5
13
A2
20
A1
A2
26
B3
Ready
22
27
14
C2
C1
14
SYS2
1
E-20
B2
B1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
Fig. E-17: "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
Example circuits
E.9.2
"Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-18: "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram (1/2)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-21
Example circuits
Fig. E-19: "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram (2/2)
SIMOCODE pro
E-22
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Example circuits
E.10
"Pole-changing starter" example circuit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-23
-X2
-Q2
/.4
-T10
Current measurement
1
3
5
I> I> I>
BU
-X2
-Q3
/.4
W1
W2
V2 M V1
U2 3 AC U1
-M1
PE
2
4
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
3
5
2
4
6
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
PE
/.2
5
3
1
6
4
2
6
5
4
-X1
-A10
PTC
T2
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
/.2
X9
Basic Unit
-S11
-S12
IN2
SIMOCODEpro V
-X19
IN1
PROFIBUS
Profibus DP
-X19
SPE/PE
-S13
IN3
IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11
I>
Local
Off
Local
Slow
Local
Fast
I>
OUT2
Mains contactor
Slow

1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
-Q3
-F12
C 1,6A
Mains contactor
Fast
-Q2
230V AC
OUT1
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
9
C4
13
CT
T1
PE
A
B
A
B
A5
A1
A3
14
D1
D2
1
2
A1
A2
24V
A
B
10
C5
22
21
4
C3
13
5
8
C2
C1
14
2
A2
A1
D3
D4
1
2
1
3
A1
A2
E-24
OUT3
6
7
-A11
BUS
ON>>
Operator Panel
Device
OFF
GEN.FAULT
ON>
TEST/
RESET
E.10.1
SYS
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
"Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram
Fig. E-20: "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
Example circuits
E.10.2
"Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-21: "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-25
-X2
-Q21
/.5
-Q22
/.7
Current measurement
1
2
3
1
3
5
2
4
6
BU
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
3
5
PE
-X2
-Q31
/.5
/.2
W2
W1
V1 M V2
U1 3 AC U2
-M1
2
4
6
-T10
1
3
5
2
4
6
1
2
3
1
3
5
2
4
6
4
5
6
I > I > I >
-Q32
/.6
/.2
-X1
PE
5
3
1
6
4
2
-A10
PTC
-S11
-X19
IN1
X9
IN2
-S12
Basic Unit
SIMOCODE pro V
Profibus DP
-X19
PROFIBUS
-S13
IN3
IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11

I>
-Q21
230V AC
OUT1
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
/.7
-Q31
C 1,6A
-F12
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
I>
OUT2
OUT3
-A11
PE
-S14
-X19
IN1
25
N/M
OUT1
-S15
IN2
Digital Module
BUS
ON<
-Q22
IN3
Operator Panel
DEVICE
<>/<<>>
SIMOCODE pro V
-Q32
-A12
OFF
GEN.FAULT
ON>
IN4
OUT2

TEST/
RESET
Mains contactor
Slow
Right
Local
Slow
Right
Local
Fast
Right
Local
Slow
Left
Local
Fast
Left

Local
Off
Mains contactor
Fast
Left
Mains contactor
Slow
Left
Mains contactor
Fast
Right
E.11
"Pole-changing reversing starter" example circuit
E.11.1
"Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram
PE
CT
T1
T2
A5
A1
A3
C4
13
14
D1
D2
1
2
A1
A2
24V
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
/.5
A
B
A
B
22
2
A1
SPE/PE
A
B
10
C5
21
4
C3
13
5
8
D3
D4
1
2
A2
20
SYS
23
1
3
A1
A1
A2
B4
13
14
A2
21
24
B5
13
6
7
A1
A2
26
B3
SYS1
Ready
22
27
14
C2
C1
14
SYS2
1
E-26
B2
B1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
Fig. E-22: "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
Example circuits
E.11.2
"Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-23: "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram (1/2)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-27
Example circuits
Fig. E-24: "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram (2/2)
SIMOCODE pro
E-28
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Example circuits
E.12
"Solenoid valve" example circuit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-29
-Y1
I> I> I>
-X1
-X2
-Q2
/.4
-X1
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
PE
/.2
3
2
1
7
1
3
5
2
4
6
1
3
5
2
4
6
6
5
4
8
1
2
1
2
3
N
PE
-A10
PTC
X9
Basic Unit
-S11
-S12
IN2
SIMOCODE pro V
-X19
IN1
PROFIBUS
Profibus DP
-X19
SPE/PE
9
-RMZ
IN3
-RMA
IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11

I>
-Q2

C 1,6A
Local
Off
Local
On
Mains contactor
230V AC
OUT1
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
11
13
14
CT
T1
T2
18
19
20
A
B
1
2
1
2
A1
A2
24V
A
B
A
B
10
12
22
21
4
10
14
13
14
13
5
8
9
8
2
A1
A2
-F12
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
3
4
I>
1
2
OUT2
1
3
Feedback
Limit switch
Close
Feedback
limit switch
Open
OUT3
6
7
E-30
6
-A12
BUS
Operator Panel
DEVICE
CLOSE
GEN.FAULT
OPEN
TEST/
RESET
E.12.1
SYS
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
"Solenoid valve" circuit diagram
Fig. E-25: "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
PE
/.2
Example circuits
E.12.2
"Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-26: "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-31
-T10
-Q1
Current measurement
BU
-M1
-X2
M
3 AC
PE
-Q3
/.4
/.2
PE
I> I> I>
-X1
-Q2
/.4
3
2
1
6
4
2
5
3
1
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
3
5
6
5
4
U
V
W
1
2
3
2
4
6
-X1
PE
-A10
PTC
X9
Basic Unit
IN2
SIMOCODEpro V
-X19
IN1
PROFIBUS
Profibus DP
-X19
SPE/PE
-RMZ
-RMA
IN3
IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1,6A
-F11
CT
T1
T2
1
3
5
2
4
6
/.2
A
B
A
B
18
19
20
13
1
2
I>
1
2
OUT1
-Q2
230V AC
A1
A2
24V
A
B
10
14
13
14
4
15
13
14
5
8
16
17
/.7
C 1,6A
-F12
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
3
4
OUT2
-Q3
I>
OUT3
-A11
N/M
PE
-S11
-X19
IN1
25
-S12
IN2
230V AC
-S13
IN3
Digital Module
SIMOCODEpro V
OUT1
DEVICE
IN4
STOP
GEN.FAULT
OPEN
OUT2
BUS
CLOSE
Operator Panel
-A12
23
11
A1
A2
20
24
12
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
/.4
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
22
SYS1
Ready
21
26
10
1
3
A1
A2
SYS
14
22
27
6
7
6
TEST-/
RESET
Feedback
Limit switch
Open
Feedback
Limit switch
Closed
Local
Open

Local
Closed
Local
Stop

Mains contactor
Closed
Mains contactor
Open
"Positioner 1" circuit diagram
13
E.13.1
21
"Positioner" example circuit
13
E.13
14
SYS2
1
E-32
9
8
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
Fig. E-27: "Positioner 1" circuit diagram
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
Example circuits
E.13.2
"Positioner 1" function circuit diagram
Fig. E-28: "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-33
-T10
-Q1
3
2
1
I> I> I>
BU
-X2
-M1
-X1
-Q2
/.4
Current measurement
PE
M PE
3 AC
-Q3
/.4
/.2
-A10
PTC
X9
Basic Unit
-DMZ
-X19
IN1
-RMZ
IN2
SIMOCODEpro V
Profibus DP
-X19
PROFIBUS
-RMA
IN3
-DMA
IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1,6A
-F11

I>
230V AC
-Q2
OUT1
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
1
2
1
2
6
4
2
5
3
1
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
-X1
PE
1
3
5
2
4
6
6
5
4
1
2
3
U
V
W
CT
T1
T2
1
3
5
SPE/PE
9
22
13
14
2
4
6
/.2
18
19
20
A
B
21
14
/.7
C 1,6A
-Q3
-F12
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
I>
OUT2
A1
A2
24V
3
4
A1
A2
A
B
A
B
10
14
13
4
15
13
22
21
5
8
16
17
OUT3
-A11
N/M
PE
-S11
-X19
IN1
OUT1
-S12
IN2
230V AC
-S13
IN3
Digital Module
SIMOCODEpro V
DEVICE
BUS
CLOSE
IN4
STOP
GEN.FAULT
OPEN
OUT2
Operator Panel
-A12
SYS2
1
2
1
3
A1
A2
25
11
14
SYS1
Ready
20
13
24
22
7
6
SYS
12
23
21
21
26
10
13
14
22
27
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
/.4
E-34
1
TEST/
RESET
Mains contactor
Closed
Local
Stop
Local
Closed
Local
Open
Feedback
Torque switch
Closed
Feedback
Limit switch
Closed
Feedback
Limit switch
Open
Feedback
Torque switch
Open

Mains contactor
Open
E.13.3
9
8
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
Example circuits
E.13.4
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-35
-T10
BU
-M1
-X2
M
3 AC
PE
-Q3
/.4
/.2
PE
I> I> I>
-X1
-Q2
/.4
Current measurement
3
2
1
6
4
2
5
3
1
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
-X1
PE
1
3
5
2
4
6
6
5
4
1
2
3
U
V
W
-A10
CT
PTC
T1
T2
X9
Basic Unit
-DMZ
-RMZ
IN2
SIMOCODEpro V
-X19
IN1
PROFIBUS
Profibus DP
-X19
SPE/PE
9
-RMA
IN3
13
1
3
5
2
4
6
/.2
A
B
A
B
18
19
20
21
22

IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1,6A
-F11
I>
-Q2
230V AC
OUT1
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
1
2
1
2
A1
A2
24V
A
B
10
14
14
13
4
15
13
14
5
8
16
17
/.7
2
A1
A2
C 1,6A
OUT2
-Q3
-F12
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
3
4
I>
1
2
1
3
A1
A2
OUT3
6
7
6
-A11
N/M
PE
-S11
-X19
IN1
25
-S12
IN2
230V AC
-S13
IN3
DEVICE
IN4
STOP
GEN.FAULT
OPEN
OUT2
BUS
CLOSE
Operator Panel
Digital Module
SIMOCODEpro V
OUT1
-A12
11
14
SYS1
Ready
20
13
24
22
SYS2
SYS
12
23
21
21
26
10
13
14
22
27
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
/.4
E-36
1
TEST/
RESET
Mains contactor
Closed
Local
Stop
Local
Closed
Local
Open
Feedback
Torque switch
Closed
Feedback
Limit switch
Closed
Feedback
Limit switch
Open
Mains contactor
Open
E.13.5
9
8
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
Example circuits
E.13.6
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-37
-T10
-M1
-X2
-X1
-Q2
/.4
Current measurement
I> I> I>
BU
PE
M PE
3 AC
/.2
-Q3
/.4
-A10
PTC
X9
Basic Unit
-RMZ
IN2
SIMOCODEpro V
-X19
IN1
PROFIBUS
Profibus DP
-X19
SPE/PE
3
2
1
6
4
2
5
3
1
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
3
5
2
4
6
6
5
4
1
2
3
U
V
W
-X1
PE
A
B
A
B
-RMA
IN3
-DMA
IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1,6A
-F11

I>
-Q2
230V AC
OUT1
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
1
2
1
2
A1
A2
24V
18
19
20
13
CT
T1
T2
1
3
5
2
4
6
/.2
/.7
C 1,6A
-Q3
-F12
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
I>
OUT2
A
B
10
14
14
13
4
15
13
14
21
5
8
3
4
1
2
1
A1
A2
OUT3
-A11
N/M
PE
-S11
-X19
IN1
25
-S12
IN2
230V AC
-S13
IN3
Digital Module
SIMOCODEpro V
OUT1
DEVICE
IN4
STOP
GEN.FAULT
OPEN
OUT2
BUS
CLOSE
Operator Panel
-A12
23
11
13
20
24
14
A1
A2
SYS
12
21
22
7
6
21
26
SYS1
Ready
22
10
13
14
16
17
22
SYS2
27
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
/.4
E-38
1
TEST/
RESET
Local
Stop
Local
Closed
Local
Open
Feedback
Limit switch
Closed
Feedbackl
Limit switch
Open
Feedback
Torque switch
Open
Mains contactor
Closed
Mains contactor
Open
E.13.7
9
8
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
Example circuits
E.13.8
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-39
-T10
I> I> I>
BU
-X2
-M1
-X1
-Q2
/.4
Current measurement
3
2
1
6
4
2
5
3
1
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
M
3 AC
PE
/.2
PE
-Q3
/.4
-A10
PTC
X9
Basic Unit
-DMZ/ RMZ
IN2
SIMOCODEpro V
-X19
IN1
PROFIBUS
Profibus DP
-X19
SPE/PE
-X1
PE
1
3
5
2
4
6
6
5
4
1
2
3
U
V
W
CT
T1
T2
1
3
5
2
4
6
/.2
18
19
20
-DMA/RMA
IN3
IN4
Device
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1,6A
-F11

I>
230V AC
-Q2
OUT1
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
13
1
2
1
2
A1
A2
24V
A
B
21
22
/.7
C 1,6A
-Q3
-F12
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
I>
OUT2
2
A1
A2
A
B
A
B
10
14
14
13
4
15
14
13
22
21
5
8
16
17
3
4
1
2
1
3
A1
A2
OUT3
6
7
6
-A11
N/M
PE
-S11
-X19
IN1
25
-S12
IN2
230V AC
-S13
IN3
IN4
STOP
GEN.FAULT
OPEN
OUT2
BUS
CLOSE
Operator Panel
Digital Module
SIMOCODEpro V
OUT1
-A12
11
14
SYS1
Ready
20
13
24
22
SYS2
SYS
12
23
21
21
26
10
13
14
22
27
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
/.4
E-40
1
TEST/
RESET
Feedback
Torque switch/
Limit switch
Open
Feedback
Torque switch/
Limit switch
Closed
Local
Open
Local
Closed
Local
Stop
Mains Contactor
Closed
Mains Contactor
Open
E.13.9
9
8
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Example circuits
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
Example circuits
E.13.10
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-41
-A1
-M1
3RW402/
3RW403/
3RW404
Current measurement
-Q1
/.4
1
3
5
2
4
6
BU
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
3
5
2
4
6
-T10
PE
PTC
OVERLOAD
+ 24vdc
-S11
Profibus DP
Basic Unit
-S12
IN2
SIMOCODEpro V
-X10
IN1
off

IN3
IN4
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
Device
C 1A
-F11
-X10
I>
230V AC
-Q1
OUT1
-Q11
C 1,6A
-F12
OUT2
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
I>
OUT3
-Q11
/.4
C 3A
-F13
I>
DEVICE
ON>
BUS
OFF
Operator Panel
-A11
GEN.FAULT
TEST/
RESET
Soft starter
Reset
Soft starter
Fault
Local
On
Local
Off
Soft starter
Start
Mains contactor
"Soft starter" example circuit
E.14.1
Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)
-A10
-X9
PROFIBUS
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
Control Voltage:24V DC or 110-240V AC/DC
E.14
3 AC
230VAC
3RW40
13
I > I > I >
PE
2
3
A1
A2
14/24
PE
CT
T1
T2
Bus connector at Sub-D
X9
-Q1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
/.2
1L1
3L2
5L3
2T1
4T2
6T3
U
V
W
/.2
/.5
/.6
on
BYPAS
1
2
3
IN
23
95
96
98
A
B
'A
'B
8
4
7
1
2
1
2
A1
A2
24V
SPE/PE
A
B
13
14
5
8
6
5
10
9
21
22
2
A1
A2
3
4
1
2
1
3
A1
A2
6
7
1
2
11
12
2
3
/.2
/.2
E-42
SYS
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
Example circuits
Fig. E-37: Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
Example circuits
E.14.2
Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403,

3RW404)
Fig. E-38: Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-43
-A1
Current measurement
-Q1
/.4
-M1
3RW405/
3RW407
-T10
BU
3 AC
230VAC
3RW40
PE
I > I > I >
1
3
5
2
4
6
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
3
5
-A10
CT
PTC
T1
T2
OVERLOAD
+ 24vdc
-S11
Profibus DP
-X9
PROFIBUS
off
Basic Unit
-S12
IN2
SIMOCODEpro V
-X10
IN1

X9
-Q1
13
2
4
6
1L1
3L2
5L3
PE
2
3
A1
A2
14/24
PE
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
/.2
2T1
4T2
6T3
U
V
W
/.2
/.5
/.6
on
BYPAS
1
2
3
IN
23
95
96
98
A
B
'A
'B
8

IN3
4
7
Device
IN4
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11
-X10
I>
230V AC
-Q1
OUT1
OUT2
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
-A1R
Fern
Reset
C 1,6A
-F12

1/N AC 50Hz 230V
2L1
2N
1
2
1
2
A1
A2
24V
SPE/PE
A
B
13
14
5
8
6
5
10
9
21
22
2
A1
A2
3
4
I>
1
2
1
3
E1
E2
OUT3
6
7
SYS
C 3A
-F13
I>
1
2
2
3
E-44
-A11
BUS
OFF
Operator Panel
DEVICE
ON>
/.2
/.2
GEN.FAULT
TEST/
RESET
6RIWVWDUWHU
5HVHW
6RIWVWDUWHU
)DXOW
/RFDO
2II
/RFDO
2Q
6RIWVWDUWHU
6WDUW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
E.14.3
SYS
3/N/PE AC50Hz 400V
Example circuits
Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)
Fig. E-39: Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
Example circuits
E.14.4
Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)
Fig. E-40: Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-45
-Q2
/.5
-T10
1
3
5
-A1
Current measurement
-Q1
/.4
-M1
3RW402/
3RW403/
3RW404
2
4
6
BU
3 AC
-A10
PTC
OVERLOAD
+ 24vdc
230VAC
3RW40
PE
I > I > I >
1
3
5
2
4
6
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
3
5
2
4
6
1L1
3L2
5L3
-S11
Profibus DP
-X9
PROFIBUS
off
Basic Unit
-S12
IN2
SIMOCODEpro V
-X10
IN1
X9
A
B
'A
'B
SPE/PE
A
B
-S13
IN3
IN4
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
Device
C 1A
-F11
-X10
1
2
I>
1
2
230V AC
A1
A2
24V
-Q1
OUT1
C 1,6A
-Q2
-F12
OUT2
3
4
I>
1
2
-Q1
PE.
13
OUT3
6
7
-Q11
/.6
C 3A
-F13
I>
1
2
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
-A11
IN1
-Q11
N/M
Ready
A1
A2
OUT1
21
IN2
230V AC
-A12
BUS
ON>>
Operator Panel
DEVICE
IN3
Digital Module
SIMOCODEpro V
20
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
/.2
14/24
on
BYPAS
PE.
2T1
4T2
6T3
U
V
W
CT
T1
T2
A1
A2
2
3
/.6
/.6
1
2
3
IN
23
95
96
98
/.2
9
8
13
14
5
8
6
5
10
9
21
22
4
7
13
14
2
A1
A2
PE
SYS1
25
23
24
11
12
2
3
/.2
/.2
1
3
A1
A2
SYS
26
OFF
GEN.FAULT
ON>
IN4
OUT2
22
27
E-46
1/N AC 50Hz 230V
2L1
2N
TEST/
RESET
/RFDO
5LJKW
/RFDO
/HIW
6RIWVWDUWHU
)DXOW
6RIWVWDUWHU
5HVHW
/RFDO
2II
6RIWVWDUWHU
6WDUW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
5LJKW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
/HIW
Example circuits
E.15
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" example circuit
E.15.1
Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404)
Fig. E-41: Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS2
SYS
Example circuits
E.15.2
Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403,

3RW404)
Fig. E-42: "Soft starter with reversing contactor" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-47
-Q2
/.5
1
3
5
-A1
-Q1
/.4
Current measurement
-M1
3RW405/
3RW407
2
4
6
1
3
5
T1
T2
T3
BU
L1
L2
L3
2
4
6
1
3
5
2
4
6
-T10
3 AC
PE.
230VAC
PE
3RW40
13
I > I > I >
/.2
2
3
A1
A2
-A10
PTC
OVERLOAD
+ 24vdc
-S11
PROFIBUS
off
-S12
IN2
SIMOCODEpro V
Basic Unit
-X10
IN1
Profibus DP
-X9

X9
-Q1
CT
T1
T2
1
2
3
IN
/.5
/.5
/.2
14/24
on
BYPAS
PE.
1L1
3L2
5L3
2T1
4T2
6T3
U
V
W
IN3
-S13
23
95
96
98
A
B
'A
'B
Device
IN4
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
C 1A
-F11
-X10
1
2
I>
1
2
230V AC
A1
A2
24V
SPE/PE
A
B
13
14
5
8
6
5
10
9
22
21
4
7
13
14
-Q1
OUT1
2
A1
A2
C 1,6A
-Q2
-F12
OUT2
3
4
I>
C 3A
-F13
OUT3
I>
/.2
/.2
SYS
1
2
1
3
A1
A2
1
2
2
3
6
7
-A11
IN1
-A1R
Fern
Reset
N/M
E1
E2
OUT1
21
IN2
230V AC
IN3
Digital Module
SIMOCODEpro V
20
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
Ready
PE
SYS1
25
23
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
24
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
26
E-48
-A12
22
OUT2
DEVICE
BUS
ON>>
SYS2
Operator Panel
IN4
SYS
GEN.FAULT
ON>
OFF
TEST/
RESET
/RFDO
/HIW
/RFDO
2II
/RFDO
5LJKW
6RIWVWDUWHU
5HVHW
6RIWVWDUWHU
6WDUW
6RIWVWDUWHU
)DXOW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
/HIW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
5LJKW
E.15.3
27
Example circuits
Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)
Fig. E-43: Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
Example circuits
E.15.4
Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)
Fig. E-44: Function circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-49
-M1
-X2
-X1
-Q1
/.4
UL1
UL2
UL3
-T4
#2,5mm 2
#2,5mm 2
I > I > I >
Current-/voltagemeasurement unit
-Q1
-X1
6
4
2
5
3
1
BU
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
1
3
5
2
4
6
PE
PTC
-S11
-X19
IN1
Profibus DP
-S12
IN2
Basic Unit
SIMOCODEpro V
IN3
Device
IN4
BUS
Gen.fault
Test/reset
I>
230V AC
-Q1
OUT1
C 1,6A
-F12
OUT2
I>
OUT3
-A12
BUS
Operator Panel
DEVICE
GEN.FAULT
ON
OFF
TEST/
RESET
Local
Off
Local
On
Main contactor
E.16.1
"Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example
-A10
C 1A
-F11
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

1L1
1N
"Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example
1~
/.2
PE
-A13
-X19
PROFIBUS
1/N AC 50Hz 230V

2L1
2N
E.16
L
N
PE
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
/.2
PE
SYS2
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
8
1
2
3
N
9
11
CT
T1
T2
X9
A
B
18
19
20
SPE/PE
A
B
13
14
4
10
1
2
1
2
A1
A2
24V
A
B
10
12
21
22
5
8
9
8
2
A1
A2
3
4
1
2
1
3
5
6
7
6
E-50
SYS
Example circuits
Fig. E-45: "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit example
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
SIMOCODE pro
SYS
decoupling modul
SIMOCODEpro V
SYS1
Ready
Example circuits
E.16.2
"Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit example
Fig. E-46: "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
E-51
Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-52
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Safety and commissioning information

for EEx areas
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find safety and commissioning information for
hazardous areas. It is imperative that you observe this information for the
protection of any motors in hazardous areas.
Target groups
Commissioners
Necessary knowledge
Explosion protection
IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other
than mines)
IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)
IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence
of combustible dust - Selection and installation
IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the
presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines
Betriebssicherheitsverordnung - BetrSichV (Ordinance on Industrial
Safety and Health).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F-1
Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
F.1
General
Information and standards

Type of protection EEx e and EEx d:
The overload protection and thermistor motor protection of the
SIMOCODE pro system meets the requirements for overload protection of
explosion proof motors for the following types of protection:
EExd "explosion proof enclosure", e.g. according to DIN EN 50018 or
DIN EN 60079
EExe "increased safety", e.g. according to DIN EN 50019 or
DIN EN 60079-7.
Increased danger in hazardous areas means it is necessary to carefully
observe the following notes and standards:
IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other
than mines)
IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence
of combustible dust - Selection and installation
IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the
presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines
Betriebssicherheitsverordnung - BetrSichV (Ordinance on Industrial
Safety and Health).
All 3UF7 devices are approved under Device Group I, Category "M2" (mining)
and Device Group II, Category 2 in the area "GD" (areas in which explosive
gas, steam, fog, air mixtures and inflammable dust are present):
BVS 06 ATEX F 001
I (M2) *)
BVS 06 ATEX F 001
II (2) GD *)
*) Note:
This safety and commissioning information is also valid for devices with the
certificate number BVS 04 ATEX F 003.
These devices are suitable for the protection of motors in hazardous areas
and comply with the standards listed above.
Tests other than those legally stipulated (Ordinance on Industrial
Safety and Health) are not required.
Warning
All installation, commissioning and maintenance work is to be carried out by
responsible, qualified personnel only. Unprofessional behavior can cause
serious damage to persons and goods.
SIMOCODE pro
F-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F.2
Set-up and commissioning

Notice
Please observe the following SIMOCODE pro operating instructions
Device
Order No.
Basic unit
3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Digital module
3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
3ZX1012-0UF73-1BA1
3ZX1012-0UF73-3BA1
3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F-3
F.2.1
Setting the rated motor current

Set the 3UF7 to the rated motor current (according to the type plate or
design test certificate of the motor).
Notice
Note the trip class/tripping characteristic of the 3UF7.
Select the trip class so that the motor is thermally protected, even when the
rotor is stalled.
Motors, cables and contactors must be suitable for the selected trip class.
Notice
Set the response of the overload protection to "Tripping"!
Example
Motor 500 V, 50/60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time TE= 11 s,
IA/Is = 5.5:
TE = 11 s
IA/Is = 5.5
Fig. F-1: Tripping conditions of the EExe motor, selected: CLASS 10
SIMOCODE pro
F-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F.2.2
SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input

For the 3UF70, you can use type A temperature sensors with a
characteristic curve according to IEC 60947-8 (DIN VDE 0660, Part 303), DIN
44081 and DIN 44082.
Depending on the number of sensors, this will result in the following
tripping and restart temperatures:
Fig. F-2: Typical characteristic curve of a type A sensor (logarithmic scale)
Depending on the number of sensors, the following tripping and restart

temperatures will result based on the TNF (rated response temperature of
the sensor):
Tripping temperature
Restart temperature
3 sensors
TNF + 4 K
TNF - 7 K
6 sensors
TNF - 5 K
TNF - 20 K
Table F-1: Tripping and restart temperatures
The temperatures listed are limit values.

Notice
Set the response for the activated thermistor to "Tripping"!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F-5
F.2.3
Sensor circuit wiring

Caution
Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables.
The use of motor feeder wires or other main current cables is not permitted.
Shielded control cables must be used if extremely inductive or capacitive
interferences are to be expected because of parallel high-voltage cables.
Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables:
Cable
cross section
Cable lengths at the thermistor input

Without short-circuit detection
With short-circuit detection 1)
2.5 mm2
2 x 2800 m
2 x 250 m
1.5 mm2
2 x 1500 m
2 x 150 m
2 x 500 m
2 x 50 m
0.5 mm
1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit will be detected up to this maximum cable length.
Table F-2: Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables
We recommend evaluation of the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable.

If the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable is not evaluated, the sensor
resistance must be measured with a suitable measuring device during
commissioning or after modifications/maintenance work has been carried
out (mounting, demounting the system).
F.2.4
Short-circuit protection for type of assignment 2 according to

IEC 60947-4-1
Short-circuit protection must be carried out by separately arranged
overcurrent protection devices.
Caution
When combining with other contactors, observe the respective maximum
fuse protection of the contactor for type of assignment 2.
F.2.5
Cable protection
Caution
Avoid impermissibly high cable surface temperatures by correctly
dimensioning the cross sections!
Select a sufficient cross section - especially with heavy starting CLASS 20
to CLASS 40 (see Chapter D.7 "Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor
feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V").
SIMOCODE pro
F-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F.2.6
Test
SIMOCODE pro offers users the convenient option of checking the
complete motor protection chain (incl. actuators and sensors such as
contactors, thermistors). This can, for example, be used to carry out tests
according to IEC 60079-17.
This test includes a complete function test. For this purpose, all three test
phases are to be carried out (hardware test, current feedback, motor
protection tripping, see below). The test can be carried out using the "TEST/
RESET" buttons provided, or automatically via the bus. Due to existing selftest routines, tripping currents do not need to be started in order to carry
out testing.
Test phases
Phase 1: Hardware test/lamp test (0 to 2 s):
The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays
are activated, including lamp controls. Contactor controls remain unchanged.
Phase 2: Hardware test results (2 to 5 s):
If there is a fault, the "HW fault basic unit" fault is triggered.
If there is no fault:
The "GEN. FAULT" LED flashes when no main current is flowing
The "GEN. FAULT" LED flickers if main current is flowing in all three
phases (special case: for "1-phase load" in one phase).
Phase 3: Relay test (> 5 s):
If testing is carried out with tripping, the contactor controls are deactivated.
The following table shows the test phases carried out when the "TEST/
RESET" button is pressed for the required length of time:
Test phase
Status
Without main current

O.K.
Fault *)
With main current

O.K.
Fault
Hardware test/lamp test

"DEVICE" LED
Orange
Green
Orange
Green
"GEN.FAULT" LED
<2s
Contactor control
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Unchanged
Show QL*
Results of the hardware test/lamp test
"DEVICE" LED
2s-5s
Green
Red
Green
Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control
Unchanged
Deactivated
Unchanged
Deactivated
Relay test
"DEVICE" LED
>5s
Green
Red
Green
Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control
LED lit/activated
Deactivated
LED flashing
Deactivated
LED flickering
Deactivated
Deactivated
LED off
*) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s

Table F-3: The states of the status LEDs/contactor controls during testing
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F-7
F.2.7
Further safety guidelines
Caution
Only the relay outputs of the 3UF70 basic unit or the 3UF730 monostable
digital module may be used for the protection function!
Warning
The 3UF7 is not suitable for installation in hazardous areas.
The device may only be used in a switchgear cabinet with at least degree of
protection IP 4x.
When setting up the equipment in hazardous areas, ensure the 3UF7 does
not present a fire hazard. Appropriate measures must be taken (e.g.
encapsulation).
Warning:
For SIMOCODE pro devices with a 24 V DC supply, galvanic isolation must
be ensured with a battery or a safety isolating transformer according to
DIN EN 61558-2-6.
Notice
The 3UF7 is not suitable for load-side operation on frequency converters.
F.2.8
Ambient conditions
Permissible ambient temperature range:
Storage/transport:
-40 C to +80 C
Operation:
-25 C to +60 C; OPD: 0 C to +60 C
F.2.9
Safety data
SIL (IEC 61508): SIL 1
PFDavg (IEC 61508) < 3.0 * 10-2
Repeat test: DIN EN 60079-17, Section 4.4.
SIMOCODE pro
F-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F.3
Maintenance and repairs

These devices are maintenance-free.
Warning
Repairs may only be carried out by the manufacturer.
F.4
Warranty
Notice
For this warranty to be considered valid, the safety and commissioning
information of the following operating instructions must be observed:
Device
Order No.
Basic unit
3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Operator panel
3ZX1012-0UF72-1AA1
3ZX1012-0UF78-2BA1
3ZX3012-0UF72-2AA1
Digital module
3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
3ZX1012-0UF73-1BA1
3ZX1012-0UF73-3BA1
Expansion modules
3ZX1012-0UF75-1BA1
3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Door adapter
3ZX1012-0UF78-1AA1
Decoupling module
3ZX1012-0UF71-5BA1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
F-9
F.5
Further information
You will find further information on the Internet:
Internet:
Service and support:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance.
ATEX:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/atex.
Certificates:
SIMOCODE pro
F-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Symbols
IL1, IL2, IL3
Imax 1-54
1-54
Numerics
0/4 A - 20 mA monitoring 5-1, 5-15
1NC contact + 1NO contact evaluation/
2NC contact evaluation 10-20
2x 1-channel/1x 2-channel 10-20
3UF50 basic type 1-74
3UF50 compatibility mode 1-20, 9-1, 9-2
3UF50 operating mode 1-74
3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator
panels C-13
9-pole SUB-D connection 13-46
A
I_max 1-54
IL1, IL2, IL3 1-54
A/B terminals 13-46
Abbreviations A-3, B-4
Abbreviations and specifications A-3
About SIMOCODE 1-53
Access to data records in STEP7 12-24
Accessories 1-27, 1-107, C-16
Acknowledgement of faults 10-7
Active control stations 4-65, A-2
Active control stations, contactor controls,
lamp controls and status information for
the control functions 4-65
Active power 1-22
Active power monitoring 1-16, 5-1, 5-13
Actual analog signal values 1-22
Acyclic Receive 7-3, 7-17
Acyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3) 1-115
Acyclic Send 6-18
Acyclic Send Byte 0 (1) 1-115
Acyclic Send Data 6-18, 12-1
Acyclic services 1-20, 6-18, 7-17
Acyclic writing and reading of DPV1 data
records 12-17
Adapt display settings 1-75, 1-81
Addressing plug 1-27, 1-32, 1-107, 13-36,
13-42, Glossary-1
Adopt address 1-85
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Alarms 12-7
Alarms - diagnostic alarm 12-15
Alarms - process alarm 12-16
Alarms according to DPV1 1-20
Alarms, faults and system events 15-1
AM Inputs 1-114
AM inputs function block 7-14
AM Output 1-114, 6-11
Ambient conditions F-8
Analog input 1, 2 1-61
Analog module 1-7, 1-17, 1-26, 1-79, 1-99,
5-16
Analog module (AM) 1-104, Glossary-1
Analog module connection example 1313-23
Analog module inputs 7-1, 7-3, 7-14
Analog module open circuit 15-2
Analog module output 6-1, 6-11
Analog module pin assignment 13-22
Analog signals 1-22
Analog temperature monitoring with NTC,
PT100, PT1000 and KTY 83/84 sensor
types 1-14
Analog terminal block 1-112
Analog value recording 1-114, 8-1, 8-2,
8-3
Antivalence 15-2
Apparent power 1-22
Areas of application 1-6
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data
for predefined control functions B-45
ATEX Glossary-1
Automatic acknowledgement of faults
reset 10-7
Automatic baud rate recognition 1-20
Automatic starting after power failure
10-21
Auto-Reset 10-11
Acyclic Receive function blocks 7-17
B
Basic unit 1-15, 1-75, 1-90, 13-2, 14-2, F-3,
F-9, Glossary-1
Basic unit 1 1-29
Basic unit 2 1-30
Index-1
Index
Basic unit connection example 13-15

Basic unit inputs 7-3, 7-4
Basic unit outputs 6-4
Basic unit pin assignment 13-14
Basic units 1-29, C-2
Baud rate 1-72, Glossary-2
Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s 1-20
Binary inputs for 110 - 240 V AC/DC 1-14
Binary inputs on the basic units and digital
modules 7-1
Binary terminal block 1-112
Bistable outputs 1, 2 1-77
Bistable relay outputs 1-14
BU input settings 7-5
BU inputs 1-121
BU outputs 1-121, 6-5
Bus Glossary-2
Bus connection D-8
Bus connection system 1-24, 13-30,
13-31
Bus connection system from 20 A to
630 A 13-30, 13-31
Bus fault/PLC/PCS fault response 10-25
Bus monitoring 1-72, 10-24, 10-25
Bus o.k. 1-72
Bus ok, PLC/PCS in run 1-63
Bus parameters 12-1
Bus segment Glossary-2
Bus termination module 13-47
Bus/PLC fault - reset 1-73, 10-25
Buttons, operator panel D-22
Buttons, operator panel with display D-23
C
Cable cross sections 13-12
Cable length of the sensor circuit
cables F-6
Cable protection F-6
Calculation modules 1-21, 11-2
Calculator 1-21
Calculator 1 1-59, 1-70, 1-117
Calculator 2 1-59, 1-71, 1-117, 11-28
Calculator examples 11-30
Calculator formulae 11-29
Calculator settings 11-29
Calculators 1-70
Cascade input Glossary-2
Cascade input automatic start/monitored
start 10-21
Catalogs and information material xiii,
F-10
Change-over pause 4-16, 4-18, 4-31, 44-32, 4-34, 4-36, 4-37, 4-39, 4-41, 4-43,
4-44, 4-46, 4-48, 4-50
Change-over pause active 1-64
Channel-related diagnostics 12-7, 12-14
Characteristic curve of a type A sensor

F-5
Check list for selecting a device series
1-13
Circuit breaker 1-19, 4-14, 4-29
Circuit breaker control (MCCB) 1-30
Class 3-8, Glossary-2
Class 1 master 12-2, 12-17, Glossary-2
Class 2 master 12-2, Glossary-2
Class time 3-14
Clear 1-85
Clockwise rotation 4-33
Cold starting 10-9
Color coding for the connecting cable
13-41, 13-43
Commands 1-52
Commands (OPD) 1-48
Comment 1-89
Commissioning 2-9, 14-1, 14-3, 14-4, F-3
Communication 1-5, 1-20, 1-51, 12-1
Communication principle 12-4
Compatibility mode 1-73
Compatibility mode 1 1-74
Conductor cross section 13-30, 13-31
Configuration fault 15-2
Configuration information for using an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module 1-106
Configure diagnostic response 12-7
Configuring a reversing starter 2-1
Configuring the DM-F DIP switch 1-101
Connecting cable 1-27, 1-108, 13-36,
Glossary-3
Connecting cables to the system interface
of the operator panel 13-44, 13-45
Connecting plugs with sockets 1-113
Connecting system components to the
system interface 13-39, 13-43
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the
9-pole SUB-D socket 13-46
Connection cross sections, decoupling
module D-9
Connection for voltage measurement
D-8
Connection, analog module D-20
Connection, basic units D-6
Connection, digital modules D-11
Connection, DM-F D-13
Connection, earth-fault module D-20
Connection, temperature module D-21
Contactor Glossary-3
Contactor control 4-33
Contactor controls 4-12, 4-65, A-2
Contrast 1-81
Control circuit, analog module D-19
Control circuit, digital modules D-10
SIMOCODE pro
Index-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Control circuit, earth-fault module D-20

Control commands 4-1, 4-7, 4-24, 4-27,
4-30, 4-33, 4-37, 4-40, 4-44, 4-47, 4-54,
4-59, 4-62
Control function 4-1, 4-2
Control functions 4-10, 4-65, Glossary-3
Control of the main contactor in the motor
feeder 6-4
Control station - local control 4-3
Control station - operator panel 4-4
Control station - PC 4-4
Control station - PLC/PCS 4-3
Control station Local Control 2-2
Control station operator panel 4-2
Control station PC 4-2
Control station PLC/PCS 4-2
Control station settings 4-9
Control stations 1-124, 4-1, Glossary-3
Cooling down period 1-62, 3-10,
Glossary-4
Cooling down period active 1-65
Cooling down period of the motor 1-22
Cos phi 1-94, Glossary-4
Cos phi monitoring 1-16, 1-126, 5-1, 5-11,
11-25, Glossary-4
Cos phi, P, S 1-61
Cold starting function test 10-9
Counter 11-2, 11-8, 11-9
Counter - actual value 1-70
Counter - output 1-70
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-131
Counter-clockwise rotation 4-33
Counter logic modules 11-8
Counters 1-21, 1-70
Cover 1-32
Cross-circuit detection 10-20
Current flowing, device ok 1-63
Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-22
Current limit 1-15, 3-14
Current limit monitoring 1-13, 1-15, 5-1,
5-5, 5-6, Glossary-4
Current limits 1-124, 5-5
Current measuring 1-13, 1-76
Current measuring module 1-24, 1-93,
4-32, 13-2, 13-30, 14-2, 5-5, C-3, C-4,
C-5, C-6, C-7, F-3, F-9, Glossary-4
Current measuring module installed 4-36
Current measuring module installed in
delta circuit/supply line 4-18
Current measuring with the current measuring modules and current/voltage measuring modules 13-30
Current/voltage measuring module 1-7,
5-13, 13-2, 14-2, C-9, C-10, C-11, C-12,
F-3, F-9, Glossary-4
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
1-24, 1-25, 1-94, 5-5, 5-8, 13-31, C-8

Cyclic data 12-6
Cyclic data exchange 12-17
Cyclic Receive 7-3, 7-16, 12-6
Cyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3) 1-132
Cyclic Receive function blocks 7-16
Cyclic Send 6-16, 12-6
Cyclic Send Byte 0 (1, 2/3) 1-132
Cyclic Send data 2-12, 6-17, 12-1
Cyclic services 1-20, 6-17, 7-16
D
Dahlander 1-13, 1-19, 1-30, 4-14, 4-39,
B-51, E-18, E-19
Dahlander reversing starter 4-14, 4-43,
B-52, E-20, E-21, E-22
Dahlander reversing starter control
function 4-40
Data access 12-6
Data formats B-1
Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1 B-21
Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 B-26
Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1 B-30
Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2 B-37
Data record 139 - Marking B-40
Data record 160 - Communication
parameters B-41
Data record 165 - Identification B-41
Data record 202 - Acyclic receive B-42
Data record 203 - Acyclic send B-43
Data record 224 - Password protection
B-44
Data record 67 - Process image of the
outputs B-8
Data record 69 - Process image of the
inputs B-9
Data record 72 - Error buffer B-10
Data record 73 - Event memory B-11
Data record 92 - Device diagnostics B-12
Data record 94 - Measured values B-19
Data record 95 - Service data/statistical
data B-20
Data records 12-24, B-1, B-2, B-3
Data transfer 12-4
Date 1-89
Decoupling module 1-25, 1-96, 13-2,
14-2, F-9, Glossary-4
Decoupling module connection
example 13-24
Decoupling module in different
networks 1-95, 1-96
Index-3
Index
Decoupling module pin assignment

13-24
Degree of protection (according to
IEC 60529) D-2
Delay xii, 3-12
Delay time 1-100, 7-11
Delay time for sensor inputs
50ms/10ms 10-20
Delta networks 1-98
Device class 1-91
Device data 12-2
Device data (GSD file) Glossary-5
Device family 1-90
Device I/Os 1-52
Device I/Os (OPD) 1-46
Device parameters 12-1
Device replacement 1-107
Device series 1-7
Device subfamily 1-90
Device test active 1-65
Diagnostic alarms 12-7
Diagnostic data 1-5, 1-23
Diagnostic device fault 1-74
Diagnostic message "Local" and
"PROFIsafe" 1-23
Diagnostic warning 1-74
Diagnostics data 12-7
Diagnostics for device faults 12-7
Diagnostics for process events 12-7
Diagnostics for process warnings 12-7
Digital module 1-77, 1-100, 13-2, 14-2, F-3,
F-9, Glossary-5
Digital module 1 as DM-F Local 1-78
Digital module 1 inputs 7-3
Digital module 1 is DM-F PROFIsafe 1-78
Digital module 2 inputs 7-3
Digital module connection example 13-17
Digital module DM-F Local 1-102, 13-2,
14-2, F-3, F-9
Digital module DM-F Local connection
example 13-28
Digital module DM-F Local pin
assignment 13-26
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe 1-102,
13-2, 14-2, F-3, F-9
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe connection examples 13-29
Digital module inputs 7-9
Digital module outputs 6-9
Digital module pin assignment 13-16
Digital modules 1-25, 1-99
Digital modules DM-F Local and
DM-F PROFIsafe 13-5, 13-25, C-15,
Glossary-5
Dimension drawings C-1
DIP positions, enabling circuit 0>1, digital
module DM-F Local 1-88

DIP switch Glossary-5
DIP switch, DM-F Local D-16
DIP switch, DM-F PROFIsafe D-17
DIP switches, DM-F PROFIsafe 10-22
DIP switches, DM-F Local 1-66, 10-19,
10-20
Direct starter 1-9, 1-10, 1-13, 1-19, 1-30,
4-14, 4-23, B-46, E-6, E-7
Direct starter for 1-phase loads E-50,
E-51
Direct starter control function 4-22
Direction of rotation 4-24
Display 1-92
Display of all pending faults 1-86
Display of all pending status
information 1-86
Display of all pending warnings 1-86
Display of measured values in the measured values display 1-60
Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/maintenance display 1-67
Display settings 1-52
Display settings (OPD) 1-47
Display, operator panel with display D-23
Displays (lamp control) 4-12
Displays of the operator panel with
display 1-38, 1-51
Displays the current status of all
device I/Os 1-75
DM Inputs 7-11
DM Outputs 6-9
DM1(2) Inputs 1-118
DM1(2) Inputs, DM-F = DM-F Local or DMF PROFIsafe 1-118
DM1(2) Outputs 1-118
DM-F Abbreviations-1
DM-F - Test requirement 15-2
DM-F DIP switch
1-101
DM-F feedback circuit 15-2
DM-F Local 1-18
DM-F PROFIsafe 1-18
DM-F PROFIsafe, inputs 1,2,3, feedback
circuit 1-78
DM-F safety-oriented tripping 15-2
DM-F system interfaces 1-101
DM-F wiring 15-2
DM-FL - Configuration deviation 15-2
DM-FL - Configuration mode 15-3
DM-FL - Cross circuit 15-3
DM-FL - Simultaneity 15-3
DM-FL waiting for start-up test 15-3
DM-FP F PRM error 15-3
DM Inputs function blocks 7-9
SIMOCODE pro
Index-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Documentation for safety-oriented functions and failsafe digital modules 1-102

Door adapter 1-27, 1-108, 13-2, 14-2,
C-16, F-9, Glossary-5
Double 0 15-3
Double 1 15-3
DP master 12-2, Glossary-5
DP master with DPV1 alarm support (DPV1
alarm mode) 12-21
DP master without DPV1 alarm support
(DPV0 alarm mode) 12-21
DP masters which are operated in "DPV1"
DP mode 12-22
DP masters which are operated in "S7
compatible" DP mode 12-23
DP slave/DP standard slave Glossary-6
DPV0 1-74
DPV1 1-74
PC 4-9
DPV1 slave 12-2
DPV1 slave via GSD 12-17
E
Early warning and fault messages 1-23
Earth fault 5-2
Earth-fault detection 1-7
Earth-fault module 1-26, 1-99, 1-105,
Glossary-6
Earth-fault module connection
example 13-19
Earth-fault module pin assignment 13-18
Earth-fault monitoring 1-15, 1-26, 1-127,
5-1, 5-2, Glossary-6
Earth-fault monitoring via the current measuring module (internal) 1-13
Earth-fault monitoring with external
summation current transformer via the
earth-fault module 1-14
EEx e applications 3-10, 3-15, 5-23
Electrical service life of relay outputs,
DM-F D-12
EMC stability according to
IEC 60947-1 D-2
EMERGENCY OFF Glossary-7
Emergency start 1-20, 1-121, 10-2, 10-17,
Glossary-6
Emergency start executed 1-65
EMERGENCY STOP Glossary-7
EMERGENCY STOP command
device Glossary-7
EMERGENCY STOP device Glossary-7
Enabled control command 4-7
Enabled control command - OFF 4-35,
4-53, 4-57, 4-64
Enabled control command - ON < 4-57
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Enabled control command - ON > 4-53,

4-57
Enabling circuit Glossary-7
Enabling circuit 1>0, digital module
DM-F Local 1-88
Enclosure width, DM-F D-12
End position 4-53, 15-3
Energy consumed 1-59, 1-68
Error buffer 1-53
Error buffer (OPD) 1-49
Error buffer/reading out error protocol
14-15
Error protocolling with time stamp 1-23
Error types 12-14
European norm EXplosion safe (EEx)
Glossary-7
Evaluating diagnostics data 12-21
Event memory 1-53, 1-88, 14-16
Event memory, OPD 1-49
Example circuits E-1
Execution ON command 15-3
Execution STOP command 15-4
Execution time 4-17, 4-19, 4-23, 4-26,
4-29, 4-32, 4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50,
4-53, 4-58, 4-61, 4-64
Expansion modules 13-2, 14-2, F-9,
Glossary-7
Expansion modules for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series 1-99
Expansion modules/decoupling
module C-14
Explosion protection F-1
Extended control 1-120
Extended protection 1-119
External current transformer 13-33
External earth fault 15-4
External earth-fault monitoring 1-15, 5-2
External earth-fault monitoring (with
summation current transformer) 5-4
External fault 1-20, 10-2, 10-10, 10-11,
15-4
External fault 1 (and 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) 1-120
External fault function blocks 10-10
External fault response 10-11
F
Factory settings 1-85, 2-2, 14-3, E-2,
Glossary-7
Factory settings display 1-84
Failsafe data transfer via PROFIBUS/
PROFIsafe 12-5
Failsafe digital module DM-F 1-101
Failsafe digital module DM-F Local 1-25,
13-2, 14-2, F-3, F-9
Failsafe digital module DM-F
PROFIsafe 13-2, 14-2, F-3, F-9
Index-5
Index
Fault current 5-2

Fault feedback 4-17
Fault message xii
Faults 1-53, 1-83
Faults (OPD) 1-49
FB ON 4-16, 4-17, 4-50
FC, FO, TC, TO 1-64
Features 1-4
Feedback (FB) OFF 15-4
Feedback (FB) ON 15-4
Feedback circuit Glossary-8
Feedback faults 1-23
Feedback ON 4-16, 4-44, 4-47
Feedback time 4-17, 4-19, 4-23, 4-26,
4-29, 4-32, 4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50,
4-58, 4-61, 4-64
Feeder power consumption 1-22
Field/field level Glossary-8
Fieldbus Glossary-8
Flashing 1-21, 11-2, 11-21
Flashing 1 (2, 3) 1-116
Flashing logic modules 11-21
Flashing settings 11-21
Flickering 1-21, 11-2, 11-22
Flickering 1 (2, 3) 1-120
Flickering logic modules 11-22
Flickering settings 11-22
Frequencies D-2
Full motor protection 1-4
Function block Glossary-8
Function blocks 1-111, 10-2
Function blocks (alphabetical) 1-114
FW version 1-91, 1-92
G
General fault, general warning 1-63
General representation of the input
types 7-2
GSD 12-2
GSD file 1-110, 12-18
H
Hardware fault 15-4
Hardware test 10-6, F-7
HW version 1-91, 1-92
Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA 5-17
Hysteresis for monitoring functions 5-25
5-6, 5-7, 5-10
I
I L1, I L2, I L3 1-76
I_max 1-60
I_max, Cos 1-55
I_max, UL1-L2, C 1-58
I_max, UL1-L2, F 1-58
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos 1-58
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos_Phi, S 1-55, 1-57,

1-58
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, P 1-55
I_max, UL1-L2, Cos, S 1-55
I_max, UL1-N, C 1-58
I_max, UL1-N, F 1-58
I_max, UL1-N, Cos 1-57
I_max, UL1-N, Cos, P 1-55
I_max, UL1-N, Cos, S 1-55
I/O devices Glossary-8
Identification 1-53, 1-89
Identification (OPD) 1-50
Identification number 1-91
Identification of the motor feeder and the
SIMOCODE pro components 1-89
Identification-related diagnostics 12-11
IL1, IL2, IL3 1-60
Illumination 1-81
Imax_A 1-54
Imax, cos phi 1-55
Independent operation 1-8, Glossary-8
Information about mounting and
wiring 13-2
Information and Download Center xiii,
F-10
Information and standards F-2
Input 1, analog module 1-79
Input 2, analog module 1-79
Input characterictic, DM-F PROFIsafe
D-18
Input characteristic, DM-F Local D-16
Input with safety relay function,
DM-FPROFIsafe D-18
Inputs 1-75, 1-77, 7-1, 7-3
Inputs (binary), basic units D-5
Inputs (binary), digital modules D-10
Inputs (binary), DM-F PROFIsafe D-17
Inputs DM-F Local 1-78
Inputs DM-F PROFIsafe 1-78
Inputs with safety relay function D-16
Inputs, analog module D-19
Installation guidelines for the
PROFIBUS DP 13-47
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1
slave via GSD in the configuration
software 12-18
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave
via OM SIMOCODE pro 12-20
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as
SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via
GSD) in STEP7 HW Config 12-19
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in
SIMATIC S7 with
OM SIMOCODE ES 12-22
Interfaces 13-1
Interlocking time 4-16, 4-18, 4-24, 4-26,
SIMOCODE pro
Index-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
4-36, 4-43, 4-50, 4-58, 4-64, 5-21

Interlocking time active 1-64
Internal comments 1-22
Internal earth fault 15-4
Internal earth-fault monitoring 1-15, 5-2,
5-3
IT Abbreviations-1
IT system Glossary-8
Local control 4-5

Local control station 1-11, 2-3, 2-9, 4-2,
7-9
Location designation 1-89
Locking the contactor 4-16
Logic module Glossary-8
Logic modules 1-21, 11-1, 11-2
Low voltage Glossary-9
J
Just one start possible
M
Main circuit, current measuring modules,
D-7
Main display 1-51
Main display (OPD) 1-41
Main menu (OPD) 1-40
Mains buffering time, basic units D-5
Maintenance F-9
Manual operation 4-5
Manufacturer 1-90
Manufacturer's identification 12-10
Master Glossary-9
Master PROFIBUS address 12-10
Max. star time 4-32, 4-36
Max. temp. C 1-56
Max. temp. F 1-57
Max. temperature 1-61, 1-80
Maximum expansion with expansion
modules 1-106
Measured curves 1-4
Measured values display 1-51
Measured values display (OPD) 1-42
Measuring current and voltage with current/voltage measuring modules 13-31
Measuring current with an external current
transformer (interposing transformer)
13-33
Measuring current with current measuring
modules 13-30, 13-31
Measuring, processing and outputting
analog values 1-13
Memory module 1-27, 1-32, 1-107, 13-36,
13-42, Glossary-9
Memory module "park position" 1-34,
1-37
Menu of the operator panel with display
1-40
Messages (OPD) 1-48
MFLB 1-90, 1-92
Mode selector 4-5, 4-6, 4-9
Module fault 15-4
Module supply voltage is not present
15-5
15-4
K
Key-operated switch operation
KTY83 1-80
KTY85 1-80
4-5
L
Labeling strips 1-32, 1-33, 1-36
Lamp control for displaying operating
states 6-4
Lamp controls 4-12, 4-65, A-2
Lamp test 10-6, F-7
Languages 1-81
DM-F Local 1-88
DM-F PROFIsafe 1-88
Last event "Enabling circuit opened" 1-88
Last trip current 1-62
LC 4-9
LED display D-4
LED display, analog module D-19
LED display, decoupling module D-9
LED display, digital modules D-10
LED display, DM-F Local D-14
LED display, DM-F PROFIsafe D-17
LED display, earth-fault module D-20
LED display, operator panel D-22
LED display, operator panel with
display D-23
LED display, temperature module D-21
LEDs for DM-F device diagnostics 1-101
LEDs of the operator panel with
display 6-7
Limit Monitor 1-21, 11-2, 11-23, 11-24,
11-25
Limit Monitor 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-121
Limit Monitor logic modules 11-23
Limit overshooting 11-23
Limit undershooting 11-23
List of abbreviations Abbreviations-1
Load feeder 1-10
Load type 4-17, 4-20, 4-23, 4-26, 4-29,
4-32, 4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-57,
4-61, 4-64
Local 4-5, 4-6
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

B-48, E-11
Index-7
Index
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3LV

E-10
Monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA 1-126, Glossary-9
Monitoring for further availability 1-16
Monitoring for undervoltage 1-16
Monitoring functions 1-15, 5-1,
Glossary-9
Monitoring interval for mandatory
testing 5-1, 5-24
Monitoring interval for testing 1-127
Monitoring of current limits I< 5-7
Monitoring of current limits I> 5-6
Monitoring the number of starts 5-20,
Glossary-9
Monitoring voltage Glossary-9
Motor control 1-4, 4-1
Motor control functions 1-29
Motor current monitoring 5-5
Motor feeder 1-9, 2-3
Motor model 10-17
Motor operating hours 1-22, 1-67
Motor operating hours > 15-5
Motor protection 3-1, Glossary-10
Motor protection and motor control
status 1-63
Motor protection functions 3-2
Motor stop time 1-16, 1-68
Motor stop time > 1-68, 15-5
Motor stop time monitoring 5-19,
Glossary-10
Motor stop times 1-22, 5-18, 5-19
Motor switching state 1-22
Motor temperature 1-15
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
control function 4-27
Mounting 13-1
Mounting basic units D-4
Mounting lugs 13-3, 13-4, 13-6, 13-7
Mounting lugs for screw attachment 13-3
Mounting position D-2
Mounting the basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module 13-4
Mounting, analog module D-19
Mounting, current measuring modules,
13-6, 13-7, D-7
Mounting, decoupling module D-9
Mounting, digital modules D-10
Mounting, DM-F module D-12
Mounting, earth-fault module D-20
Mounting, operator panel D-22
Mounting, operator panel with display
D-23
Mounting, temperature module D-21
N
Navigating the menu of the operator panel
with display 1-40
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES 11-1, 12-1
Network contactor 4-33
No start 1-68
No start possible 15-5
Non-maintained command mode 1-64,
4-16, 4-23, 4-26, 4-29, 4-32, 4-36, 4-39,
4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-53, 4-57, 4-60, 4-64
Non-safety functions (failsafe digital
modules) 7-11
Non-volatile element 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-122
Non-volatile element logic modules 11-18
Non-volatile element settings 11-20
Non-volatile elements 1-21, 11-2, 11-18,
11-19, 11-20
NOR function 11-17, 11-20
Notes on parameterizing 14-3
NTC 1-80
Number of motor starts 1-22
Number of overload trips 1-22, 1-67
Number of parameterizations 1-69
Number of permissible starts
remaining 1-22
Number of starts 1-16, 5-20
Number of starts - actual value 1-67
Number of starts - overshoot 5-19
Number of starts - pre-warning 5-19
O
Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro
1-110
OFF command-reset 10-11
OM SIMOCODE pro 12-2
ON control command 4-53
ON, ON>>, Start active 1-63
Operator Panel 4-9
OP Buttons 1-116, 7-8
OP LED 1-115
Open circuit, analog module 1-79
Operating data 1-5, 1-22
Operating hours 1-16, 5-18
Operating hours BU 1-69
Operating hours monitoring 5-19,
Glossary-10
Operating manual failsafe digital module
DM-F Local 1-18, 1-102
Operating manual failsafe digital module
DM-F PROFIsafe 1-18, 1-102
Operating modes 4-1, 4-5, 4-6
Operating modes for calculator 2 11-28
Operating range, basic units D-4
Operating range, DM-F D-12
Operating, service and diagnostic data
1-22
SIMOCODE pro
Index-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream

from the Y link 1-20
Operation monitoring 1-116, 5-1, 5-18,
Glossary-10
Operational Protection OFF 1-20, 10-2,
10-12, 10-13, 15-5, Glossary-10
Operational Protection OFF (OPO) function
block 10-12
Operator controls of the operator panel
with display 1-39
Operator panel 1-24, 1-32, 13-2, 14-2,
F-9, 7-7, Glossary-10
Operator panel adapter 1-27, 1-108, 13-2,
14-2, C-16, F-9
Operator panel buttons 7-1, 7-3, 7-6
Operator panel LEDs 6-1, 6-6
Operator panel with display 1-7, 1-24, 11-34, 13-2, 14-2, F-9
Operator panel, "Test/Reset" button 7-6
Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4 7-6
OPO 1-117, 10-12
OPO, Remote, TPF 1-64
Organization blocks Glossary-11
Output of an analog value 6-15
Output of the effective motor current
6-13, 6-14
Output response of the timer 11-12, 11-13
Output, analog module 1-79, D-19
Outputs 1-75, 6-1, 6-3
Outputs 1,2 "monostable" 1-77
Outputs 1,2, feedback circuit DM-F
Local 1-78
Outputs 1,2, feedback circuit
DM-F PROFIsafe 1-78
Outputs DM-F Local 1-78
Outputs DM-F PROFIsafe 1-78
Overload 3-10, 15-5
Overload operation 15-5
Overload protection 1-13, 1-15, 3-1, 3-2,
3-5, 3-14, Glossary-11
Overload relay 1-13, 1-19, 1-30, 4-14, 44-20, B-45, E-4, E-5
Overload relay control function 4-20
Overtemperature 5-23, 5-24
P
Panel reset 10-11
Parameter 4-16, 15-6
Parameter changes not allowed in the current operating state 15-6
Parameter incorrect 15-6
Parameterization 2-6
Parameterization during startup 12-17
Parameterization via PROFIBUS 12-25
2-8
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Password 15-10
Pause time 3-10, Glossary-11
Pause time active 1-65
PC cable 1-27, 1-107, 13-36, 13-42,
Glossary-11
PCS 7 SIMOCODE pro function block
library 1-28
Performance Level (PL) 1-18, 1-101,
Glossary-11
Permissible ambient temperature D-2
Permissible number of starts
exceeded 15-6
Permissible starts 5-20
Permissible starts - actual value 1-68
PFD Abbreviations-2
PFDavg (IEC 61508) F-8
PFHD Abbreviations-2
Phase failure monitoring 1-13
Phase sequence 1-22, 1-94
Phase sequence 1-2-3 1-65
Phase sequence 3-2-1 1-65
Phase sequence identification 1-17
Phase unbalance 1-22, 1-60, 3-13, 15-6
Pin assignment of the removable
terminals 13-18, 13-20, 13-22, 13-24,
13-27, 13-32
Pin assignment of the removable terminals
of the basic unit 13-14
of the digital module 13-16
of the digital module DM-F Local 13-26
Pin assignments for digital module
DM-F PROFIsafe, 24 V DC version
13-27
Plant downtimes 5-18
Plant identifier 1-89
PLC/PCS 4-5, 4-9
PLC/PCS in Run 1-73
PLC/PCS monitoring 1-20, 1-73, 10-2,
10-24, 10-25
Plugs (analog) 1-111
Plugs (binary) 1-111
Pole-changing reversing starter 4-14,
4-50, B-54, E-26, E-27, E-28
Pole-changing reversing starter control
function 4-47
Pole-changing starter 1-13, 1-19, 1-30,
4-14, 4-46, B-53, E-24, E-25
Pole changing starter control function
4-44
Positioner 1-13, 1-19, 4-14, 4-57, 10-12,
10-13, B-56, E-32, E-33, E-34, E-35, E-36,
E-37, E-38, E-39, E-40, E-41
Positioner closes 1-64
Positioner control 1-30, 4-56
Index-9
Index
Positioner control function 4-54, 10-12

Positioner opens 1-64
Power considerations 1-13
Power consumption, basic units D-4
Power consumption, DM-F D-12
Power factor 1-22
Power failure (UVO) 15-6
Power failure monitoring 1-20, 10-2,
10-15, 10-16
Power failure monitoring settings 10-16
Power failure time 10-16
Power loss ride-through time, DM-F D-12
Power management 1-13
Power monitoring 1-13, 1-127
Power-up behavior 3-5
Pre-alarm delay 3-12
Preparing the data transfer 12-17
Prerequisites for commissioning and
servicing 14-2
Preventive maintenance 14-8
Pre-warning level 3-12
Pre-warning overload (I >115%) 15-6
Process alarms 12-7
Process and diagnostic alarm 12-17
Process automation Glossary-11
Process monitoring 1-15
Product Information System (ProdIS) iixiii, F-10, Abbreviations-2
PROFIBUS Glossary-12
PROFIBUS address 1-72
PROFIBUS communication (OPD) 1-45
PROFIBUS DP 1-20, 1-28, 2-2, 4-4, 4-59,
4-62, 6-2, 6-3, 6-5, 6-16, 6-18, 7-17, 10-7,
12-2, Glossary-12
PROFIBUS DP interface 1-20,
Glossary-12
PROFIBUS DP interface, basic units D-4
PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket
13-46
PROFIBUS DPV1 6-18, 7-17, 12-2,
Glossary-12
PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) installation guidelines 13-47, Glossary-12
PROFINET Glossary-12
PROFIsafe 12-3, Glossary-12
PROFIsafe address 1-72
Programmable logic controller (PLC)
Glossary-13
Programming device Glossary-13
Protection functions 1-15
Protection/Control 1-122
Protective extra low voltage (PELV)
Glossary-13
Pt100 1-80
Pt1000 1-80
PTC 3-15
PTC high resistance/not present

PTC ok 1-75
PTC short circuit 1-75
Pump 1-11, 1-15
1-75
R
Rated control supply voltage Us D-4
Rated control supply voltage Us,
DM-F D-12
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp,
basic units D-4
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp,
DM-F D-12
Rated insulation voltage Ui, basic units
D-4
Rated insulation voltage Ui, DM-F D-12
Rated motor current F-4
Reaction times, typical D-27
Read and adapt main display 1-54
Reading data 12-3
Reading out statistical data 14-8
Reading out the device-internal error
buffer 1-87
Reading out the device-internal event
memory 1-88
Receive data from PROFIBUS DP 1-111,
7-1
Relay enabling circuits, DM-F D-12
Relay outputs 6-1
Relay outputs, basic units D-5
Relay outputs, digital modules D-10
Relay outputs, DM-F D-12
Relay test 10-6, F-7
Releases 4-1, 4-7
Remote operation 4-5
Remote reset 10-11
Remote/Automatic 4-5, 4-6
Removable terminals 13-3, 14-13
Repairs F-9
Replacing a basic unit 14-11
Replacing a DM-F 14-12
Replacing an expansion module or a
decoupling module 14-12
Required function is not supported 15-7
Reset 1-20, 3-12, 10-2
Reset 1 (2, 3) 1-125
Reset display settings 1-84
Reset function 10-4, 10-5
Reset settings 10-7
Resetting, testing and parameterizing via
commands 1-85
Resistive load 4-17
Response xii, 3-4, 3-14
Restart 1-85
Restart temperature F-5
Restart time delay 10-15
SIMOCODE pro
Index-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Restart time delay (staggered) 10-16

Return to main display 1-84
Reversing starter 1-13, 1-19, 1-30, 2-1,
2-2, 2-7, 2-9, 4-14, 4-26, B-47, E-8, E-9
Reversing starter control function 4-24
Routing function 12-20, 12-25
S
S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro 12-17
Safe isolation according to
IEC 60947-1 D-3
Safe isolation according to IEC 60947-1,
DM-F D-12
Safe Tripping 10-3
Safe Tripping reset 10-23
Safe Tripping response 10-23
Safe Tripping, DM-F Local 1-123
Safe Tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe 1-123
Safety and commissioning information for
EEx areas F-1
Safety data F-8
Safety DM-F Local 1-66
Safety DM-F PROFIsafe 1-66
Safety extra low voltage Glossary-13
Safety guidelines F-8
Safety Integrity Level 1-18, 1-101,
Glossary-14
Safety/PROFIsafe - separate function from
Safety-oriented tripping 1-14, 1-18, 10-18
Safety-oriented tripping "Local" 1-20
Safety-oriented tripping "PROFIsafe" 1-20
Safety-oriented tripping monitoring 1-22
Saving change-over command 4-16, 4-26,
4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-64
Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES
file into the basic unit 14-10
Saving parameters from the basic unit into
a SIMOCODE ES file 14-9
Saving parameters from the basic unit into
the memory module 14-9
Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit 14-10
Schematic of the "OP Buttons" function
block 7-8
Screw attachment 13-3, 13-4, 13-6, 13-7
Screw terminals 1-111, 1-112
SELV Glossary-13
Send data on the PROFIBUS DP 6-1
Sensor channels 1,2, DM-F Local 1-78
Sensor channels DM-F Local 1-78
Sensor circuit fault 3-16
Sensor circuit wiring F-6
Sensor circuit, temperature module D-21
Sensor fault 1-80, 3-16
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Sensor input automatic start/monitored

start 10-21
Sensor measuring circuit 1-16, 1-22
Sensor out of range 1-80
Sensor type 1-80
Sensor types 1-105
Sensors 1-26
Separate failsafe function from control
function 4-20, 4-23, 4-26, 4-29, 4-32,
4-36, 4-39, 4-43, 4-46, 4-50, 4-53, 4-57,
4-60, 4-64
Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface 13-40
Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel
13-43
Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to
the basic unit 13-46
Service 14-1
Service and support xiii, F-10
Service data 1-5, 1-22
Set current 3-5
Set current Is2 3-6
SET/RESET button, DM-F Local 10-19, DD-16
SET-RESET button, DM-F PROFIsafe
D-17
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address 2-10
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via
SIMOCODE ES 2-11, 14-5
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the
addressing plug 2-11, 14-5
Setting the PROFIsafe address on
DM-F PROFIsafe 14-5
Setting the rated motor current F-4
Setting up in hazardous areas F-8
Settings of the DIP switches
(DM-F Local) 10-19, 10-20
Settings of the DIP switches
(DM-F PROFIsafe) 10-22
Set-up F-3
SFB Glossary-13
SFC Glossary-13
Shock resistance (sine pulse) D-2
Short code 1-90
Short-circuit protection for type of assignment 2 according to
IEC 60947-4-1 F-6
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up
to 100 kA and 690 V D-24
Signal conditioner 11-15, 11-16, 11-17
Signal conditioner logic modules 11-15
Signal conditioner 1 (and 2, 3, 4) 1-123
Signal conditioner settings 11-17
Signal conditioners 1-21, 11-2
Index-11
Index
Signal types/output responses of non-volatile elements 11-19

SIL (IEC 61508) F-8
SIL (Safety Integrity Level) Glossary-14
SIMATIC Glossary-14
SIMATIC PCS 7 1-28
SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system
1-28
SIMATIC PDM 4-4, 12-3, Glossary-14
SIMATIC PDM (PCS7) 12-2
SIMATIC powercontrol 12-2
SIMATIC S7 1-110, 12-18
SIMOCODE ES 1-109, 2-2, 3-1, 4-1, 4-4,
6-1, 7-1, 8-1, 9-1, 10-1, 10-11, 11-1, 12-1,
12-2, 14-3, 14-9, B-40, Glossary-14
SIMOCODE ES 2007 + SP2 1-28
SIMOCODE ES parameter files 1-110
SIMOCODE ES Premium 12-25
SIMOCODE pro basic unit 1-113
SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD
12-21
SIMOCODE pro object manager
(OM) Glossary-14
SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library 1-110,
Glossary-14
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave 12-3,
Glossary-15
SIMOCODE pro V installation
(example) 13-38
Single-phase networks 1-98
Slave Glossary-15
Slave diagnostics 12-10
Slave operating modes 12-17
Smooth running down time 4-64
Snap-on mounting 13-4
Socket assignment table - analog A-12
Socket assignment table - digital A-5
Sockets (analog) 1-112
Sockets (binary) 1-111
Soft starter 1-13, 1-19, 4-14, 4-60, 4-62,
B-57, E-42, E-43, E-45
Soft starter control 1-30
Soft starter control function 4-59
4-14, 4-64, B-58, E-46, E-47, E-48, E-49
Software 1-28, 1-109
Solenoid valve 1-13, 1-19, 4-14, 4-53,
B-55, E-30, E-31
Solenoid valve control 1-30
Solenoid valve control function 4-51
Specifications A-4, B-5, D-2
Stalled positioner 15-7
Stalled rotor 15-7
Stalled rotor level 3-14
Stalled rotor monitoring 1-13

Stalled rotor protection 1-15, 3-2, 3-14,
Glossary-15
Standard diagnostics 12-7, 12-17
Standard function Glossary-15
Standard functions 1-20, 10-1, 10-2
Standard motor feeders 1-13
Standard rail mounting 13-6, 13-7
Standards F-2
Star contactor 4-33
Star networks 1-97
Star time 4-32, 4-36
Star-delta connection 4-34, 5-2
Star-delta reversing starter 1-19, 4-14,
4-35, B-50, E-16, E-17
Star-delta starter 1-13, 1-19, 1-30, 4-14, 44-32, B-49, E-12, E-13, E-14, E-15
Star-delta starter control function 4-30
Star delta reversing starter control
function 4-33
Start-up override 4-17, 5-16
Start-up parameter block 1-73
Start-up parameter block active 15-7
Start-up testing 10-21
States of the status LEDs/contactor controls during testing 10-6, F-7
Station Glossary-15
Station status 1 12-9
Station status 1 to 3 12-9
Statistical data 14-8, Glossary-15
Statistics/maintenance 1-51
Statistics/maintenance (OPD) 1-44
Status - cooling down period active 15-7
Status - DM-F enabling circuit 15-8
Status - emergency start executed 15-8
Status display 1-51
Status display for PROFIBUS
communication 1-72
Status display motor protection/motor
control (OPD) 1-43
Status information 1-52, 4-12, 4-65, 12-7,
12-11, 12-17, A-2
STEP7 12-18, 12-19, 12-20, Glossary-15
Stop category 0 Glossary-15
Strip lengths 13-12, 13-32
Summation current evaluation 5-2
Summation current transformer 1-7, 1-26
Supplying the inputs 7-5, 7-11
Supplying the inputs of the basic unit
13-13
13-15
DM-F PROFIsafe 13-27
SIMOCODE pro
Index-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Switch voltage display 1-83

Switching from star to delta 4-30, 4-33,
4-36
Switching the direction of rotation 4-24,
4-33, 4-40, 4-47, 4-62
Switching the direction of travel 4-54
Switching the speed 4-37, 4-40, 4-44,
4-47
System components 1-24, 1-29
System interface 1-24, 13-40
System interface cover 1-27, 1-108, 13-39,
13-42
System interface cover IP54 Glossary-16
System interface, current measuring modules, current/voltage measuring
modules D-7
System interface, digital modules D-10
System interfaces 13-36, 13-42
System interfaces on basic units, expansion modules, decoupling module, current measuring modules and current/
voltage measuring modules 13-39
System interfaces on the digital modules
DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe 13-41
System interfaces on the operator
panel 13-42
System interfaces on the operator panel
and the operator panel with display
13-42
System interfaces, analog module D-19
System interfaces, basic units D-4
System interfaces, decoupling module DD-9
System interfaces, DM-F D-12
System interfaces, earth-fault module DD-20
System interfaces, operator panel D-22
System interfaces, operator panel with
display D-23
System interfaces, temperature module
D-21
T
T1, T2, T3 1-61, 1-80
Table of contents i
Tables A-1
Target groups 4-1
Technical data D-1
Technical data of the DM-F Local digital
module D-14
Technical data of the DM-F Local and
DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules D-12
Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe
digital module D-17
Technical data of the earth-fault module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
D-20
Technical data of the expansion modules
D-10
Technical data of the operator panel with
display D-23
Technical data of the temperature
module D-21
Technical data, analog module D-19
Technical data, decoupling module D-9
Technical data, digital modules D-10
Technical data, operator panel D-22
Telegram description 12-6
Temperature in the sensor measuring
circuits 1, 2 and 3 1-22
Temperature limit 3-15
Temperature module 1-7, 1-16, 1-26, 1-80,
1-99, 1-105, 15-8, Glossary-16
Temperature module - warning level
exceeded 15-8
Temperature module connection
example 13-21
Temperature module inputs 7-1, 7-12,
7-13
(TM inputs) 7-3
Temperature module out of range 15-8
Temperature module pin assignment
13-20
Temperature monitoring 1-16, 1-26,
1-105, 1-128, 3-15, 5-1, Glossary-16
Temperature monitoring (analog) 5-22
Temperature sensor 1-7, 5-22
Temperatures C 1-56
Temperatures F 1-57
Terminal block Glossary-16
Test 1-20, 10-2, F-7
Test 1 (2) 1-125
Test function 10-4, 10-5
Test interval for mandatory testing 5-24
Test phases 10-6, F-7
Test position 10-8
Test position feedback (TPF) 1-20, 10-2,
10-8, 10-9, 15-8, Glossary-16
Test Position Feedback function block
10-8
Test settings 10-6
Test trip 15-8
Test verification documents D-2
Test/Reset 1-85, 10-4
Test/Reset button DM-F 1-101
TEST/RESET button, basic units D-4
Test/Reset buttons 10-11
Thermal motor model 1-22, 1-61, 3-10,
10-5
Thermistor 1-125
Thermistor motor protection (PTC
Index-13
Index
binary) D-5
Thermistor motor protection with PTC
(binary) 1-13, D-5
Thermistor open circuit 15-8
Thermistor protection 1-15, 3-1, 3-2,
Glossary-16
Thermistor sensor 1-15
Thermistor short circuit 15-8
Thermistor trip level 15-8
Thermistors 3-15
Through-hole opening, current measuring
modules, current/voltage measuring
modules D-8
Through-hole openings 13-30, 13-31
Through-hole technology 1-24, 13-30,
13-31
Through-hole technology up to 200 A
13-30, 13-31
Tightening torques 13-12, 13-32
Time range for permissible starts 5-20
Time range for starts 5-20
Time stamp 1-92, 1-131
Time synchronization 10-26
Time synchronization via
PROFIBUS DP 1-20
Time to trip 1-22, 1-62
Timer 1-21, 1-69, 11-2, 11-10, 11-14
Timer - output 1-69
Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-125
Timer actual value 1-69
Timer logic modules 11-10
Timestamping 1-20, 10-3, 10-26
Timestamping active 1-73
TM inputs 1-125
TN-C system Glossary-16
TN-S system Glossary-16
Torque 4-56
TPF 1-122
Transferring parameters to the basic
unit 2-9
Transformation ratio 13-33
Transformation ratio - active 3-5, 3-6
Transformation ratio - primary 3-6
Transformation ratio - secondary 3-6, 3-7
Trip - Bus 15-9
Trip - PLC/PCS 10-24, 15-9
Trip - Power failure (UVO) 10-16
Trip - Test position feedback (TPF) 10-9
Trip antivalence 15-8
Trip class 3-5, 3-8, F-4
Trip current 1-23
Trip end position 15-9
Trip temporary components 15-9
Tripping characteristic F-4
Tripping temperature F-5
Tripping time 3-5, 3-8
Truth table 2I/1O 1-129, 11-6

Truth table 3I/1O 1-129, 11-3, 11-5
Truth table 5I/2O 1-130, 11-7
Truth tables 1-21, 11-2, 11-4, 11-5
Type of load 3-11
Type of protection EEx e and EEx d F-2
Types of positioner control 4-56
Types of signals 11-16, 11-19
Types of signals/output responses of the
signal conditioners 11-16
U
U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1 1-57,1-60, 1-76
UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N 1-57, 1-60, 1-76
Unbalance 15-5
Unbalance level 3-13
Unbalance monitoring 1-13
Unbalance protection 1-15, 3-1, 3-2, 3-13,
Glossary-17
Universal Current (UC) Glossary-17
USB to serial adapter 1-27, 1-107
UVO 1-128
UVO fault 10-15
V
Voltage display 1-83
Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-22
Voltage measurement 1-13, 1-76
Voltage monitoring 1-128
Voltage monitoring 1-16, 5-1, 5-8,
Glossary-17
Voltage monitoring for undervoltage
1-13
W
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA > overshot
15-9
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA< undershot
15-9
Warning level cos phi < 15-9
Warning level I< undershot 15-9
Warning level I> overshot 15-9
Warning level P< undershot 15-9
Warning level P> overshot 15-9
Warning level U< undershot 15-9
Warnings 1-52, 1-83
Warnings (OPD) 1-48
Warranty F-9
Watchdog 1-20, 1-131, 10-2, 10-24, 10-25
Watchdog function block 10-24
Win SIMOCODE DP Converter 1-110
Glossary-17
Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files
1-110
Wiring 13-1, 13-12
Wiring the basic units, expansion modules
and the decoupling module 13-12
SIMOCODE pro
Index-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index
Wiring the removable terminals 13-24

Wiring the removable terminals for basic
units 13-14
Wiring the removable terminals of the
digital module 13-46
Writing data 12-3
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Index-15
Index
SIMOCODE pro
Index-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
List of abbreviations
Abbreviation
Meaning
Acycl.
AM
Acyclic
Analog module
AS
AS
Alarm switch
Auxiliary switch
ATEX
"Atmosphre explosible" (explosive atmospheres) according to the ATEX

equipment directive 94/9/EC
AWG
BU
American wire gauge

Basic unit
CPU
Cycl.
Central processing unit

Cyclic
DCM
DIP
Decoupling module
Dual in-line package
DM
DM-F
Digital module
Failsafe digital module (DM-FL or DM-FP)
DM-FL
DM-FP
Digital module Failsafe Local

Digital module Failsafe PROFIsafe
DP
EEx
Distributed peripherals
European norm EXplosion safe: Specifies the protection classes for
categorizing motors for use in potentially explosive areas.
EM
EMC
Earth-fault module
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF
ex
Electromotive force
Explosion proof
FB
FC
Feedback
Feedback CLOSE
F-CPU
FMS
Failsafe CPU (controller)

Fieldbus message specification
FO
GF, CF
Feedback OFF
General fault, control function
GSD
IM
Device data
IT
LC
Isolation Terre
Local control
MM
NTC
Memory module
Negative temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
OB
OM
Organization blocks
Object manager for integrating PROFIBUS DP slaves in STEP 7
OP
OPD
Operator panel
OPO
Operational protection OFF
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Abbreviations-1
List of Abbreviations
OSSD
PCS
Part of the electro-sensitive protective equipment (EPSE) that is connected to

the controller and switches to the OFF state when the sensor component
responds during the specified operation.
Process control system
PD
PDM
Programming device
Process device manager
PELV
PFD
Protective extra low voltage

Probability of failure on demand: Probability of a dangerous failure of a safety
function when needed
PFHD
Probability of dangerous failure per hour: Mean probability of a dangerous

failure per hour
PL
PLC
Performance Level
Programmable logic controller
ProdIS
Product information system
PTC
PZ
Positive temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)

Pozidriv
SELV
SFB
Safety extra low voltage

System function block
SFC
SIL
System function
Safety Integrity Level
TC
Th
Torque closed
Thermistor
TM
TO
Temperature module
Torque open
TPF
UC
Test position feedback

Universal current
UM
SIMOCODE pro
Abbreviations-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary
Addressing plug
The addressing plug is necessary to enable the hardwarebased allocation of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic unit
without a PC/PD.
Analog module (AM)
The analog module offers the option of extending BU2 by
adding optional analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA - 20 mA).
This makes it possible to measure and monitor any arbitrary
process variables which can be mapped onto a 0/4 mA to 20
mA signal. The automation system has free access to the
measured process variables.
ATEX
This is abbreviated from the French "Atmosphre explosible"
(explosive atmospheres).
ATEX is used as a synonym for both EC directives on
explosion protection, specifically the ATEX equipment
directive 94/9/EC and the ATEX workplace directive 1999/92/
EC.
Basic unit (BU)
The basic units are the fundamental components of the
SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units are always necessary
when using SIMOCODE pro. They have the same enclosure
width of 45 mm and are equipped with removable terminals.
Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro C device series. It contains the important
motor control functions and motor protection functions.
Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all functions and
fulfills all requirements for motor protection, motor control,
diagnostics and monitoring.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary-1
Glossary
Baud rate
The baud rate is the speed at which data is transferred and
indicates the number of transmitted bits per second (baud
rate = bit rate).
With PROFIBUS DP, baud rates from 9.6 kBaud to 12 MBaud
are possible.
Bus
A common transmission path with which all stations are
connected. It has two defined ends.
With PROFIBUS, the bus is a two-wire cable (copper cable) or
a fiber optic cable.
Bus segment
PROFIBUS DP consists of at least one bus segment. A bus
segment has at least two stations, one of which must be a
DP master. A maximum of 32 stations can be connected to a
bus segment.
Cascade input
Safe single-channel input of a safety relay, e.g. DM-F Local
and DM-F PROFIsafe. This input is evaluated internally as a
sensor signal. If no voltage is applied the safety relay trips the
enabling circuits (outputs) safely.
Class
Unit for the tripping class. Indicates the maximum tripping
time in which SIMOCODE must trip at a current that is 7.2
times the value of the set current Is in a cold state (motor
protection according to IEC 60947). If Class 10 is set for
SIMOCODE pro (for example), it is ensured that if a current
that is 7.2 times the set current occurs
the (cold) motor will switch off after 10 seconds. The tripping
class can be set to 8 different settings ranging from Class 5
to Class 40.
Class 1 master
Active stations on PROFIBUS DP. The cyclic data exchange
with other stations is characteristic for this type of master.
Typical class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a
PROFIBUS DP connection.
Class 2 master
Optional stations on PROFIBUS DP.
Typical class 2 masters are, for example,
PC/PD devices with the "SIMOCODE ES" software
PDM (PCS7)
PC with "SIMARIS manager" software (power
management).
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-2
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary
Connecting cable
Connecting cables are necessary for connecting the
individual basic units with their current measuring modules
and, if required, with their expansion modules or operator
panels. They are available in various versions and lengths
(ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.5 m; round cable 2.0 m). The
total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m per
system!
Contactor
Electromagnetically actuated low voltage switch with only
one rest position, which is not manually operated and can
make, carry or break currents under normal circuit conditions
including operating overload conditions.
A contact system comprises main and auxiliary contacts (NC
contacts and NO contacts). Main contacts can switch
currents of several hundred amps (depending on the size of
the contactor), while auxiliary contacts are only suitable for
low currents.
Control functions
Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are
used for controlling load feeders. They are characterized by
the following important features:
Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off process (no current
flows in the main circuit without the ON command)
Monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main
circuit without the ON command)
Monitoring the ON status
Tripping if a fault occurs.
Control stations
Control stations are places from which control commands are
issued to the motor. The "Control Stations" function block is
used for administration, switching and prioritization of these
different control stations. SIMOCODE pro allows the parallel
administration of up to four different control stations.
Dependent on the control function, up to 5 different control
commands can be transmitted from every control station to
SIMOCODE pro.
Local control, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control
commands via pushbuttons.
PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the
automation system (remote).
PC, control commands are issued via an operator control
station or via PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES
software.
Operator panel/operator panel with display, control
commands are issued via the buttons of the operator
panel/operator panel with display in the switchgear cabinet
door.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary-3
Glossary
Cooling down period

The cooling down period is the amount of time that must
elapse before an overload trip can be reset. This is usually
5 minutes.
Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time
extend the specified time correspondingly.
Cos phi monitoring
Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive
loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous
motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that
fluctuate significantly. The measuring principle for the power
factor (cos phi) is based on the evaluation of the phase
displacement between voltage and current in one phase.
Monitoring of current limits is used for process monitoring.
Thus, impending irregularities in the system can be detected
in good time: If a current limit is exceeded but still below the
overload limit, it can, for example, indicate a dirty filter on a
pump, or an increasingly sluggish motor bearing. If the
current limit is undershot, it can be the first sign of a wornout drive motor belt.
Current measuring modules are used together with the basic
units of the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device
series.
The current measuring module must be selected according to
the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of
the motor). The current measuring modules cover current
ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with intermediate
transformers up to 820 A.
The SIMOCODE pro V device series allows a current/voltage
measuring module to be used instead of a current measuring
module.
In addition to measuring the motor current, current/voltage
measuring modules also enable:
Monitoring voltages up to 690 V
Calculation and monitoring of power and cos phi
Monitoring of the phase sequence.
Decoupling module
A module for connection in series upstream from a current/
voltage measuring module to the system interface when
voltage and power measurements are implemented in nonearthed networks.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-4
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary
Device data (GSD file)

Information on the input and output range, as well as the
consistency of the cyclically transmitted data is defined in the
device data file (GSD file), tested with the configuration
telegram from the device and, if appropriate, declared to be
valid. It is used for integrating the device into SIMATIC S7 or
any standard DP master system (automation system).
Digital module (DM)
Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the
types and number of binary inputs and outputs on basic unit
2 as applicable.
A maximum of 2 digital modules can be connected to one
basic unit 2. All versions can be combined with each other.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of
twelve binary inputs and seven binary outputs.
The failsafe digital modules DM-F Local and
DM-F PROFIsafe are used as safety relays in EMERGENCY
STOP mechanisms according to EN 418 and in safety circuits
according to EN 60204 (11.98):
Digital module DM-F Local:
For applications that require local safety-oriented tripping
with EMERGENCY OFF buttons.
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:
For applications that require decentralized, safety-oriented
tripping with EMERGENCY OFF buttons. A failsafe SIMATIC
controller adopts the logical connection between the
EMERGENCY OFF button and the failsafe digital module
PROFIsafe (DM-F PROFIsafe).
DIP switch
Small switch that allows basic settings to be carried out. DIP
stands for dual in-line package i.e. a design with two parallel
terminal rows.
Door adapter
The door adaptor is necessary for making the system
interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessible
location (e.g. front panel), thus enabling fast
parameterization.
DP master
A master which works with the DP protocol according to the
EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Cyclic send data is exchanged between the DP master and
the DP slave once in every DP cycle. The DP master sends
the cyclic receive data to SIMOCODE pro. In response,
SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic send data to the DP master.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary-5
Glossary
DP slave/DP standard slave

A slave which is operated on the PROFIBUS with the
PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50
170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
The earth-fault module offers the option of implementing
powerful external earth-fault monitoring in connection with
the 3UL22 summation current transformer (making it
possible to evaluate rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A and 1
A). In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring function
which is supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro V
can be extended by an additional and more precise external
earth-fault monitoring system.
SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase
currents. By evaluating the summation current of the three
current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a
possible fault current or earth fault.
There is a difference between internal and external earth-fault
monitoring:
Internal earth-fault monitoring:
Internal earth-fault monitoring via current measuring modules
or current/voltage measuring modules is only possible for
motors with a 3-phase connection in networks that are either
grounded directly or with low impedance.
The basic unit uses the total current to detect a possible fault
current/earth-fault current.
External earth-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V:
External earth-fault monitoring via a summation current
transformer and an earth-fault module is normally used for
networks that are grounded with high impedance.
The earth-fault module (EM) evaluates rated fault currents
using an externally connected summation current
transformer (e.g 3UL22).
Emergency start
Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from
SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This allows the
motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. This
function can be used to:
Enable an immediate restart/reset after an overload trip
Control the operation of the thermal memory (motor
model) during operation, if required.
Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, this function
cannot permanently affect the thermal motor model.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-6
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary
EMERGENCY STOP
Stop in an emergency according EN 418 (ISO 13850).
Operation intended to stop a dangerous process or
movement as quickly as possible in an emergency.
EMERGENCY-STOP command device
Contact block (EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton
according to EN 418 (ISO 13850), cable-operated switch with
positive opening contacts according to EN 60204-1) that
causes the process, machine or plant to be stopped when
actuated in hazardous situations. This must have positivelyopening contacts, be easy to reach and be tamper-proof.
EMERGENCY-STOP device
A protective device for initiating the appropriate procedure in
an emergency according to EN 418 (ISO 13850) and
EN 60204-1
Enabling circuit
An enabling circuit generates a safety-oriented output signal.
To the outside enabling circuits function as NO contacts
(from the functional perspective safety-oriented opening is
always considered). A single enabling circuit that is designed
to be internally redundant in the safety relay (two-channel)
can be implemented for Category 3/4 according to EN_9541 (EN ISO 13849-1:2006).
European norm EXplosion safe (EEx)
European norm EXplosion safe: Specifies the protection
classes for categorizing motors for use in hazardous areas.
Expansion modules
Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion
modules are available:
Digital module (DM)
Analog module (AM)
Temperature module (TM).
All expansion modules have the same design with an
enclosure width of 22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2
system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and removable
terminals.
Factory settings
The factory settings are used to reset all parameters of a
device to the default settings to which they were set at the
factory.
The factory settings can be restored using the "TEST/RESET"
button on the basic unit or via the SIMOCODE ES software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary-7
Glossary
Feedback circuit
Monitors activated actuators (e.g. relays or contactors with
positively-driven contacts). The evaluation unit can only be
activated if the feedback circuit is closed. Note: NC contacts
of the monitored relays that are connected in series are
integrated in the feedback circuit of the safety relay. If a
contact welds in the enabling current path, it is no longer
possible to re-activate the safety relay because the feedback
circuit remains open.
Fieldbus
Industrial communication system that connects a multitude
of field devices such as probes (sensors), actuators and
drives with a control device.
Field/field level
The field level or field is separate to the higher-level control
level in automation and the individual sensors and actuators
can be found here.
Function block
Defined group of functions that can be freely-parameterized
by the user and connected to other function blocks in order to
create a complete branched logic system. This means
conventional wired control circuits containing auxiliary relays
and time relays can be completely replaced.
Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor
feeder independently of the automation system. Even if the
automation system (PLC) fails, or if communication is
disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully protected and
controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being
connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can easily be connected
later, if required.
I/O devices
The term I/O devices is used in automation to refer to
peripheral devices, for example, devices that are connected
to centralized controls.
IT system
The IT system (FR Isol Terre) is a specific type of ground
connection for increased failsafe protection in case of
isolation faults.
Logic module
Logical operations, time relay functions and counter functions
are implemented using logic modules.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-8
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary
Low voltage
All voltage levels used for the distribution of electricity which
are located in a range whose upper limit in AC networks is
generally 1000 V.
Master
PROFIBUS DP is based on a master slave architecture.
Telegrams are sent from the master to the actuated station
(slave) and are answered by it in return.
Memory module
The memory module is plugged into the system interface and
is used for fast reading in or out of the entire SIMOCODE pro
parameterization, e.g. if a unit is exchanged.
Monitoring 0/4-20 mA
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog
signals of a transducer (standard 0/4 - 20 mA output signal).
The analog signals are fed to the "0/4 - 20 mA" function block
via the analog module.
The following monitoring functions
Voltage monitoring
Cos phi monitoring
Monitoring 0/4 A - 20 mA
Operate "in the background" in the same way as motor
protection and motor control. They can be active or not,
according to the control function selected.
Monitoring the number of starts
Monitoring the number of starts can protect system parts
(motors and switching devices such as soft starters and
converters) from too many start processes within a
parameterizable time frame and, thus, prevent damage. This
is particularly useful for commissioning or manual control.
Monitoring voltage
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage
monitoring of either a three-phase network or a one-phase
network for freely selectable limits, direction of rotation (for
AC) or readiness to start.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary-9
Glossary
The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning

level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage measuring is carried out using current/voltage
measuring modules.
Motor protection
The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for currentdependent motor protection:
Overload protection
Thermistor protection.
Motor stop time monitoring
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the stop times of a motor in
order to avoid plant down times due to failed motors caused
by either running too long (wearing out) or being stopped for
too long.
Operating hours monitoring
The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the
operating hours (service life) of a motor to be recorded so
that motor maintenance prompts can be generated in good
time as applicable.
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop
times of a motor and restrict the number of start-ups in a
defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to
failed motors caused by running or being stopped for too
long.
The "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block puts
the positioner into a safe position and switches the motor off.
Operator panel (OP)
The operator panel controls the motor feeder from the
switchgear cabinet. It contains all the status LEDs which are
on the basic units, the "TEST/RESET" button and the external
system interface.
It can be used with both the SIMOCODE pro C device series
and the SIMOCODE pro V device series.
Operator panel (OPD)
The operator panel with display can be used as an alternative
to the standard operator panel (OP).
It displays the current measured values, operating and
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-10
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary
diagnostic data, status information for the motor feeder at

the switchgear cabinet and the device-internal error protocol.
It also contains all the status LEDs that are present on the
basic unit and facilitates access to the system interface from
outside the switchgear cabinet. Its keys can be used to
control the motor and to navigate the display menu.
The operator panel with display can only be used in
combination with basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from
version *E03* onwards.
Organization blocks
Organization blocks form the interface between the CPU
operating system and the user program. The order that the
user program is processed in is specified in the organization
blocks.
Overload protection
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors
according to IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set to 8
different settings, ranging from Class 5 to Class 40.
Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response
of the motor when tripped under normal operating conditions
(not in the case of an overload trip). After this interval, the
thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold
start is possible. This makes frequent start-ups possible
within a short period of time.
Performance Level (PL)
According to the standard EN ISO 13849-1 "a distinct level
specifying the capability of safety-relevant parts of a control to
execute a safety function under predictable conditions". Five
Performance Levels are specified (a to e) with defined ranges of
the probability of a dangerous failure per hour.
PL "e" corresponds to SIL 3 and is specified as the highest level.
PC cable
The PC cable is used to connect the serial interface of the PC
to the system interface of a basic unit for device
parameterization.
Pozidriv (PZ)
Type of fixing screws and cross-tip screwdrivers.
Process automation
Automation of continuous production processes.
Controls manufacturing processes e.g. in the chemical
processing or water industry.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary-11
Glossary
PROFIBUS
Process field bus, European process and fieldbus standard as
defined in the PROFIBUS standard (EN 50 170, Volume 2,
PROFIBUS).
It lays down the functional, electrical and mechanical
properties for a bit-serial fieldbus system.
PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks PROFIBUScompatible automation systems and field devices at the cell
and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the DP
(decentralized peripherals), FMS (fieldbus message
specification), PA (process automation) or TF (technological
functions) protocol.
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol (decentralized
peripherals).
The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange
between the central DP devices and the I/O devices.
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface
(SUB-D socket or terminal connection on the basic units).
PROFIBUS DPV1
Expansion of the DP protocol.
This enables acyclic data exchange of parameter, diagnostic,
receive and test data.
PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) installation guidelines
For PROFIBUS networks, the PROFIBUS DP/FMS installation
guidelines from the PROFIBUS User Organization must be
adhered to. They contain important information about the
cable routing and commissioning of PROFIBUS networks.
PROFINET
Automation standard for Industrial Ethernet.
PROFIsafe
The PROFIBUS safety profile (PROFIsafe) specifies the
communication between failsafe I/O devices and failsafe
controllers. It is based on the standard for safety-oriented
applications and the experiences of PLC users and
manufacturers in the PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO).
The PROFIsafe profile is certified by the TV and the IFA
(Institute for Occupational Safety and Health of the German
Social Accident Insurance). The newest version of the
PROFIsafe specification is the Profile for Safe Technology
V1.11 from July 2001.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-12
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary
Programmable logic controller (PLC)

A controller whose functions are stored as a program on the
control device. The PLC consists of a CPU, memory, input/
output modules and an internal bus system. The I/O devices
and the programming language are based on the needs of the
control engineering.
Programming device
A compact and transportable PC, suitable for industrial
purposes. It is characterized by a special hardware and
software configuration for SIMATIC programmable logic
controllers.
Protective extra low voltage (PELV)
Protective measure against electric shock (previously
"protective extra low voltage with safe isolation").
Active components and exposed conductive parts may be
grounded and connected to the protective conductor in
contrast to SELV. Safe isolation means that the primary circuit
of the transformer must be isolated from the secondary
circuit by means of double or reinforced insulation. PELV is
used where active low voltage conductors or exposed
conductive parts must be grounded. This is the case, for
example, if equipotential bonding is required to prevent
sparks in containers and hazardous areas. However
dangerous leakage currents can flow over the exposed
conductive parts through the enclosure ground (independent
of the low voltage), if faults occur in the higher-level network.
SELV
Safety extra low voltage
Low electric voltage (up to 50 V AC or 120 V DC), that offers
significant protection against electric shock due to its low
value and insulation.
Devices that are operated with SELV and do not generate
high voltages are categorized as Class III according to DIN EN
61140 (VDE 0140-1).
SFB
System function block
A block integrated in the S7 CPU operating system that can
be called like a function block (FB) in the user program if
required.
SFC
System function:
A function integrated in the S7 CPU operating system that
can be called like a function (FC) in the user program if
required.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary-13
Glossary
SIL (Safety Integrity Level)

A measure of the safety-related performance of electric and
electronic control equipment defined in IEC 61508.
The IEC standard details four SIL levels (SIL1 to SIL4) that
define safety requirements for electric and electronic
devices. The specified safety-related function in the event of
a fault is expressed by the SIL value.
SIMATIC
Term for industrial automation products and systems from
Siemens AG.
SIMATIC PDM
You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMATIC PDM
(Process Device Manager) software.
The following options are available:
SIMATIC PDM as a stand-alone program
PDM integrated into STEP 7.
SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for
SIMOCODE pro, and runs on a PC/PD with Windows XP or
Windows 7 Ultimate and Professional.
SIMOCODE pro object manager (OM)
Part of SIMOCODE ES. When SIMOCODE ES and
SIMOCODE pro object manager are installed on a PC/PD,
SIMOCODE ES can be called directly from STEP 7 HW
Config. This enables simple and complete SIMATIC S7
configuration.
SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library is used to connect
SIMOCODE pro to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control
system. It contains:
The corresponding diagnostics and driver modules
containing the respective diagnostics and driver concept of
SIMATIC PCS 7
The elements (symbols and faceplates) necessary for
operating and monitoring.
Note
The PCS 7 libraries are subject to continual maintenance and
improvement.
Current service packs and hotfixes can be downloaded at
http://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Software
Downloads.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-14
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro S7 Slave

The SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a special slave that has the
following characteristics:
It supports the S7 model (diagnostic alarms, process
alarms)
It can be parameterized.
Slave
PROFIBUS DP is based on a master slave architecture.
Telegrams are sent from the master to the actuated station
(slave) and are answered by it in return.
After the motor current overshoots an adjustable blocking
limit (current limit), a definable and delayable response can
be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor
can be set to switch off quickly independently of the overload
protection. The stalled rotor protection is only active after the
parameterized class time has elapsed, e.g. for Class 10 after
10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and
mechanical loads as well as premature aging of the motor.
Standard function
Standard functions are typical motor functions that can be
activated according to need and, as applicable, individually
set for each motor feeder.
They are already available, work independently of the
selected control function and can be used/activated as
optional additions.
Station
A device which can send, receive or amplify data via the bus,
e.g. master, slave.
Statistical data
SIMOCODE pro makes statistical data available which can be
read out with SIMOCODE ES under Target System >
Service Data/Statistical Data (for example).
STEP7
Engineering system Contains programming languages for
creating user programs for SIMATIC S7 controls.
Stop category 0
Non-controlled shutdown by immediately switching off the
power to the machine's drive elements.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary-15
Glossary
System interface cover IP54

Cover to protect the system interface on the door adaptor or
on the operator panel/operator panel with display from soiling
or to seal it.
The temperature module offers the option of expanding the
SIMOCODE pro V device series using an analog temperature
monitoring system. With this, up to three analog sensor
measuring circuits (two-wire or three-wire systems) can be
connected. The temperatures recorded can be fully
integrated into the process, can be monitored and are also
available for a higher-level automation system. You can, for
example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the
motor windings, bearings, coolant or gear box oil.
SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor types (NTC,
KTY83/84, PT100 and PT1000) for use with hard, fluid or
gaseous media.
Temperature monitoring
See temperature module (TM).
Terminal block
Insulating component with one or more insulated terminals
for fixing to a support.
Test position feedback (TPF)
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is
isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is
connected.
The "Cold starting" function test is carried out in this state.
This means the motor feeder is tested without a current in
the main circuit.
The basic units (BU1 and BU2) also make it possible to
connect thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the
motor temperature.
TN-C system
In a TN-C system (FR Terre Neutre Combin) 1 wire is used
simultaneously as a protective earth (PE) and neutral wire (N).
TN-S system
In a TN-S system (FR Terre Neutre Spar) the neutral wire
and the protective earth are led separately from the
transformer up to the appliance.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-16
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and
transmitted to the control system. A definable and delayable
response can be tripped when an adjustable limit has been
overshot. If phase unbalance is greater than 50%, a reduction
in the tripping time according to the overload characteristic
curve takes place automatically, since the heat development
in motors increases under asymmetrical conditions.
Universal current (UC)
Universal current Feature of devices that can be operated
with both AC and DC current.
Voltage monitoring
See monitoring voltage
Software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP
parameter files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES
parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Glossary-17
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-18
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
From (please complete)

Name
Company/Department
To
SIEMENS AG
I IA CE MK&ST 3
Address
Telephone
92220 Amberg, Germany

Fax
Fax: ++49 9621/ 80-3337
SIMOCODE pro Manual
Did you notice any mistakes while reading this manual?

Please use this reply sheet to inform us about them.
We are grateful for your comments and suggestions.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03
Service & Support

Internet:
Newsletter always up to date:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/newsletter
E-Business in the Industry Mall:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/mall
ATEX:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/atex
Certificates:
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/approvals
Contact for all technical information:
Technical Assistance
Tel.: +49 (911) 895-5900
E-Mail: technical-assistance@siemens.com
www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/technical-assistance
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 23 55
90713 FRTH
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/automation
Subject to change without prior notice

Order No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0
Siemens AG 2011

System Manual SIMOCODE Pro en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

System Manual SIMOCODE Pro en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Motor Management and

Analog value recording

Order number: 3UF7970-0AA00-0

Proper use of Siemens products

Copyright Siemens AG 2011

Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction and objective of the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Motor stop time monitoring . . . . . . . . .

Analog value recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3UF50 compatibility mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Logic modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Mounting, wiring, interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

General information about mounting and wiring . . . . . . . . . . .

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Commissioning and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

General information about commissioning and service . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarms, faults and system events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status

Data formats and data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Handling data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Data record 94 - Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3UF70 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Current/voltage measuring module (through-hole converter)

Common technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

"Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) 3VL" example circuit . . . . . . . .

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor"

Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas. . . . . . . . . . .

List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations-1

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Purpose of this manual

SIMOCODE pro response tables

Short description of the responses:

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

You will find further information on the Internet:

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 03

Current measuring module

(overload, thermistor, earth-fault )

(including monitoring + interlocks)

Recording of measured curves:

Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), also

These control functions are pre-defined in SIMOCODE pro and can be

Basic unit (BU1)

Operator panel (OP)

Basic unit (BU2)

Operator panel (OPD)

Additional optional expansions are possible

System components: See Chapter 1.7 "Description of system components".

Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro

Automation level / I/O module

Fig. 1-3: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)

Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Basic unit (BU)

3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V

Basic unit (BU 2)

Fig. 1-5: Schematic of a typical application example

Recording, displaying and evaluating measured values

Check list for selecting a device series

Monitoring of stalled rotor, unbalance, phase

1) Only for basic unit 2 from version E03